This is a modern-English version of The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898, Volume 43, 1670-1700: Explorations by early navigators, descriptions of the islands and their peoples, their history and records of the Catholic missions, as related in contemporaneous books and manuscripts, showing the political, economic, commercial and religious conditions of those islands from their earliest relations with European nations to the close of the nineteenth century, originally written by unknown author(s). It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Original Title Page.
The Philippine Islands, 1493–1898

Explorations by early navigators, descriptions of the islands and their peoples, their history and records of the catholic missions, as related in contemporaneous books and manuscripts, showing the political, economic, commercial and religious conditions of those islands from their earliest relations with European nations to the close of the nineteenth century,

Volume XLIII, 1670–1700
The Arthur H. Clark Company
Cleveland, Ohio
MXMVI

[5]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Contents of Volume XLIII

[7]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Preface

This volume carries forward the history of the Dominican order in the Philippines, and, like the other instalments of Dominican history, or, to speak more broadly, of the history of the orders, contains many interesting sidelights. The increasing power of the order is well seen in the new arrivals of missionaries from Spain, and their pushing out into the territory regarded by the Recollects as their own, to the detriment of the latter, which the Dominicans are able to do through the great influence of Felipe Pardo, the archbishop. The tone of the history is one of ecclesiastical jealousy and aggrandizement. In the appendix which treats in great part of the Moros and peoples of Mindanao, the chief things to note are the similarity of these latter-day Malay peoples in many of their customs and characteristics with the early Filipinos as described by the early writers. The persistence of the old superstitious beliefs in the province of Nueva Ecija, Luzón, is interesting, and probably typical of the islands as a whole, at least in districts somewhat out of the usual line of travel. As this appendix shows, there is yet much work for the ethnologist in all parts of the Philippines.

This volume continues the history of the Dominican order in the Philippines, and like the other parts of Dominican history, or more generally, the history of the religious orders, it offers many interesting insights. The growing strength of the order is evident in the arrival of new missionaries from Spain and their expansion into areas claimed by the Recollects, which negatively affects the latter. The Dominicans achieve this partly due to the significant influence of Felipe Pardo, the archbishop. The tone of the history reflects ecclesiastical rivalry and ambition. In the appendix, which largely discusses the Moros and the peoples of Mindanao, the main points of interest are the similarities between these contemporary Malay groups and the early Filipinos as described by earlier writers. The persistence of old superstitious beliefs in Nueva Ecija, Luzón, is intriguing and likely typical of the islands as a whole, especially in areas off the beaten path. As this appendix demonstrates, there is still much work for ethnologists throughout the Philippines.

The first portion of this volume treats of the Dominican [10]missions, in general between the years 1670–1700, the matter being translated and condensed from Salazar’s Historia. In 1671 and 1679 new contingents of religious arrive in the province from Spain, which prove of great profit to the overworked missionaries, for they have missions on the Asiatic mainland as well as in the Philippines which must be supplied. In the latter year the Zambal mission is transferred to the Dominicans, they supplanting the Recollect order, who have been in charge there for over sixty years. This is at the request of the natives themselves, but it is discovered shortly that that request is only a ruse on the part of the latter in order to escape any obligation to accept the faith, for they soon petition that they be given Jesuits in place of Dominicans. Before the transfer of the mission the Dominicans have already begun to work in the Zambal district, but desist because of the complaints of the Recollects that their territory is being invaded. When they resume their work there in 1679, they are aided considerably by the governor, Vargas y Hurtado, and his military representative in the Zambal district. These chapters show in extenso the methods used by the missionaries in advancing the faith. The soldiers are of considerable aid in escorting those who are to become reduced to a civilized life in the villages where the fathers can watch over their welfare carefully. The harshness of the soldiers is counteracted by the mildness and solicitude of the missionaries. The work of the latter also extends to the industrial training of the new converts. Natives of civilized villages are specially hired to instruct them in agriculture, but so lazy are many of the Zambals that after their [11]lands have been cultivated, sowed, and tended, they refuse to harvest them themselves and many of them take to the mountains and apostatize from the faith. Some, however, gather the harvest as they have the profit in sight. In those new missions the children, from regarding the fathers with suspicion and abhorring their very sight, soon flock about them at their appearance and will scarcely be persuaded to part from them. The children, too, are the ones whom the fathers first win over to the faith and the instruction, and these in turn bring in their parents and the other older people by taunting them with their ignorance. The astute Fray Domingo Perez, who is in charge of the Zambal field, suppresses the practice of murders by means of a trick, for by feeling the pulses of all the men of a village he is able through the natural fear of the culprit to detect the murderer. Therefore the superstitious Zambals imagine that he can detect any wrongdoing by simply feeling the pulse, and look upon him with awe. But still notwithstanding the seeming success of the missions after three years the father learns through the children that the Indians have been secretly maintaining their old idol worship. Horrified, he straightway sets about destroying the worship and the idols, and after a vigorous campaign succeeds in wiping out idolatry. The balance of the missionary work of the Dominicans relates mainly to the northern province of Cagayan, where the Dominicans have many villages and peoples under their charge. Two fathers sent out from Manila in 1673 sound the Irraya district in order that they may discover whether those people are ready to embrace the faith. The field is however, not yet ripe, and hence [12]nothing further is done there until the year 1677, when Fray Pedro Jimenez is assigned to that district. Being shortly recalled, he is sent back there the following year, and the work is taken up in earnest. Many Indians are reduced, both with and without the aid of the soldiers, for Fray Pedro is a fearless worker. In seven years he has founded three permanent villages; but at the end of that time he is removed from his mission because of certain slanderous reports against him, although he returns later after being fully vindicated. The Dominicans open up a road to the province of Cagayan at their own expense in order that they may have easier access thereto. At the intermediary chapter of 1680 various new missions are accepted formally by the order and religious assigned to them. The mission of Palavig is composed of Visayans who flee thither, and of Christian apostates and heathens. Though that mission had first been founded in 1653, it had been soon abandoned because of some sudden fear, and the people had taken to the mountains. Also after its reëstablishment, the mission is of but little permanence, for the people abandon it because of annoyances received from a commandant who comes there to watch for the Acapulco ship. Early in the eighteenth century a new mission is established in that district at Bavag, which is soon moved to Dao, and then to Vangag. The work of the missions is enforced in 1684 by a band of forty-nine missionaries. That same year also, Fray Pedro Jimenez is sent to Fotol on the borders of the country of the Apayaos (incorrectly called Mandayas), a people who are especially fierce and bloodthirsty. There he manages to patch up a quarrel among [13]opposing factions by his diplomacy, and gains the hearts of the people. Accompanied by twenty-two heathens he goes to Aparri, where the alcalde-mayor bestows honors and titles upon them. Notwithstanding the rumors that the Apayaos are plotting to kill him, the father visits their mountain fastnesses, where his confidence meets its just reward. Some months later he returns thither and builds a church among them. In 1686 so greatly has the work prospered that Fray Pedro is given two associates, and in 1688 another. With the increased aid, he establishes a new village of over 500 converts, but he is soon compelled to abandon the mission because of sickness, whereupon the inhabitants of the village of Calatug, supposedly Christians, attack the mountaineers to whom they have always been hostile, and the village is consequently abandoned by the survivors, some of whom flee to the mountains and others are transferred to another mission site. The intermediary chapter of 1688 accepts certain houses in Pangasinan. In the mission of San Bartolome which is composed of Alaguetes and Igorots, many intermarriages take place and the people are knit closer together. That village exists more than twenty years, but is finally burned in 1709 or 1710 by hostile Igorots, and the father in charge and the faithful of his flock remove to San Luis Beltran which is located farther from the mountains and is safer. The latter mission is twice removed and at each time some of the Indians refuse to accompany it, because of their disinclination to abandon the locality where they have become fixed, or flee to the mountains. In 1732 another mission is established at that point. The mission of Tuga is opened by Fray Juan Iñiguez, [14]who begins his work there in 1688 with great success. That mission also experiences various removals, and in 1715, the remaining Christians are removed to the mission of Tuao. The revolt in Cagayan in 1718 finishes the mission, for its inhabitants apostatize and take to the mountain. The work is taken up later there in 1722; and in 1731, although still called the mission of Tuga it is moved nearer Tuao. As a result of the chapter of 1680 work is taken up in the Batanes Islands. Fray Mateo Gonzalez, who has been assigned to the Cagayan missions, extends his work to the Babuyanes Islands to the north of Luzón. He establishes a village on the Cagayan coast with people from those islands, but an order from the government sends those people back to their islands and the mission village is destroyed. In 1686, the first efforts are made in the Batanes, but the attempt proves abortive through the death of two of the fathers assigned to that field. In 1718 another attempt there proves successful. In 1693 the mission of Santa Cruz is established near Malaueg by Fray José Galfarroso, who working zealously through those rough mountains, gains the most influential man of the region to the Christian faith, in consequence of which many conversions are made. New mission bands reach the province in the years 1694 and 1699, and an examination of the names shows that it is difficult to obtain priests for the work for many of those sent are only brothers and acolytes. The mission of Itugug or Paniqui is flourishing and in Zifun a fine field is opened under charge of Fray Jerónimo Ulloa.

The first part of this book discusses the Dominican [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]missions, generally covering the years 1670–1700, and the material is translated and condensed from Salazar’s Historia. In 1671 and 1679, new groups of religious arrive in the province from Spain, which are very helpful to the overworked missionaries since they have missions on the Asian mainland as well as in the Philippines that need support. In the latter year, the Zambal mission is given to the Dominicans, who replace the Recollect order that has been in charge for over sixty years. This change is made at the request of the natives, but it is soon discovered that this request is just a trick to avoid any obligation to accept the faith, as they quickly ask for Jesuits instead of Dominicans. Before the mission is transferred, the Dominicans have already started work in the Zambal district but stop due to complaints from the Recollects about territory invasion. When they resume their work in 1679, they receive significant support from the governor, Vargas y Hurtado, and his military representative in the Zambal district. These chapters show in extenso the methods used by the missionaries to promote the faith. The soldiers help escort those who are to be integrated into a civilized life in the villages where the fathers can carefully oversee their well-being. The harshness of the soldiers is balanced by the gentleness and care of the missionaries. Their work also includes industrial training for the new converts. Natives from civilized villages are especially hired to teach them about agriculture, but many of the Zambals are so lazy that after their [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]lands have been cultivated, sown, and tended, they refuse to harvest them themselves. Many take to the mountains and abandon the faith. However, some do gather the harvest as they see the profit in it. In these new missions, the children, who initially regard the fathers with suspicion and dislike their presence, soon gather around them at their arrival and can hardly be persuaded to leave. The children are also the first to be won over to the faith and education, and they then bring in their parents and other older people by mocking them for their ignorance. The clever Fray Domingo Perez, who oversees the Zambal field, stops the practice of murders with a clever trick. By checking the pulses of all the men in a village, he can detect the murderer through the natural fear of the guilty party. Thus, the superstitious Zambals believe he can sense any wrongdoing just by feeling the pulse and look up to him with respect. However, despite the apparent success of the missions, after three years the father learns through the children that the Indians have secretly been continuing their old idol worship. Horrified, he immediately sets out to destroy the worship and the idols, and after a vigorous campaign, he succeeds in eliminating idolatry. The rest of the Dominican missionary work mainly concerns the northern province of Cagayan, where they have many villages and communities under their care. Two fathers sent from Manila in 1673 explore the Irraya district to find out if the people are ready to embrace the faith. However, the field is not yet ripe, so [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]nothing further is done there until 1677, when Fray Pedro Jimenez is assigned to that district. After a short recall, he is sent back the following year, and earnest work begins. Many Indians are converted, both with and without help from the soldiers, as Fray Pedro is a determined worker. In seven years, he has founded three permanent villages; but after that time, he is removed from his mission due to certain slanderous reports against him, although he later returns after being fully exonerated. The Dominicans build a road to the province of Cagayan at their own expense to ensure easier access. At the intermediary chapter of 1680, various new missions are formally accepted by the order and assigned religious. The Palavig mission consists of Visayans who fled there, along with Christian apostates and pagans. Even though this mission was first founded in 1653, it was soon abandoned due to sudden fears, causing the people to retreat to the mountains. Also, after its reestablishment, the mission has little permanence, as the people abandon it because of disturbances caused by a commandant monitoring the Acapulco ship. Early in the 18th century, a new mission is established in that area at Bavag, which is soon moved to Dao, and then to Vangag. The mission work is bolstered in 1684 by a group of forty-nine missionaries. That same year, Fray Pedro Jimenez is sent to Fotol on the borders of the Apayaos' territory (incorrectly called Mandayas), a fierce and bloodthirsty people. There, he manages to resolve a conflict among opposing factions through his diplomacy, winning the people's hearts. Accompanied by twenty-two pagans, he goes to Aparri, where the alcalde-mayor gives honors and titles to them. Despite rumors that the Apayaos plan to kill him, the father visits their mountain strongholds, where his trust is rewarded. A few months later, he returns and builds a church among them. By 1686, the work has progressed so much that Fray Pedro is given two associates, and in 1688 another. With the added help, he establishes a new village of over 500 converts, but he soon has to abandon the mission due to illness. Consequently, the inhabitants of the village of Calatug, who are supposedly Christians, attack the mountain people they have always been hostile towards, leading to the village being abandoned by the survivors, some of whom flee to the mountains while others move to another mission site. The intermediary chapter of 1688 accepts certain houses in Pangasinan. In the San Bartolome mission, which is made up of Alaguetes and Igorots, many intermarriages occur, leading to closer ties among the people. This village lasts more than twenty years but is eventually burned in 1709 or 1710 by hostile Igorots, causing the responsible father and his faithful flock to move to San Luis Beltran, which is further away from the mountains and safer. This new mission is relocated twice, and at each move, some of the Indians refuse to go because they don’t want to leave the place where they’ve settled or flee to the mountains. In 1732, another mission is established at that location. The mission of Tuga is opened by Fray Juan Iñiguez, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, who starts working there in 1688 with great success. That mission also experiences various relocations, and in 1715, the remaining Christians are moved to the Tuao mission. The revolt in Cagayan in 1718 ends the mission, as its inhabitants abandon the faith and retreat to the mountains. Work resumes there later in 1722; and in 1731, even though it’s still named the Tuga mission, it is relocated nearer to Tuao. Following the 1680 chapter, work begins in the Batanes Islands. Fray Mateo Gonzalez, assigned to the Cagayan missions, extends his efforts to the Babuyanes Islands north of Luzón. He sets up a village on the Cagayan coast with people from those islands, but a government order sends them back to their islands, and the mission village is destroyed. In 1686, first attempts are made in the Batanes, but it fails due to the deaths of two of the fathers assigned there. In 1718, another attempt succeeds. In 1693, the Santa Cruz mission is established near Malaueg by Fray José Galfarroso, who, working diligently through those rough mountains, converts the most influential man in the area to Christianity, resulting in many conversions. New groups of missionaries reach the province in 1694 and 1699, and a look at the names shows it’s tough to find priests for the work since many sent are only brothers and acolytes. The Itugug or Paniqui mission is thriving, and in Zifun, a good field opens under the care of Fray Jerónimo Ulloa.

The ethnological appendix opens with a short account by Tomás Ortiz, O.S.A., of various superstitions [15]and heathen beliefs and practices that still exist among the natives, notwithstanding all the efforts of the religious to stamp them out. Many of them show a strange mingling of heathenism and Christianity. Their belief in nonos, primarily, ancestor worship, leads them to ascribe spirits or souls to everything, somewhat as did the primitive North American Indian, and they are very careful to propitiate the spirit or nono of river, field, and wood, etc. The ceremony of tibao, or awaiting the soul of the deceased, is still practiced by the natives, and they endeavor by various methods to outwit the fathers. Ashes are spread in the house where the death occurred and by the tracks made thereon, they ascertain whether the soul has returned or not. They have numerous beliefs regarding the tigbalāg, the patianac, the asuang, the last two of which are the enemies of childbirth and children. Various ridiculous conjurings are performed in order to scare off those terrible monsters of the imagination. The bongsol are certain enchantments caused in the body by a sorcerer called ganay, and in order to drive them away, one must have recourse to another sorcerer. In any sickness that is deemed natural when it first comes on, if the cure is not effected as quickly as desired, it is always referred to enchantment or bongsol, and is exorcised. Bilao is an elaborate ceremony, in which the rosary plays a conspicuous part, for the discovery of any thief. The anting-anting is carried by many of the natives. Both males and females are circumcised. There is a curious custom of spanning their weapons while reciting the Lord’s Prayer, and if the two operations end at the same time, then one may kill with impunity. Many [16]heretical beliefs and many false preachers exist, the proximity of the Mahometans having its effect. Eclipses of the moon mean that that orb is being swallowed by some awful monster, and all the people endeavor to scare away that beast with the great din that they make. Inasmuch as all these beliefs are not universal, the missionary must exercise great prudence at all times.

The ethnological appendix begins with a brief overview by Tomás Ortiz, O.S.A., of various superstitions [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and pagan beliefs and practices that still exist among the locals, despite the efforts of religious figures to eliminate them. Many of these beliefs show a strange blend of paganism and Christianity. Their belief in nonos, primarily ancestor worship, leads them to attribute spirits or souls to everything, similar to how primitive North American Indians did, and they are very careful to appease the spirit or nono of rivers, fields, and woods, etc. The ceremony of tibao, or waiting for the soul of the deceased, is still practiced by the locals, and they try various methods to outsmart the elders. Ashes are spread in the house where the death occurred, and through the tracks made in them, they determine whether the soul has returned or not. They have numerous beliefs about the tigbalāg, the patianac, and the asuang, the last two being considered enemies of childbirth and children. Various silly rituals are performed to drive away these imagined monsters. The bongsol involves certain enchantments caused by a sorcerer called ganay, and to dispel them, one must turn to another sorcerer. In any illness thought to be natural at first, if the cure is not achieved quickly, it is always attributed to enchantment or bongsol, and an exorcism is performed. The bilao is a complex ceremony, featuring the rosary prominently, aimed at discovering any thief. Many locals carry anting-anting for protection. Both men and women undergo circumcision. There's a strange custom of laying their weapons spanwise while reciting the Lord’s Prayer, and if both actions conclude simultaneously, then one can kill without consequence. Many [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]heretical beliefs and false preachers exist, influenced by the presence of Mahometans. Lunar eclipses are seen as the moon being swallowed by a dreadful monster, and the people try to scare that beast away with loud noise. Since not all of these beliefs are universal, the missionary must exercise great caution at all times.

Another Augustinian, Joaquin Martínez de Zúñiga, also devotes a chapter of his Historia to the Peoples of the Philippines. There are only two classes of peoples in the Philippines—the Negritos and the Filipinos—and even these in last analysis are, he says, homogeneous. Most of the chapter is taken up with the attempt to prove that the Philippine Islands were peopled from the East and that they are perhaps of the same origin as the Indians of South America, who would then be the parent stock. All the peoples of the South Seas are homogeneous, according to him, and he believes that he has proved his case by the faulty philological method. His views are interesting, as he is the only person who has put forward such claims. In reply to those who claim a Malay origin for the peoples of the Philippines, he states that the method of writing might very well have been learned from the Malays, but that the people must have come from the east and not the west, as the east winds prevail throughout the torrid zone. He gives a brief description of the people, and various of their customs.

Another Augustinian, Joaquin Martínez de Zúñiga, also dedicates a chapter of his Historia to the Peoples of the Philippines. There are only two groups of people in the Philippines—the Negritos and the Filipinos—and even they, in the end, are, he says, similar. Most of the chapter focuses on trying to prove that the Philippine Islands were settled from the East and that they might share the same origin as the Indians of South America, who would then be the original ancestors. He claims that all the peoples of the South Seas are similar, and he believes he has supported his argument with a flawed philological approach. His opinions are intriguing, as he is the only one to present such theories. In response to those who argue for a Malay origin for the people of the Philippines, he suggests that the method of writing may have been learned from the Malays, but that the people must have come from the east and not the west, since the east winds dominate the torrid zone. He provides a brief overview of the people and some of their customs.

The selection from Wilkes’s narrative of his celebrated expedition may be said more properly to be a general description of the island of Joló than a special study of its people. His narration contains [17]so many interesting observations, however, both in regard to the people and their daily life and the other matters touched upon, that it is deemed not to be out of place here. Besides it is the first authentic account of that island by an American. The expedition leaves Manila, January 21, 1842, and coasting steadily to the south, with short stays at Mindoro and at a village in Panay, anchors January 31, at Caldera in Zamboanga province. At that time, in all Mindanao, there were, says Wilkes, only about 10,000 people under Spanish rule, and about one-half of those were in Zamboanga. Caldera is a convict settlement for native Filipinos, but Spanish criminals are sent to Spain. On the first of February, they leave Mindanao and in due time anchor at the village of Soung or Joló. An interview with the sultan is set by the governor, Dato Mulu, at which, when it is held, the sultan agrees to a treaty of trade with the Americans. Wilkes gives much interesting information regarding the customs and social and industrial life of the Sulus; describes their chief city which has its Chinese quarter; describes the government which is an oligarchy, the chief governing body being the Ruma Bechara or Trading Council which is presided over by the sultan to whom but scant respect is paid, for the individual datos retain as much power as possible. Trade is free, and both freemen and slaves engage in it at will, the slaves of the island often attaining to a high degree of importance. The naturalists are disappointed in their attempts to make researches on the island, as the sultan, although in order to evade the request, declares that it is unsafe, because of the hostile datos. Wilkes gives considerable sound advice in regard to [18]the navigation of this district, trading at Joló, and various other matters, besides an interesting though brief history of Joló, before and after the advent of the Spaniards. Those interesting people the sea-gypsies are described. The expedition reaches the Straits of Singapore on February 18.

The excerpt from Wilkes’s account of his famous expedition is more accurately a broad overview of the island of Joló rather than a detailed examination of its inhabitants. However, his narrative includes [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] many compelling observations about the people, their daily lives, and other related topics, making it relevant here. Additionally, it serves as the first credible account of that island by an American. The expedition departs from Manila on January 21, 1842, sailing steadily southward, with brief stops in Mindoro and a village in Panay, and arrives at Caldera in Zamboanga Province on January 31. At that time, Wilkes notes there were only about 10,000 people in all of Mindanao under Spanish rule, with roughly half of them located in Zamboanga. Caldera serves as a settlement for native Filipino convicts, while Spanish criminals are sent to Spain. On February 1, they leave Mindanao and eventually arrive at the village of Soung or Joló. The governor, Dato Mulu, arranges an interview with the sultan, during which the sultan agrees to a trade treaty with the Americans. Wilkes provides a wealth of interesting information about the customs and social and industrial life of the Sulus, detailing their main city that features a Chinese quarter and explaining that the government is an oligarchy led by the Ruma Bechara or Trading Council, chaired by the sultan, who commands little respect, as individual dados strive to maintain as much power as possible. Trade is open, allowing both free individuals and slaves to participate, with local slaves often attaining significant status. The naturalists face disappointment in their efforts to study the island, as the sultan, aiming to avoid their requests, asserts it is unsafe due to hostile dados. Wilkes offers a lot of practical advice regarding [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] navigating the area, trading in Joló, and various other subjects, along with an intriguing but brief history of Joló before and after the Spaniards arrived. The fascinating sea-gypsies are also described. The expedition arrives at the Straits of Singapore on February 18.

The remainder of the appendix, except the last document, constitutes letters written by the Jesuit missionaries from Mindanao and Basilan, and an ethnological survey of the Mindanao peoples by a Jesuit of Manila who had formerly spent a number of years in Mindanao. They are all comparatively modern, extending through the years 1885–1889. January 20, 1885, Father Quirico Moré writes to the father superior of the missions mainly concerning the Moros about the Gulf of Dávao, where the Spaniard José Oyangúren defeated them and brought them under the dominion of Spain. Various events are related in regard to efforts to reduce these Moros who are less in number than is generally supposed, for though the Moros generally acquiesce in the Spanish proposals to assume village life, their willingness is only feigned. Those about the gulf are the “remains of powerful and warlike Moros, who in the not distant past collected tribute from the Mandayas and other heathens.” There are two classes of Moros, the datos, or aristocracy, and the common people. With the first rank must be included the panditas or priests. Though the Moros endure, they do not accept, Spanish rule, and await the time when they can throw it off. Meanwhile they also suffer from the heathens about them, who are hostile to them. To obtain the best results the officers of dato and pandita should be suppressed, and other radical measures carried out. [19]

The rest of the appendix, except for the last document, consists of letters written by Jesuit missionaries from Mindanao and Basilan, along with an ethnological survey of the Mindanao people conducted by a Jesuit from Manila who previously spent several years in Mindanao. These letters are relatively modern, covering the years 1885–1889. On January 20, 1885, Father Quirico Moré writes to the superior of the missions primarily about the Moros around the Gulf of Dávao, where the Spaniard José Oyangúren defeated them and brought them under Spanish control. Various events are described regarding the attempts to pacify these Moros, who are fewer in number than generally believed. Although the Moros usually agree to Spanish suggestions to adopt village life, their acceptance is merely superficial. Those around the gulf are the “remnants of powerful and warlike Moros, who not long ago collected tribute from the Mandayas and other non-Muslims.” There are two classes of Moros: the datos, or aristocrats, and the common people. The panditas, or priests, are also included in the first rank. While the Moros endure Spanish rule, they do not truly accept it and await the time when they can shake it off. In the meantime, they also face hostility from the non-Muslims around them. To achieve the best outcomes, the leaders of the datos and panditas should be eliminated, and more radical measures should be implemented. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Father Pedro Rosell writes from Caraga, April 17, 1885, in regard to a visit of inspection of the visitas of the southern part of the district made by himself and Father Pablo Pastells, in December 1884, to the Mandayas. He reports a most encouraging state of affairs there pertaining to the conversion and reduction of the Mandayas. Especially helpful has been the conversion of three bailanes or priestesses. With the occasion of that conversion, the writer describes the method of sacrifice among the Mandayas, and the effects produced on the bailanes who are believed to be the true mediators between men and gods. In describing the form of belief Father Rosell finds an analogy to the Trinity in the Mandaya divinities, and one to Satan in the two spirits of evil. Of great interest in this letter is the song sung by the bailanes while sacrificing.

Father Pedro Rosell writes from Caraga on April 17, 1885, about an inspection visit he and Father Pablo Pastells made to the southern part of the district in December 1884, focusing on the Mandayas. He reports a very encouraging situation there regarding the conversion and assimilation of the Mandayas. Particularly helpful has been the conversion of three bailanes, or priestesses. In light of that conversion, the writer describes the method of sacrifice among the Mandayas and its impact on the bailanes, who are believed to be the true mediators between people and the divine. In describing their beliefs, Father Rosell finds a parallel to the Trinity in the Mandaya deities and one to Satan in the two evil spirits. Of great interest in this letter is the song that the bailanes sing during the sacrifice.

A series of five letters from Father Mateo Gisbert, written from Dávao in 1886, contains much interesting material. In his letter of January 4, the Hispano-Germanic controversy over the Carolinas is mentioned, and the heathen and Christian fear in the Dávao district of a German invasion. There are many heathens in Dávao, some of whom are industrious and intelligent, but few of whom are baptized. In southwest Dávao there are about 12,000 Bagobos, and they still maintain their old heathen customs, among them that of human sacrifice. They have two feasts during the year, one before the sowing of the rice, and the other at the end of the harvest. The latter is called the feast of women, and there is nothing worse seen at it than feasting, drinking, and dancing. In the former feast, the human sacrifice figures. The Bagobos recognize two beginnings and each person has two souls. Various [20]remarks are made in regard to their legends or beliefs. At death also, the human sacrifice is performed in order to remove the mourning. One such sacrifice is described. The second letter of February 8, recites certain superstitious customs of the Bagobos. In times of sickness they invoke their gods. They always give the first fruits of the harvest to the diuata. Birds may be both good and bad omens; sneezing is always a bad omen. There are few thefts among them, for they believe that by the use of certain magic powders, they will compel the thief to inform on himself. The Bilans are the most industrious of all heathen peoples about Dávao and they number about 20,000. Although they have some of the customs of the Bagobos, their language differs from that of the latter. In his letter of February 20, Father Gisbert describes the customs of the Tagacaolos who number 12,000 or 14,000. Their language is understood by the Visayans. There are many intertribal feuds among them and they are continually at war among themselves, those of one district capturing and selling to the Moros those of another. They are more docile than are their neighbors. The Manobos are lazy and warlike and constantly on the hunt for slaves. The Moros thereabout are a race of thieves and are exceedingly treacherous. The Atás or Negritos live in the interior, and but little is known of them. Their number may reach 25,000, and they possess their own language. The letter of July 26 is written in a slightly depressed tone. Father Gisbert gives a short Bagobo genealogy. They have indulged in human sacrifice for many years. Human sacrifices prove, though it seems a paradox, a lucrative and real business, and [21]not only Bagobos, but Moros and others traffic in them. Various details of a human sacrifice are given. The fifth letter of December 24, relates the results of a visit to the island of Sámal. There the Moros of the Dávao district, afraid that the Christian conversion is about to prevail, machinate to keep control, and oppose missionary efforts. The action of the Spanish authorities in giving titles as captains and lieutenants to Christians makes such persons the real datos of the island and weakens the hereditary allegiance. The remnants of the Moros about Dávao ask for villages, but it is only pretense, in order that they may continue to live under their old customs, and so that the datos may not lose the few followers left to them. It is advised that the people be encouraged to desert their datos and panditas, and that all the Moros be assembled into one village. The many small villages of the Moros, each with its dato and pandita, are an obstacle to the reduction and conversion of the heathens.

A series of five letters from Father Mateo Gisbert, written from Dávao in 1886, includes a lot of interesting information. In his letter from January 4, he mentions the Hispano-Germanic dispute over the Carolinas and the fears, both among the non-Christians and Christians in the Dávao area, of a German invasion. There are many non-Christians in Dávao, some of whom are hardworking and smart, but very few are baptized. In southwest Dávao, there are about 12,000 Bagobos who still keep their old customs, including human sacrifice. They have two annual festivals: one before planting rice and the other at the end of the harvest. The latter is referred to as the women's feast, where the worst activities are eating, drinking, and dancing. The first feast involves human sacrifice. The Bagobos believe in two beginnings and that every person has two souls. Various [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] comments are made about their legends and beliefs. A human sacrifice is also performed at death to help remove grief. One such sacrifice is described. In his second letter from February 8, he recounts some superstitious practices of the Bagobos. When they are sick, they call on their gods. They always offer the first fruits of their harvest to the diuata. Birds can be good or bad omens; sneezing is considered a bad omen. There are few thefts among them because they believe that certain magical powders will force a thief to confess. The Bilans are the most industrious of all the non-Christian groups around Dávao, numbering about 20,000. While they share some customs with the Bagobos, their language is different. In his letter from February 20, Father Gisbert describes the customs of the Tagacaolos, who number around 12,000 to 14,000. The Visayans understand their language. There are many intertribal conflicts among them, and they are often at war with one another, with people from one area capturing others and selling them to the Moros. They are more compliant than their neighbors. The Manobos are lazy and warlike, always looking for slaves. The Moros in the area are known for their thievery and treachery. The Atás or Negritos live inland, and little is known about them. Their population may be around 25,000, and they have their own language. The letter from July 26 has a slightly gloomy tone. Father Gisbert provides a brief genealogy of the Bagobos. They have been practicing human sacrifice for many years. Though it seems odd, human sacrifices turn out to be a profitable and real business, and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] not only the Bagobos but also the Moros and others are involved in this trade. Various details of a human sacrifice are shared. The fifth letter from December 24 discusses the aftermath of a visit to the island of Sámal. There, the Moros from the Dávao region, worried that Christian conversion might succeed, work to maintain their control and resist missionary efforts. The actions of the Spanish authorities in appointing Christians as captains and lieutenants make these individuals the real leaders of the island and weaken the loyalty to the traditional leaders. The remaining Moros around Dávao request villages, but it’s merely a pretense so they can continue living according to their old customs, ensuring that their leaders do not lose the few followers they have left. It is suggested that the people should be encouraged to abandon their datos and panditas, and that all the Moros should be gathered into one village. The many small Moro villages, each with its own dato and pandita, hinder the efforts to reduce and convert the non-Christians.

The letter written by Father Pablo Cavalleria to Father Francisco Sanchez from Isabela de Basílan in the island of Basílan, December 31, 1886, gives a great deal of most important information regarding the Moros of that island. The native race is evidently fewer in number than the Moros (who number ten or twelve thousand), and is partially christianized. The Moros inhabit the coast and the interior, the former being known as Sámal Laút, who are fishermen, and the latter as Yacans, who are agriculturists. They are hostile to each other. With the Sámal Laút are mingled also Joloans and Malays. Personal descriptions of the Moros, their mental characteristics, their religion, marriage and [22]mortuary customs, etc., are given. Their chief feast is the celebration of the birth of Mahomet, though that date is not fixed but depends rather on when there is sufficient food for a good feast. They are superstitious, and perform various superstitious rites. They have seven heavens and seven hells, each with its distinctive signification. Their method of fighting is described. Their hatred toward the Christians is well shown in a native song quoted by Father Cavalleria.

The letter written by Father Pablo Cavalleria to Father Francisco Sanchez from Isabela de Basílan on December 31, 1886, provides a wealth of important information about the Moros of that island. The native population is clearly smaller in number than the Moros, who number around ten to twelve thousand, and they are partially Christianized. The Moros live along the coast and in the interior, with the coast-dwellers known as Sámal Laút, who are fishermen, and those in the interior called Yacans, who are farmers. They are hostile toward each other. Along with the Sámal Laút, there are also Joloans and Malays. Personal descriptions of the Moros, including their mental traits, religion, marriage customs, and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]funeral customs, are provided. Their main celebration is the feast for the birth of Mahomet, though the date varies based on when there is enough food for a proper celebration. They are superstitious and carry out various rituals. They believe in seven heavens and seven hells, each with its own significance. Their fighting methods are described, and their animosity toward Christians is clearly expressed in a native song quoted by Father Cavalleria.

Father Pablo Pastells, in a letter to the father provincial, written from Manila, April 20, 1887, devotes considerable space to an ethnological survey of the peoples of Mindanao. The population of that island is divided into Malays and Indonesians (although the latter has no foundation), and Negritos; and there is still another division into Old Christians, New Christians, and heathens. The first named number 186,000, and their customs are influenced to a greater or less degree by those of the heathens according as they are more or less removed from them. Father Pastells describes their social life in many details, which shows that they have become “reduced” fairly well to a half civilized life. The New Christians date from 1876 (the date when the Jesuits reëntered Mindanao) and are scarcely to be differentiated in life and customs from the heathens from whom they have proceeded. The heathens (among whom are evidently numbered the Moros) aggregate 300,000, and among them are found Chinese and Japanese crossings, says Father Pastells. In greater or less detail, is set forth information concerning the Mamanuas, Manobos, Mandayas, Manguangas, Monteses, Guiangas, Bagobos, [23]Calaganes, Tagacaolos, Tirurayes, Tagabili, Sámales, Subánon, Lutangos Moros, Calibuganes, and Moros. The worst of the last named, are the Moros of Jolo, and the Sámales Laút, while the most pacific are the Yacanes.

Father Pablo Pastells, in a letter to the provincial father, written from Manila on April 20, 1887, spends a lot of time on an ethnological overview of the people of Mindanao. The population of that island is split into Malays and Indonesians (though the latter isn’t really accurate), as well as Negritos; and there’s another division into Old Christians, New Christians, and pagans. The Old Christians number 186,000, and their customs are influenced to varying degrees by those of the pagans depending on how closely they interact. Father Pastells describes their social life in detail, indicating that they have adapted to a semi-civilized lifestyle. The New Christians came about in 1876 (the year the Jesuits returned to Mindanao) and are hardly distinguishable in their way of life and customs from the pagans they emerged from. The pagans (who clearly include the Moros) total about 300,000, and among them, there are also Chinese and Japanese mixes, says Father Pastells. There’s varying detail provided on the Mamanuas, Manobos, Mandayas, Manguangas, Monteses, Guiangas, Bagobos, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Calaganes, Tagacaolos, Tirurayes, Tagabili, Sámales, Subánon, Lutangos Moros, Calibuganes, and Moros. The most troublesome among the latter are the Moros of Jolo and the Sámales Laút, while the most peaceful are the Yacanes.

Father Joseph Maclotet writes to the rector of the Ateneo Municipal, from Talisayan, May 11, 1889, concerning the Buquidnons of Misamis province who are divided into three groups, numbering in all about 13,000. Socially and religiously they resemble other natives of that district. They are described and compared to the Visayans. They are intelligent and modest, and have some idea of God, heaven, and eternity. They are polytheists and have four gods. The spirit of evil is also propitiated by them. The sacrifices, consisting of products of the soil, wine, and fowls, are generally offered by the old men. Their marriage ceremonies and various other social features of their life are described. They are industrious and engage in various industries and occupations, the chief being agriculture. Their implements are described, among them being an ingenious cotton-gin. The Chinese with whom they trade take every advantage of them and cheat them on all sides. They have rude musical instruments. They punish crime according to certain traditional laws, the dato being judge. Many superstitions and omens, as in all other heathens of Mindanao, enter into their lives.

Father Joseph Maclotet writes to the rector of the Ateneo Municipal, from Talisayan, May 11, 1889, about the Buquidnons of Misamis province, who are split into three groups totaling around 13,000 people. Socially and religiously, they are similar to other natives in the area. They are described and compared to the Visayans. They are intelligent and humble, with some understanding of God, heaven, and eternity. They are polytheists and worship four gods. They also appease the spirit of evil. Sacrifices, which include local produce, wine, and chickens, are typically offered by the elders. Their marriage ceremonies and different social aspects of their lives are outlined. They are hard-working and participate in various industries and jobs, with agriculture being the primary one. Their tools include a clever cotton gin. The Chinese merchants they trade with often take advantage of them and frequently cheat them. They have simple musical instruments. They punish crimes based on certain traditional laws, with the dato acting as the judge. Like many other non-Christian groups in Mindanao, their lives are influenced by numerous superstitions and omens.

The final document of the Appendix is translated from the supplement for December 9, 1905, of El Renacimiento, of Manila, and treats of the still prevailing belief among the more ignorant people of Luzón in regard to witches. The mangkukulam, the male or female witch, cannot look another person [24]straight in the face, and has immense power of doing evil to his neighbors. He causes various aches and pains. The symptoms exhibited by the person bewitched are given, as also the modus operandi of the witch. Regular physicians are powerless because they do not believe in enchantment. Instead, a special witch doctor is employed. His treatment consists in the use of anona bark which has power over the witchcraft, and in bad cases a good caning is often administered, or, the last resort, bathing in boiling water. This last proves effective, for the patient dies under it. The belief is that these severe measures do not harm the patient, but the witch. There is another witch doctor, whose procedure differs somewhat from that of the former and does not involve the discomfort of the patient to so great a degree. A small wax figure made in human shape is put into boiling water, whereupon the witch is bound to present himself and confess his fault. The writer relates a personal experience, in which, against his will, he was made to act the part of witch doctor. The people have another name for another sort of witch, who sends his sickness, which is incurable, through the air. Every Friday, all witches suffer terribly as a sort of recompense for the power which they possess, and next day attend the witches’ frolic.

The final document in the Appendix is translated from the supplement for December 9, 1905, of El Renacimiento, from Manila, and discusses the enduring belief among the less educated people of Luzón regarding witches. The mangkukulam, whether male or female, cannot look another person [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]directly in the eye and has great power to harm their neighbors. They cause various aches and pains. The symptoms shown by the person who has been bewitched are detailed, along with the witch's methods. Regular doctors are ineffective because they don't believe in magic. Instead, a specialized witch doctor is hired. His treatment involves using anona bark, which has power over witchcraft, and in severe cases, a good beating is often given, or as a last resort, bathing in boiling water. This method is said to be effective, as the patient often dies from it. The belief is that these harsh measures do not hurt the patient, but rather the witch. There is another witch doctor with a different approach that doesn’t involve as much discomfort for the patient. A small wax figure made in the shape of a human is placed in boiling water, causing the witch to be compelled to appear and confess their wrongdoing. The writer shares a personal experience where, against his wishes, he was forced to act as a witch doctor. The people also refer to a different type of witch who sends illness, which is deemed incurable, through the air. Every Friday, all witches suffer greatly as a form of punishment for the powers they wield, and the following day they participate in witches’ celebrations.

The Editors

The Editors

September, 1906. [25]

September, 1906. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Document of 1670–1700

  • Dominican missions. Vicente de Salazar, O.P. [From his Historia de el Santissimo Rosario.]

Source: This is translated and synopsized from Salazar’s Historia de el Santissimo Rosario (Manila, 1742), from a copy owned by Edward E. Ayer.

Source: This is translated and summarized from Salazar’s Historia de el Santissimo Rosario (Manila, 1742), from a copy owned by Edward E. Ayer.

Translation: This is made by James A. Robertson. [27]

Translation: This was done by James A. Robertson. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Dominican Missions, 1670–1700

[The following is translated and synopsized from Vicente Salazar’s Historia,1 from a copy belonging to Edward E. Ayer, Chicago. The first five chapters contain nothing directly on the missions.]

[The following is translated and summarized from Vicente Salazar’s Historia,1 from a copy belonging to Edward E. Ayer, Chicago. The first five chapters don't have anything directly related to the missions.]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter VI

A new reënforcement of religious arrives at this province and the [post of the] commissary of the Holy Office is given back to it.

A new reinforcement of religious comes to this province, and the [post of the] commissary of the Holy Office is restored to it.

[In 1671, a band of thirty-three missionaries, who [28]had been gathered by the definitor, Juan Polanco, arrives at Manila.2 They are as follows:]

[In 1671, a group of thirty-three missionaries, who [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]were assembled by the definitor, Juan Polanco, arrives in Manila.2 They are as follows:]

The father lector, Fray Alonso Sandin, son of San Estevan, of Salamanca, and head of the mission.

The father lector, Fray Alonso Sandin, son of San Estevan, from Salamanca, and head of the mission.

Father Fray Alonso de Cordova, son of Santo Domingo y San Pablo, of Ezija.

Father Fray Alonso de Cordova, son of Santo Domingo and San Pablo, from Ezija.

Father Fray Miguel Rodrigo, of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca.

Father Fray Miguel Rodrigo from the San Estevan convent in Salamanca.

Father Fray Andres Toro, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of El Campo de Zafra.

Father Fray Andres Toro, from the convent of Santo Domingo, in the Campo de Zafra.

Father Fray Alonso Dominguez, of the convent of San Ildephonso, of Toro.

Father Fray Alonso Dominguez, from the convent of San Ildephonso in Toro.

Father Fray Bartolome Marron, of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid.

Father Fray Bartolome Marron, from the San Pablo convent in Valladolid.

Father Fray Domingo Mezquita, of the convent of Preachers, of Zaragoça.

Father Fray Domingo Mezquita, from the Preachers' convent in Zaragoza.

Father Fray Diego Ortiz, of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca.

Father Fray Diego Ortiz, from the convent of San Estevan in Salamanca.

Father Fray Diego de Villar, of the same convent.

Father Fray Diego de Villar, from the same convent.

Father Fray Domingo de Escalera, of the convent of El Rosario, of Madrid.

Father Fray Domingo de Escalera, from the convent of El Rosario in Madrid.

Father Fray Francisco de la Maza, of the convent of Nuestra Señora, of Atocha.

Father Fray Francisco de la Maza, from the convent of Our Lady of Atocha.

Father Fray Francisco Luxan, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla.

Father Fray Francisco Luxan, from the convent of San Pablo, in Seville.

Father Fray Jacinto Samper, of the convent of Caspe, in Aragon.

Father Fray Jacinto Samper from the convent in Caspe, Aragon.

Father Fray Geronimo de Ulloa, of the convent of Santiago de Galicia.

Father Fray Geronimo de Ulloa, from the convent of Santiago de Galicia.

Father Fray Juan de Santa Cruz, of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca. [29]

Father Fray Juan de Santa Cruz, from the convent of San Estevan in Salamanca. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Father Fray Juan de Arjona, of the convent of San Vicente, of Plasencia.

Father Fray Juan de Arjona, from the San Vicente convent in Plasencia.

Father Fray Joseph de la Trinidad, or Galfaroso, of the convent of Santiago, of Pamplona.

Father Fray Joseph de la Trinidad, also known as Galfaroso, from the convent of Santiago in Pamplona.

Father Fray Juan Catalan, of the same convent.

Father Fray Juan Catalan, from the same convent.

Father Fray Joseph Valdes, of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid.

Father Fray Joseph Valdes, from the San Pablo convent in Valladolid.

Father Fray Melchor Lorenzana, of the convent of San Pablo, of Plasencia.

Father Fray Melchor Lorenzana, from the convent of San Pablo in Plasencia.

Father Fray Matheo Gonçalez, of the convent of Santa Cruz, of Segovia.

Father Fray Matheo Gonçalez, from the Santa Cruz convent in Segovia.

Father Fray Mathias Ramon, of the convent of Santo Thomas, of Avila.

Father Fray Mathias Ramon from the convent of Santo Thomas in Avila.

Father Fray Pedro Gonzalez, of the convent of Nuestra Señora, of la Peña de Francia.

Father Fray Pedro Gonzalez, from the convent of Our Lady of the Rock of France.

Father Fray de la Peña, of the same convent.

Father Fray de la Peña, from the same convent.

Father Fray Pedro Fenollar, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Mallorca.

Father Fray Pedro Fenollar, from the Santo Domingo convent in Mallorca.

Father Fray Pedro de la Fuente, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Victoria.

Father Fray Pedro de la Fuente, from the convent of Santo Domingo in Victoria.

Brother Fray Juan Ybañez de Santo Domingo, of the same convent.

Brother Fray Juan Ybañez de Santo Domingo, of the same convent.

Brother Fray Diego de Almazan, of the convent of Preachers, of Zaragoça.

Brother Fray Diego de Almazan, from the convent of Preachers in Zaragoza.

Brother Fray Dionisio Morales, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Ciudad de el Caller.

Brother Fray Dionisio Morales, from the convent of Santo Domingo, in Ciudad de el Caller.

The last three were choristers, and the following were lay-brethren:

The last three were choir members, and the following were lay brothers:

Fray Matheo Gascon, of the convent of Preachers, of Zaragoça.

Fray Matheo Gascon, from the Convent of Preachers in Zaragoza.

Fray Joseph Garcia, of the convent of Preachers, of Magallon.

Fray Joseph Garcia, from the Preachers' convent in Magallon.

Fray Raymundo Martorel, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Graus. [30]

Fray Raymundo Martorel, from the convent of Santo Domingo in Graus. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The last named remained in Mexico in the hospice of the order there. With the other thirty-two who reached this land, our ministries and missions in charge of the province were reënforced, and other missions which were promoted because of that new reënforcement, and were shortly after founded as will be told later in the following chapters.

The last person mentioned stayed in Mexico at the order's hospice there. Along with the other thirty-two who arrived in this land, our ministries and missions under the province received reinforcement, and more missions were created because of that new support, which will be discussed later in the following chapters.

[The remainder of the chapter relates to the reëstablishment of the post of commissary of the Holy Office to the Dominicans, who had always held it previous to Fray Joseph de Paternina, O. S. A. Chapters vii–xxvii contain lives of various missionaries of the Philippines and the Asiatic mainland, notices of provincial elections, and accounts of the missions of the Asiatic mainland.]

[The rest of the chapter discusses the reinstatement of the position of commissary of the Holy Office to the Dominicans, who had always held it before Fray Joseph de Paternina, O. S. A. Chapters vii–xxvii include biographies of different missionaries in the Philippines and on the Asian mainland, information about provincial elections, and reports on the missions in the Asian mainland.]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter XXVIII

Arrival of a new mission of religious at the province; the province assumes the administration of the Zambals.

A new group of missionaries arrives in the province; the province takes over the administration of the Zambals.

[In 1679 a band of Dominicans arrive at the islands in charge of Fray Francisco Villalba.3 Those religious are as follows:]

[In 1679 a group of Dominicans arrived at the islands led by Fray Francisco Villalba.3 Those religious are as follows:]

The father vicar, Fray Francisco Villalba, son of the convent of San Pablo, of Burgos.

The father vicar, Fray Francisco Villalba, from the convent of San Pablo in Burgos.

The father presentee, Fray Manuel Trigueros, son of the convent of the Preachers, of Zaragoça.

The father present, Fray Manuel Trigueros, son of the Convent of the Preachers in Zaragoza.

The father presentee, Fray Francisco Matoces, son of the convent of Santa Catharina Virgen y Martir, of Barzelona.

The father present, Brother Francisco Matoces, from the convent of Santa Catharina Virgin and Martyr, in Barcelona.

Father Fray Magino Ventallol, doctor in the holy canons, son of the same convent. [31]

Father Fray Magino Ventallol, doctor in the holy canons, son of the same convent. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Father Fray Raymundo Berart, doctor in both laws, and professor of the university of Lerida, son of the said convent of Barzelona.

Father Fray Raymundo Berart, a doctor in both laws and a professor at the University of Lerida, is a member of the convent in Barcelona.

Father Fray Raphael Morert, graduate from the same branches, and son of the said convent.

Father Fray Raphael Morert, a graduate from the same branches, and a member of that convent.

Father Fray Joseph Vila, son of the said convent.

Father Fray Joseph Vila, son of that convent.

The father lector, Fray Miguel Ossorio, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla.

The father lector, Fray Miguel Ossorio, from the San Pablo convent in Sevilla.

The father lector, Fray Francisco Ruiz, son of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid.

The father reader, Fray Francisco Ruiz, from the San Pablo convent in Valladolid.

The father lector, Fray Francisco Vargas, son of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca.

The father lector, Fray Francisco Vargas, son of the convent of San Estevan in Salamanca.

The father lector, Fray Francisco Ximenez, son of the convent of Xerez.

The father lector, Fray Francisco Ximenez, from the convent of Xerez.

Father Fray Juan Yñiguez, son of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla.

Father Fray Juan Yñiguez, from the San Pablo convent in Sevilla.

Father Fray Miguel de Castro, son of the same convent.

Father Fray Miguel de Castro, son of the same convent.

Father Fray Diego Burguillos, son of the same convent.

Father Fray Diego Burguillos, from the same convent.

Father Fray Juan de Santo Thomas, son of the same convent, collegiate and now lector in the college of Santo Thomas, of the said city.

Father Fray Juan de Santo Thomas, a member of the same convent, is a scholar and currently a lecturer at the college of Santo Thomas in that city.

Father Fray Juan Rois, son of the convent of Lugo.

Father Fray Juan Rois, from the convent of Lugo.

Father Fray Juan Fernandez, son of the convent of Valladolid.

Father Fray Juan Fernandez, from the Valladolid convent.

Father Fray Juan de Todos Santos, son of the said convent.

Father Fray Juan de Todos Santos, a member of that convent.

Father Fray Juan Gonçalez, son of the royal convent of Nuestra Señora, of Atocha.

Father Fray Juan Gonçalez, from the royal convent of Nuestra Señora in Atocha.

Father Fray Gregorio Xiraldez, son of the convent of Pontevedra.

Father Fray Gregorio Xiraldez, from the convent of Pontevedra.

Father Fray Francisco Nuñez Bravo, son of the convent of Santa Cruz, of Segovia. [32]

Father Fray Francisco Nuñez Bravo, from the convent of Santa Cruz in Segovia. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Father Fray Fernando Ortubia, son of the convent of Santiago de Galicia.

Father Fray Fernando Ortubia, son of the Santiago de Galicia convent.

Father Fray Domingo Muta, a Sicilian, son of the convent of Turin.

Father Fray Domingo Muta, a Sicilian, son of the convent in Turin.

Father Fray Bernardo Lopez, son of the convent of San Pedro Martir, of Toledo.

Father Fray Bernardo Lopez, from the convent of San Pedro Martir in Toledo.

Father Fray Antonio de Santa Maria, son of the convent of Valladolid.

Father Fray Antonio de Santa Maria, a member of the convent of Valladolid.

Father Fray Alonso de Herrera, son of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca.

Father Fray Alonso de Herrera, from the San Estevan convent in Salamanca.

Father Fray Alonso Cobelo, son of the convent of Lugo.

Father Fray Alonso Cobelo, from the Lugo convent.

Fray Francisco de Frias, deacon, son of the convent of Burgos.

Fray Francisco de Frias, deacon, son of the convent in Burgos.

Fray Iñigo de San Joseph, son of the convent of San Pablo of Palencia.

Fray Iñigo de San Joseph, from the San Pablo convent in Palencia.

Fray Thomas de el Rosario, of the convent of La Puebla de los Angeles.

Fray Thomas de el Rosario, from the convent of La Puebla de los Angeles.

And three lay-brethren, as follows:

And three lay members, as follows:

Brother Fray Juan Calvo, of the convent of Santa Cruz, of Segovia.

Brother Fray Juan Calvo from the Santa Cruz convent in Segovia.

Brother Fray Juan Martinez, of the convent of Nuestra Señora of Nieva.

Brother Fray Juan Martinez, from the convent of Our Lady of Nieva.

Brother Fray Francisco de la Cruz, of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca.

Brother Fray Francisco de la Cruz, from the convent of San Estevan in Salamanca.

That same year, on the first of February, a student, a native of Galicia, and a relative of the archbishop of Mexico, one Antonio de Eguiar y Seijas, took the habit for this province in the hospice of San Jacinto in Mexico; and at the proper time in the following year he professed and immediately came to this his province.

That same year, on February 1st, a student from Galicia, who was related to the archbishop of Mexico, Antonio de Eguiar y Seijas, joined this province at the San Jacinto hospice in Mexico. The next year, when the time was right, he made his vows and quickly came to this province.

That new reënforcement was very necessary because of the great amount of work to be done in [33]this province. For, besides the Christian districts in its charge, and the Chinese missions, and those of Tunking, on the eleventh of May of the said year, the governor of these islands as vice-patron of these churches, in the name of the king our lord, had entrusted us with the administration of the province of Zambales, which had thitherto been in charge of the Augustinian Recollect fathers.4 Its administration was now entrusted to our province for the following cause and reason. Those Indians were and are the rudest that are known in these environs of Manila. They are very cruel and bloodthirsty, and fond of murdering people without more cause than their liking for cutting off heads. They were always the bugaboo of the Spaniards, and the terror of the Indians of the other provinces. They could never be wholly conquered, especially those living in Buquil; for they were a people who lived in the mountains where the Spanish arms could not reach them. And less was it possible to conquer them by means of mildness, gentleness, kindness, and caresses, although the preachers of the holy gospel of the Recollects of our father St. Augustine tried to invite and lure them to the knowledge of the true God and to consider the welfare of their souls. Consequently, although those missionaries were among them for more than seventy years, they were unable to reduce them to the mild yoke of the law of Christ. And although they worked with zeal in that attempt, with great merit and profit to themselves, yet they always lived in great disconsolation, at beholding the hardness of those hearts. Not less affliction and trouble was caused to the Indians when they saw [34]fathers and Spaniards in their lands, for since they were so stiff-necked, and accustomed to liberty, they did not look with favor on the payment of tribute or submission and obedience to the fathers. Consequently, they were dissatisfied with the fathers, and discussed various plans to oust them. They did not dare to murder them for fear of the Spaniards, who had a presidio or fort in Paynaven (the center of that province), and because since they were near Manila, any action that they attempted would be avenged by the Spaniards who would send troops of soldiers there by both land and sea. Hence the final plan discussed by the inhabitants of Buquil was to have recourse to the governor, asking him to remove those fathers, and in their place give them Dominican fathers. This was not because of any greater affection that they had for us than for them, but because they imagined that by successive changes, they could better conserve their liberty. This seems clearly to be their end, for before the end of seven years after our entrance into that province, they were dissatisfied with us, and begged fathers of the Society. They are a fickle people and fond of change. Their idea was that one sort of ministers succeeding thus to others, neither the one nor the other sort could get a foothold, or be able to put the preaching or the evangelical instruction on a sound basis among them.

That new reinforcement was urgently needed because of the huge amount of work to be done in [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]this province. In addition to managing the Christian districts and the Chinese missions, as well as those in Tunking, on May 11 of that year, the governor of these islands, acting as vice-patron of these churches in the name of our king, had assigned us the administration of the province of Zambales, which had previously been overseen by the Augustinian Recollect fathers.4 We were now in charge for the following reason: The local Indians were the most unruly known in the Manila area. They were very cruel and bloodthirsty, often killing people for no reason other than their desire to behead them. They had always been a source of fear for the Spaniards and terror for the Indians in other provinces. Complete conquest was never achieved, especially for those living in Buquil, as they resided in mountainous regions inaccessible to Spanish forces. Attempts to conquer them through kindness and gentleness were futile, despite the efforts of the Recollects, who tried to bring them to understand the true God and seek their spiritual welfare. Although those missionaries spent over seventy years among them, they couldn't bring them under the gentle rule of Christ’s law. Their dedicated work, which brought them personal merit and reward, was met with despair as they witnessed the stubbornness of these people. The Indians were equally troubled by the presence of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]fathers and Spaniards in their land; being so defiant and accustomed to freedom, they resented paying tribute or submitting to the fathers. Consequently, they grew unhappy with their leadership and considered various ways to remove them. However, they dared not kill them for fear of the Spaniards, who had a fort in Paynaven (the center of that province), and because any action they took would be swiftly avenged by troops sent from Manila. Therefore, the final plan discussed by the people of Buquil was to approach the governor, requesting the removal of those fathers in favor of Dominican priests. This was not out of any greater fondness for us but because they believed that with each change, they could better preserve their freedom. This seems to be their true intention, as less than seven years after we took over the province, they were unhappy with us and sought priests from the Society. They are a fickle people who enjoy change. Their belief was that this kind of succession of ministers would prevent any group from establishing a foothold or effectively conducting preaching and evangelization among them.

Chart of the harbor bar of Manila, and vicinity of river Pasig, 1757

Chart of the harbor bar of Manila, and vicinity of river Pasig, 1757

Chart of the Manila harbor bar and surrounding area of the Pasig River, 1757

[Photographic facsimile from original MS. in Archivo general de Indias, Sevilla]

[Photographic facsimile from original MS. in Archivo general de Indias, Sevilla]

It happened, then, in the year 1676, that the alcalde-mayor of Pampanga, then Sargento-mayor Don Francisco de Texada, and Sargento-mayor Alonso Fernandez Pacheco, former chief commandant of the fort of Balas, began communication with the Zambal Indians of Buquil and having gained [37]their good will with their zeal for the welfare of their souls, persuaded them to become baptized, for as abovesaid, most of the people of Buquil were heathens. They answered that they would become baptized if they were given Dominican ministers; for they wished to be administered by them alone. Having received that petition and proposal of the Indians, the said alcalde and commandant informed the governor of these islands, then the master-of-camp, Don Manuel de Leon. He desirous of the reduction of those infidels, petitioned the father provincial of this province, then father Fray Phelipe Pardo, to send some religious to Zambales as missionaries for those mountains, in order to ascertain whether the effect of reducing those barbarians to the faith of Christ could be obtained in that way—a matter that all desired greatly. By virtue of that, the father provincial sent father Fray Pedro de Alarcon5 and father Fray Domingo de Escalera to the place called Buquil. To another place called Balacbac, which is located behind the mountains of Abucay, he sent the father vicar of the said village, namely, Father Domingo Perez. The latter immediately departed for Balacbac and having assembled some Indians there, baptized nine, and returned to [38]Abucay, bringing five Zambals with him whom he afterward catechised and baptized. One of them was the nephew of the priest of the idols, and the father taught him to read and write, for he was more clever than the others. That Indian was very useful, and afterward was of much help to the said father in the reduction of the Zimarrones of the mountains, and in telling their customs and idolatries. The two fathers who were at Buquil, assembled some Indians into a place which they called Nuestra Señora de Atocha, where they baptized some and catechised others. But the governor having died at the beginning of the following year, the former ministers of that province began to complain to the father provincial that we were entering their administration. Notwithstanding that he had a sound reply that the vice-patron of those fields of Christendom had entrusted the matter to us, the father provincial in order to avoid anger between both orders, enjoined the fathers to return. That was the end of that first entrance which our religious made in Zambales. The provincial chapter was held after that, and in it the said father Fray Domingo Perez was elected vicar of Samal. The latter, by virtue of the order which was enacted in the said provincial chapter for all the father vicars of the houses near the mountains where there were any heathens to reduce, to endeavor to make entrances among them in order to allure them to the faith of Christ, did in that part what was ordered, by making some entrances among those mountains in order to reduce some Negritos, who are called Zambals.6 Although the father worked with energy in that [39]attempt, and went to great expense in kindnesses to them, he could obtain nothing from them because of their great barbarity and other reasons which it is not the present purpose to mention.

It happened in the year 1676 that the alcalde-mayor of Pampanga, Sargento-mayor Don Francisco de Texada, and Sargento-mayor Alonso Fernandez Pacheco, the former chief commandant of the fort of Balas, started communicating with the Zambal Indians of Buquil. They won their favor by genuinely caring for their spiritual well-being and persuaded them to get baptized, as most of the Buquil people were still pagans. The Zambals agreed to be baptized only if they were given Dominican ministers, as they preferred to be ministered to by them alone. After receiving this request from the Indians, the alcalde and commandant informed the governor of these islands, Don Manuel de Leon. Wanting to convert the infidels, he asked the father provincial of this province, Fray Phelipe Pardo, to send some missionaries to Zambales to see if they could bring those barbarians to the Christian faith, which everyone greatly desired. In response, the father provincial sent Fray Pedro de Alarcon and Fray Domingo de Escalera to Buquil. He also sent Father Domingo Perez, the vicar of the nearby village, to a place called Balacbac, located behind the mountains of Abucay. Father Perez immediately left for Balacbac, gathered some Indians, baptized nine of them, and returned to Abucay with five Zambals, whom he later taught and baptized. One of them was the nephew of the priest of the idols, and the father taught him to read and write because he was smarter than the rest. This Indian proved to be very helpful, assisting the father in reaching the Zimarrones in the mountains and sharing their customs and idolatries. The two fathers at Buquil gathered some Indians in a place they called Nuestra Señora de Atocha, where they baptized some and catechized others. However, after the governor died at the beginning of the following year, the previous ministers of the province complained to the father provincial that we were encroaching on their administration. Despite having a valid response that the vice-patron of those areas of Christendom had entrusted the matter to us, the father provincial decided to avoid conflict between the two orders and instructed the fathers to return. This marked the end of the first mission our priests made in Zambales. Following this, the provincial chapter was held, and Father Fray Domingo Perez was elected vicar of Samal. By virtue of an order enacted in that provincial chapter for all father vicars of nearby houses to make attempts at converting any heathens in the mountains, he worked to fulfill that directive by making some efforts among the mountains to reach the Negritos, known as Zambals. Although the father energetically pursued this goal and spent a lot on kindnesses towards them, he was unable to achieve anything due to their extreme barbarity and other reasons that I won't detail here.

In the year 1678, Master-of-camp Don Juan de Vargas y Hurtado, knight of the Order of Santiago, came to govern these islands. With the coming of the new governor, the Zambals of Buquil renewed their former petition that Dominican fathers be given them. In order to make surer of their demands, they presented themselves to the archbishop, saying that they would quickly be reduced and would embrace the faith of Jesus Christ, if ministers of our order were given them. The archbishop, having seen that proposal, informed the governor of it, to whom as vice-patron belonged the right of assigning one or another sort of ministers to those Indians. The governor brought with him a royal decree from his Majesty ordering him to entrust to one of the orders the administration of the island of Mindoro, which was in charge of secular priests. Upon seeing the representation of the Zambals, he offered the administration of the said island of Mindoro to the Augustinian Recollect fathers, on condition that they leave the province of Zambales, in order that our religious might assume its administration in accordance with the petition of the Indians of that province. The father provincial of the Recollects accepted the exchange, although they assert that the cession was not legal, as it was not made by the provincial chapter of their province. That annulling clause was not put forward then, and [40]the cession made by the father provincial of the administration of Zambales before the said governor having been seen, the Recollects were given that of the island of Mindoro. By virtue of that, the said governor in his Majesty’s name, conceded to the Order of St. Dominic the administration of the province of Zambales from the village of Marivelez to that of Bolinao. The father provincial of this province, namely, the father commissary Fray Balthasar de Santa Cruz, immediately sent some religious to administer the said Indians. In the intermediate congregation of the following year, the houses of the said province were accepted in due form, and ten religious were established in them for the cultivation of those fields of Christendom, and for the new reductions of the heathens....

In 1678, Master-of-camp Don Juan de Vargas y Hurtado, a knight of the Order of Santiago, began governing these islands. With the new governor's arrival, the Zambals of Buquil renewed their previous request for Dominican fathers to be sent to them. To strengthen their case, they approached the archbishop, stating that they would quickly convert and embrace the faith of Jesus Christ if ministers from our order were provided to them. The archbishop, seeing the proposal, informed the governor, who had the authority as vice-patron to assign different types of ministers to those Indigenous people. The governor arrived with a royal decree from his Majesty instructing him to assign the administration of Mindoro Island, which was previously managed by secular priests, to one of the religious orders. After reviewing the Zambals' request, he offered the administration of Mindoro Island to the Augustinian Recollect fathers, on the condition that they vacate the province of Zambales, allowing our religious order to take over in response to the Indians' request. The provincial father of the Recollects accepted the transfer, though they claimed it wasn't legal, as it wasn't approved by their provincial chapter. This objection wasn’t raised at that time, and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] after reviewing the transfer made by the provincial father of the administration of Zambales to the governor, the Recollects were assigned Mindoro Island instead. Consequently, in his Majesty’s name, the governor granted the Order of St. Dominic the administration of Zambales province from the village of Marivelez to Bolinao. The provincial father of this province, Fray Balthasar de Santa Cruz, promptly sent some religious to serve the Indians. In the following year's intermediate gathering, the houses of the province were formally accepted, and ten religious were established to work in those areas of Christendom and to assist in the new conversions of the Indigenous people.

[Chapter xxix deals with the customs of the Zambals, and is omitted here, as we shall give in a future volume the original MS., on which it is based.]

[Chapter xxix covers the customs of the Zambals, and is omitted here, as we will include the original manuscript it’s based on in a future volume.]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter XXX

How our religious continued to soften those Zambal Indians and reduce them to civilization

How our religious efforts continued to soften those Zambal Indians and bring them into civilization

[Notwithstanding that the Recollects had preached in the province of Zambales for seventy years and many of the Zambals were baptized, many of them were still wild, and refused the gospel message held out to them. This is because of their great love of liberty and hatred of restraint, and not because of lack of zeal on the part of the Recollects. Besides the Zambals lived scattered in many rancherías so that it was difficult for the fathers to visit them more than once or twice a year, and consequently, the little [41]instruction that could be given them was insufficient to leaven them with the gospel spirit throughout the year. They had been unable to reduce them to fewer settlements because the various bands were often at war with one another and could not reconcile their difficulties. Then, too, the magistrates, sunk in their self interest, did not furnish the aid that should come from them. “This is the reason, and there is no other, why there is so much infidelity in these islands; for it is clearly seen by experience that when the secular government has been in earnest, and encouraged a mission, very abundant fruits have followed therefrom.” The narrative continues:]

[Even though the Recollects had been preaching in the province of Zambales for seventy years and many of the Zambals were baptized, a lot of them were still unruly and rejected the gospel message offered to them. This was due to their strong love of freedom and aversion to restriction, not a lack of effort from the Recollects. Moreover, the Zambals were scattered across many small settlements, making it hard for the fathers to visit them more than once or twice a year. As a result, the limited [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] instruction they received was not enough to instill the gospel spirit in them throughout the year. They couldn't be consolidated into fewer communities because the various groups were often at war with each other and couldn't resolve their conflicts. Additionally, the local leaders, mired in their own interests, did not provide the necessary support. "This is the reason, and there is no other, why there is so much infidelity in these islands; for it is clearly seen by experience that when the secular government has been sincere and supported a mission, very abundant fruits have followed therefrom." The narrative continues:]

And this is what our religious had in their favor when they entered that province of Zambales, for the governor of these islands, Don Juan de Vargas y Hurtado, was very desirous of that reduction, and made exact measures for it. In imitation of him the chief commandant of the fort of Paynaoven, namely, Adjutant Alonso Martin Franco, tried to coöperate in this design by his continual vigilance and efforts and at the evident risk of his life, and without heeding his own interest in the many offers of gold which the Indians made him so that he might desist from his purpose and not oblige them to leave their retreats. Our religious protected by that aid, proposed to the Indians of those rancherías as soon as they reached Playahonda, to collect into one settlement in the site that they thought best, in order that they might be more easily taught and administered by the religious. Since they had promised to reduce themselves if Dominican ministers were given them, and since the governor had given them those ministers, [42]they ought also to fulfil their word. The Indians of Playahonda replied that they were not the ones who had gone to Manila with that request, but it was those of Buquil. Consequently, the latter ought to be confronted with that promise, and not they. Thereupon, the religious summoned those of Buquil and making them the proposal abovesaid, the Indians began to offer various excuses. By that our religious recognized that all their promises were feigned, and that they were very far from any intention to become reduced. Consequently, that reply having been heard by the religious, which was so contrary to what they had expected, and seeing that stronger measures were needed, the father vicar provincial returned to Manila to represent to the governor the rebellion of the Zambal Indians. The said father was welcomed by his Lordship, from whom he obtained what he wished, namely, the prohibition of trade between the Zambals and the Indians of Pampanga and other provinces, in order that, being deprived of that recourse, hunger and necessity might compel them to descend from the mountain and live in a settlement in order to exist.

And this is what our religious had going for them when they entered the province of Zambales. The governor of these islands, Don Juan de Vargas y Hurtado, was very eager for that reduction and made precise plans for it. Following his lead, the chief commander of the fort at Paynaoven, Adjutant Alonso Martin Franco, tried to support this effort with his constant vigilance and actions, putting his life at risk and ignoring his own interests despite the many offers of gold the Indians made him to persuade him to abandon his mission and not force them to leave their hideouts. With that support, our religious proposed to the Indians of those rancherías as soon as they arrived at Playahonda to gather into one settlement in the location they deemed best, so they could be more easily taught and administered by the religious. Since they had promised to settle down if Dominican ministers were provided, and since the governor had given them those ministers, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] they were expected to follow through on their word. The Indians of Playahonda responded that they were not the ones who had gone to Manila with that request; it was the people from Buquil. Therefore, those from Buquil should be held accountable for that promise, not them. The religious then summoned those from Buquil and presented the same proposal, but the Indians began to make various excuses. This led our religious to realize that all their promises were insincere and that they had no real intention to settle down. Given the unexpected response from the Indians and recognizing that stronger measures were needed, the father vicar provincial returned to Manila to inform the governor about the rebellion of the Zambal Indians. The father was welcomed by his Lordship, from whom he obtained what he sought, specifically the prohibition of trade between the Zambals and the Indians of Pampanga and other provinces, so that being deprived of that option, hunger and necessity would drive them to come down from the mountains and live in a settlement.

But that provision proving insufficient to make the Zambals live in definite villages, the governor ordered the proclamation of an edict ordering all the Zambals to descend the mountains under penalty of being severely punished. The edict was proclaimed in Paynaoven and in other places of that province, whence the notice of it could be carried to those who were living in the mountains. More than five hundred Zambals of Buquil descended on the day and to the site assigned. There the commandant of the fort again imparted to them the edict and [43]order of the governor. Their reply to the proposal was to submit the whole matter in common to an Indian called Quiravat, who had been the chief agent in begging our ministers for religious. He said “Let him who wishes to descend to settle, do it and welcome, but as for me, I am going to live with my people where I choose.” The commandant angered at his boldness, manacled and bound the said Quiravat, and the Indians his associates seeing that, began to discharge a cloud of arrows at the commandant and his soldiers, in number twenty-two men. Thereupon, the said commandant ordered Quiravat to be beheaded, and the other Indians retired with the death of twelve of their companions, but without their having done any harm to the Spaniards. That fray and encounter inspired the Indians with fear, and some, although they were few, descended. But in the following year of 1680, three hundred soldiers having entered by way of Pampanga, and the commandant of Paynaoven and his men having made a raid in that other part, the Zambals were inspired with so great fear, that many of them descended from the mountains. Consequently, it was possible to form or increase three villages: one near the fort called Alalan; another in Balacbac, called Nuevo Toledo; and the third south of the two, called Baubuen. The Indians who descended from the mountain were gathered into those three villages, whether from fear of the Spaniards, or through the persuasions of the fathers. The latter, by the aid of the soldiers, caused the Indians to show them more respect; and with the affability and benignity of their treatment, softened the hardness of their hearts. The same effort was made in [44]other places of the said province, where there were already some villages, although they were very small and distant, and could not be administered by the religious without evident risk and danger. Consequently, they soon asked that they be placed in such condition and distance that there might be easy communication from one village to the other. All that was done at the cost of the order, which paid those who built the houses. Those houses were built by people of other villages and provinces, and they were given already built to the Zambals; for to compel them to make them was morally impossible.

But since that provision was not enough to make the Zambals settle in specific villages, the governor issued an edict requiring all the Zambals to come down from the mountains or face severe punishment. The edict was announced in Paynaoven and other places in the province, so that the news could reach those living in the mountains. More than five hundred Zambals from Buquil descended on the appointed day and to the designated location. There, the commandant of the fort reiterated the edict and the governor’s orders to them. Their response was to refer the entire issue to an Indian named Quiravat, who had been the main advocate for the missionaries. He said, “Anyone who wants to come down and settle can do so, but as for me, I'm going to live where I choose with my people.” The commandant, infuriated by his defiance, shackled and restrained Quiravat. Upon seeing this, the other Indians began to shoot a barrage of arrows at the commandant and his twenty-two soldiers. Consequently, the commandant ordered Quiravat to be executed, and the other Indians retreated after losing twelve of their companions, although they didn’t harm the Spaniards. This conflict instilled fear in the Indians, and although they were few, some came down. However, in the following year of 1680, after three hundred soldiers entered through Pampanga, and the commandant of Paynaoven and his men conducted a raid in that area, the Zambals became so frightened that many of them came down from the mountains. As a result, it became possible to establish or expand three villages: one near the fort called Alalan; another in Balacbac, named Nuevo Toledo; and the third south of the two, called Baubuen. The Indians who came down were gathered into these three villages, whether out of fear of the Spaniards or due to the persuasion of the missionaries. The latter, with the help of the soldiers, earned the respect of the Indians; their friendliness and kindness softened the hardness of their hearts. The same effort was made in [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]other areas of the province, where there were already some small and far-flung villages that couldn't be managed by the missionaries without obvious risk. As a result, they soon requested to be placed in a condition and distance that would allow easy communication between villages. This was all done at the expense of the order, which paid those who constructed the houses. Those houses were built by people from other villages and provinces and were given to the Zambals already constructed; forcing them to build their own was morally impossible.

This effort of causing the Indians to form their villages would have been of slight use, if at the same time they had not been obliged to work in making their fields in order that they might have the wherewithal to sustain life, so that they might not be under the necessity of abandoning their villages and returning to the mountains, where with the hunt and with various roots, the Indians are wont to sustain life at small cost, without the care and trouble of cultivation. And as they were unaccustomed to the cultivation of the soil, and did not know how to plow, or dig, and had no instruments for that, nor even seed for planting: they were provided with all this by our religious. More than fifty buffaloes or carabaos (which are their oxen), by which the plowing is done in this country, were taken there at the cost of the order. Also many plows were bought for them, and they were also given the seed so that they could allege no reasonable excuse. Inasmuch as they did not know how to plow or to plant, salaried Indians were taken from other provinces, so that they might cultivate the [45]land, and so that the Zambals might learn of them. After the land that first year had been cultivated, and the rice had headed, it was given to them at the time of harvest, so that they might reap and gather it. But so great was the laziness of those Zambals that many of them refused to accept the land because it was not reaped. But others, having the profit so plainly in sight, set to work to reap it and gather it; and since by that means they made sure of their food, they were inclined to work and the cultivation of their fields. Our religious encouraged them in this by thus forcibly setting before their eyes the profit of the harvest, that they would have afterward. The religious accompanied them to the fields to work, heartily praised those who applied themselves, and perhaps, in order to inspire them by their example, put their hands to the plow. For the religious very well understood that if the Indians did not turn husbandmen, they would not be secure in the level land, and they would easily return to the mountains under the obligation of necessity. And thus that necessary diligence was compulsory in order to reduce them to a civilized life and to a good government.

This effort to get the Indigenous people to set up their villages wouldn’t have been very effective if they hadn’t also been required to work on their fields to ensure they had enough to eat. This way, they wouldn’t feel the need to abandon their villages and head back to the mountains, where they could survive on hunting and foraging for roots at minimal cost, without the effort of farming. Since they were not used to farming and didn’t know how to plow or dig—and didn't have the tools or seeds needed—they were provided with everything by our religious leaders. More than fifty buffalo or carabaos (which are their oxen), used for plowing in this area, were brought in at the order's expense. Many plows were also purchased for them, along with seeds, so they couldn’t make any reasonable excuses. Because they didn’t know how to farm, hired Indigenous workers from other areas were brought in to cultivate the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]land, helping the Zambals learn how to do it themselves. After the land was cultivated the first year and the rice was ready, they were given the harvest so they could reap and gather it. However, the laziness of many Zambals led them to refuse the land because it hadn’t been harvested yet. But others, seeing the clear benefit, got to work reaping and gathering; and since that ensured their food supply, they became more motivated to farm their fields. Our religious leaders encouraged them by putting the benefits of the harvest right in front of them. They accompanied them to the fields to work, praised those who put in the effort, and perhaps even helped out themselves to inspire them by example. The religious leaders understood very well that if the Indigenous people didn’t take up farming, they wouldn’t be safe on the flat lands and would easily return to the mountains out of necessity. Thus, this necessary diligence was essential to help them transition to a civilized lifestyle and better governance.

All the time the fathers continued to soften their hardness by their kindness and mildness, which they showed them not only in the gentleness of their intercourse and conversation, but also much more in the generosity and liberality which they used toward them, providing them with all that was necessary, both for the building of their houses and for the cultivation of their fields. They gave the Indians a quantity of clothing to wear, besides the other acts of kindness and the presents which they made them. [46]In that our province spent much money, a sum which, according to the accounts, exceeded ten thousand pesos. The thing that robbed still more their affection was on seeing that the fathers defended them when the soldiers wished to employ violence with them, for they took the part of the Indians, and softened the fury of the soldiers. By that means the Indians came to perceive two things: one that the fathers considered their good; and the other that they were higher than the soldiers, since the latter obeyed the religious and desisted from the attempted severity when the fathers ordered or petitioned them. Hence they came to infer that to stand well with the fathers and to obey them was of great profit to them, for so they were assured by the Spaniards, and among the religious they experienced no evil treatment, but everything was mild, gentle, and peaceful. Consequently, they moderated themselves and became so mild, within a year, that it caused great surprise to see those who had formerly been so wild and unmanageable become so conformable and domestic.

The fathers kept softening their strictness with kindness and gentleness, which they showed not only in their friendly interactions and conversations but also more significantly in their generosity and support. They provided everything the Indians needed for building their homes and farming their land. They gifted the Indians a lot of clothing to wear, along with other acts of kindness and presents. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]In doing this, our province spent a significant amount of money, which totaled over ten thousand pesos according to the records. What made the Indians even fonder of the fathers was seeing them defend them when the soldiers tried to be violent, as they stood up for the Indians and calmed the soldiers' anger. This led the Indians to realize two things: first, that the fathers genuinely cared for their well-being; and second, that they held a higher position than the soldiers since the latter obeyed the fathers and backed off from their harshness when asked to do so. As a result, they began to understand that getting along with the fathers and obeying them was very beneficial for them, as the Spaniards assured them of this, and they experienced nothing but kindness from the religious figures, where everything was gentle and peaceful. Consequently, they adjusted their behavior and became so gentle within a year that it was surprising to see those who had once been wild and unruly become so compliant and domesticated.

When our religious entered at the beginning, the children ran away from them when they saw them, and the women also hid; but the former later became so familiar with the religious that they would scarcely let them alone. When the religious entered any village, the children all descended from their houses and went behind him, and walked with him, and followed wherever he went. Scarcely would they let him walk, for some of the children seized him by the habit, and others placed their scapularies under his eyes [for him to bless?].

When our religious came in at first, the children ran away from them when they saw them, and the women also hid; but later, the kids became so comfortable with the religious that they hardly left them alone. Whenever the religious entered a village, all the children came down from their houses, followed behind him, and walked with him wherever he went. They barely let him walk on his own, as some of the children grabbed his robe, while others held out their scapularies for him to bless.

While the father was in the convent, it was not [47]empty of Indians, who were going and coming, some to beg for relief in their necessities, while others begged consolation for their troubles, some medicine for their pains, and some relief in their afflictions. All found there whatever they needed, for charity serves for everything. And since the Indians beheld that of the fathers toward them, they loved them, esteemed them, and favored, and were so well inclined to their intercourse, that, on a certain occasion, when they thought that the fathers were going to leave them, and return to Manila, the sorrow manifested by all was great until the fathers undeceived them, and released them by various means of their vain fear. Those who had previously fled from the fathers, and those with whom the above-mentioned violence had to be used in order to gain admittance in the beginning, reached this condition of sociability and mildness in little more than one year....

While the father was at the convent, it wasn't [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]empty of Indians, who were coming and going—some asking for help with their needs, while others sought comfort for their troubles, some medicine for their pain, and some relief from their suffering. Everyone found what they needed there, because charity covers everything. And since the Indians noticed the fathers’ kindness towards them, they grew to love, respect, and support them. They became so fond of their interactions that on one occasion, when they thought the fathers were going to leave them and return to Manila, everyone expressed great sorrow until the fathers clarified the situation and eased their unfounded fears. Those who had previously run away from the fathers, and those with whom force had to be used to gain entry at the start, reached a state of friendliness and kindness in just over a year...

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter XXXI

Fruit of the preaching of our religious in the changing of the customs of the religious

Results of the preaching by our religious in the shift of the customs of the religious

When once our religious had gained the goodwill of the Indians they immediately began to exercise the apostolic ministry of the preaching in order to eradicate their ancient vices and customs and reduce them to the perfection of a Christian life. There was much to do and accomplish in this province, for there were yet many heathens in it, and many apostates from the faith which they had received, and some, who made use of the name of Christian, living in their rancherías or visitas, far from the intercourse with, and teaching of, their [48]ministers, were only Christians in name, but in their morals and even in their religion they were heathens, since they did not know the Christian doctrine or the mysteries of the Catholic faith, and neither prayed nor knew how to pray, nor heard mass, nor observed the feasts, nor took any account of Lent, fasting, or abstinence, and did not show any other token of a Christian. For since they lived in the mountains, in remote and distant places, where the ministers could not visit them unless by running great risks and dangers, as abovesaid, they were not sufficiently rooted in the faith which the preachers had taught them; and, living intermixed among the heathens, they easily took on their rites and customs. If, perchance, they wore the rosary at the neck it was when they were going to the villages of Christians, so that they might not be taken for heathens. But there in their rancherías among the mountains, very rarely did they wear it; for the devil had persuaded them that nothing good could happen to them if they had those beads with them. Consequently, when they went to hunt, or to commit a murder, they immediately took off the rosary, in order to obtain success in their undertaking. In short, to tell the whole thing, those Indians of Buquil were even idolaters, and although they had received baptism, they continued in their idolatries, and in their sacrifices to the demon. Only in the capitals where the fathers lived, were there a few perfect Christians; but in the rancherías and visitas, especially those of the district of Buquil, since they did not have the ministers over them, they lived in entire liberty with their ancient vices and superstitions. They killed one another without cause or reason, became intoxicated, worshiped [49]idols, and lived together as they did before, without taking any account of their Christianity.

Once our religious gained the trust of the Indians, they quickly started preaching to eliminate their old vices and customs and guide them towards a Christian way of life. There was a lot to do in this area because many pagans still lived there, along with some who had rejected the faith they had received. Some claimed to be Christians but lived far from the guidance of their [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]ministers in their ranches or outposts, only identifying as Christians in name, as their morals and beliefs were still pagan. They didn't know Christian teachings or the mysteries of the Catholic faith, and they neither prayed nor knew how to pray, nor did they attend mass, observe celebrations, observe Lent, fast, or abstain from certain foods, showing no other signs of being Christian. Living in the mountains, in remote areas where ministers could only visit at great risk, they weren't firmly grounded in the faith the preachers had taught them, and being surrounded by pagans, they easily adopted their rituals and customs. Sometimes they would wear rosaries around their necks when visiting Christian villages to avoid being seen as pagans, but in their mountain ranches, they rarely wore them. They had been convinced that nothing good could come from carrying those beads. Therefore, when they went hunting or to commit acts of violence, they would remove their rosaries to ensure success in their endeavors. In short, the Indians of Buquil were essentially idolaters; even though they had been baptized, they continued practicing their idol worship and sacrifices to demons. Only in the main towns where the fathers lived were there a few true Christians, but in the rancherías and visitas, especially in the Buquil district, without ministers around, they enjoyed complete freedom to indulge in their old vices and superstitions. They killed each other without cause, got drunk, worshiped [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]idols, and lived as they had before, ignoring their Christianity.

In order to free them from all such things our religious toiled and labored earnestly arguing, exhorting, and checking them in all patience and instruction, according to the advice of the apostle. And inasmuch as all the barbarity of their customs originated from their lack of faith, the fathers began to set before them and to explain to them the immortality of the soul, the reward or punishment of the other life, and all the other mysteries of the Catholic faith. Their instruction took so fast hold once more on the apostates and on the people of Buquil, that they looked at one another in stupefaction at what they heard the fathers say. The latter seeing the surprise that those things caused in the Indians, decided that it was necessary to start that undertaking from its very beginnings, and to teach them to pray and the instruction, which they had either never understood, or they had completely forgotten. They began that effort by the children, whom they instructed excellently in the prayers, and in the explanation of the doctrine. After them the older people went to the church, in order not to be put to the blush before the children. The latter, either by the advice of the fathers or because of their own natural loquaciousness, upbraided their elders later with the little knowledge which they had had of God before and because they had lived like heathens. By that means the elders were put to shame, and submitted to the teaching. Little by little they began to open their eyes, and to see the blindness in which they had lived. Confused and ashamed of their old way of living, they applied themselves indeed with [50]all earnestness to learn what was necessary for salvation. The church was filled with people all day long who wished to learn the prayers and formulas, which the children prayed in a loud voice, so that the others learned them in that way. The religious preached to them quite frequently, explaining to them the mysteries of the faith, and threatening with the wrath and anger of God those who did not keep the holy commandments. They did that with so great spirit, and fervor, that it caused great terror to those who heard it, and thus daily they were becoming reduced to live according to the laws of Christians.

To help free them from all those things, our religious worked tirelessly, arguing, encouraging, and guiding them with patience and instruction, just like the apostle advised. Since all their harsh customs stemmed from their lack of faith, the fathers began to present and explain to them the immortality of the soul, the rewards or punishments in the afterlife, and all the other mysteries of the Catholic faith. Their teaching took hold so strongly with the apostates and the people of Buquil that they were stunned by what the fathers were saying. Noticing the surprise this caused among the Indians, the fathers decided it was essential to start from the very beginning, teaching them how to pray and the teachings they had either never understood or had completely forgotten. They began with the children, whom they taught well in prayers and in explaining the doctrine. After that, the older folks came to church, not wanting to be embarrassed in front of the children. The children, either following the fathers' advice or out of their natural tendency to talk, later scolded their elders for the little knowledge they had about God before and for living like heathens. This shamed the elders, and they accepted the teaching. Gradually, they began to open their eyes and realize the blindness in which they had lived. Confused and ashamed of their past way of living, they earnestly committed themselves to learning what was necessary for salvation. The church was filled with people all day long eager to learn the prayers and formulas that the children recited aloud, which helped others learn as well. The religious preached to them regularly, explaining the mysteries of faith and warning of God's wrath and anger toward those who did not follow the holy commandments. They delivered these messages with such passion and fervor that it instilled great fear in those who heard it, and thus, day by day, they were increasingly inclined to live according to Christian laws.

[The preaching of the religious is aided by divine miracles, and the religious also make use of stratagem to banish vice. An instance of the latter is as follows.]

[The preaching of the religious is supported by divine miracles, and the religious also use clever tactics to eliminate vice. An example of the latter is as follows.]

Such was the one of which the father vicar provincial, Fray Domingo Perez, made use, to banish homicide. He frequently censured that vice in them, but for all that they were wont secretly to commit murders. The father would hear of the murder, although the aggressor was not known. Assembling all those of the village, he would declare that he would ascertain it by means of the pulse. Then he took the pulse of each one, and since confusion is natural in the criminal, especially in these Indians, who understand so little of dissimulation, when the father would take hold of the pulse of the aggressor, the latter trembled all over his body. Hence, by a happy conjecture, the father would deduce that he was the one, and then by censuring him or punishing him according to his deserts, the others were deterred from, and afraid of, committing that crime, which could never be hidden from the father, since he [51]learned everything from the pulse. So certain were they of that, that if any of them had had anything stolen from him, he went to the father to complain, and requested him to feel the pulse of all, in order to ascertain the thief who had stolen it. And although the father usually excused himself from doing that, they could not rid themselves of the idea, which they had formed on the first occasion, that the fathers learned all things by means of the pulse. Therefore, they managed to check many of their ancient customs and superstitions.

Such was the method used by the provincial vicar, Fray Domingo Perez, to eliminate murder. He often condemned that vice among them, but despite his efforts, they were still known to secretly commit homicides. The father would always hear about the murder, even if the attacker was unknown. He would gather everyone from the village and announce that he would find out who it was by taking their pulse. Then he would check each person’s pulse, and because it's natural for a criminal to feel nervous, especially among these indigenous people who were not very good at hiding their emotions, when the father took the pulse of the culprit, that person would tremble all over. From this, the father would make an educated guess about who the culprit was, and then, by reprimanding or punishing him appropriately, he would deter others from committing that crime, which could never be hidden from the father, as he learned everything from the pulse. They were so convinced of this that if anyone had anything stolen, they would go to the father to report it and ask him to check the pulse of everyone to find out who the thief was. Although the father usually declined to do that, they couldn’t shake the belief they had formed the first time that the fathers could learn everything through the pulse. Therefore, they managed to curb many of their old customs and superstitions.

But not so quickly did our religious learn what can not be mentioned without tears, namely, that although the Indians were apparently Christians, and were subject to the teaching of the fathers, and had abandoned some of their ancient customs, and embraced in part the observance of the divine law, yet they desired to serve God and the demon at the same time, and they desired to embrace the matters of the faith in such a manner that they should not become separated from the ancient worship which they attributed to the demon in their false gods. That matter was kept very secret among them, for since they feared lest it should reach the ears of the fathers, they had all sworn an oath to keep close concerning that fact. They kept that oath so well that it was never revealed through them. But God revealed it in a curious manner to the religious for the welfare of those miserable people. We have related in chapter xxviii that Father Fray Domingo Perez baptized a boy in Abucay, the nephew of a priest of the idols, who having been taught to read and write, and having been given devout books to read, became a very excellent Christian. He and other lads whom the [52]father kept in the convent, asked the said religious many things concerning the faith, which he taught them and explained to them most gladly, so that daily they became more imbued in all its articles and mysteries. Three years after the entrance of our religious into that district, those lads asked the father if it was right to do such and such things, namely the idolatries which the Indians practiced, and the sacrifices which they made to the demon. The father asked them what it was that was done, and they like children went on to tell whatever they had seen their elders do, and whatever they were practicing secretly even to that time. The father’s grief at such news can well be imagined. But dissembling its effects for the time being, in order not to frighten them away from the hunt, he charged the lads to keep still about what they had told him. Summoning the schoolboys, whom he petted and treated with great kindness, he was informed by them with so great clearness on this head, that he learned who were the priests of those sacrifices, and the instruments that each one had for their diabolical functions. Also charging those children to keep still, he ordered them to tell no one what they had told him, so that their parents might not beat them. The father having learned everything very clearly, and having consulted with God concerning the matter in prayer, he resolved, when Lent came in the year 1683, to put an end to that idolatry, although he knew very well that it would be at the cost of great labor, and many troubles and dangers. For the principal priests of those sacrifices were the principal people of the village, and they were respected and venerated by all and could set afoot any treachery against him. And since [53]they had all sworn not to reveal the matter, as he had not yet proved it, it was a point in which all were interested, and in which all would be against him.

But our religious didn't quickly learn what is too painful to mention, which is that even though the Indians seemed to be Christians, were following the teachings of the fathers, had given up some of their old customs, and partially embraced divine law, they still wanted to serve both God and the demon at the same time. They wanted to practice their faith in a way that wouldn't separate them from the ancient worship they associated with the demon represented by their false gods. They kept this matter very secret among themselves, fearing that it might reach the fathers, so they all took an oath to keep it quiet. They held that oath so well that it was never revealed through them. However, God revealed it in an unusual way to the religious for the benefit of those unfortunate people. We mentioned in chapter xxviii that Father Fray Domingo Perez baptized a boy in Abucay, the nephew of an idol priest, who, having learned to read and write and received devout books, became an excellent Christian. He and other boys, whom the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]father housed in the convent, asked the religious many questions about the faith, which he taught and explained to them enthusiastically, so they grew more immersed in all its articles and mysteries every day. Three years after the arrival of our religious in that area, those boys asked the father whether it was right to do certain things, namely, the idolatries practiced by the Indians and the sacrifices made to the demon. The father asked them what those activities were, and like children, they shared everything they had seen their elders do, including the secret practices they were still engaged in. The father's grief at such news can only be imagined. However, hiding his feelings for the moment, so as not to scare them away from the investigation, he instructed the boys to remain silent about what they had told him. By gathering the schoolboys, whom he treated with great kindness, he got clear information from them, learning who the priests of those sacrifices were and the tools each used for their diabolical rituals. He also instructed those children to keep quiet, so their parents wouldn't punish them. After learning everything clearly and praying to God about the situation, the father decided that when Lent arrived in 1683, he would put an end to that idolatry, even knowing it would require significant effort and would come with many troubles and dangers. The main priests of those sacrifices were the leading people in the village, respected and held in high regard by everyone, and they could initiate any treachery against him. And since they had all sworn not to disclose the matter, and he had not yet proved it, it was a situation where everyone had a vested interest, and they would all be against him.

However, having placed all his confidence in God, and with the information that he possessed of the whole matter, he began to summon one after another the chiefs, and chide each one in private for the execrable evil that he was practicing by offering sacrifice to the demon. Before that one could deny the truth to him, he said to him, “You have such and such instruments, and with them you sacrificed on such and such a day, in company with such and such a person.” To another he said: “You are a priest, and consequently, you have so many instruments kept in such a place for the sacrifices, by which you give to the demon the honor that belongs to God; and as proof of it you performed that sacrifice on such and such a day with such and such a person, and this other on such and such a day, with such and such a person.” In such wise did he examine them all and censured them for so great evil. They, seeing that he was giving them so sure proofs, considered the religious as a diviner and gave him the instruments of their idolatries. He commenced by the village of Bauguen, whose church was dedicated to Santa Rosa. By the aid and favor of the saint he collected a great number of those instruments, which some gave to him willingly and some reluctantly. He called the children, and ordered them to break up those instruments, and they obeyed immediately. “Now throw them into the privies,” said the father, “and let the children perform the necessities of nature on them.” They obeyed his order instantly, and made a mockery and jest of those instruments. The Zambals were [54]astonished that the father and the children were not killed for the disrespect that they showed to their gods, for they believed that he who touched or profaned such instruments would die. The father preached to them, and taught them what they were to do in the future. Having finished that matter in Bauguen, he went to Balacbac to do the same; and although he had some difficulty, with the help of God, it was conquered. From Balacbac he went to the village of Alalan, and although he found the people there obstinate and pertinacious, by his kindness and arguments, he induced them to do the same that had been done in the preceding villages. Then he went to Buquil and did the same as in Playa-Honda, breaking and burning all the instruments of their idolatries. And although the father had many troubles on account of that, he stood it all with great patience, as he saw that he was performing the cause of God in this; for which, as we shall see later, they deprived him of life and made him a glorious martyr.

However, after placing all his trust in God and considering what he knew about the whole situation, he began to call the chiefs one by one and privately scold each of them for the terrible sin they were committing by sacrificing to the demon. Before they could deny anything, he would say to them, “You have this and that equipment, and you sacrificed on such and such a day, along with so and so.” To another, he said, “You are a priest, so you have these items stored in this place for the sacrifices, through which you give the demon the honor meant for God; and as proof, you performed that sacrifice on that date with that individual, and another on this date with that individual.” He thoroughly examined each of them and condemned them for such great evil. Seeing that he had such convincing proof, they regarded the religious leader as a seer and handed over their idolatrous instruments. He started with the village of Bauguen, where the church was dedicated to Santa Rosa. With the saint's help and favor, he gathered a large number of these items, with some willingly giving them and others doing so begrudgingly. He called the children and instructed them to break the instruments, and they obeyed right away. “Now throw them in the toilets,” said the father, “and let the children relieve themselves on them.” They immediately followed his command and made a joke of those instruments. The Zambals were [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]astonished that the father and the children weren't killed for their disrespect to their gods, as they believed that anyone who touched or desecrated such items would die. The father preached to them and taught them what they should do going forward. After finishing the task in Bauguen, he went to Balacbac to do the same; despite some challenges, with God's help, he was successful. From Balacbac, he moved on to the village of Alalan, and although he found the people there stubborn and persistent, through his kindness and reasoning, he got them to do what had been accomplished in the previous villages. Then he went to Buquil and repeated the same actions as in Playa-Honda, breaking and burning all the instruments of their idols. Despite facing many troubles due to this, he endured it all with great patience, as he saw that he was serving God's cause; for which, as we will see later, they took his life and made him a glorious martyr.

That so pernicious root having been torn out, the religious had no difficulty in sowing in the land of their hearts the good doctrine and teaching. The holy fear of God, the frequency of the holy sacraments, the devotion of the queen of the Angels, and the exercise of the holy rosary persuaded them. And since now the demon had left their souls, and he had been bereft of the right which he had to them, the instructions and inducements of the religious found no resistance in their hearts; and, consequently, they agreed thoroughly in all those things, and thereby they daily became more perfect, and became fervent Christians, anxious for their salvation, and given to the exercises of piety. Now one never heard, as [55]formerly, of violent murders; and now there was no intoxication or other disorders; now the superiors were obeyed and respected by their inferiors; now one no longer heard among them a “I do not wish,” as they were wont to answer formerly; now all were safe, each in his own house, and no one thought of taking vengeance on another. They attended mass almost every day, and went to recite the rosary in the afternoon. They all wore the rosary hanging from their necks with great devotion, and recited it in their houses every night. They observed the fasts of the Church, and the days of abstinence with punctuality, for they feared greatly lest God punish them, as He did punish some for the example of others. In fine, such was the reform in their morals, and the change of life in those Indians, that the fathers themselves were surprised to see what had been wrought by the hand of God, which had changed them in the briefest of space from ravening wolves to gentle lambs, and from fierce and savage men into faithful and obedient sons of the Church. And although our religious worked mightily in this yet all the glory is due to God, who not only gave His spirit to the ministers, but also coöperated in their preaching with many manifest miracles which will be related in the following chapter.

That harmful root having been removed, the religious had no trouble planting good teachings in their hearts. The holy fear of God, frequent participation in the sacraments, devotion to the queen of Angels, and the practice of the holy rosary inspired them. And since the demon had now left their souls, losing the hold he had on them, the instructions and encouragement from the religious met no resistance in their hearts; as a result, they fully agreed with all these things, and they became increasingly perfect, fervent Christians eager for their salvation, and committed to acts of piety. Now one never heard, as [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]before, of violent murders; now there was no drunkenness or other disturbances; now superiors were obeyed and respected by their subordinates; now there was no longer the common “I don’t want to,” as they used to respond; now everyone was safe in their homes, and no one thought of seeking revenge on another. They attended mass almost every day and prayed the rosary in the afternoon. They all wore the rosary around their necks with deep devotion and recited it in their homes every night. They observed the Church's fasts and abstinence days diligently, fearing greatly that God would punish them, as He had punished some as a warning to others. In short, the reform in their morals and the transformation of those Indians was so remarkable that even the fathers were amazed to witness what God had done, changing them within a short time from ravenous wolves to gentle lambs, and from fierce, savage men into faithful and obedient sons of the Church. Although our religious worked hard in this, all the glory belongs to God, who not only empowered the ministers but also supported their preaching with many clear miracles that will be described in the following chapter.

[Chapter xxxii recounts the miraculous occurrences above mentioned, all of which resulted in greater faith and devotion to the new precepts taught by the missionaries, and instilled fear of God into the hearts of the Indians.] [56]

[Chapter xxxii recounts the miraculous events mentioned earlier, all of which led to increased faith and commitment to the new teachings introduced by the missionaries, and cultivated a sense of reverence for God in the hearts of the Indians.] [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter XXXIII

Of another mission in the farthest villages of Yrraya in the province of Cagayan

About another mission in the most distant villages of Yrraya in Cagayan province

Not only in that mission of Zambales did the province labor in that time, but also in another of not less fruit in the ends and confines of Cagayan. There were formerly four villages there, namely, Batavag, Pilitan, Bolo, and Abuatan. They comprised about two thousand houses. Those villages in the seventh year of their foundation, when although many of their inhabitants were heathens, notwithstanding that more of them were already Christians, were abandoned on the day of the Ascension of the Lord in the year 1615, by their dwellers, who retired into the interior, deceived by their aniteras or priestesses, who did not look with favor upon their Christianity, because of the profit that they lost thereby in their sacrifices and diabolical functions. And so much were those priestesses able to say to induce them to make that retirement, that at last they resolved to do it, apostatizing from the faith which they had received, as is mentioned in the first part of this history, book 2, chapter 3.7 That apostasy caused great pain, especially to the fathers of Cagayan, who had charge of those four villages which they had founded amid severe labors, drawing their inhabitants from heathenism and luring them to the faith of Christ. When they saw now that all that they had obtained by their labor in many years was lost in one single day, they were caused great pain and disconsolation, and they saw that the fruit of their labors had been ill obtained. Therefore those fathers made [57]a few efforts on various occasions to reduce those Indians to a settlement, but they obtained from them no further fruit than the obtaining of a few souls whom God had predestined for His glory. But since the zeal of the religious was directed to much more, namely, the reduction of all that people, they lost no opportunity for that enterprise, to solicit it with might and main.

Not only did the province contribute to the mission in Zambales during that time, but it also engaged in another important effort in the regions of Cagayan. There used to be four villages there: Batavag, Pilitan, Bolo, and Abuatan, which together had around two thousand houses. In the seventh year after they were founded, despite many of the inhabitants being heathens at that time, a larger number had already become Christians. However, on the day of the Ascension of the Lord in 1615, the residents abandoned these villages, retreating into the interior, misled by their aniteras or priestesses, who opposed their Christianity because it cut into their profits from sacrifices and other rituals. The priestesses were so persuasive that the villagers ultimately decided to leave, renouncing the faith they had received, as mentioned earlier in this history, book 2, chapter 3.7 This renunciation caused great sorrow, especially for the fathers of Cagayan, who had worked hard to establish those four villages, converting the people from paganism to Christianity. When they realized that all their years of effort had been wiped out in a single day, they felt immense grief and despair, seeing their hard work had come to nothing. Consequently, those fathers made [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]a few attempts to settle the Indians again, but they only managed to save a few souls whom God had destined for His glory. Yet, since the religious had greater ambitions—namely, to bring all those people into the fold—they seized every opportunity to pursue that mission with all their might.

In the year 1673, when the father commissary, Fray Phelipe Pardo, was elected provincial of this province, the definitory (as we remarked above) charged him straitly to strive for new missions and reductions of heathens to the faith of Christ. Consequently, the said father provincial going to visit the province of Cagayan, the religious of that province petitioned him to found that mission of Yrraya, and the prelate meeting their fervor, sent two religious to that district, namely, father Fray Pedro Sanchez and father Fray Geronimo de Ulloa,8 who played the part of explorers, in order that by talking and by treating with the apostates, they might sound their minds and good will, and ascertain whether it was the season for that harvest so that they might put therein the sickle of the preaching. The two said religious went thither, and although the apostates received them well, they could not obtain what they were after by entreaty, namely, that they should reduce themselves to their former villages. For those people were prevented beforehand by the Indians of the village of Cabagan, who induced [58]them, for their own private interests, not to return to their Christianity. In order, then, to get them to reëstablish the said villages, they were prevented from trading with the heathen, which was a source of great profit and gain to them, and at the same time those of Cabagan remained more in the interior of the province, without having so easy a place of retreat open in time of any insurrection. Just as in the wars with Portugal, some did not wish that country to be conquered, so that they might have an easy refuge in the time of any trouble, so also, those Indians of Cabagan, although Christians, induced the heathens not to become Christians, and pointed out to them the burden of the tribute, the polos, the personal services, and other penalties and troubles which the Christians feel when they are settled. What passes in this country is incredible, for on one and the same foundation, namely, greed, opposing results are built. Many Chinese heathens live here, and very rarely does one see one of them who dies without baptism, not only because of the inducements of our religious, who have charge of that mission, but also because when any of those heathens falls sick, all his relatives, even the pagans, unite in persuading him to become a Christian, not for any zeal which they have for the faith, for they remain in their paganism, but for fear lest, if they die heathens, their property might suffer some loss, as has been established in practice according to law or custom. On the contrary, it happens among the Indians, that the Christians of the villages near the heathens persuade them not to become Christians, in order that they might not lose thereby their commerce and trade, in which is placed their gain and interest. [59]And it is not to be wondered at that the Indians do so, since they are new and recent Christians; for there are Europeans who oppose the missions greatly, for their own interest. Whatever the religious effect by their efforts is destroyed easily by an alcalde or a commandant for his own private conveniences. This has always been, and is, the cause, as abovesaid, of there being so much infidelity in these islands. In fine, the two religious whom the provincial sent, returned without it having been possible for them to obtain anything of substance, as the apostates were very obstinate because of the inducements of the people of Cabagan.

In 1673, when Father Commissary Fray Phelipe Pardo was elected provincial of this province, the definitory (as mentioned earlier) instructed him to actively seek out new missions and bring non-believers to the faith of Christ. So, when the provincial visited the province of Cagayan, the local clergy asked him to establish the Yrraya mission. The prelate, recognizing their enthusiasm, sent two clergy members to that area, Father Fray Pedro Sanchez and Father Fray Geronimo de Ulloa, who acted as scouts. Their goal was to engage with the apostates, gauge their sentiments and willingness, and find out if it was time to begin evangelizing. The two clergy went there, and although the apostates welcomed them, they couldn't persuade them to return to their original villages. The villagers were dissuaded by the people from Cabagan, who, for their own benefit, discouraged their return to Christianity. To compel them to reestablish their villages, the people of Cabagan blocked their trade with the non-believers, which had been a significant source of income for the apostates. Meanwhile, those from Cabagan remained deeper in the province, avoiding easy escape routes during any unrest. Just like during the wars with Portugal, some people didn’t want that territory conquered so they could find refuge in troubled times. Similarly, the Cabagan Indians, despite being Christians, led the non-believers away from Christianity, highlighting the burdens of taxes, forced labor, and other hardships that come with being settled Christians. What's happening in this country is astonishing; built on the same foundation of greed, completely opposite outcomes arise. Many Chinese non-believers live here, and rarely does one pass away without being baptized, not just due to the persuasion of our clergy managing that mission, but also because when one of them falls ill, all their relatives, even the pagans, encourage them to convert—not out of a true desire for faith, as they still hold on to their pagan beliefs, but out of fear that if they die as non-believers, their assets might suffer as established by law or custom. Conversely, among the Indians, Christians in the villages near non-believers encourage them not to convert so they won’t lose their trade and profits. It’s not surprising that the Indians behave this way, considering they are still new to Christianity; there are Europeans who greatly oppose missions for their own benefit. Whatever religious impact the clergy make can easily be undermined by an alcalde or commandant acting in their self-interest. This has always been, and continues to be, the reason for the prevailing infidelity in these islands. Ultimately, the two clergy members sent by the provincial returned without achieving anything significant, as the apostates were quite stubborn due to the influence from the people of Cabagan.

In the year 1677, a provincial chapter was held in this province. Among other ordinances established in it was the one mentioned above several times, namely, that the vicars of the villages near the heathens endeavor most earnestly to reduce them. The venerable father, Fray Pedro Ximenez,9 an apostolic man, and one at home in missions, was elected vicar of Cabagan in that chapter. In addition to the said ordinance of the chapter, the recently-elected father provincial charged him with the reduction of those infidels and apostates. The father provincial going upon his visit, and consulting over the method of that reduction with the fathers of the province of Cagayan, sent the said father Fray Pedro Ximenez to the abovesaid site of Yrraya, assigning him as companion of that undertaking his own associate and secretary, then father Fray Andres Gonçalez, afterward [60]bishop of Nueva Caceres. But the said father provincial having died in a few days, the said reduction ceased for the time being.

In 1677, a provincial chapter was held in this province. Among other rules established was the one mentioned several times, which stated that the vicars of the villages near the non-Christians should earnestly try to convert them. The respected Father, Fray Pedro Ximenez, an apostolic man and experienced in missions, was elected vicar of Cabagan during that chapter. In addition to the chapter's ordinance, the recently-elected provincial father tasked him with converting those non-believers and apostates. As the provincial father planned his visit and discussed the conversion methods with the fathers of the Cagayan province, he sent Father Fray Pedro Ximenez to the mentioned location of Yrraya, assigning his associate and secretary, Father Fray Andres Gonçalez, later bishop of Nueva Caceres, to accompany him on this mission. However, just a few days later, the provincial father passed away, and the conversion efforts came to a halt for the time being.

In the following year of seventy-eight, a chapter was again held in this province, and the said father Fray Pedro Ximenez was reëlected vicar of Cabagan. While that chapter was being held, the governor of these islands, at the petition of the archbishop and the bishop of Cagayan, as well as of the recently-elected father provincial, namely, father Fray Balthasar de Santa Cruz, called a council of war in regard to that reduction. In that council it was resolved that the said father Fray Pedro Ximenez, selecting five Spaniards, five Pampangos, and sixteen Indians should proceed to the reduction of those heathens, summoning them in the name of the king, our sovereign, by pardon for all their apostasies, murders, and other crimes that they had committed, and that the apostates who became reduced, would be excused from paying tribute for three years, and the heathens for ten years if they were converted. He was ordered to inform the superior government of the result of his journey so that the measures necessary and fitting for the said reduction, might be taken. With that order the said father, Fray Pedro Ximenez, went to Cagayan. The alcalde-mayor of that province furnished him with all that was needed for that undertaking, although the father refused to take any soldiers with him but only the sixteen Indians for his protection and so that they might act as rowers in the boat. The father ascended to those paramos and desert places, and by treating those heathens with kindness and gentleness he reduced many of those of a district called Ziffun to descend to settle [61]in a place called Santa Rosa, where the village of Batavag had formerly stood. They did that immediately without any delay, and without the aid of troops or escorts. Besides them others offered themselves to the father, in number about three hundred, but since they lived farther inland, they needed escorts to accompany them and to take charge of their effects and household goods. The alcalde-mayor of that province, Admiral Don Pedro de la Peña, who was zealous for the honor of God and for the welfare of souls, was of great help with his measures. They were allowed to select a village where they wished to live. Some of them went to Cabagan, others to the said village of Santa Rosa, and others to another new village called Ytugug, which was under the advocacy of Nuestra Señora de Victoria. Besides them a hundred persons descended and founded the village of San Fernando, where the ancient village of Bolo was established. Thus of the four former villages, three have been reëstablished, namely, San Fernando, Santa Rosa, and Ytugug.

In the following year, 1878, there was another chapter held in this province, and Father Fray Pedro Ximenez was re-elected as the vicar of Cabagan. While that chapter was taking place, the governor of these islands, at the request of the archbishop, the bishop of Cagayan, and the newly elected provincial, Father Fray Balthasar de Santa Cruz, called a council of war regarding the reduction. In that council, it was decided that Father Fray Pedro Ximenez, along with five Spaniards, five Pampangos, and sixteen Indians, would go to bring those heathens into the fold, summoning them in the name of our sovereign king, offering pardon for all their apostasies, murders, and other crimes they had committed. It was agreed that the apostates who converted would be excused from paying tribute for three years, while the heathens would be exempt for ten years if they converted. He was instructed to inform the superior government of the results of his journey so that necessary measures for the reduction could be taken. With that order, Father Fray Pedro Ximenez traveled to Cagayan. The alcalde-mayor of that province provided him with everything needed for the mission, although the father refused to take any soldiers with him, opting only for the sixteen Indians for protection and as rowers for the boat. The father journeyed to those remote and desolate areas, and by treating those heathens with kindness and gentleness, many from a district called Ziffun came down to settle in a place called Santa Rosa, where the village of Batavag used to be. They acted quickly and without delay, without the aid of troops or escorts. Additionally, about three hundred others volunteered to join the father, but since they lived further inland, they needed escorts to accompany them and carry their belongings. The alcalde-mayor of that province, Admiral Don Pedro de la Peña, who was committed to the honor of God and the welfare of souls, was very helpful with his efforts. They were allowed to choose a village where they wanted to live. Some went to Cabagan, others to the village of Santa Rosa, and others to a new village called Ytugug, which was under the patronage of Nuestra Señora de Victoria. Additionally, a hundred people descended and established the village of San Fernando, where the old village of Bolo once stood. Thus, out of the four former villages, three were re-established: San Fernando, Santa Rosa, and Ytugug.

The devil was envious of that reduction, and accordingly attempted to destroy it and undo it, making use of the same instruments by which he had prevented it so many years before. He suggested then to an Indian of Cabagan to stir up the Indians who had descended, but the latter not daring to do it himself made use of a heathen called Baladdon. The latter treacherously killed twelve persons of those who had recently become settled, and through that deed the reduction was on the point of being undone and the Indians of returning to the mountains, seeing how little security there was in the villages. In order to quiet and calm them the alcalde-mayor [62]took a hand. By means of a troop of soldiers whom he sent, he avenged those treacherous murders, by killing some of the accomplices and capturing others, in all seventy in number; and by looting their possessions and goods, which rightly went to the troops. By that vengeance which was taken on those traitors, the new villages were calmed and quieted, and the enemies were too fearful to attempt another such thing. Father Fray Pedro remained in the said new villages, instructing and teaching the apostates, and catechising heathens, in order that they might receive holy baptism.

The devil was jealous of the progress made in the community and tried to destroy it, using the same tactics he had employed years earlier. He influenced an Indian from Cabagan to incite the others who had come down, but the latter, not daring to take action himself, enlisted a pagan named Baladdon. Baladdon deceitfully killed twelve individuals who had recently settled, putting the community at risk of being dismantled and making the Indians consider returning to the mountains, as they felt unsafe in the villages. To reassure and stabilize them, the alcalde-mayor [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] intervened. He sent a group of soldiers who took revenge for the treacherous murders by killing some accomplices and capturing others, totaling seventy people. They also seized their possessions, which rightfully belonged to the troops. This act of retribution calmed the new villages, and the enemies were too afraid to try anything similar again. Father Fray Pedro stayed in those new villages, teaching and instructing the recent converts and catechizing the pagans to prepare them for holy baptism.

All this news was reported in Manila, and was gladly received there by both the governor of these islands and the ministers of the royal Audiencia. Taking action for the permanence of that reduction, they ordered the alcalde of Cagayan to establish a presidio in the province of Paniqui, which was located inland, so that the said new villages might be assured, and the disturbances from the enemies cease. The said presidio was not established, for although the alcalde-mayor of the said province went by way of Cagayan, the one sent by the governor did not arrive by way of Ytuy. But the journey of the alcalde-mayor of Cagayan was not in vain, for father Fray Pedro had formerly treated with some heathens of a place called Ambayao to descend to the new villages, and now by the aid of the alcalde and his men father Fray Pedro went down to the said Indians, with their wives, families, and household goods, and reaching the village of Ytugug with them, they were allowed to choose a site in which to live. Some hundred of them remained there, while the others went down to [63]Cabagan, Lalo, Yguig, Fotol, and to other villages.

All this news was reported in Manila and was happily received there by both the governor of the islands and the ministers of the royal Audiencia. To ensure the stability of that settlement, they instructed the alcalde of Cagayan to set up a fort in the province of Paniqui, which was located inland, so that the new villages could be secured and the disturbances from enemies would stop. The fort was not established because, although the alcalde-mayor of the province traveled through Cagayan, the one sent by the governor did not arrive via Ytuy. However, the journey of the alcalde-mayor of Cagayan was not in vain, as Father Fray Pedro had previously negotiated with some non-Christians from a place called Ambayao to move to the new villages. Now, with the help of the alcalde and his men, Father Fray Pedro went to those Indians, along with their wives, families, and household goods. Upon reaching the village of Ytugug with them, they were allowed to choose a site to live. About a hundred of them stayed there, while the others went down to [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Cabagan, Lalo, Yguig, Fotol, and other villages.

When the matter was at the height of its success, the devil managed to put forth all his efforts in order to cause all the said reduction to cease. He so overturned affairs that the very ones charged with the movement, petitioned most earnestly that an end be put to it, relying on some opinions apparently correct, but of little profit to the mission. Hence father Fray Pedro was ordered to cease to bring heathens to settle if troops and escorts were needed for that purpose. The religious obeyed that new order and took care only to instruct those who had been reduced, and did not attempt to make further conquests with the aid of troops or escorts. But alone, without troops or noise, people kept descending those mountains, and many of them summoned him to go to get them. But since he was ordered not to take troops, with only the Indians of the new villages, some of whom were neophytes and others catechumens, he went through those deserts and collected many apostates and heathens. On one occasion, he led one hundred and fifteen persons, and one week afterward another thirty-five followed from a place called Yobat. They said to the father: “If you stay in Yobat two days more, a vast number of people will descend. Do you not hear them calling to you from afar and inviting you to go to them?” The said father did not understand it so, but thought on the contrary that they were enemies, and as he had so few people with him could not trust himself; besides those men whom he took had enough to do in carrying the children and old and sick people, and the possessions and household goods of those who descended. [64]

When everything was going really well, the devil put in a lot of effort to stop the progress. He messed things up so much that the people in charge of the movement earnestly requested to put an end to it, relying on some seemingly valid opinions that ended up being unhelpful for the mission. As a result, Father Fray Pedro was told to stop bringing heathens to settle if troops and escorts were necessary for that. The religious leaders followed this new directive and focused only on teaching those who had already been converted, without trying to make new converts with the help of troops or escorts. However, on their own, without any military presence, people kept coming down from the mountains, and many called out to him to come get them. But since he was instructed not to take troops, he only had the Indians from the new villages with him—some of whom were new converts and others were still learning. He traveled through the deserts and gathered many apostates and heathens. Once, he brought back one hundred and fifteen people, and a week later, another thirty-five came from a place called Yobat. They told him, “If you stay in Yobat two more days, a huge number of people will come down. Can’t you hear them calling to you from a distance, inviting you to join them?” The father didn’t see it that way; he thought they were enemies, and since he had so few people with him, he couldn’t take the risk. Besides, those he had were already busy carrying children, the elderly, sick people, and the belongings of those who were coming down. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Amid such glorious enterprises and tasks father Fray Pedro was employed for seven years, during which he reduced very many apostates, and baptized innumerable heathens, with whom he founded the three villages above mentioned, which are still in existence today after a period of more than sixty years. The other villages of the province were increased by those who descended from the mountains to live in them. But when the hopes of reducing all those pagans were greatest, the devil laid such snares and so many witnesses rose up against the father that it became necessary for this province to remove him from that ministry, and to transfer him to another one very distant from it. There without his rivals or least of all the devil designing it, God carried him to other reductions, of which an account will be given in due time. In the meanwhile that mission was taken charge of by other fathers who were also zealous workers, who made their raids into those mountains and the districts of the heathens from time to time, and led many of them by means of their inducements to descend to live in the settlement; in order that they might be better taught and instructed in what pertained to the welfare of their souls, until after the lapse of several years and [until] all had been disabused of their error, and of the false opinion that they were laboring under against the innocence of the said religious, the province again placed him as minister of those new villages, in order that he might continue the former reduction. By his efforts the mission was rejuvenated and finally the father ended his days there, as will be related farther on when treating of his death.

Amid such glorious projects and tasks, Father Fray Pedro worked for seven years, during which he helped many apostates return to the faith and baptized countless native people, with whom he founded the three villages mentioned above, which still exist today after more than sixty years. The other villages in the province grew with people coming down from the mountains to live in them. But just when the hopes of converting all those pagans were highest, the devil set traps, and many witnesses turned against the father, making it necessary for the province to remove him from that ministry and transfer him to another location far away. There, without his rivals or even the devil to interfere, God led him to other conversions, which will be discussed in due time. In the meantime, that mission was taken over by other dedicated fathers, who occasionally ventured into the mountains and the regions of the indigenous people, persuading many of them to come down and live in the settlement so they could be better taught and guided on what mattered for the welfare of their souls. After several years, and once all had come to understand the truth and abandon their misconceptions about the innocence of those religious figures, the province again appointed him as the minister of those new villages to continue the earlier efforts. With his dedication, the mission was revitalized, and ultimately, the father spent his last days there, as will be recounted later when discussing his death.

During these latter years in which this account is [65]written, that mission has been reëstablished with seemingly more success than ever; for although the attempt has been made several times to reduce all that paganism, it has been impossible to obtain it until now as the said heathens live in remote places and are separated from communication with other provinces. Therefore, they seem almost unconvertible, as the missionaries could not live among them without notable discomfort, lack of health, and even not without danger to their lives. For on eight or more occasions that the religious have entered those mountains for the purpose of reducing the heathens who live in them, sometimes escorted by soldiers, and at other times without that aid, in all of them, they have experienced lack of health and death of the missionaries and even of the soldiers who accompanied them. Hence, the reduction of all that paganism was deemed impracticable. But now during these latter years, the earnest solicitude of the prelates has made that land communicable by opening through it a road from the province of Pangasinan to that of Cagayan. Although very heavy expenses have been incurred in this, this province considers those expenses as excellently employed, since from them has followed the conquering of the impenetrability of that land, the thing that rendered the said reduction most difficult. That difficulty having been thus removed, there has been no difficulty in the missionaries living and dwelling there permanently, as at present some religious are doing, occupied in the conversion of those heathens. Many of the latter are now baptized and are founding many new villages which make a good province distinct from those of Pangasinan and Cagayan; and [66]it is hoped that there will be a very plentiful harvest, according to the good condition of the crops which are now apparently ripe and only need the workers from Europa to gather the fruit of our labors.

During these recent years when this account is [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]written, that mission has been reestablished with seeming success like never before; for although attempts have been made multiple times to convert all that paganism, it has been impossible to achieve this until now, as those heathens live in remote areas and are cut off from communication with other provinces. Consequently, they appear almost unconvertible, since the missionaries could not live among them without significant discomfort, health issues, and even threats to their lives. On eight or more occasions, the religious have ventured into those mountains to try to convert the heathens there, sometimes with soldiers’ protection and other times without, but in every instance, they faced health problems and the deaths of both missionaries and accompanying soldiers. Thus, converting all that paganism was considered impractical. However, in these recent years, the sincere efforts of the prelates have made that land accessible by opening a road from the province of Pangasinan to Cagayan. Although this involved considerable expenses, the province views those costs as well spent, as they have allowed for overcoming the impenetrability of that terrain, which was the major obstacle to conversion. With that challenge now resolved, there has been no issue with missionaries settling there permanently, and currently, some religious are doing just that, focusing on converting those heathens. Many of them have now been baptized and are establishing numerous new villages, creating a thriving province distinct from Pangasinan and Cagayan; and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]there is hope for a plentiful harvest, given the good condition of the crops that are now apparently ripe and just require workers from Europe to gather the fruits of our labor.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter XXXIV

An intermediary congregation is celebrated in this province; notice of the mission of Vangag and of an Indian woman of especial merit.

A mid-level gathering is honored in this area; an announcement regarding the mission of Vangag and an Indian woman of exceptional worth.

[An intermediary chapter is held at Manila in May, 1680, at which notice is given of the entrance of the Dominicans into Zambales. The following houses of that province are accepted: Santiago of Bolinao; San Andres of Masinloc; Nuestra Señora de el Rosario, of Marivelez; Nuestra Señora de el Sagrario, of Nuevo Toledo; Nuestra Señora de la Soledad, of Paynaven; Nuestro Padre Santo Domingo, of Alalang; Santa Rosa, of Baubuen. Ten religious are assigned to them. The house of San Thelmo, of Apparri, located at the port of the province of Cagayan, is also accepted. “The vicar of the house of Binmaley was given a vote in the provincial chapters, and the vicar of the island of the Babuyanes was given a vote in the intermediary assemblies.”]

[An intermediary chapter took place in Manila in May, 1680, where it was announced that the Dominicans were entering Zambales. The following houses in that province were accepted: Santiago of Bolinao; San Andres of Masinloc; Nuestra Señora de el Rosario of Marivelez; Nuestra Señora de el Sagrario of Nuevo Toledo; Nuestra Señora de la Soledad of Paynaven; Nuestro Padre Santo Domingo of Alalang; and Santa Rosa of Baubuen. Ten religious were assigned to these houses. The house of San Thelmo in Apparri, located at the port of the province of Cagayan, was also accepted. “The vicar of the house of Binmaley was granted a vote in the provincial chapters, and the vicar of the island of the Babuyanes was given a vote in the intermediary assemblies.”]

One of the missions which flourished with great fruit in this province during that time was the mission of Palavig, which is the mission now called Vangac. This is a mission on the coast of Cagayan near the mountains of Paranàn which end at the cape called Engaño [i.e., deceit]. The land of this island becomes more lofty as it approaches nearer the north. That mission is composed of Visayan Indians of the opposite coast of that province, who [67]fleeing from the village of Paranàn and from other villages, inhabit those inaccessible mountains, where they are safe because of the inaccessibility of those ridges. Among them are some Christian apostates and many heathens who were born in the mountains. On the brow of those mountains that mission was founded in the year 1653 by the earnest and laborious efforts of the venerable father, Fray Juan Uguet, under the advocacy of St. Thomas of Aquinas. And when the mission was in a good condition, and there were many recently-baptized people in it, and others reconciled from their apostasy, they were frightened by the Indians of the village of Buguey, and they consequently returned immediately to the mountain, and the mission was abandoned and destroyed, and all the toil of the father came to nought through the persuasions of those bad citizens. It was God’s will to have them reunite at the same site of Palavig, through the inducements of some zealous missionaries, but they afterward left it again because of the annoyances which they suffered annually from a commandant who goes to that district to watch for the ship from Acapulco. Under that pretext he usually causes considerable vexation to the Indians of the village of Buguey, and much more to those of the mission as they are naturally a very pusillanimous race. Hence, that mission has suffered its ups and its downs, for however much the fathers labored in it, the inhabitants of Buguey by their persuasions, and that commandant by his bad treatment, destroyed their labors. It is now about twenty-five years since they returned to settle on a creek called Bavag under the advocacy of St. Michael, who among other saints fell to their lot. [68]Thence they moved to Vangag, in order to draw those people from the mountain whence they had gone. For the same reason, they were moved on another occasion to a site called Dao, which is the site where they still live, although still under the title of Vang̃ag.

One of the missions that thrived significantly in this region during that time was the mission of Palavig, which is now known as Vangac. This mission is located on the coast of Cagayan near the Paranàn mountains, which end at a cape called Engaño [i.e., deceit]. The land on this island gets higher as you move north. This mission is made up of Visayan Indians from the opposite coast of the province who, fleeing from the village of Paranàn and other villages, inhabit those hard-to-reach mountains, where they feel safe due to the rugged terrain. Among them are some Christian converts who have fallen away and many non-Christians born in the mountains. The mission was established on the slopes of those mountains in 1653 through the dedicated efforts of the venerable father, Fray Juan Uguet, under the guidance of St. Thomas of Aquinas. When the mission was thriving, with many newly baptized individuals and others reconciling from their apostasy, they were intimidated by the Indians from the village of Buguey. As a result, they immediately returned to the mountains, leading to the abandonment and destruction of the mission, and all the father’s hard work went to waste due to the influence of those troublesome citizens. It was God’s will for them to regroup at the same site of Palavig, thanks to the efforts of some dedicated missionaries, but they eventually left again because of the annual troubles caused by a commandant monitoring the Acapulco ship. Under that pretext, he often caused significant distress to the Buguey Indians, and even more so to those in the mission, as they are naturally a very timid people. Consequently, the mission has experienced its ups and downs; no matter how hard the fathers worked there, the residents of Buguey, with their persuasion, and that commandant, with his mistreatment, undermined their efforts. It has been about twenty-five years since they returned to settle by a creek called Bavag under the protection of St. Michael, among other saints assigned to them. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]From there, they moved to Vangac to bring those people back from the mountains. For the same reason, they were relocated at another time to a place called Dao, which is where they still live, although still under the name Vangac.

[Salazar relates the steadfastness of a native girl at the above mission, who was of considerable use to the missionaries. Two fathers while on an expedition concerned with the mission, are carried across a river by Negritos, of which race Salazar says:]

[Salazar talks about the determination of a local girl at the above mission, who was very helpful to the missionaries. Two priests, while on a mission-related expedition, are carried across a river by Negritos, of which race Salazar mentions:]

Those blacks of those mountains are very barbarous and ferocious, above all the other inhabitants of Cagayan.... Those black men of the mountain flee from the water even more than from fire; for every night in order to go to sleep, they make a fire in the open, and sleep on the cinders or hot ashes, but they will never bathe or wash, in order not to get wet, although they stand so greatly in need of it, and bathing is a common and daily thing among the other natives of this country.10

Those black people from the mountains are very primitive and fierce, more so than the other inhabitants of Cagayan.... These mountain dwellers avoid water even more than fire; every night, they build a fire outside to sleep on the embers or hot ashes, but they would never bathe or wash to avoid getting wet, even though they desperately need it, while bathing is a regular daily activity for the other natives in this country.10

[The Negritos’ hatred of bathing makes our author imagine that those who carried the fathers across the river are spirits sent by God to aid His chosen ones in their trouble. The chapter ends with an account of a pious Indian woman who dies in Abucay. Following this chapter, the missions of the Asiatic mainland and the Pardo troubles and controversy [69]are discussed in chapters xxxv–xlviii; and the lives and deaths of various Dominicans in chapters xlix–lxii, of which chapters l–lv treat of Fray Domingo Perez (see VOL. XXXIX, pp. 149–275).]

[The Negritos' dislike of bathing leads our author to think that those who carried the fathers across the river are spirits sent by God to help His chosen people in their troubles. The chapter wraps up with a story about a devout Indian woman who dies in Abucay. After this chapter, the missions on the Asiatic mainland and the Pardo troubles and controversies [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] are covered in chapters xxxv–xlviii; and the lives and deaths of various Dominicans in chapters xlix–lxii, with chapters l–lv focusing on Fray Domingo Perez (see VOL. 39, pp. 149–275).]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter LXIII

A new band of religious arrives in the province, one of whom dies at sea

A new group of religious arrives in the province, one of whom dies at sea

[More than two hundred religious went to the Philippines in 1684, as recruits for the orders of St. Francis, St. Augustine (both calced and discalced), and St. Dominic. Those for the last-named order number forty-nine, “which is the most abundant succor which has reached this province since its foundation.”11 Those missionaries are as follows:]

[More than two hundred religious traveled to the Philippines in 1684, as recruits for the orders of St. Francis, St. Augustine (both calced and discalced), and St. Dominic. The group for the last order includes forty-nine members, “which is the most significant support that has arrived in this province since its foundation.”11 Those missionaries are as follows:]

The said father, Fray Jacinto Jorva, son of the convent of Santa Catharina Martyr, of Barcelona.

The father mentioned, Fray Jacinto Jorva, is from the convent of Santa Catharina Martyr in Barcelona.

Father Fray Francisco Miranda, of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid, and collegiate of San Gregorio of the same city.

Father Fray Francisco Miranda, from the convent of San Pablo in Valladolid, and a member of San Gregorio in the same city.

Father Fray Pedro Mexorada, of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca.

Father Fray Pedro Mexorada, from the San Estevan convent in Salamanca.

Father Fray Diego Piñero, of the province of Andalucia.

Father Fray Diego Piñero from the province of Andalucia.

Father Fray Diego Velez, of the province of España.

Father Fray Diego Velez, from the province of Spain.

Father Fray Juan Truxillo, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Xerez.

Father Fray Juan Truxillo, from the convent of Santo Domingo in Xerez.

Father Fray Miguel de la Villa, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla.

Father Fray Miguel de la Villa, from the San Pablo convent in Sevilla.

Father Fray Sebastian de el Castillo, of the same convent. [70]

Father Fray Sebastian de el Castillo, from the same convent. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Father Fray Francisco Marquez, of the convent of San Pablo, of Cordova.

Father Fray Francisco Marquez of the San Pablo convent in Cordova.

Father Fray Thomas Croquer, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Xerez.

Father Fray Thomas Croquer, from the Santo Domingo convent in Xerez.

Father Fray Thomas de Gurruchategui, of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca.

Father Fray Thomas de Gurruchategui, from the San Estevan convent in Salamanca.

Father Fray Antonio Beriain, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Victoria.

Father Fray Antonio Beriain, from the convent of Santo Domingo in Victoria.

Father Fray Joseph Beltroli.

Father Fray Joseph Beltroli.

Father Fray Jacobo de el Munt.

Father Fray Jacobo de el Munt.

Father Fray Juan de Soto, of the convent of San Pablo, of Palencia.

Father Fray Juan de Soto from the San Pablo convent in Palencia.

Father Fray Pedro Martin.

Father Fray Pedro Martin.

Father Fray Diego Casanueva.

Father Fray Diego Casanueva.

Father Fray Gaspar Carrasco.

Father Fray Gaspar Carrasco.

Father Fray Manuel Ramos, of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca.

Father Fray Manuel Ramos, from the convent of San Estevan in Salamanca.

Father Fray Miguel de San Raymundo.

Father Fray Miguel de San Raymundo.

Father Fray Raymundo de Santa Rosa.

Father Fray Raymundo de Santa Rosa.

Father Fray Sebastian Bordas, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Mexico.

Father Fray Sebastian Bordas, from the Santo Domingo convent in Mexico.

Father Fray Juan de Abenojar.

Father Fray Juan de Abenojar.

Father Fray Diego Vilches, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla.

Father Fray Diego Vilches from the San Pablo convent in Sevilla.

Father Fray Antonio de Santo Thomas, a Pole.

Father Fray Antonio de Santo Thomas, a Polish man.

Father Fray Francisco de la Vega.

Father Fray Francisco de la Vega.

Father Fray Nicolas de el Olmo, of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca.

Father Fray Nicolas de el Olmo, from the convent of San Estevan, in Salamanca.

Father Fray Francisco Morales, of the same convent.

Father Fray Francisco Morales, from the same convent.

Father Fray Gabriel Serrano, of the same convent.

Father Fray Gabriel Serrano from the same convent.

Father Fray Santiago de Monteagudo, of the convent of Santiago, of Galicia. [71]

Father Fray Santiago de Monteagudo, from the convent of Santiago in Galicia. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Father Fray Francisco Ruiz.

Father Fray Francisco Ruiz.

Father Fray Julian de la Cruz.

Father Fray Julian de la Cruz.

Father Fray Juan de la Barrera.

Father Fray Juan de la Barrera.

Father Fray Joseph Plana, of the convent of Xirona.

Father Fray Joseph Plana, from the convent of Xirona.

Father Fray Juan de la Nava, of the convent of San Pablo, of Cordova.

Father Fray Juan de la Nava, from the San Pablo convent in Córdoba.

Father Fray Juan Romero, of the convent of San Gines, of Talavera.

Father Fray Juan Romero from the San Gines convent in Talavera.

Father Fray Francisco Gomez, of the convent of Santo Thomas, of Avila.

Father Fray Francisco Gomez from the convent of Santo Thomas in Avila.

Father Fray Thomas Escat, of the convent of Santa Catharina Martyr, of Barcelona.

Father Fray Thomas Escat, from the convent of Santa Catharina Martyr in Barcelona.

Father Fray Diego Arriola.

Father Fray Diego Arriola.

Father Fray Blas Iglesias, of the convent of San Vicente, of Plasencia.

Father Fray Blas Iglesias from the San Vicente convent in Plasencia.

Father Fray Miguel Matos, of the convent of Nuestra Señora de la Candelaria, of the Canary Islands.

Father Fray Miguel Matos, from the convent of Nuestra Señora de la Candelaria, in the Canary Islands.

Fray Fernando Ybañez, deacon.

Deacon Fernando Ybañez.

Fray Thomas de Plasencia, acolyte.

Fray Thomas de Plasencia, assistant.

And six lay-brethren, who are the following:

And six lay members, who are as follows:

Fray Francisco Tostado, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla.

Fray Francisco Tostado, from the San Pablo convent in Seville.

Fray Manuel Santos, of the convent of Santa Cruz, of Segovia.

Fray Manuel Santos, from the convent of Santa Cruz in Segovia.

Fray Juan Ruiz, of the convent of Santa Cruz, of Villaescusa.

Fray Juan Ruiz from the Santa Cruz convent in Villaescusa.

Fray Thomas Gomez.

Fray Thomas Gomez.

Fray Manuel Gonçales.

Fray Manuel González.

And Fray Lucas de el Moro, of the convent of Nuestra Señora, of Atocha.

And Friar Lucas de el Moro, from the convent of Our Lady of Atocha.

[To this band must be added the name of Fray Juan Marcort, son of the convent of Xirona, who [72]died at sea after the vessel had left the port of Acapulco.]

[To this band must be added the name of Fray Juan Marcort, son of the convent of Xirona, who [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]died at sea after the ship had left the port of Acapulco.]

[Chapter lxiv treats of an English pirate (Dampier) who cruises among the Babuyanes, and defiles a church of the Dominicans. Chapter lxv, the last of the first book, reviews the life of Fray Antonio Calderon, who dies while provincial of his order. Chapter i, of the second book, records the election as provincial of Fray Bartholome Marron.]

[Chapter 64 discusses an English pirate (Dampier) who sails around the Babuyanes and desecrates a Dominican church. Chapter 65, the last chapter of the first book, reflects on the life of Fray Antonio Calderon, who passes away while serving as provincial of his order. Chapter 1 of the second book documents the election of Fray Bartholome Marron as provincial.]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter II

Of the reduction of the Mandayas Indians to our holy faith

About the conversion of the Mandaya Indians to our holy faith

[Father Pedro Ximenez, who had labored for six years in the mission of Irraya, being compelled to leave that place because of slanderous reports, is sent in 1684 to the village of Fotol, on the border of the Mandaya country in the central part of Luzón. The needs that he finds there will not allow him to take the rest that he has planned after his active and laborious campaign against infidelity in Irraya, and he takes up his work in the new mission with undiminished zeal. The people of Fotol he finds in the midst of famine, for the fierce Mandayas12 of the uplands will not allow them to cultivate their fields. The father resolves upon the reduction of the Mandayas. He begins by writing letters to an influential [73]apostate who is living in the mountain region, and those letters so stir up the conscience and memory of that man that he resumes the faith which he had abandoned, and is later of great service to the father, and lives in Christian humility until his death which occurs within a short time. Not without hindrances from the evil one, however, are the efforts of the gospel worker. That enemy of mankind causes an inhabitant of the village of Nabayugan to murder another heathen, whereupon all is confusion and the breathing forth of threats. The father learning that that murder may be atoned for by two ways, namely, by fighting or by a fine, promises to pay for it himself in the interests of peace. Through his native ambassadors he sends a present of shirts, salt, needles, combs, and tibors, to the aggrieved faction. Won by such generous kindness, the ambassadors are treated most cordially, and a favorable answer sent to the father, and they promise to descend the mountain to meet him near Capinatan. The energetic priest immediately sets out, but the devil ever watchful in the interests of his evil trade, manages to upset the boat in which the father is journeying on the river at the hour of midnight. However, nothing but a wetting and considerable discomfort is the result, and next day Fray Pedro meets the heathens. After a stay with them of two days, the father returns accompanied by two chiefs and four others of the heathens, a not slight undertaking on the part of those timid people, as they are in constant fear of treachery. They return to the mountains after short visits to the villages of Capinatan and Affulug, accompanied by some of the inhabitants of the former village. Among their people they relate the [74]good treatment which they have received from the father, “as well as from the commandant of the fort, who really aided considerably in that reduction by his affability, kindness, and good treatment. If the other commandants of the forts near the heathens carried themselves in that manner, they could gather more fruit than the fathers for their conversion and reduction. But the pity is that most of them not only do not aid, but even offer opposition on this point, and think only of their profit and interests.” Once more the devil endeavors to destroy the peace which seems about to spread throughout the district. One of three heathens, who go down to the village of Malaueg, is killed by the inhabitants of that place, and the other two are seized and sent to the commandant of Nueva Segovia. To their surprise that commandant, instead of praising them for their vigilance, seizes the captors and frees the captives, the latter upon the supplication of the father, being sent to him and returned to their people. Other troubles are also satisfactorily settled through the agency of Fray Pedro. At his invitation twenty-two of the heathens accompany him to Apparri, where the alcalde-mayor confers on them titles and honors, thus increasing the favorable opinion of the Mandayas. The village of Calatug still proves an obstacle to the general peace, for they are hostile to the Mandayas, and have declared that if the latter become reduced they will attack and kill them. The Mandayas who wish to become civilized, after holding a council, resolve to ask aid of the alcalde-mayor against the village of Calatug, and that aid is promised them. Meanwhile it is reported that there is a plot to kill Fray Pedro, and that all the friendliness [75]of the Mandayas is only treachery. Refusing to believe that, the father determines, against advice from all sides, and a vigorous protest from the commandant of the fort at Capinatan, to ascend the mountains in company with only one Mandaya and his daughter, and the necessary rowers, eight in number. His confidence is well answered by the joyful reception accorded him by the Mandayas, among whom he remains for about a fortnight. The following September, in conformity with his promise he again ascends the mountains, and at that time a church is built which is dedicated to Nuestra Señora de la Peña de Francia. In 1686 that church numbers more than one thousand three hundred converts and apostates who have come back to the faith. The number of converts in that mission is opportunely increased by an epidemic of smallpox, when the mercy of God is seen in many, both those who die and those who recover. In 1687 the growth of the work causes the chapter held that year to assign Fray Pedro two associates, and in 1688 he is made an independent missionary and given one other associate. That increase enables him to found another village in a district less mountainous and hence less difficult to administer, and soon there is a Christian population of over five hundred there. But the father falling ill, and finding it necessary to retire, the people of Calatug, still hostile to the Mandayas, assault the village, and all but one hundred and forty of them are either killed or flee to the mountains. Them the alcalde-mayor of the province removes to the village of Camalayugan, and that mission comes to an end.]

[Father Pedro Ximenez, who had worked for six years in the Irraya mission, had to leave due to slanderous reports. In 1684, he was sent to the village of Fotol, on the edge of the Mandaya territory in central Luzón. The urgent needs he encountered there did not allow him to take the break he intended after his intense and demanding work against disbelief in Irraya, and he approached his new mission with relentless enthusiasm. The people of Fotol were suffering from famine, as the fierce Mandayas of the uplands prevented them from farming their land. The father decided to focus on reducing the Mandayas. He started by writing letters to a prominent apostate living in the mountains, which sparked that man's conscience, leading him to return to the faith he had abandoned. He proved to be a great help to the father and lived in Christian humility until his death shortly after. However, the efforts of the gospel worker were not without challenges from the evil one. That enemy caused a resident of the village of Nabayugan to murder another pagan, resulting in chaos and threats. When the father learned that the murder could be atoned for in two ways—by fighting or paying a fine—he offered to pay the fine himself to keep the peace. Through his native messengers, he sent a gift of shirts, salt, needles, combs, and tibors to the offended party. The ambassadors, impressed by such generosity, were treated warmly and conveyed a positive response to the father, promising to come down the mountain to meet him near Capinatan. The energetic priest immediately set out, but the devil, ever watchful in his wicked schemes, managed to capsize the boat carrying the father across the river at midnight. However, it only resulted in him getting wet and feeling quite uncomfortable, and the next day, Fray Pedro met with the pagans. After spending two days with them, the father returned with two chiefs and four other pagans, a significant undertaking for those fearful individuals due to their constant fear of betrayal. They returned to the mountains after brief visits to the villages of Capinatan and Affulug, accompanied by some residents of the former. Among their people, they shared the [74] good treatment they received from the father, “as well as from the commandant of the fort, who really helped significantly in this reduction with his friendliness, kindness, and good treatment. If the other commandants of forts near the pagans acted similarly, they could achieve better results than the fathers in converting and reducing them. But sadly, most of them not only do not help but even oppose this, thinking only of their own gain.” Once again, the devil tried to disrupt the peace that seemed ready to spread across the region. One of three pagans who went down to the village of Malaueg was killed by the locals, while the other two were captured and sent to the commandant of Nueva Segovia. To their surprise, that commandant, instead of praising them for their vigilance, seized the captors and freed the captives, who were returned to their people at the father's request. Other issues were also resolved effectively by Fray Pedro. At his invitation, twenty-two pagans joined him in Apparri, where the alcalde-mayor granted them titles and honors, thereby boosting the Mandayas' goodwill. The village of Calatug still posed a barrier to overall peace, as they were hostile to the Mandayas and threatened to attack and kill them if the latter were subdued. The Mandayas seeking to become civilized held a council and decided to ask the alcalde-mayor for help against Calatug, and that assistance was promised. Meanwhile, word spread that there was a plot to kill Fray Pedro and that all the friendliness shown by the Mandayas was merely a ruse. Refusing to believe that, the father, despite urgent warnings from all sides and a strong protest from the commandant of the fort at Capinatan, decided to ascend the mountains with only one Mandaya, his daughter, and eight rowers. His trust was rewarded with a warm welcome from the Mandayas, and he stayed with them for about two weeks. The following September, keeping his promise, he went back up the mountains, and during that visit, a church was constructed, dedicated to Nuestra Señora de la Peña de Francia. By 1686, that church had over one thousand three hundred converts and apostates returning to the faith. The number of converts in that mission increased notably due to a smallpox epidemic, where God's mercy was evident in both those who died and those who recovered. In 1687, the growth of the work prompted the chapter to assign Fray Pedro two associates, and in 1688, he became an independent missionary with one additional associate. This expansion allowed him to establish another village in a less mountainous area, making it easier to manage, and soon there was a Christian population of over five hundred there. However, when the father fell ill and had to step back, the people of Calatug, still hostile to the Mandayas, attacked the village, leaving only one hundred and forty survivors, who either were killed or fled to the mountains. The alcalde-mayor of the province relocated them to the village of Camalayugan, signaling the end of that mission.]

[Chapters iii–ix discuss the lives of various gospel [76]workers, and Chinese affairs. Chapter x treats of certain miracles that occurred in the hospital of San Gabriel.]

[Chapters iii–ix cover the lives of different gospel [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]workers and issues in China. Chapter x discusses specific miracles that took place in the hospital of San Gabriel.]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter XI

Of the intermediary congregation of the year eighty-eight, and the houses which were accepted by it.

Of the intermediary congregation of the year 1988, and the houses that were accepted by it.

[In 1688 the intermediary chapter held at Manila, accepted the ministries of San Policarpo of Tabuco and its adjacent ministries of Santo Thomas and El Rosario; and that of San Bartholome of Anno in Pangasinan. The first had been assigned to the Dominicans in 1685 by Felipe Pardo because of the lack of seculars to administer it and they keep it until the death of that archbishop, when it again passes into the control of the seculars. Much has been done there in the meanwhile by the religious entrusted with its administration, namely, Fray Juan Ybañez de Santo Domingo and two associates. The other house of San Bartolome was founded for the reduction of the Igorots and Alaguetes in its neighborhood. With the ones converted from those peoples and some oldtime Christians from Pangasinan, the village soon acquires considerable Christian population and a church and convent are built at the cost of the Dominican province. Since the location of the mission is poor, and communication with the nearest Dominican houses of Pangasinan difficult, an intermediary mission is founded midway between San Bartolome and the other missions, to which is given the name of San Luis Beltran. In the mission, many are baptized, “especially of the Alaguetes, who were more docile than the Igorots, although also many of the latter were converted.” [77]That mission lasts more than twenty years. In 1709 or 1710 “because of disputes that arose between those of the village and the Igorots, who lived in the mountain, the latter descended the mountain at night and set fire to the village, without being perceived.” Consequently the village is deserted, and the father and the inhabitants remove to San Luis Beltran, which being farther from the mountains is safer. After six years there, a government decree removes them to Maoacatoacat. Later the mission is moved to Pao, and finally to Manaoag. But since the natives dislike to leave the sites where they are settled, and also enjoy a life of freedom where they are not molested by the tribute, many of the inhabitants refuse to move at the successive transfers. Falling into relaxation in consequence, many become infidels, and their number is increased by others who flee to them to escape the tribute and the restrictions of religion. In 1732, in response to a petition by the Dominican provincial, the government again establishes a mission village in San Luis Beltran. Starting thence, a new mission is opened on almost the same site of San Bartolome under the name of San Joseph at a site called Maliongliong for the conversion of the Igorots. As a result of the efforts put forth there, a new province called Paniqui is opened up which is in charge of four Dominican religious. Much fruit is gathered for the faith in that region.]

[In 1688, the intermediary chapter held in Manila accepted the ministries of San Policarpo of Tabuco and its nearby ministries of Santo Thomas and El Rosario; as well as San Bartholome of Anno in Pangasinan. The first had been assigned to the Dominicans in 1685 by Felipe Pardo due to the shortage of secular clergy to manage it, and they kept it until the archbishop's death, at which point it returned to the control of the seculars. In the meantime, a lot of work had been done there by the religious in charge, specifically Fray Juan Ybañez de Santo Domingo and two companions. The other house of San Bartolome was established to support the Igorots and Alaguetes in the area. With those converted from these groups and some longtime Christians from Pangasinan, the village soon gained a significant Christian population, and a church and convent were built at the expense of the Dominican province. Because the mission's location was poor and communication with the nearest Dominican houses in Pangasinan was difficult, an intermediary mission was set up halfway between San Bartolome and the other missions, named San Luis Beltran. In this mission, many people were baptized, “especially among the Alaguetes, who were more receptive than the Igorots, although many of the latter were also converted.” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]That mission lasted more than twenty years. In 1709 or 1710, “because of conflicts that arose between the villagers and the Igorots, who lived in the mountains, the latter came down at night and set fire to the village without being noticed.” As a result, the village was deserted, and the father and the residents moved to San Luis Beltran, which was safer since it was farther from the mountains. After six years there, a government order relocated them to Maoacatoacat. The mission was later moved to Pao, and eventually to Manaoag. However, since the locals were reluctant to leave the places where they had settled and enjoyed a life of freedom free from tribute and religious restrictions, many of the inhabitants refused to move during these successive relocations. As a result of this relaxation, many fell away from the faith, and their numbers increased with others who fled to them to escape tribute and religious limitations. In 1732, in response to a request from the Dominican provincial, the government re-established a mission village in San Luis Beltran. From there, a new mission was opened nearly on the same site as San Bartolome, under the name of San Joseph, at a site called Maliongliong, aimed at converting the Igorots. Due to the efforts made there, a new province called Paniqui was established, which was overseen by four Dominican religious. Much progress in faith was made in that region.]

[Chapters xii–xxi treat of the lives of various missionaries, among them that of the famous Fray Felipe Pardo.] [78]

[Chapters xii–xxi discuss the lives of different missionaries, including the renowned Fray Felipe Pardo.] [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter XXII

Election as provincial of the father commissary, Fray Christoval Pedroche, and founding of the mission of Tuga.

Election of Fray Christoval Pedroche as provincial commissary and the establishment of the Tuga mission.

[The above father is elected provincial in 1690, after his return from exile to Nueva España, on account of the Pardo troubles. During his term there is considerable activity among the Chinese missions, those of Batanes, and that of Tuga. This last mission is the outcome of the work of father Fray Juan Yñiguez,13 who is entrusted in 1688 “with the conversion of the Indians of Mananig and the other neighboring nations who inhabited the rough mountains near the village of Tuao in the province of Cagayan, on the western side of the said village; and extend north and south for many leguas. At the same time the said father was charged to learn the language peculiar to that country of Ytabes,14 and compile a grammar and lexicon in it.... In the short space of six months, he learned the language of the Ytabes, and reduced it to a very detailed grammar.... In the same time he founded a new village in the mission in the very lands of the heathens about six leguas south of the village of Tuao, on a plateau below the creek of Tuga, whence that mission took its name, which it keeps even in [79]our times.” The church built there is dedicated to St. Joseph, and mass said on the second of February, 1689. Notwithstanding the many oppositions offered to the new mission, it grows and prospers. At the end of eight years, the mission is moved to a more pleasant site two leagues nearer Tuao, and although it receives the name of Tuga there, it is sometimes called San Joseph de Bambang, from a mountain called Bambang. In 1710, lack of friars causes the abandonment of Tuga as an active mission, and it becomes a visita of Tuao. That epoch marks its decline, and in 1715, after many have fled to the mountains where they have resumed their pagan life, the remaining Christians are transferred to Tuao. “After the year 1718 the whole province of Cagayan rose in revolt15, and that disturbance began especially in that district of Ytabes where the said village of Tuao is located. Thereupon the new Christians of the mission who had assembled in that village, returned to their former sites and mountains, and apostatized from the faith which they had received.” At the close of that insurrection, the Dominicans attempt to regain the ground that they had lost. In 1722 a friar is assigned to that mission to regain the apostates and work for new conversions among the heathens. Both objects are largely fulfilled. In 1731, the missionary established there, Fernando de Lara, moves the site of the mission still nearer to Tuao because of the greater conveniences. The new site which is maintained is called Orac, [80]although it is still called by the former name of Tuga.]

[The above father is elected provincial in 1690, after his return from exile to Nueva España due to the Pardo troubles. During his term, there is significant activity among the Chinese missions, those in Batanes, and that of Tuga. This last mission results from the efforts of Father Fray Juan Yñiguez, who was assigned in 1688 “with the conversion of the Indians of Mananig and the other neighboring nations who lived in the rugged mountains near the village of Tuao in the province of Cagayan, located on the western side of the village; extending north and south for many leagues. At the same time, the said father was tasked with learning the unique language of that region, Ytabes, and compiling a grammar and lexicon for it.... In just six months, he learned the Ytabes language and created a detailed grammar.... During that time, he established a new village in the mission on the very lands of the pagans about six leagues south of the village of Tuao, on a plateau below the creek of Tuga, from which the mission derives its name, which it retains even in [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]our times.” The church built there is dedicated to St. Joseph, with mass held on February 2, 1689. Despite numerous challenges to the new mission, it flourishes and thrives. After eight years, the mission is relocated to a more desirable site two leagues closer to Tuao, and although it is still named Tuga, it is occasionally referred to as San Joseph de Bambang, after a nearby mountain called Bambang. In 1710, due to a shortage of friars, Tuga is abandoned as an active mission and becomes a visita of Tuao. This marks the beginning of its decline, and by 1715, after many have fled to the mountains and returned to their pagan ways, the remaining Christians are moved to Tuao. “After the year 1718, the entire province of Cagayan revolted, especially in the area of Ytabes where the village of Tuao is located. Consequently, the new Christians from the mission who had gathered in that village returned to their previous homes and mountains and renounced the faith they had received.” At the end of that uprising, the Dominicans try to regain lost ground. In 1722, a friar is assigned to that mission to reclaim the apostates and work towards new conversions among the pagans. Both objectives are largely achieved. In 1731, the missionary there, Fernando de Lara, moves the mission site even closer to Tuao for better convenience. The new location is called Orac, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] although it is still often referred to by the former name of Tuga.]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter XXIII

Foundation of the mission of Batanes; death of Fray Matheo Gonçalez, and Fray Juan Rois in those islands.

Establishment of the mission in Batanes; passing of Fray Matheo Gonçalez and Fray Juan Rois in those islands.

[At the chapter meeting of 1680, Father Matheo Gonçalez16 is chosen vicar of the Babuyanes Islands which lie north of the province of Cagayan. His work there is successful and he reduces many to the faith, those who are baptized moving to the chief village where the church and convent are located. Extending his labors to the farthest of the Babuyanes Islands, the father arrives there at the time when a volcano is filling its natives with terror. Taking advantage of the situation, he so adds to their terror by his preaching that both apostates (of whom many have gone to that island) and heathen resolve to leave the island and go to Cagayan with the father. Leaving en masse they are taken to Cagayan and form a new village on the seacoast between the two villages of Yguig and Nassiping. That village is however suppressed later by order of the government, and its inhabitants return to the Babuyanes. Another village called Amulung is stationed there in 1733 which is formed of Indians from other villages, and a church and convent established there. Casting their eyes to the three Batanes Islands north [81]of the Babuyanes,17 and thirty leagues from Cagayan, the Dominicans plan for their spiritual conquest; but not until the year 1686 can anything be done. In that year Fray Matheo Gonçalez is again appointed vicar of the Babuyanes, and given Fray Diego Piñero18 as associate. They visit the Batanes with the object of exploring them and learning the language. The islands appear ripe for the harvest but more laborers are needed. Consequently, as it is the time for the intermediary chapter the vicar returns to Cagayan for help, leaving Fray Diego Piñero alone. One other worker, Fray Juan de Rois [82]is assigned to the field. But scarcely have the three fathers begun their labors when sickness causes the death of the father vicar and his latest associate, whereupon Fray Diego Piñero, notwithstanding the murmurs of the natives, returns to Cagayan to seek more aid. But no more religious can be spared just then for there is a great lack of them for even the settled missions. Not for thirty years later (1718) is another attempt made in the Batanes, when Fray Juan Bel being appointed vicar of the Babuyanes, visits them. In 1720, as a consequence to his report, five religious are assigned for the mission. As the Batanes are not healthful for Europeans, the island of Calayan19 midway between the Batanes and the Babuyanes is chosen as the place of residence for the new mission. In that island as many as possible of the new converts are removed, and the church and convent are established there. The king being petitioned bears part of the expenses of the transferring of the converts to Calayan. The venture is successful, and at the time of Salazar’s writing (1742), the mission still exists.]

[At the chapter meeting of 1680, Father Matheo Gonçalez16 is chosen as the vicar of the Babuyanes Islands, situated north of the province of Cagayan. His work there is successful, and he brings many people to the faith; those who are baptized move to the main village where the church and convent are located. Extending his efforts to the furthest Babuyanes Islands, Father Matheo arrives at a time when a volcano is frightening the locals. He takes advantage of this fear with his preaching, causing both defectors (many of whom have moved to that island) and non-believers to decide to leave and go to Cagayan with him. Leaving en masse, they are taken to Cagayan and establish a new village along the coast between the two villages of Yguig and Nassiping. However, that village is later disbanded by the government's orders, and its people return to the Babuyanes. Another village called Amulung is formed there in 1733, made up of Indians from other villages, with a church and convent established there. Looking towards the three Batanes Islands located north [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] of the Babuyanes,17 and thirty leagues from Cagayan, the Dominicans plan for their spiritual conquest; but it isn’t until 1686 that anything can be done. In that year, Fray Matheo Gonçalez is reappointed as the vicar of the Babuyanes, with Fray Diego Piñero18 as his associate. They visit the Batanes to explore and learn the language. The islands seem ready for the harvest, but more workers are needed. Therefore, as it is the time for the intermediary chapter, the vicar returns to Cagayan for assistance, leaving Fray Diego Piñero behind. Another worker, Fray Juan de Rois [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__], is assigned to the mission. However, it’s hardly been long before illness leads to the death of the vicar and his newest associate, prompting Fray Diego Piñero to return to Cagayan for more support, despite the concerns of the locals. But at that moment, no additional religious can be spared due to a significant shortage, even for the established missions. It isn’t until thirty years later (1718) that another attempt is made in the Batanes when Fray Juan Bel is appointed vicar of the Babuyanes and visits the islands. In 1720, based on his report, five religious are assigned to the mission. Since the Batanes are not healthy for Europeans, the island of Calayan19, situated midway between the Batanes and the Babuyanes, is selected as the base for the new mission. On that island, as many of the new converts as possible are relocated, and the church and convent are established there. The king is petitioned to cover part of the costs of transferring the converts to Calayan. The venture proves successful, and at the time of Salazar’s writing (1742), the mission still exists.]

[Chapters xxiv–xxxiii discuss the lives and work of various missionaries, and Chinese affairs.]

[Chapters xxiv–xxxiii talk about the lives and work of different missionaries, and issues in China.]

[Chapter xxxiv treats of the life of Mother Sebastiana de Santa Maria, a native woman, who became a member of the tertiary branch of the Dominican order.] [83]

[Chapter xxxiv discusses the life of Mother Sebastiana de Santa Maria, an indigenous woman who became part of the tertiary branch of the Dominican order.] [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter XXXV

Foundation of the mission of Santa Cruz in Cagayan; and the death of two most virtuous hermits in this province.

Establishment of the Santa Cruz mission in Cagayan; and the death of two highly virtuous hermits in this province.

In the year 1693, the mission of Santa Cruz was established at a place called Gumpat, near a visita of Malaveg, called Santa Cruz, whence the mission took its name. It was founded by father Fray Joseph Galfaroso,20 or de la Santissima Trinidad, son of the convent of Pamplona, a man most zealous for the welfare of souls. While vicar of Malaveg, he, not being satisfied with the administration of the said village, made various entrances through the neighboring mountains in search of the heathens who lived in them, in order to lure them to the bosom of our holy faith. Those mountains are rough and broken, and the heathen who inhabit them are very brave, and give the Christian villages much to do with their continual raids and assaults with which they keep them terrified. Among those heathens of the mountain, a chief named Don Joseph Bucayu, who was the terror of all those mountains and of the neighboring villages, was prominent for his valor and courage, and was feared by all. This man God wished to take as the instrument for the foundation of that mission, for with the authority and respect that all had for him, he could attract many to his side, and [84]taking example from him whom they considered their leader, many should embrace our holy faith.

In 1693, the Santa Cruz mission was established in a place called Gumpat, near a small settlement of Malaveg, also named Santa Cruz, which is where the mission got its name. It was founded by Father Fray Joseph Galfaroso, also known as de la Santissima Trinidad, from the convent in Pamplona, a man deeply committed to the welfare of souls. While serving as vicar of Malaveg, he was not content with the administration of the village. He ventured into the nearby mountains to find the indigenous people living there, aiming to bring them into our holy faith. Those mountains are rough and steep, and the indigenous people who live there are very brave, causing a lot of trouble for the Christian villages with their constant raids and attacks, which keep them in fear. Among these mountain inhabitants, a chief named Don Joseph Bucayu was especially known for his bravery and was feared by all. God intended for this man to be the key to establishing that mission, as his authority and respect could help attract many to his side, and by following his example, they might embrace our holy faith. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[Through the grace of God, the fierce heart of this chief is softened and he embraces the faith, and by the force of his example draws many after him. He becomes the chief pillar of the new mission that is formed at Santa Cruz. Great success attends that mission until the year of the insurrection in Cagayan (1718), when that place is also deserted and its inhabitants take to the mountains. The remainder of this chapter is concerned with the life and death of Domingo Pinto of the tertiary branch of the Dominicans, who had lived as a hermit for twenty-three years; and information concerning a man known as Diego Peccador (i.e., Sinner), a Spaniard presumably of good blood, who lived as a hermit close beside the church at San Juan del Monte, for five or six years, practicing the most austere penances and mortifications, after which he disappeared and nothing else was heard of him.]

[Through God's grace, the fierce heart of this chief is softened, and he embraces the faith, drawing many others along with him by his example. He becomes a key supporter of the new mission established at Santa Cruz. This mission experiences great success until the insurrection in Cagayan (1718), when the area is abandoned and its people flee to the mountains. The rest of this chapter focuses on the life and death of Domingo Pinto from the tertiary branch of the Dominicans, who lived as a hermit for twenty-three years, and information about a man known as Diego Peccador (i.e., Sinner), a Spaniard of presumably noble lineage, who lived as a hermit near the church at San Juan del Monte for five or six years, practicing extreme penances and self-denial, after which he vanished without a trace.]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter XXXVI

Election of the father commissary, Fray Juan de Santo Domingo21 as provincial. Mention of the deceased of the records of that time. The new mission of religious which arrived at the province that year.

Election of Father Commissary, Fray Juan de Santo Domingo21 as provincial. Mention of the deceased from the records of that time. The new mission of clergy that arrived in the province that year.

[The above-named father is elected provincial in 1694. At that chapter meeting mention is made of [85]two members of the order who have passed away—Fray Manuel Trigueros, who dies in China in 1693; and Sister Mariana Salzedo; of the tertiary branch of the order, a Spanish woman. In 1694 a band of thirty-eight religious arrives at the islands,22 which has been collected in Spain by Fray Francisco Villalba, who has been exiled from the islands by order of the Audiencia in consequence of the Pardo troubles. Of the original number of forty religious in this band two remain in Mexico. The names of the thirty-eight men are as follows:]

[The father mentioned above is elected provincial in 1694. During that chapter meeting, it's noted that [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] two members of the order have passed away—Fray Manuel Trigueros, who died in China in 1693; and Sister Mariana Salzedo, a member of the tertiary branch of the order and a Spanish woman. In 1694, a group of thirty-eight religious arrives in the islands, 22 which has been gathered in Spain by Fray Francisco Villalba, who was exiled from the islands by the Audiencia due to the Pardo troubles. Of the original forty religious in this group, two remain in Mexico. The names of the thirty-eight men are as follows:]

The father lector, Fray Pedro Muñoz, son of the convent of Nuestra Señora, of Atocha.

The father reader, Fray Pedro Muñoz, son of the convent of Nuestra Señora, Atocha.

The father lector, Fray Francisco Cantero, son of the convent of San Pablo, of Ezija.

The father reader, Fray Francisco Cantero, from the convent of San Pablo in Écija.

Father Fray Vicente de el Riesgo, son of the convent of Leon.

Father Fray Vicente de el Riesgo, son of the convent of León.

The father lector, Fray Jayme Mimbela, son of the convent of Preachers of Zaragoça, and collegiate of the college of San Vicente, of the same city, who afterward became bishop of Santa Cruz, of the port of Perù, and later of Truxillo. [86]

The father lector, Fray Jayme Mimbela, a member of the Convent of Preachers in Zaragoza and a student at the San Vicente college in the same city, later became the bishop of Santa Cruz in the port of Peru, and subsequently of Trujillo. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Father Fray Pedro de Santa Theresa, son of the very religious convent of Nuestra Señora, of Las Caldas.

Father Fray Pedro de Santa Theresa, a member of the highly religious convent of Nuestra Señora, of Las Caldas.

Father Fray Fernando Diaz, son of the convent of San Pablo, of Palencia.

Father Fray Fernando Diaz, a member of the San Pablo convent in Palencia.

Father Fray Francisco Gonçalez de San Pedro, son of San Estevan, of Salamanca.

Father Fray Francisco Gonçalez de San Pedro, son of San Estevan, from Salamanca.

Father Fray Juan Cavallero, son of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid.

Father Fray Juan Cavallero, from the San Pablo convent in Valladolid.

Father Fray Joseph Martin, of the convent of San Ginès, of Talavera.

Father Fray Joseph Martin, from the San Ginès convent in Talavera.

Father Fray Alonso Robles, of the convent of Salamanca.

Father Fray Alonso Robles, from the convent in Salamanca.

Father Fray Alonso Texedor, of the convent of Valladolid.

Father Fray Alonso Texedor, from the convent in Valladolid.

Father Fray Francisco Marzan, of the convent of Santo Thomas, of Avila.

Father Fray Francisco Marzan, from the convent of Santo Thomas in Avila.

Father Fray Marcos de Arroyuelo, of the convent of San Pablo, of Burgos.

Father Fray Marcos de Arroyuelo, of the San Pablo convent in Burgos.

Father Fray Juan Ruiz de Tovar, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Oviedo.

Father Fray Juan Ruiz de Tovar, from the Santo Domingo convent in Oviedo.

Father Fray Francisco Gonçalez, of the convent of Salamanca.

Father Fray Francisco Gonçalez from the convent of Salamanca.

Father Fray Juan Gonçalez, of the same convent.

Father Fray Juan Gonçalez, from the same convent.

Father Fray Fernando de la Motta, of the convent of Valladolid.

Father Fray Fernando de la Motta, from the convent in Valladolid.

Father Fray Francisco de Escalante, of the convent of San Pedro Martir, of Toledo.

Father Fray Francisco de Escalante, from the convent of San Pedro Martir in Toledo.

Father Fray Andres Lozano, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla.

Father Fray Andres Lozano from the San Pablo convent in Sevilla.

Father Fray Diego Ballesteros, son of the convent of Toledo.

Father Fray Diego Ballesteros, from the convent of Toledo.

Father Fray Manuel de Santa Cruz, of the convent of Avila. [87]

Father Fray Manuel de Santa Cruz from the convent of Avila. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Father Fray Geronimo Martin, of the convent of Valladolid.

Father Fray Geronimo Martin, from the convent of Valladolid.

Father Fray Lorenzo Fernandez, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla.

Father Fray Lorenzo Fernandez, from the San Pablo convent in Seville.

Father Fray Joseph de el Rosario, of the convent of San Ildephonso of Zaragoça.

Father Fray Joseph de el Rosario, from the convent of San Ildephonso in Zaragoza.

Father Fray Manuel Ruiz, of the convent of Salamanca.

Father Fray Manuel Ruiz from the convent of Salamanca.

Father Fray Pedro Vegas, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Ocaña.

Father Fray Pedro Vegas, from the convent of Santo Domingo in Ocaña.

Father Fray Francisco Lopez, of the convent of Salamanca.

Father Fray Francisco Lopez, from the Salamanca convent.

Father Fray Antonio Ruidiaz, of the convent of Valladolid.

Father Fray Antonio Ruidiaz from the Valladolid convent.

All the above were already priests. Those who came as choristers are the following:

All of the above were already priests. The ones who came as singers are:

Fray Manuel de Escobedo, deacon, of the convent of Nuestra Señora, of Atocha.

Fray Manuel de Escobedo, deacon, of the convent of Our Lady of Atocha.

Fray Juan de Astudillo, deacon, of the convent of Santo Thomas, of Madrid.

Fray Juan de Astudillo, deacon, from the convent of Santo Thomas, in Madrid.

Fray Pedro Humanes, deacon, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla.

Fray Pedro Humanes, deacon, from the convent of San Pablo in Seville.

Fray Diego Constantino, of the convent of Atocha.

Fray Diego Constantino from the Atocha convent.

Fray Martin de Oña y Ocadiz, of the convent of Burgos.

Fray Martin de Oña y Ocadiz, from the convent in Burgos.

Fray Diego Liaño, of the same convent.

Fray Diego Liaño, from the same convent.

And Fray Francisco Novarin, an Asturian, son of Santo Domingo, of Mexico.

And Brother Francisco Novarin, from Asturias, son of Santo Domingo, from Mexico.

And two religious lay-brothers: the first, Fray Francisco de Toledo, son of the convent of Guadalaxara; and the second, Fray Vicente de el Castillo, son of the convent of Burgos. In addition there were two others, who as above said remained in Mexico with the father vicar, Fray Francisco [88]Villalba, who could not return to the province because of his sentence of exile.

And two lay brothers: the first, Brother Francisco de Toledo, from the convent of Guadalajara; and the second, Brother Vicente de el Castillo, from the convent of Burgos. Additionally, there were two others who, as mentioned earlier, stayed in Mexico with the father vicar, Brother Francisco [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Villalba, who couldn't return to the province due to his exile sentence.

[With that band also comes one Fray Domingo Mezquita, who had first gone to the Philippines in 1671, but after some years residence there had returned secretly to Spain. Moved again by the will of God, he returns to the islands where he dies after some years. Those missionaries are detained in Mexico for two years waiting for a ship. Finally a ship is bought at Acapulco in which is sent the royal situado, the Dominican religious, a mission band of sixty Recollects, and a few soldiers. After a voyage fraught with danger, for the ship is old and rotten, the harbor of Cavite is finally reached June 28, and as soon as all the cargo and passengers are safely off, it founders. The much-needed missionaries are distributed among the Philippine and Chinese missions.]

[With that group also comes one Fray Domingo Mezquita, who first went to the Philippines in 1671 but returned secretly to Spain after several years there. Called again by the will of God, he goes back to the islands, where he dies after some years. Those missionaries are held up in Mexico for two years waiting for a ship. Finally, a ship is purchased in Acapulco to carry the royal situado, the Dominican religious, a group of sixty Recollects, and a few soldiers. After a perilous voyage, since the ship is old and rotten, they finally reach the harbor of Cavite on June 28, and as soon as all the cargo and passengers are safely off, it sinks. The much-needed missionaries are assigned to the Philippine and Chinese missions.]

[Chapters xxxvii and xxxviii treat of the Chinese missions and the lives and work of certain fathers. Chapter xxxix notes the celebration of the intermediary chapter of 1696, and treats of members of the Dominican order who die during this period: namely, father Fray Diego Vilches, a Montañes native, who takes the habit at the Sevilla convent; and Doña Antonio de Jesus y Esguerra, a Spanish woman, and a member of the tertiary branch of the order. Chapters xl–xliii relate the foundation and progress of the beaterio of Santa Catharina, of Manila. The disputes between Archbishop Camacho and the orders (see VOL. XLII, pp. 25–116) and the questions of the friars’ estates, are taken up in chapters xliv–xlvi. The following chapter records the results of the provincial chapter of April 10, 1698, [89]and states the condition of both Philippine and Chinese missions. That chapter accepted the mission of San Luis Beltran (of which mention is made in an earlier chapter) in Pangasinan. The mission work of that district results in the intermarriage of Pangasinans and Alaguetes, and the idiom of Pangasinan becomes the common language. Chapter xlviii reviews the lives of prominent members of the order who die in this period: Fray Francisco Sanchez, Fray Francisco de Escalante, and Sister Jacinta de la Encarnacion, of the beaterio.]

[Chapters 37 and 38 discuss the Chinese missions and the lives and work of certain priests. Chapter 39 notes the celebration of the interim chapter of 1696 and covers members of the Dominican order who passed away during this time: specifically, Father Fray Diego Vilches, a Montañes native who took his vows at the Sevilla convent; and Doña Antonio de Jesus y Esguerra, a Spanish woman and a member of the tertiary branch of the order. Chapters 40–43 describe the founding and development of the beaterio of Santa Catharina in Manila. The disputes between Archbishop Camacho and the orders (see VOL. 42, pp. 25–116) and issues regarding the friars’ estates are addressed in chapters 44–46. The next chapter records the outcomes of the provincial chapter held on April 10, 1698, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and outlines the status of both the Philippine and Chinese missions. That chapter approved the mission of San Luis Beltran (which was mentioned in an earlier chapter) in Pangasinan. The mission efforts in that area led to intermarriage between the Pangasinans and Alaguetes, making the Pangasinan language the common tongue. Chapter 48 reviews the lives of significant members of the order who died during this period: Fray Francisco Sanchez, Fray Francisco de Escalante, and Sister Jacinta de la Encarnacion of the beaterio.]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter XLIX

New reënforcement of religious, which arrived at this province, and the voyage of two of them to Kun-King.

New reinforcements of religious individuals arrived in this province, and two of them traveled to Kun-King.

[In 1699 a band of thirty-seven missionaries reaches the province. They have been collected by Fray Francisco Villalba (his third mission) who escorts them to Acapulco.23 Those missionaries are as follows:]

[In 1699, a group of thirty-seven missionaries arrives in the province. They have been gathered by Fray Francisco Villalba (on his third mission), who takes them to Acapulco.23 The missionaries are as follows:]

The father lector, Fray Thomas Tocho, son of the royal convent of Santo Domingo, of Mallorca.

The father lector, Fray Thomas Tocho, a member of the royal convent of Santo Domingo in Mallorca.

The father lector, Fray Francisco de Barrera, son of the convent of Santa Maria, of Nieva.

The father lector, Fray Francisco de Barrera, from the convent of Santa Maria in Nieva.

The father preacher, Fray Juan Martinez, son of the convent of San Pablo, of Burgos.

The father preacher, Fray Juan Martinez, from the convent of San Pablo in Burgos.

The father lector, Fray Juan de Toro, son of the royal convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla.

The father lector, Fray Juan de Toro, from the royal convent of San Pablo in Seville.

The father lector, Fray Antonio Diaz, son of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid. [90]

The father lector, Fray Antonio Diaz, son of the convent of San Pablo in Valladolid. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Father Fray Antonio Gonçalez Laso, son of the convent of La Puebla de los Angeles.

Father Fray Antonio Gonçalez Laso, from the convent of La Puebla de los Angeles.

Father Fray Phelipe Fernandez, son of the royal convent of Santa Maria, of Nieva.

Father Fray Phelipe Fernandez, from the royal convent of Santa Maria in Nieva.

Father Fray Diego Perez de Matta, son of the royal convent of Santo Domingo, of Mexico.

Father Fray Diego Perez de Matta, a member of the royal convent of Santo Domingo in Mexico.

Father Fray Antonio de Argollanes, son of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Oviedo.

Father Fray Antonio de Argollanes, from the Santo Domingo convent in Oviedo.

Father Fray Joseph de Rezabal, son of the convent of San Pablo, of Victoria.

Father Fray Joseph de Rezabal, a member of the San Pablo convent in Victoria.

Father Fray Domingo Salzedo, son of the convent of San Pablo, of Burgos.

Father Fray Domingo Salzedo, from the San Pablo convent in Burgos.

Father Fray Balthasar de Andueza, son of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid.

Father Fray Balthasar de Andueza, from the San Pablo convent in Valladolid.

Father Fray Antonio Rodriguez, son of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Ciudad de San-Tiago.

Father Fray Antonio Rodriguez, from the convent of Santo Domingo, of the city of Santiago.

Father Fray Juan Pinta, of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid.

Father Fray Juan Pinta, from the San Pablo convent in Valladolid.

Father Fray Andres Gonçalez, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of San-Tiago.

Father Fray Andres Gonçalez, from the convent of Santo Domingo, of San-Tiago.

Brother Fray Francisco Petite, deacon, of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid.

Brother Fray Francisco Petite, deacon, from the San Pablo convent in Valladolid.

Brother Fray Bartholome Sabuquilla, deacon, of the convent of Santo Thomas, of Madrid.

Brother Fray Bartholome Sabuquilla, deacon, of the convent of Santo Thomas, in Madrid.

Brother Fray Manuel de Esqueda, deacon, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Cadiz.

Brother Fray Manuel de Esqueda, deacon, from the convent of Santo Domingo in Cadiz.

Brother Fray Antonio Perez, deacon, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Zamora.

Brother Fray Antonio Perez, deacon, of the Santo Domingo convent in Zamora.

Brother Fray Mauro Falcon, deacon, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of San-Tiago.

Brother Fray Mauro Falcon, deacon, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of San-Tiago.

Brother Fray Antonio Zabala, deacon, of the convent of San Pablo, of Burgos.

Brother Fray Antonio Zabala, deacon, from the San Pablo convent in Burgos.

Brother Fray Juan Crespo, subdeacon, of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid. [91]

Brother Fray Juan Crespo, subdeacon, of the San Pablo convent in Valladolid. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Brother Fray Francisco Cavallero, subdeacon, of the same convent.

Brother Fray Francisco Cavallero, subdeacon, from the same convent.

Brother Fray Francisco Molina, subdeacon, of the same convent.

Brother Fray Francisco Molina, subdeacon, from the same convent.

Brother Fray Bernardino Membride, subdeacon, of the same convent.

Brother Fray Bernardino Membride, subdeacon, from the same convent.

Brother Fray Gregorio Vigil, acolyte of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Oviedo.

Brother Fray Gregorio Vigil, acolyte at the Santo Domingo convent in Oviedo.

Brother Fray Juan Matheos, acolyte, of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca.

Brother Fray Juan Matheos, acolyte, of the convent of San Estevan, in Salamanca.

Brother Fray Pedro Campueñas, acolyte, of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid.

Brother Fray Pedro Campueñas, acolyte, of the convent of San Pablo, Valladolid.

Brother Fray Andres de Lubitero, acolyte, of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca.

Brother Fray Andres de Lubitero, acolyte, of the San Estevan convent in Salamanca.

Brother Fray Miguel Velasco, acolyte, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Mexico.

Brother Fray Miguel Velasco, acolyte, of the convent of Santo Domingo, in Mexico.

Brother Fray Joseph de Palencia, acolyte, of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid.

Brother Fray Joseph de Palencia, acolyte, of the convent of San Pablo, in Valladolid.

Brother Fray Joachin de la Torre, acolyte, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Oxaca.

Brother Fray Joachin de la Torre, acolyte, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Oaxaca.

Brother Fray Joseph Barba, lay-brother, of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid.

Brother Fray Joseph Barba, lay brother, of the convent of San Pablo, in Valladolid.

Brother Fray Joseph Barba, lay-brother, of the convent of San Ildephonso, of Zaragoça.

Brother Fray Joseph Barba, a lay-brother, from the convent of San Ildephonso in Zaragoza.

Brother Fray Domingo Sena, lay-brother, of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid.

Brother Fray Domingo Sena, lay brother, of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid.

Brother Fray Martin de San Joseph, lay-brother, of the convent of Burgos.

Brother Fray Martin de San Joseph, a lay brother from the convent of Burgos.

Brother Fray Joseph Pina, lay-brother, of the convent of Burgos.

Brother Fray Joseph Pina, lay-brother, from the convent of Burgos.

Besides these thirty-seven religious, came another, a Genoan, who was sent by the Propaganda, one Fray Thomas Sextri, of the Dominican convent of Turin. [The remainder of the chapter is occupied [92]with the relation of the voyage to Tun-King by two of the above religious.]

Besides these thirty-seven religious workers, another person arrived, a Genoan, who was sent by the Propaganda, Brother Thomas Sextri, from the Dominican convent in Turin. [The rest of the chapter covers the account of the voyage to Tun-King by two of the aforementioned religious.]

[Chapter l mentions the intermediary chapter of May 1, 1700, and the state of the Philippine and other missions of the order. In Cagayan the missions of Zifun and those to the Mandayas are in a flourishing condition. Through the efforts of Fray Francisco de la Vega,24 the earnest work of Fray Pedro Ximenez is carried on, and the fierce dwellers of the village of Calatug are reduced to the faith. The assembly earnestly charges the missionary at Fotol to bend all his energies to the conversion of the Mandayas. Fray Vicente de el Riesgo25 is appointed to the mission of Ytugug, and he is charged with the reduction of Yogat and Paniqui; and well does he obey those injunctions. Not only does he reduce again the villages of Ytugug, Santa Rosa, and San Fernando, but also villages of Cagayan. “Besides that mission of Ytugug or Paniqui, another harvest field, no less abundant, had been discovered, in the very center of those mountains, on the side looking toward the east, in an extensive field called Zifun. There the venerable father, Fray Geronimo Ulloa, vicar of the village of Tuguegarao, filled with zeal for the reduction of those infidels, had [93]made various raids in those mountains. That father was very fond of missions and had labored in others with zeal and fervor, and although he was now very old, and had in his charge so large a village as Tuguegarao, and was very far from those mountains, yet he was unable to restrain his zeal, and his desire for the welfare of souls. Hence burning with the ardor of youth, as soon as he was freed from the obstacles of the necessary occupations of his ministry, he entered those mountains alone in search of those straying souls in order to lure them to the flock of Christ, without stopping to consider dangers or discomforts in order that he might gain some souls for heaven.” So great is his success, and so many the souls that he reduces that the intermediary chapter gives him an associate, in order that the father may give all of his time to the mission work of Zifun.]

[Chapter l mentions the intermediary chapter of May 1, 1700, and the state of the Philippine and other missions of the order. In Cagayan, the missions of Zifun and those to the Mandayas are thriving. Thanks to the efforts of Fray Francisco de la Vega, the dedicated work of Fray Pedro Ximenez continues, and the fierce locals of the village of Calatug are being converted to the faith. The assembly strongly urges the missionary at Fotol to focus all his energy on converting the Mandayas. Fray Vicente de el Riesgo is assigned to the mission of Ytugug, and he is tasked with converting Yogat and Paniqui; he follows these directives very well. Not only does he re-establish the villages of Ytugug, Santa Rosa, and San Fernando, but also some villages in Cagayan. “In addition to the mission of Ytugug or Paniqui, another rich field has been found deep in the mountains, on the eastern side, in a broad area known as Zifun. There, the venerable father, Fray Geronimo Ulloa, vicar of the village of Tuguegarao, driven by his zeal to convert those pagans, had made several missions into those mountains. He loved missions and had served in others with dedication and energy, and although he was now quite old, managing a large village like Tuguegarao and far from those mountains, he could not suppress his zeal and concern for souls. Thus, burning with youthful passion, as soon as he was free from the necessary duties of his ministry, he ventured into those mountains alone to seek out lost souls and draw them to Christ's flock, not hesitating to face dangers or hardships in order to save souls for heaven.” His success is so remarkable, and he converts so many souls, that the intermediary chapter assigns him an associate so that he can devote all his time to the mission work of Zifun.]

[Chapters li–lvii (which complete the volume) treat of the lives of various fathers and sisters of the order. In the biographical notices of these chapters, as well as in all the other biographical chapters of this volume, there is necessarily much on the mission work of the Dominicans; but the method of treatment is almost entirely from the standpoint of the individual, and offers no view of the mission work as a whole, or at least nothing new is added to the broader aspects of the work. Consequently, we do not present anything from those chapters in this survey of Dominican missions.] [95]

[Chapters li–lvii (which complete the volume) cover the lives of various fathers and sisters of the order. In the biographical notes of these chapters, as well as in all the other biographical chapters in this volume, there is a lot about the mission work of the Dominicans; however, the approach mostly focuses on the individual rather than providing a broader perspective on the mission work as a whole, adding nothing new to the wider aspects of the work. Therefore, we do not include anything from those chapters in this overview of Dominican missions.] [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]


1 The translation of the title-page of the above book is as follows: “History of the province of Santissimo Rosario de Philipinas [i. e., most holy rosary of the Philipinas], China, and Tunking, of the holy order of the Preachers. Third part. In which are treated the events of said province from 1669 to 1700. Composed by the Reverend Father Fray Vicente de Salazar, rector of the college of Santo Thomas of the city of Manila, and chancellor of its university. Dedicated to the sovereign queen of the angels, the most holy Mary, in her miraculous image of the rosary, which is venerated with the universal devotion of the people in the church of Santo Domingo of the said city of Manila. Printed by the press of the said college and university of Santo Tomas of the said city, in the year 1742.” The first two parts of this history (those by Aduarte and Santa Cruz) have been given in translation and synopsis in preceding volumes in this series.

1 The translation of the title page of the above book is as follows: “History of the province of Santissimo Rosario de Philipinas [i. e., most holy rosary of the Philippines], China, and Tunking, of the holy order of the Preachers. Third part. This covers the events of said province from 1669 to 1700. Written by the Reverend Father Fray Vicente de Salazar, rector of the College of Santo Thomas in Manila, and chancellor of its university. Dedicated to the sovereign queen of the angels, the most holy Mary, in her miraculous image of the rosary, which is honored with universal devotion in the Church of Santo Domingo in Manila. Printed by the press of the College and University of Santo Tomas in that city, in the year 1742.” The first two parts of this history (by Aduarte and Santa Cruz) have been translated and summarized in previous volumes of this series.

Fray Vicente Salazar was born in Ocaña and professed at Valladolid. He became a professor in Spain. Arriving in Manila in 1727, he became a professor in the college of Santo Tomàs and in 1742 was its rector. Later he became prior of the Manila convent. The last years of his life were spent in the Ituy missions, his death occurring between the years of 1755–1759. See Retana’s edition of Zúñiga’s Estadismo, ii, p. 615.

Fray Vicente Salazar was born in Ocaña and took his vows at Valladolid. He became a professor in Spain. After arriving in Manila in 1727, he joined the faculty at the College of Santo Tomás, and in 1742, he became its rector. Later, he served as the prior of the Manila convent. He spent the final years of his life in the Ituy missions, passing away between 1755 and 1759. See Retana’s edition of Zúñiga’s Estadismo, ii, p. 615.

2 For sketches of the members of this mission, see Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 101–194.

2 For sketches of the members of this mission, see Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 101–194.

3 See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 194–230, for sketches of these missionaries.

3 See Biographical Review, ii, pp. 194–230, for profiles of these missionaries.

4 See the Recollect account of these transactions in VOL. XLI.

4 Check the Recollect account of these transactions in VOL. 41.

5 Fray Alarcón was a native of Archidona, and professed in the convent at Madrid June 30, 1661. On arriving at the islands (1666), he was assigned to the province of Pangasinan. In 1669 he was appointed master of novitiates in Manila, but resigned the post that same year. In 1673 he went to Formosa intending to enter the Chinese missions, but finding that impossible he returned to Manila in 1674. From 1675–1678 he labored in the missions of the province of Bataán, being sent the latter year to the Chinese missions; but finding it necessary to return to Manila shortly after, his subsequent efforts to return again to China were unavailing. He died in Manila September 15, 1685, after a lingering illness. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 59–61.

5 Fray Alarcón was from Archidona and joined the convent in Madrid on June 30, 1661. When he arrived in the islands in 1666, he was assigned to the province of Pangasinan. In 1669, he was appointed master of novices in Manila, but he resigned that position later that same year. In 1673, he traveled to Formosa with the intention of joining the Chinese missions, but after realizing that was not possible, he returned to Manila in 1674. From 1675 to 1678, he worked in the missions of the province of Bataan and was sent to the Chinese missions that same year; however, he had to return to Manila shortly after, and his later attempts to go back to China were unsuccessful. He passed away in Manila on September 15, 1685, after a prolonged illness. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 59–61.

6 The Zambals were not Negritos, although they may have been a mixture of Negrito blood. They were probably somewhat the same as the Igorots, and hence a race of Malay extraction.

6 The Zambals weren't Negritos, although they might have had some Negrito ancestry. They were likely similar to the Igorots, making them a group of Malay descent.

7 i.e., in Aduarte’s Historia; see VOL. XXXII, p. 55.

7 i.e., in Aduarte’s Historia; see VOL. 32, p. 55.

8 Fray Jerónimo de Ullóa was a Galician, who professed at Coruña March 13, 1665, at the age of twenty-one. He was a zealous missionary in various Cagayan missions and in the Babuyanes. His death occurred in 1700 or 1701. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 175–179.

8 Fray Jerónimo de Ullóa was from Galicia and joined the order in Coruña on March 13, 1665, at the age of twenty-one. He was a dedicated missionary in several missions in Cagayan and the Babuyanes. He passed away in 1700 or 1701. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 175–179.

9 Fray Pedro Jiménez took the Dominican habit in 1658, and arrived in the Philippines in 1666. He labored principally in the province of Cagayan where he was at different times assigned to different missions. He died December 20 without being able to receive the last sacraments. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 61–77.

9 Fray Pedro Jiménez joined the Dominican order in 1658 and arrived in the Philippines in 1666. He worked mainly in the province of Cagayan, where he was assigned to various missions at different times. He died on December 20 without being able to receive the last sacraments. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 61–77.

10 W. A. Reed says (, pp. 40, 41): “He is repulsively dirty in his home, person, and everything he does. Nothing is ever washed except his hands and face, and those only rarely. He never takes a bath, because he thinks that if he bathes often he is more susceptible to cold, that a covering of dirt serves as clothing, although he frequently gets wet either in the rain or when fishing or crossing streams. This is probably one reason why skin diseases are so common.”

10 W. A. Reed says (, pp. 40, 41): “He is extremely dirty in his home, on his body, and in everything he does. The only parts that he cleans are his hands and face, and even those are washed only occasionally. He never takes a bath because he believes that bathing often makes him more vulnerable to catching a cold, thinking that a layer of dirt acts like clothing, even though he often gets soaked in the rain or while fishing or crossing streams. This is probably one reason why skin diseases are so common.”

11 See sketches of these missionaries in Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 230–256.

11 Check out sketches of these missionaries in Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 230–256.

12 This is an error, as the Mandayas are a Mindanao tribe. Probably the Apayaos, who live in the district of Ayangan in the comandancia of Quiang̃án are meant. In Bontoc and other northern provinces of Luzón the word Ĭ-fu-gao means “the people;” it is the name which the Bontoc Igorots apply to themselves. The name Apayao, in northern Luzón, is another form of the same word. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 469; Blumentritt’s List of Tribes in Philippines (Mason’s translation); and Jenks’s , p. 33.

12 This is a mistake, as the Mandayas are a tribe from Mindanao. They probably meant the Apayaos, who live in the Ayangan district in the comandancia of Quiang̃án. In Bontoc and other northern provinces of Luzón, the word Ĭ-fu-gao means “the people;” it’s the name that the Bontoc Igorots call themselves. The name Apayao, in northern Luzón, is another variation of the same word. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 469; Blumentritt’s List of Tribes in Philippines (Mason’s translation); and Jenks’s, p. 33.

13 Fray Juan Iñiguez was a native of Antequera, and made his profession at Sevilla, September 21, 1671. Reaching the Philippines (1671) at the age of twenty-four, he was immediately assigned to the province of Cagayan where he labored until 1720, the year of his death. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 211–215.

13 Fray Juan Iñiguez was from Antequera and made his profession in Sevilla on September 21, 1671. He arrived in the Philippines in 1671 at the age of twenty-four and was immediately assigned to the province of Cagayan, where he worked until his death in 1720. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 211–215.

14 These are not a separate tribe as one would be led to suppose by Blumentritt, but a branch of the Igorot people. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 456–459.

14 These are not a separate tribe as one might think based on Blumentritt's claims, but rather a branch of the Igorot people. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 456–459.

15 The natives of Malaoeg and Tuao revolted at the end of 1718 under their leaders Magtangaga and Tomás Sinaguingan. They were put down by Captain Don Juan Pablo de Orduña, and the rebels were punished. See Montero y Vidal, i, p. 414.

15 The people of Malaoeg and Tuao rose up at the end of 1718 under their leaders Magtangaga and Tomás Sinaguingan. They were defeated by Captain Don Juan Pablo de Orduña, and the rebels faced consequences. See Montero y Vidal, i, p. 414.

16 Fray Mateo González made his profession September 5, 1667, and arrived at the Philippines in 1671 at the age of twenty-seven. He was assigned to Cagayan, where he labored extensively. He also worked in the Babuyanes and introduced the mission work into the Batanes, his death occurring in the latter islands July 25, 1688. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 155–157.

16 Fray Mateo González took his vows on September 5, 1667, and arrived in the Philippines in 1671 at the age of twenty-seven. He was assigned to Cagayan, where he worked extensively. He also worked in the Babuyanes and brought mission work to the Batanes, where he passed away on July 25, 1688. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 155–157.

17 A correspondent, William Edmonds, principal of schools in the Batanes Islands, says in a letter of April 9, 1906: “I have an idea that either the formation of the land [of the Batanes] is entirely changed (two islands then being one now) or that there is some serious error in Dampier’s topography [see VOL. XXXIX, pp. 96–115]. The names of many of the islands now are not those given by Dampier.” Of the later history of the Batanes Islands Mr. Edmonds says: “In 1791, Governor-general Don José Basco sent an expedition with an alcalde, two Dominican missionaries, mechanics, and artificers to establish civil government. In a short time the people were instructed in material arts, constructing tribunals, churches, convents, schools, and houses, all of stone walls, one vara thick, to resist typhoons. Five municipalities were established, the islands forming a district of the province of Cagayan. In September, 1897, these pacific islands fell an easy prey to the Revolutionary expedition which sacked the churches and convents, and carried away the priests as prisoners to Cagayan. The Katipunan government ruled until December, 1899, when the American government took possession. In October, 1903, the various towns were united into one municipality of the province of Cagayan.” As references concerning these islands, Mr. Edmonds gives El Correo Sino Anamita (Manila, 1866–1892), xxix, p. 483; and Marin’s Ensayo (Manila, 1901), ii, pp. 690, 801: both publications of the Dominicans.

17 A correspondent, William Edmonds, the principal of schools in the Batanes Islands, writes in a letter dated April 9, 1906: “I have a feeling that either the geography of the Batanes has completely changed (two islands then being one now) or there’s a significant mistake in Dampier’s maps [see VOL. 39, pp. 96–115]. Many of the islands’ names today are not those listed by Dampier.” Regarding the later history of the Batanes Islands, Mr. Edmonds notes: “In 1791, Governor-General Don José Basco sent a team with an alcalde, two Dominican missionaries, mechanics, and craftsmen to establish civil governance. Soon, the people learned skilled trades, constructing courts, churches, convents, schools, and houses, all with stone walls a vara thick to withstand typhoons. Five municipalities were created, with the islands forming a district of the province of Cagayan. In September 1897, these peaceful islands easily succumbed to the Revolutionary expedition that looted the churches and convents and took the priests as captives to Cagayan. The Katipunan government ruled until December 1899, when the American government took control. In October 1903, the different towns were merged into one municipality of the province of Cagayan.” As references on these islands, Mr. Edmonds provides El Correo Sino Anamita (Manila, 1866–1892), xxix, p. 483; and Marin’s Ensayo (Manila, 1901), ii, pp. 690, 801: both published by the Dominicans.

18 Fray Diego Piñero was assigned upon his arrival at the islands in 1684 to the convent of Malaueg in Cagayan. His stay in the Babuyanes was short as is related in the text. His remaining missionary labors were in the province of Cagayan. His death occurred at Lallo-c at the beginning of 1712 or a trifle before. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 236, 237.

18 Fray Diego Piñero was assigned to the convent of Malaueg in Cagayan when he arrived in the islands in 1684. His time in the Babuyanes was brief, as mentioned in the text. Most of his remaining missionary work took place in the province of Cagayan. He passed away in Lallo-c at the beginning of 1712 or just a bit before. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 236, 237.

19 The island of Calayan was taken formal possession of for the United States by the government ship “Princeton,” January 10, 1900. It is one of the islands of the Babuyanes group, and is lofty and uneven. See Gazetteer of Philippine Islands, p. 418.

19 The island of Calayan was officially claimed for the United States by the government ship “Princeton” on January 10, 1900. It is one of the islands in the Babuyanes group and has a high and rugged landscape. See Gazetteer of Philippine Islands, p. 418.

20 Fray José Galfarroso (or Halfarroso de la Trinidad, as his name is given in Reseña biográfica) made his profession September 10, 1664. Upon his arrival at the Philippines in 1671, he was assigned to the Cagayan field, where he held various posts, and where most if not all of his missionary labors were passed. He died, probably in Cagayan, early in 1700. See ut supra, ii, pp. 160, 161.

20 Fray José Galfarroso (or Halfarroso de la Trinidad, as he is mentioned in Reseña biográfica) took his vows on September 10, 1664. After arriving in the Philippines in 1671, he was assigned to the Cagayan region, where he held various positions and spent most, if not all, of his time on missionary work. He likely passed away in Cagayan in early 1700. See ut supra, ii, pp. 160, 161.

21 Fray Juan de Santo Domingo was born in 1640 near Calatayud, and professed in the convent of Ocaña October 22, 1661. He went to the Philippines in 1666, his first two years being occupied in duties in Manila. Assigned to the province of Pangasinan, he labored there for eighteen years, and exercised various duties. In 1682 he was chosen definitor, and in 1686 he was transferred to the Manila convent. He was the real founder of the Beaterio of Santa Catalina de Sena, and ordained its rules July 26, 1696, while provincial. During his term as provincial he also organized the tertiary branch of his order. After his term as provincial he was appointed vicar of the beatas and president of the college of San Juan de Letrán. In 1702 he was again elected prior of Manila convent, and because of the death of the provincial exercised the duties of that office, to which he was regularly elected again in 1706. At the end of his second term he again took up his duties as head of the beaterio and college. Besides the above posts and offices he was also commissary of the Holy Office and definitor in the chapters of 1682 and 1716. His death occurred at Manila, January 15, 1726. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 26–34.

21 Fray Juan de Santo Domingo was born in 1640 near Calatayud and entered the convent of Ocaña on October 22, 1661. He went to the Philippines in 1666, where he spent the first two years working in Manila. Assigned to the province of Pangasinan, he served there for eighteen years in various roles. In 1682, he was chosen as a definitor, and in 1686 he moved to the Manila convent. He was the true founder of the Beaterio of Santa Catalina de Sena, establishing its rules on July 26, 1696, during his time as provincial. While serving as provincial, he also organized the tertiary branch of his order. After his term as provincial, he was appointed vicar of the beatas and president of the college of San Juan de Letrán. In 1702, he was elected prior of the Manila convent again, and due to the death of the provincial, he took on the responsibilities of that office, to which he was officially re-elected in 1706. At the end of his second term, he resumed his roles as head of the beaterio and college. In addition to these positions, he also served as commissary of the Holy Office and was a definitor at the chapters of 1682 and 1716. He passed away in Manila on January 15, 1726. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 26–34.

22 See sketches of these missionaries in Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 363–457.

22 See sketches of these missionaries in Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 363–457.

23 Sketches of these missionaries will be found in Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 457–497.

23 You can find sketches of these missionaries in Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 457–497.

24 Fray Francisco de la Vega was assigned to Cagayan in 1686, where he labored in various missions there and in the Babuyanes. He died at Fotol in the beginning of 1710. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 249, 250.

24 Fray Francisco de la Vega was sent to Cagayan in 1686, where he worked on different missions there and in the Babuyanes. He passed away in Fotol at the start of 1710. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 249, 250.

25 Fray Vicente del Riesgo was a native of San Félix de Valdesoto. On arriving at the Philippines at the age of twenty-six, he was assigned to the Cagayan field where he spent the rest of his life (with the exception of a brief period spent in Manila as prior of that convent, and master of novitiates), and where he occupied various posts. He died in Cabagan, June 24, 1724. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 440–446.

25 Fray Vicente del Riesgo was from San Félix de Valdesoto. When he arrived in the Philippines at the age of twenty-six, he was assigned to the Cagayan region, where he lived the rest of his life (except for a short time spent in Manila as the prior of that convent and master of novices) and held various positions. He passed away in Cabagan on June 24, 1724. See Reseña biográfica, ii, pp. 440–446.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Bibliographical Data

The documents contained in the present volume are from the following sources:

The documents in this volume come from the following sources:

1. Dominican missions, 1670–1700.—From Salazar’s Historia de el Santissimo Rosario; (from a copy of original edition (Manila, 1742), in possession of Edward E. Ayer, Chicago).

1. Dominican missions, 1670–1700.—From Salazar’s Historia de el Santissimo Rosario; (from a copy of the original edition (Manila, 1742), in possession of Edward E. Ayer, Chicago).

2. Preliminary note.—Editorial.

2. Introductory note.—Editorial.

3. Superstitions and beliefs of the Filipinos.—From Ortiz’s Práctica del Ministerio, ca., 1731, chapter i, §4, pp. 11–15 (from Retana’s edition of Zúñiga’s Estadismo, Madrid, 1893, ii, pp. *14–*21).

3. Superstitions and beliefs of the Filipinos.—From Ortiz’s Práctica del Ministerio, ca., 1731, chapter i, §4, pp. 11–15 (from Retana’s edition of Zúñiga’s Estadismo, Madrid, 1893, ii, pp. *14–*21).

4. The People of the Philippines.—From Zúñiga’s Historia de las Islas Philipinas (Sampaloc, 1803), ii, chapter ii, pp. 19–38; from a copy of the original edition belonging to Edward E. Ayer, Chicago.

4. The People of the Philippines.—From Zúñiga’s Historia de las Islas Philipinas (Sampaloc, 1803), ii, chapter ii, pp. 19–38; from a copy of the original edition belonging to Edward E. Ayer, Chicago.

5. Jolo and the Sulus.—From Wilkes’s Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition (Philadelphia, 1844), v, pp. 343–390; from a copy belonging to the Wisconsin Historical Society.

5. Jolo and the Sulus.—From Wilkes’s Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition (Philadelphia, 1844), v, pp. 343–390; from a copy belonging to the Wisconsin Historical Society.

6. Letter from Father Quirico More.—From Cartas de los PP. de la Compañía de Jesús (Manila, 1887), vii, pp. 76–91; from a copy belonging to Edward E. Ayer, Chicago.

6. Letter from Father Quirico More.—From Cartas de los PP. de la Compañía de Jesús (Manila, 1887), vii, pp. 76–91; from a copy owned by Edward E. Ayer, Chicago.

7. Letter from Father Pedro Rosell.Ut supra, pp. 198–216. [96]

7. Letter from Father Pedro Rosell.As mentioned above, pp. 198–216. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

8. Letters from Father Mateo Gisbert.Ut supra, pp. 117–128, 137–145.

8. Letters from Father Mateo Gisbert.As mentioned above, pp. 117–128, 137–145.

9. Letter from Father Pablo Cavalleria.Ut supra, pp. 27–35.

9. Letter from Father Pablo Cavalleria.As mentioned above, pp. 27–35.

10. Extract from a letter from Father Pablo Pastells.Ut supra, pp. 336–349.

10. Extract from a letter from Father Pablo Pastells.Ut supra, pp. 336–349.

11. Letter from Father José María Clotet.—From Cartas de los PP. de la Compañía de Jesús (Manila, 1891), ix, pp. 170–184; from a copy in possession of the Library of Congress.

11. Letter from Father José María Clotet.—From Cartas de los PP. de la Compañía de Jesús (Manila, 1891), ix, pp. 170–184; from a copy held by the Library of Congress.

12. Present beliefs and superstitions in Luzón.—From the December 9, 1905 supplement of El Renacimiento; from a copy loaned by James A. LeRoy. [97]

12. Current beliefs and superstitions in Luzón.—From the December 9, 1905 supplement of El Renacimiento; from a copy borrowed from James A. LeRoy. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Appendix: Some later ethnological features of the Philippines

[98]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Sources: The material for this appendix is obtained as follows: No. 1, editorial note. No. 2, from extracts given by W. E. Retana, in his edition of Zúñiga’s Estadismo de las Islas Filipinas (Madrid, 1893), ii, pp. *14–*21, of Tomás Ortiz’s Práctica del Ministerio (chapter i, §4, pp. 11–15), a MS. conserved in the library of Eduardo Navarro, O.S.A., at Valladolid. No. 3, from Joaquín Martinez de Zúñiga’s Historia de las Islas Philipinas (Sampaloc, 1803), ii, chapter ii, pp. 19–38, from a copy belonging to Edward E. Ayer. No. 4, from Charles Wilkes’s Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition (Philadelphia, 1844), v, pp. 343–390 (mainly verbatim), from a copy belonging to the Wisconsin Historical Society. Nos. 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, from Cartas de los PP. de la Compañía de Jesús (Manila, 1887), vii, pp. 76–91, 198–216, 117–128 and 137–145, 27–35, and 336–349, respectively, from a copy belonging to Edward E. Ayer. No. 10, from Cartas de los PP. de la Compañía de Jesús (Manila, 1891), ix, pp. 170–184, from a copy belonging to the Library of Congress. No. 11, from a copy of the supplement of the Manila periodical El Renacimiento, of the issue of December 9, 1905.

Sources: The material for this appendix is obtained as follows: No. 1, editorial note. No. 2, from extracts provided by W. E. Retana in his edition of Zúñiga’s Estadismo de las Islas Filipinas (Madrid, 1893), ii, pp. *14–*21, of Tomás Ortiz’s Práctica del Ministerio (chapter i, §4, pp. 11–15), a manuscript kept in the library of Eduardo Navarro, O.S.A., in Valladolid. No. 3, from Joaquín Martinez de Zúñiga’s Historia de las Islas Philipinas (Sampaloc, 1803), ii, chapter ii, pp. 19–38, from a copy owned by Edward E. Ayer. No. 4, from Charles Wilkes’s Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition (Philadelphia, 1844), v, pp. 343–390 (mostly verbatim), from a copy owned by the Wisconsin Historical Society. Nos. 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, from Cartas de los PP. de la Compañía de Jesús (Manila, 1887), vii, pp. 76–91, 198–216, 117–128 and 137–145, 27–35, and 336–349, respectively, from a copy owned by Edward E. Ayer. No. 10, from Cartas de los PP. de la Compañía de Jesús (Manila, 1891), ix, pp. 170–184, from a copy owned by the Library of Congress. No. 11, from a copy of the supplement of the Manila periodical El Renacimiento, from the issue of December 9, 1905.

Translations and Compilations: These are made by James A. Robertson. [99]

Translations and Collections: These are done by James A. Robertson. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Preliminary note

In this series, ethnological material will be found in the following volumes of those hitherto published: II, pp. 68–72, 109–113, 122, 125, 126, 197–199, 201, 202; III, pp. 34, 54–61, 74, 97, 141–172, 181, 197–204, 286–288, 297, 298; IV, pp. 26, 27, 67–70, 98–101, 105; V, pp. 34–187 (Loarca’s Relation); VI, pp. 140, 141, 145–147; VII, pp. 173–196 (Plasencia’s Customs of the Tagálogs); XII, pp. 212, 213, 217–220, 235–244, 249–251, 261–275, 293–296, 302–310; XIII, pp. 56–58, 200–203 (Chirino’s Relation); XIV, pp. 156–159, 304, 305, 307; XVI, pp. 69–135 (Morga’s Relation), 221–223, 235, 321–329 (Customs of the Pampangos); XXIX, pp. 281–301; XXX, pp. 190–193; XXXIII, and part of XXXIV (Pigafetta’s Relation); XXXIV, pp. 185–191, 204, 215, 225, 226, 278, 279, 292–294, 318–321, 376–380, 386–388; XL, Appendix. Ethnological material is included in the following books, which we are unable to reproduce because of the limits of space, although we have used some of them extensively for annotation. Delgado’s Historia (Manila, 1893; though written about 1754) part i, book iii, pp. 249–392, contains a portion of San Agustin’s famous letter (see VOL. XL, pp. 187–295) and whose comments on which we published in part; also in appendix added by the editor, a portion of [100]Loarca’s Relation. Le Gentil’s Voyage (Paris, 1781), as follows: chap. i, art. ix, Of the genius of the inhabitants of the Philippines, and of the peculiar punishments, which the religious inflict on women who do not attend mass on days of observance, pp. 59–63 (following in great part the account of San Antonio—see VOL. XXVIII, Appendix—); art. x, Of the language and characters used by the natives of the Philippines, pp. 63–65; art. xi, Of some manners and customs of the Indians of the Philippines and of their marriages, pp. 66–74. Concepción’s Historia (Sampaloc, 1788–1792), i, chap. i, nos. 7–21, pp. 10–32; part 2, chap. i, nos. 309–320; iii, chap. ii, nos. 5, 6, pp. 27–37, nos. 10–13, pp. 46–55; v, chap. ii, no. 1, pp. 20–23. Mas’s Informe de las islas filipinas (Madrid, 1843): i, no. 1, Origen de los habitantes de la Oceania; no. 2, Estado de los Filipinos á la llegada de los Españoles (contains nothing special); no. 5, Poblacion (containing a great portion of San Agustin’s letter, with commentary, most of which is incorporated in our VOL. XL). Mallat’s Les Philippines (Paris, 1846): i, chap. iii, pp. 43–74, Condition of the country before the discovery; ii, chap. xx, pp. 89–129, Physical characteristics and customs of the savage races; chap. xxii, pp. 131–145, Customs of the children of the country, of the mestizos and the Chinese. Jagor’s Reisen in den Philippinen (Berlin, 1873): chap. xiv, pp. 118–132, Manners and customs of the Bicols; chap. xvii, pp. 161–175, The Isarog and its inhabitants; chap. xxii, pp. 227–238, Manners and customs of the Visayans. In the Ethnological Society Transactions, new series, vol. ii, session 1869–70 (London, 1870), appears (pp. 170–175), an article by Jagor, entitled “On the natives of Naga, [101]in Luzon.” Cartas de los PP. de la Compañía de Jesús de la misión de Filipinas, eight vols. (Manila, 1879–1891). Of this series Pardo de Tavera says (Biblioteca filipina, p. 87): “It is an important publication, in which is found not only information concerning the spiritual administration of the missions, but also remarkable information concerning the geography, history, ethnography, linguistics, fauna, and flora, etc., of Mindanao, which is the chief point of the activities of the Society of Jesus.” In the following selections, we have used the volumes for 1887 and 1889. Retana’s Archivo (Madrid, 1895), i, no. x, Short notice of the origin, religion, beliefs, and superstitions of the old Indians of Bicol by Fray José Castaño (written expressly for the Archivo, 1895). Algué’s Archipiélago filipino (Washington, 1900), i, tratado ii, “Ethnography,” pp. 151–238. This is translated in Report of the Philippine Commission for 1900, iii, paper no. vii, pp. 329–412. It follows on the whole the beaten lines, and much of it is unreliable. By far the most valuable material that has yet appeared on ethnology in the Philippines are the comprehensive reports which have been issued since American occupation by the Ethnological Survey, of the Department of the Interior. These have been frequently referred to in this series, and are as follows: The Bontoc Igorot, by Albert Ernest Jenks (Manila, 1905); ii, part i, Negritos of Zambales, by William Allen Reed (Manila, 1904); ii, parts ii and iii, The Nabaloi Dialect, by Otto Scheerer, and The Bataks of Palawan, by Edward Y. Miller (Manila, 1905); Relaciones agustinianas de las razas del norte de Luzón, compiled by father Fray Angel Pérez (Manila, [102]1904; Spanish edition)—containing among other things a number of letters written by Augustinian missionaries of the eighteenth century;—iv, part i, Studies in Moro History, by Najeeb M. Saleeby, a native Moro (Manila, 1905). With these reports must be classed History of the population, in Census of Philippines, i, pp. 411–491, by Dr. David P. Barrows, at the time of its writing chief of the Bureau of Non-Christian Tribes, but at present (1906) superintendent of education in Manila. Dr. Barrows’s article is followed by a compilation (pp. 492–531), entitled Characteristics of Christian tribes; and another (pp. 532–585), entitled Characteristics of the Non-Christian tribes. [103]

In this series, you'll find ethnological material in the following volumes that have been published so far: II, pp. 68–72, 109–113, 122, 125, 126, 197–199, 201, 202; III, pp. 34, 54–61, 74, 97, 141–172, 181, 197–204, 286–288, 297, 298; IV, pp. 26, 27, 67–70, 98–101, 105; V, pp. 34–187 (Loarca’s Relation); VI, pp. 140, 141, 145–147; VII, pp. 173–196 (Plasencia’s Customs of the Tagálogs); XII, pp. 212, 213, 217–220, 235–244, 249–251, 261–275, 293–296, 302–310; XIII, pp. 56–58, 200–203 (Chirino’s Relation); XIV, pp. 156–159, 304, 305, 307; XVI, pp. 69–135 (Morga’s Relation), 221–223, 235, 321–329 (Customs of the Pampangos); XXIX, pp. 281–301; XXX, pp. 190–193; XXXIII, and part of XXXIV (Pigafetta’s Relation); XXXIV, pp. 185–191, 204, 215, 225, 226, 278, 279, 292–294, 318–321, 376–380, 386–388; XL, Appendix. Ethnological material is included in the following books, which we can't reproduce due to space limitations, even though we've used some of them extensively for annotation. Delgado’s Historia (Manila, 1893; written around 1754) part i, book iii, pp. 249–392, has a section of San Agustin’s famous letter (see VOL. 40, pp. 187–295) and we published part of the comments on it; also in the appendix added by the editor, a portion of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Loarca’s Relation. Le Gentil’s Voyage (Paris, 1781), includes: chap. i, art. ix, Discussing the nature of the inhabitants of the Philippines and the peculiar punishments that religious figures impose on women who skip mass on observance days, pp. 59–63 (largely following San Antonio’s account—see VOL. 28, Appendix—); art. x, Discussing the language and characters used by the native Filipinos, pp. 63–65; art. xi, Discussing some customs and traditions of the Indians of the Philippines and their marriages, pp. 66–74. Concepción’s Historia (Sampaloc, 1788–1792), i, chap. i, nos. 7–21, pp. 10–32; part 2, chap. i, nos. 309–320; iii, chap. ii, nos. 5, 6, pp. 27–37, nos. 10–13, pp. 46–55; v, chap. ii, no. 1, pp. 20–23. Mas’s Informe de las islas filipinas (Madrid, 1843): i, no. 1, Origins of the inhabitants of Oceania; no. 2, The situation of Filipinos at the arrival of the Spaniards (contains nothing special); no. 5, Population (which includes a significant portion of San Agustin’s letter with commentary, most of which is part of our VOL. 40). Mallat’s Les Philippines (Paris, 1846): i, chap. iii, pp. 43–74, Condition of the country before discovery; ii, chap. xx, pp. 89–129, Physical characteristics and customs of the indigenous races; chap. xxii, pp. 131–145, Customs of the local children, mestizos, and Chinese. Jagor’s Reisen in den Philippinen (Berlin, 1873): chap. xiv, pp. 118–132, Customs and way of life of the Bicols; chap. xvii, pp. 161–175, The Isarog and its people; chap. xxii, pp. 227–238, Customs and way of life of the Visayans. In the Transactions of the Ethnological Society, new series, vol. ii, session 1869–70 (London, 1870), there’s an article by Jagor titled “On the natives of Naga, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]in Luzon.” Cartas de los PP. de la Compañía de Jesús de la misión de Filipinas, eight vols. (Manila, 1879–1891). Pardo de Tavera states in this series (Biblioteca filipina, p. 87): “It is an important publication that contains not only information about the spiritual administration of the missions but also significant information about the geography, history, ethnography, linguistics, fauna, and flora, etc., of Mindanao, which is the main arena of the Society of Jesus’s activities.” In the selections we have used the volumes from 1887 and 1889. Retana’s Archivo (Madrid, 1895), i, no. x, Brief note on the origin, religion, beliefs, and superstitions of the old Indians of Bicol by Fray José Castaño (specifically written for the Archivo, 1895). Algué’s Archipiélago filipino (Washington, 1900), i, tratado ii, “Ethnography,” pp. 151–238. This was translated in the Report of the Philippine Commission for 1900, iii, paper no. vii, pp. 329–412. Overall, it follows standard lines, and much of it is not reliable. The most valuable material on ethnology in the Philippines so far has been the comprehensive reports published since the American occupation by the Ethnological Survey of the Department of the Interior. These have been frequently referenced in this series and include: The Bontoc Igorot, by Albert Ernest Jenks (Manila, 1905); ii, part i, Negritos of Zambales, by William Allen Reed (Manila, 1904); ii, parts ii and iii, The Nabaloi Dialect, by Otto Scheerer, and The Bataks of Palawan, by Edward Y. Miller (Manila, 1905); Relaciones agustinianas de las razas del norte de Luzón, compiled by Fray Angel Pérez (Manila, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]1904; Spanish edition)—containing, among other things, several letters written by Augustinian missionaries in the eighteenth century;—iv, part i, Studies in Moro History, by Najeeb M. Saleeby, a native Moro (Manila, 1905). These reports include History of the population, in Census of Philippines, i, pp. 411–491, by Dr. David P. Barrows, who was the chief of the Bureau of Non-Christian Tribes at the time of writing, but is now (1906) the superintendent of education in Manila. Dr. Barrows’s article is followed by a compilation (pp. 492–531), titled Characteristics of Christian tribes; and another (pp. 532–585), titled Characteristics of the Non-Christian tribes. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Superstitions and beliefs of the Filipinos

[The following interesting account is from the Práctica del Ministerio by Tomás Ortiz, O. S. A.,1 and is translated from W. E. Retana’s edition of Zúñiga’s Estadismo de las islas Filipinas (Madrid, 1893), ii, pp. *14–*21. Retana found a copy of this important MS. at the Augustinian convent at Valladolid in the collection of father Fray Eduardo Navarro, where it still exists and where we ourselves examined it not long since. The following selection is from chapter i, section iv, pp. 11–15.]

[The following interesting account is from the Práctica del Ministerio by Tomás Ortiz, O. S. A.,1 and is translated from W. E. Retana’s edition of Zúñiga’s Estadismo de las islas Filipinas (Madrid, 1893), ii, pp. *14–*21. Retana found a copy of this important manuscript at the Augustinian convent in Valladolid in the collection of Father Fray Eduardo Navarro, where it still exists and where we ourselves examined it not long ago. The following selection is from chapter i, section iv, pp. 11–15.]

No. 31. Inasmuch as many natives, especially those of the provinces distant from Manila are much inclined to nonos or genii, to idolatries, maganitos, superstitions, enchantments, charms, and witchcraft, which have as great a diversity as have the witches, and therefore they call them by different names, [104]according to the various duties which they attribute to them; it is necessary for the father ministers, not only to preach to them continually, and to argue against, censure, and decry so pestilent abuses, but they must also be very skilful, solicitous, and careful in discovering persons infected with that mortal poison, and to apply to it the necessary remedy. In the confessions, for the same reason that but seldom will they accuse themselves all possible efforts ought to be made (without overstepping the boundaries of prudence) in order to see whether anything may be obtained; and he who has the good fortune to have any witch confess to him, will bear himself toward her as the authors teach. They ought also to charge the natives with their obligation to denounce to the ordinary,... etc.

No. 31. Since many locals, especially those from provinces far from Manila, are quite inclined towards nonos or spirits, idolatries, maganitos, superstitions, enchantments, charms, and witchcraft, which vary as much as the witches do, they refer to them by different names, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]based on the various roles they attribute to them; it is essential for the clergy not only to continuously preach to them and argue against, criticize, and condemn such harmful practices, but they must also be very skilled, diligent, and careful in identifying individuals affected by this deadly poison and to provide the necessary remedy. In confessions, for the same reason that they rarely admit their faults, every effort should be made (without exceeding the limits of wisdom) to see if anything can be uncovered; and whoever is fortunate enough to have a witch confess to them should treat her as the texts instruct. They should also remind the locals of their duty to report to the authorities,... etc.

No. 32. There are many abuses (or as they say ugales) which the natives practice against our holy faith and good customs, among others of which are the following. First, the above-mentioned idolatry of the nonos. In regard to this it must be noted that the word nono does not alone signify “grandfather,” but that it also is used as a term of respect to the old men and genii. The Indians comprise these under the word nono, just as the Chinese do under the word Espiritus [i. e., “spirits”], and the Romans under the word “Gods,” which other called Lares, Penates, etc. With the above-mentioned genii or nonos the Indians perform many acts of idolatry frequently, such as for example, asking permission, relief, and aid from them, and that they do the people no harm, and that they do not prove hostile to them, etc. They make such requests on many occasions, and among others are the following. When they wish to pluck any flower or fruit from the tree, [105]they ask permission from the nono or genius to pluck it. When they pass certain fields, rivers, creeks, or streamlets, large trees, sugar-cane plantations and other places, they ask permission and good passage from the genii or nonos. When they are obliged to cut any tree, or not to observe the things or ceremonies which they imagine to be pleasing to the genii or nonos, they ask pardon of them, and excuse themselves to those beings by saying, among many other things, that the father commanded them to do it, and that they are not willingly lacking in respect to the genii, or that they do not willingly oppose their will, etc. When they are taken with the sickness that they call pamave, which they attribute to the genii or nonos (although they try to conceal this by saying that the country [has not?] agreed with them) they ask them for health and offer them food. They do that both on this, and many other occasions, in the fields, sugar-cane plantations, streamlets, at the foot of any large tree, more generally some calunpan,2 and in various other places. This sort of idolatry is very deeply rooted and of long standing among the Indians. Consequently, it is very necessary for the father ministers to be very careful and make great efforts to extirpate it, and not avoid any labor or work until it is annihilated.

No. 32. There are many abuses (or as they call them ugales) that the natives commit against our holy faith and good customs, including the following. First, the aforementioned idolatry of the nonos. It’s important to note that the word nono doesn’t just mean “grandfather,” but it’s also used as a term of respect for old men and spirits. The Indians use the term nono for these beings, similar to how the Chinese refer to them as Espiritus [i.e., “spirits”] and the Romans called them “Gods,” which they referred to as Lares, Penates, etc. Regarding the previously mentioned spirits or nonos, the Indians frequently engage in various acts of idolatry, such as asking for permission, help, and protection from them, hoping they don’t harm the people or become hostile, etc. They make such requests on many occasions, including the following. When they want to pick any flower or fruit from a tree, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] they seek permission from the nono or spirit to do so. When passing by certain fields, rivers, creeks, or streams, large trees, sugar-cane fields, and other places, they ask the spirits or nonos for a good passage. If they have to cut down a tree or skip rituals or ceremonies they believe please the spirits or nonos, they ask for forgiveness and excuse themselves by saying, among many other things, that their father commanded them to act this way, asserting that they do not intentionally disrespect the spirits or deliberately oppose their will, etc. When they suffer from an illness they refer to as pamave, which they attribute to the spirits or nonos (though they often claim that it’s just due to the country not agreeing with them), they pray for healing and offer them food. They do this on various occasions, in fields, sugar-cane plantations, by streams, at the base of large trees, particularly near some calunpan,2 and in various other spots. This type of idolatry is deeply ingrained and has been longstanding among the Indians. Therefore, it is crucial for the father ministers to be very cautious and to make significant efforts to eliminate it, not shirking from any labor until it is completely eradicated.

No. 33. Secondly, the Indians very generally believe [106]that the souls of the dead return to their houses the third day after their death, in order to visit the people of it, or to be present at the banquet, and consequently, to be present at the ceremony of the tibao. They conceal and hide that by saying that they are assembling in the house of the deceased in order to recite the rosary for him. If they are told to do their praying in the church, they refuse to comply because that is not what they wish to do. Consequently, the minister will prevent the gathering at the house of the deceased after the burial, and will not allow the people to ascend into the house under any considerations, least of all on the third day. On the fourth day, in consequence of the said ceremony of the tibao, or because of their evil inclination, they light candles in order to wait for the soul of the deceased. They spread a mat, on which they scatter ashes, so that the tracks or footsteps of the soul may be impressed thereon; and by that means they are able to ascertain whether the soul came or not. They also set a dish of water at the door, so that when the soul comes it may wash its feet there. It does not appear that it would be much to say that those matters of the nonos or genii and the deceased were taken by the Indians from the Sangleys who are reared with various things [of belief].3 It needs a strong remedy nevertheless.

No. 33. Secondly, the Indians generally believe [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] that the souls of the deceased return to their homes on the third day after death to visit the living or attend the feast, and consequently, to participate in the ceremony of the tibao. They disguise this by saying they are gathering at the house of the deceased to pray the rosary for him. If they are asked to pray in the church, they refuse because that's not what they want to do. As a result, the minister prevents gatherings at the home of the deceased after the burial and won’t allow people to enter the house under any circumstances, especially not on the third day. On the fourth day, due to the ceremony of the tibao or their own inclinations, they light candles to await the soul of the deceased. They lay out a mat and scatter ashes on it so that the tracks or footsteps of the soul can be left there; this way, they can tell if the soul has arrived. They also place a dish of water at the door so when the soul comes, it can wash its feet. It seems quite likely that these notions about the nonos or genii and the deceased were influenced by the Sangleys, who hold various beliefs. 3 However, it undoubtedly requires a strong remedy.

No. 34. The tigbalāg which some call a ghost and others a goblin, appears to be the genius or devil, who appears to them in the shape of a black man, or [107]in the shape of an old man (or as they express it in the shape of a very small old man), or in the shape of a horse, or of a monster, etc. That being inspires them with so great fear that they come to make friendship with him, and surrender their rosaries to him, and receive from him superstitious things, such as hairs, herbs, stones, and other things, in order that they may obtain marvelous things, and that they may be aided by him in certain of their affairs.

No. 34. The tigbalāg, which some call a ghost and others a goblin, seems to be a spirit or devil that shows up in the form of a Black man, or [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] as an old man (or as they put it, a very small old man), or in the shape of a horse, or a monster, and so on. This being instills such great fear that people end up forming a friendship with him, surrendering their rosaries, and receiving superstitious items from him, like hairs, herbs, stones, and other things, so they can achieve amazing feats and get help from him in certain matters.

No. 35. The patianac whom some also call a goblin (but it is only their invention, dream, or imagination) must be the genius or devil who generally plays with them as also with many others, when losing the faith, they espouse his cause, become familiar with him, or become subject to him. They attribute to this being the ill success of births, and say that in order to harm them and cause their destruction, he enters or hides in some tree or in any other place near the house of the woman who is about to give birth, and there they sing like those who wander about, etc. In order to prevent any harm from the patianac, the men take their position naked and with their privies exposed to the air; and arm themselves with shield, catan, lance, and other arms. In this condition they stand on the ridgepole of the roof, and also under the house, and in all places they slash and cut right and left with the catan and make various gestures and set movements for the same purpose. Others, in order to prevent said harm, generally move the woman who is about to give birth to another house, for they say that her house contains a patianac.

No. 35. The patianac, sometimes referred to as a goblin (but that’s just a name someone made up), is viewed as a spirit or devil that usually interacts with them and many others when they lose their faith, side with him, or become under his influence. They blame this being for childbirth issues and believe that to bring harm and cause destruction, he hides in a tree or any location near the house of the woman about to give birth, singing like wanderers do, etc. To protect against the patianac, men stand naked with their privates exposed, armed with shields, swords, spears, and other weapons. In this state, they position themselves on the roof ridge, under the house, and in other places, slashing and cutting in all directions with the sword while performing various gestures and movements for the same reason. Others, to prevent any harm, often move the woman who is about to give birth to a different house, as they believe her original house harbors a patianac.

No. 36. Among other things they also attribute to the patianac the death of children, as well as to [108]the usang. They refer to them in the following manner. They assert that the bird called tictic is the pander of the sorcerer called usang. Flying ahead of that being, the bird shows it the houses where infants are to be born. That being takes its position on the roof of the neighboring house and thence extends its tongue in the form of a thread, which it inserts through the anus of the child and by that means sucks out its entrails and kills it. Sometimes they say that it appears in the form of a dog, sometimes of a cat, sometimes of the cockroach which crawls under the mat, and there accomplishes the abovesaid. In order to avoid that harm they do certain of the above things. To the patianac travelers also attribute their straying from or losing their road. In order to keep the right path, they undress and expose their privies to the air, and by that observance they say that they make sure of the right road; for then the patianac is afraid of them and cannot lead them astray.

No. 36. Among other things, they also blame the patianac for the deaths of children, as well as to [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]the usang. They describe them in the following way. They claim that the bird called tictic is the helper of the sorcerer known as usang. Flying ahead of that entity, the bird points out the houses where babies are about to be born. That being positions itself on the roof of the nearby house and then extends its tongue in the form of a thread, which it inserts through the baby's anus, thereby sucking out its insides and killing it. Sometimes they say it takes the shape of a dog, sometimes a cat, and at times the cockroach that crawls under the mat, and it carries out its actions as mentioned above. To avoid that danger, they perform certain rituals. Travelers also blame the patianac for getting lost or straying from their path. To stay on the right track, they undress and expose their private parts to the air, and by doing this, they believe they can ensure they won't get lost; for then the patianac is afraid of them and cannot lead them astray.

No. 37. The bongsol they sometimes assert to be various durojones which are caused by the sorcerer ganay, and which run all through the body of the bewitched, who generally remains some moments as if dead or in a faint, and at other times as though mad or raving from the sight of the ganay who appears to them in various shapes. In order to cure this sickness or enchantment, they summon another sorcerer, and he after the incantations or efforts, which will be told later, generally leaves the patient as he was before. Sometimes they say that that sickness appears to be natural or a stomach ache caused by the obstructions or durojones which grow in the stomach or in the patient’s side or by [109]shivers which move from one place to another, and from which the women of this country generally suffer. But when they are unable to cure the pain with the promptness that they desire, they generally say, especially the physicians, that the said sickness is bongsol, that is enchantment, and that it can be cured only by the one who is of the faculty, that is by one who is a sorcerer. They then bring a sorcerer, who performs the things that pertain to his faculty, and summons the first sorcerer who they say caused that sorcery. If the sickness is not lessened, the sorcerer finishes his duty by saying that the said first witch is very far away, and could not hear him; and consequently, it has happened that he has not been able to cure the said sickness. In such wise do they leave the sick person with his pains.

No. 37. The bongsol is sometimes claimed to be various durojones caused by the sorcerer ganay, which spread throughout the body of the bewitched person, who often appears to be dead or faint for a while, and at other times seems mad or raving at the sight of the ganay who takes on different forms. To treat this illness or enchantment, they call in another sorcerer. After performing incantations or other efforts, which will be explained later, he usually leaves the patient as they were before. Sometimes this illness is thought to be natural or a stomach ache caused by obstructions or durojones that form in the stomach or side, or by [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]shivers that move around, which the women of this region often experience. However, when they can’t relieve the pain quickly enough, especially the doctors, they often claim that the illness is bongsol, meaning enchantment, and that it can only be cured by someone skilled, meaning a sorcerer. They then bring in a sorcerer who performs the rites specific to his expertise and calls upon the original sorcerer believed to have caused the enchantment. If the illness doesn't improve, the sorcerer concludes his duties by saying that the original witch is very far away and couldn’t hear him; thus, he was unable to cure the illness. This is how they leave the suffering person to endure their pain.

No. 38. The ceremony or superstition of bilao is ordered for the discovery thereby of any thief. It is reduced to placing in a bilao, sieve, or screen, some scissors fastened at the point in the shape of the cross of St. Andrew, and in them they hang their rosary. Then they repeat the name of each one of those who are present and who are assembled for this. If, for example, when the name Pedro is mentioned, the bilao shakes, they say that Pedro is the thief. They also are accustomed to light candles to St. Anthony of Padua for the purpose of discovering the thief of anything [that is stolen]. For this they kneel down to pray (and perhaps to utter and perform indecent things) and wait until the flame leans toward any of those about, for instance, toward Juan, and then they declare that Juan is the thief. It is very usual for the Indians to carry about them various things in order that they might obtain [110]marvelous effects: for example, written formulas, prayers, vitiated or interspersed with words arranged for their evil intent, herbs, roots, bark, hairs, skin, bones, stones, etc., so that they may not be killed, or apprehended by justice, or to obtain wealth, women, or other things.4 They are also very much inclined to believe in omens and in unlucky days, in regard to which they are wont to keep various books of manuscripts which must be burned for them.

No. 38. The ceremony or superstition of bilao is meant to uncover any thief. It involves placing some scissors, fastened at the point in the shape of the cross of St. Andrew, in a bilao, sieve, or screen, and hanging their rosary on it. Then, they call out the name of each person present for this purpose. For instance, if the name Pedro is mentioned and the bilao shakes, they conclude that Pedro is the thief. They also commonly light candles to St. Anthony of Padua to help discover who has stolen something. For this, they kneel to pray (and possibly engage in inappropriate actions) and watch until the candle flame tilts towards someone, say, toward Juan, and then they declare that Juan is the thief. It's quite common for the Indians to carry various items to achieve [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] extraordinary results: for example, written spells, prayers, corrupted or mixed with words arranged for harmful purposes, herbs, roots, bark, hair, skin, bones, stones, etc., so they won't be harmed, caught by the law, or to gain wealth, women, or other things.4 They also tend to believe in omens and unlucky days, keeping various manuscript books that need to be burned for them.

No. 39. The natives are accustomed to circumcise the boys; and although they perform the circumcision by slitting the skin of the penis lengthwise, instead of around, still it appears that that may be accounted for by the fact that it is inferred that that ceremony was introduced into Philipinas, by the Moros from Borneo, Mindanao, or Holo, as was also the word biñag, which is used for “baptize,” and to mean “Christian,” and the word simba, which appears to mean “adoration” among them. From this use they transfer it to their temples and mosques, and the Tagálogs took it not to mean “adoration,” but “church,” and afterward used it to mean “mass,” which it never could mean. Not only do they circumcise the males but also the women, girls, or dalagas, [an operation] which they call sonad. It is reduced to cutting the organ or opening it up somewhat. However, some of them, and very reasonably, affirm that that ceremony in them in itself in both males and females is rather the offspring of lust than that of Judaism. They are also accustomed to measure or compare the weapons that they make, for [111]example, measuring the catan by spans and praying at the same time the “Our Father.” If the conclusion of the measuring is reached at the same time or when they come to the word “forgive us” they say that they cannot be punished, but that they may kill people, etc. It appears that the custom has been introduced among women who have recently brought forth of not going to church until the fortieth or sixtieth day as they say of the purification of their bodies. In that not only do they fail in the precept to hear mass but they also perform a Mosaic ceremony.

No. 39. The locals customarily circumcise boys; and although they perform the circumcision by slicing the skin of the penis lengthwise, rather than in a ring, this may be due to the belief that the practice was brought to the Philippines by the Moros from Borneo, Mindanao, or Holo. The word biñag, meaning “baptize,” which is also associated with “Christian,” and the word simba, which seems to mean “adoration” among them, came with this practice. They use it in reference to their temples and mosques. The Tagálogs adopted it not to mean “adoration,” but “church,” and later used it to refer to “mass,” which it never really meant. They don't just circumcise males; they also circumcise females, girls, or dalagas, in a procedure they call sonad. This involves cutting or partially opening the organ. However, some people, quite reasonably, argue that this ceremony in both males and females is more about lust than it is about Judaism. They are also known to measure or compare the weapons they make, for example, measuring the katana by spans while simultaneously praying the “Our Father.” If they finish measuring at the moment they say the words “forgive us,” they believe they can’t be punished and might even kill someone, etc. There’s also a custom among women who have just given birth where they don’t go to church until the fortieth or sixtieth day, as they say, to purify their bodies. By doing so, they not only neglect the obligation to attend mass but also perform a Mosaic ceremony.

No. 40. The Indians are generally corrupted by many errors, and it would take a long time to mention them. Consequently, the ministers will be very careful to uproot them, for although it does not cause any great harm in some because of their ignorance and lack of intelligence, in others they do cause great harm; for example Angel catutubo, which literally signifies “that my guardian angel was born with me or at the same time as I.” In order to avoid danger, one should say, Angel taga tanor, and the same thing in other languages.

No. 40. The Indigenous people are generally misled by many misconceptions, and it would take a long time to list them all. Therefore, the ministers will be very careful to eliminate these errors, because while they may not cause significant harm to some due to their ignorance and lack of understanding, they can be very harmful to others; for example, Angel catutubo, which literally means “my guardian angel was born with me or at the same time as I.” To avoid problems, one should say Angel taga tanor, and the same applies in other languages.

No. 41. Finally, so many are the superstitions, omens, and errors, that are found among the Indians that it would be very difficult or impossible to mention them all. The above have been mentioned so that the father ministers may examine others by them. It is to be noted that there are sectarians and preachers of various false sects among the Indians, especially in the distant provinces, either because they had false sects formerly and have continued them, or because they took them (and this is more likely) from the Joloans, Mindanaos, Sangleys, and [112]other heathen nations with whom they are accustomed to have intercourse.

No. 41. There are so many superstitions, omens, and mistakes among the Indigenous people that it would be very difficult, if not impossible, to list them all. The ones mentioned above are noted so that the father ministers can examine others in relation to them. It's important to point out that there are followers and preachers of various false beliefs among the Indigenous people, especially in remote provinces. This is either because they continued with false beliefs from before or, more likely, because they adopted them from the Joloans, Mindanaos, Sangleys, and other non-Christian nations they interact with.

No. 42. When the moon is eclipsed, the Indians of various districts generally go out into the street or into the open fields, with bells, panastanes,5 etc. They strike them with great force and violence in order that they might thereby protect the moon which they say is being eaten or swallowed by the dragon, tiger, or crocodile. And the worst thing is that if they wish to say “the eclipse of the moon” it is very common in Philipinas to use this locution, saying “the dragon, tiger, or crocodile is swallowing the moon.” The Tagálogs also make use of it and say, Linamon laho bovan. It appears that the Indians learned all this from the Sangleys of China, where all the abovesaid is performed and executed to the letter. It is not right to allow them to retain these deceits of the Chinese, and not to teach them our customs and truths. All the above contents of this section is not universal in all parts. Consequently, although all ministers ought to be careful to ascertain whether they are or are not contained in their ministries, they ought not to go ahead to censure what they are not sure of, for that very thing would perhaps teach them what we are endeavoring to extirpate. [113]

No. 42. When there's a lunar eclipse, people from various Indian communities usually head out into the streets or open fields with bells, panastanes, 5 etc. They hit these items with great intensity to try to protect the moon, which they believe is being eaten or swallowed by a dragon, tiger, or crocodile. The unfortunate thing is that when they talk about “the eclipse of the moon,” it’s common in the Philippines to say, “the dragon, tiger, or crocodile is swallowing the moon.” The Tagálogs also use this phrase, saying, Linamon laho bovan. It seems that the Indians learned this from the Sangleys of China, where the same practices are followed exactly. It’s not right to let them keep these Chinese superstitions and not teach them our customs and truths. The content of this section isn’t universal across all areas. Therefore, while all ministers should be careful to find out whether these practices are present in their ministries, they shouldn’t rush to criticize what they aren’t sure about, as that might inadvertently teach them what we’re trying to eliminate. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The people of the Philippines

[Joaquin Martinez de Zúñiga, O. S. A., in his Historia (Sampaloc, 1803),6 pp. 19–38, devotes one chapter to the inhabitants of the Philippines. We translate from the copy belonging to the library of E. E. Ayer.] [114]

[Joaquin Martinez de Zúñiga, O. S. A., in his Historia (Sampaloc, 1803),6 pp. 19–38, dedicates a chapter to the people of the Philippines. We translate from the copy held in E. E. Ayer's library.] [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter II

Of the inhabitants whom the Spaniards found in the Philipinas, and of their language, customs, and religion.

About the people that the Spaniards encountered in the Philippines, as well as their language, customs, and religion.

Our historians, always inclined to the marvelous, divide the peoples whom the Spaniards found in the Philipinas into three classes. In their histories there is not a lack of satyrs, men with tails, and mermen, and whatever else can cause wonder in human nature. But truly, only two classes of people are found, namely, those whom we know by the name of Aetas or Negritos,7 and the Indians. The Negritos [115]are small, not so black as those of Guinea, and have kinky hair and flat noses. They live naked in the mountains, and only cover themselves in front with the bark of a tree. They live on roots and the deer which they hunt with arrows in which they are very skilful. They sleep where night overtakes them. They have no idea of religion, so that they resemble wild beasts rather than men. The effort has been made to domesticate and christianize them, and they are not much opposed to it, provided that they are given food to eat. But if they are ordered to work to support their family, they return to the mountain although they have just been baptized. For that reason they are not now baptized although they agree to it, except some children whom the Indians or Spaniards generally have in their houses. Even in this case, one cannot be secure of them for when they grow up they generally return to the mountains with their fellowcountrymen. Beyond all doubt those Negritos are the first settlers of these islands, and retired to the mountains when the Indians came hither. The latter inhabit the coasts, and formerly the Negritos waged continual war with them, and would not permit them to cut wood in the mountains unless they paid tribute to them. Today they have but little power, and yet they are feared; for whenever any Negrito is killed, or when any one dies suddenly, another Negrito generally offers himself among his companions and takes an oath not to return to his own people until he kills three or four Indians. He does it by lying in ambush in their villages [116]and by treacherously killing in the mountains him who becomes separated from his companions.

Our historians, always fascinated by the extraordinary, categorize the people the Spaniards encountered in the Philippines into three groups. Their accounts are filled with satyrs, men with tails, mermen, and other wonders of human nature. However, in reality, there are only two groups of people: those known as Aetas or Negritos, and the Indians. The Negritos [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] are shorter, not as dark as those from Guinea, and have curly hair and flat noses. They live shirtless in the mountains and only cover themselves in front with tree bark. Their diet consists of roots and deer that they skillfully hunt with arrows. They sleep where night finds them. They have no concept of religion, resembling wild animals more than humans. Efforts have been made to domesticate and Christianize them, and they are generally open to it if given food to eat. However, if asked to work to support their families, they retreat to the mountains, even after being baptized. For this reason, they are not baptized now, except for some children that the Indians or Spaniards usually have in their homes. Even then, one cannot be sure of them, as when they grow up, they typically return to the mountains with their people. Undoubtedly, these Negritos are the original settlers of these islands and retreated to the mountains when the Indians arrived. The latter inhabit the coasts, and previously, the Negritos fought continuous battles with them, not allowing them to gather wood in the mountains unless they paid tribute. Today, they have little power, yet they are still feared; whenever a Negrito is killed or someone dies suddenly, another Negrito among his companions typically vows not to return to his people until he has killed three or four Indians. He accomplishes this by lying in wait in their villages [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and by treacherously killing anyone who strays from his group in the mountains.

Some believe the origin of these Negritos to be that they came from the negros of Angola,8 and the reason why they are not so black as their ancestors consists, they say, in the climate of these Indias which is more moderate. That might be so, for it is as easy for him who changes his climate to decrease in blackness during a long series of generations as it is for him to increase it by living in an inclement climate. But the flat nose and the use of the dialect of the same language which the Indians of these islands use, proves sufficiently that their origin is one and the same with them. The fact that they are blacker than the Indians, depends only on their having lived many centuries in the water by night and day, in wind and sun, and exposed to all the inclemencies of the weather. That and their lack of government has transferred them to their almost wild condition in which we see them.

Some people believe that the origin of these Negritos is that they came from the Black people of Angola, and they say the reason they are not as black as their ancestors is the milder climate of these islands. This could be true, as it is just as easy for someone who moves to a different climate to become less black over many generations as it is for them to become darker by living in a harsher climate. However, their flat noses and the fact that they speak a dialect of the same language used by the native people of these islands clearly indicate that they share the same origin. Their darker skin compared to the natives is likely due to centuries of living in water day and night, enduring wind and sun, and being exposed to all kinds of weather. This and their lack of organized government have contributed to their nearly wild state as we see them now.

The Indians whom the Spaniards found here were of average stature, olive color, or the color of boiled quinces, large eyes, flat noses, and straight hair. All had some form of government more or less civilized. They were distinguished by different names, but their features and customs prove that the origin of all these people is one and the same, and that they did not compose different races. They had their own petty rulers, who were generally the most valiant, or those who had inherited the kingdom from their fathers, if they could conserve it. Their dominion [117]extended over one or two rude settlements, or at most was according to the valor of him who ruled. They were continually at war with the neighboring settlements, and made one another slaves. From those wars there resulted three classes of people among them: namely, the chiefs who were the masters of the settlement; the slaves; and the freemen, who consisted of slaves or their descendants to whom their masters had given freedom. The last class are called Timavas even yet, which properly signifies “freed-man.” In some districts Indians are found who are whiter than others—descendants doubtless of some Chinese or Japanese, who were shipwrecked on these coasts, and whom the Indians naturally hospitably received and with whom they mingled. That is commonly believed in regard to the Ygorrotes of Ylocos.9 Their eyes, similar to those of the Chinese, prove that they mingled with the companions of Limahon who fled to those mountains when Juan de Salcedo had besieged them in Pangasinan.

The Native Americans that the Spaniards encountered here were of average height, had an olive or boiled quince skin tone, large eyes, flat noses, and straight hair. They all had some form of government that was somewhat civilized. While they were known by different names, their features and customs show that all these people share the same origin and do not belong to different races. They had their own small rulers, typically the bravest among them or those who inherited their kingdom from their fathers, as long as they could maintain it. Their rule extended over one or two crude settlements, or it depended on the strength of the one in charge. They were constantly at war with neighboring settlements and often took each other as slaves. This warfare led to three classes of people among them: the chiefs who controlled the settlements, the slaves, and the freemen, who were former slaves or their descendants who had been granted freedom by their masters. The latter class is still referred to as Timavas, meaning “freed-man.” In some areas, you find Native Americans who are lighter-skinned than others—likely descendants of some Chinese or Japanese individuals who were shipwrecked on these shores and were hospitably received and mixed with the natives. This is commonly believed regarding the Ygorrotes of Ylocos. Their eyes, which resemble those of the Chinese, suggest they mixed with the companions of Limahon, who fled to those mountains when Juan de Salcedo besieged them in Pangasinan.

It is not easy to prove the origin of these peoples but their language might supply some light. Although the languages spoken by the Indians are many and diverse, they resemble one another so closely that it is recognized clearly that they are all dialects of one and the same tongue, as the Spanish, French, and Italian are of the Latin. The prepositions and pronouns are almost the same in all of them, [118]the numerals differ but slightly, many words are common to all, and they have the same structure. This language, which is one single language, with different dialects, is spoken from Madagascar to Philipinas and no one can contradict this.10 I add that it is spoken in Nueva Guinea and in all the lands of the south, in the Marianas, in the islands of San Duisk, in those of Otayti,11 and in almost all the islands of the South Sea. In a collection of voyages wherein are found several dictionaries of the terms which the travelers could learn in each one of these islands I have seen with wonder that the pronouns are almost all the same; that in the Tagálogs the numerals resemble those of any other language of these islands, and most of the words are the same and have the same meaning as in the Tagálog language. But the thing which made me believe more in the identity of these languages was my examination of Don Juan Hovel, an Englishman, who spoke the dialect of San Duisk with a servant of his who was a native of those [119]islands. I found that the construction was the same as that of the languages which are spoken in Philipinas. Consequently, I had no reason to doubt that all these languages are dialects of one speech which is the most extensive in the world, and which is spoken through many thousands of leguas from Madagascar to the islands of San Duisk, Otayti, and the island of Pasquas12 which is not six hundred leguas distant from America; and the fact that the Indians of Philipinas do not understand the peoples of those islands when they pass through their lands does not offer any argument against this supposition, for neither do the Spaniards understand the French, nor in these islands do those of some provinces understand one another.

It’s not easy to prove the origins of these people, but their language might provide some clues. Although the languages spoken by the Indigenous peoples are many and varied, they are so similar that it’s clear they are all dialects of a single language, much like Spanish, French, and Italian are derived from Latin. The prepositions and pronouns are nearly identical across all of them, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] the numerals vary only slightly, many words are shared among them, and they have the same structure. This language, which is one language with different dialects, is spoken from Madagascar to the Philippines, and no one can dispute this.10 I also note that it's spoken in New Guinea and all the southern lands, in the Marianas, in the San Duisk islands, in the islands of Tahiti,11 and in almost all the islands of the South Sea. In a collection of voyages containing several dictionaries of the terms that travelers could learn in each of these islands, I was amazed to find that the pronouns are almost all the same; that in the Tagalogs, the numerals resemble those in any other language of these islands, and most of the words are the same and have the same meaning as in the Tagalog language. What convinced me even more about the identity of these languages was my examination of Don Juan Hovel, an Englishman, who spoke the dialect of San Duisk with his servant, a native of those [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] islands. I discovered that the structure was the same as that of the languages spoken in the Philippines. Therefore, I had no reason to doubt that all these languages are dialects of a single language which is the most widespread in the world, spoken over many thousands of leagues from Madagascar to the islands of San Duisk, Tahiti, and Easter Island12 which is less than six hundred leagues away from America; and the fact that the Indigenous people of the Philippines do not understand the people from those islands when they travel through does not argue against this assumption, for neither do Spaniards understand French, nor do people from some provinces in these islands understand each other.

In the same collection of voyages, I found a dictionary of only five terms which the Spaniards were able to learn in the Patagonian coast. One of those terms was Baláy13 which signifies “house” in that language; and with that same word do the Pampangos and Visayans designate house. It may be a mere coincidence which does not prove that the languages of various people are identical. But, seeing that in addition to this the names of South America sound like those of Philipinas, I tried to find some dictionary of that land. Not finding one I examined carefully the few words of the language of Chile which Ercilla has in his Araucana,14 and I found them [120]sufficiently like the Tagálog language. The name “Chile” is not strange to this language where the cormorant is called “cachile.” It is also a pronoun which the Malays apply to the sons of kings. “Chilian,” which is a village of Chile, is a Tagálog composition, in which, adding an “an,” we have a word which signifies “place,” and we get “cachilian” which signifies “place where there are cormorants.” Mapocho, the site of the city of Santiago, is another Tagálog composition that signifies “place.” Thus from pocquiot, a kind of herb, we get mapocquiot, a place where that plant abounds. Apo is the name given to him who governs, and that name is applied by these Indians to him who has any authority in the village. In Chile, words and phrases are reduplicated: as Ytayta, Biobio, Lemolemo, Colocolo, etc. The same is done in the Tagálog and thus we say: Ataata, Bilobilo, Lebomlebom, and Colocolo. The other words are either Tagálog or very similar, and the connection that is found in so few words in these two languages is [too] great to say that it is accident, although it is not sufficient so that we can say that they are dialects of one language. [121]

In the same collection of voyages, I found a dictionary containing just five terms that the Spaniards learned along the Patagonian coast. One of those terms was Baláy13, which means “house” in that language; and the Pampangos and Visayans also use that word to refer to a house. It could be just a coincidence that doesn't prove the languages of different people are identical. But noticing that in addition to this, the names of South America sound similar to those in the Philippines, I looked for a dictionary from that area. Not finding one, I closely examined the few words in the Chilean language that Ercilla included in his Araucana,14 and found them [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] fairly similar to the Tagálog language. The name "Chile" isn’t unfamiliar in this language where the cormorant is referred to as “cachile.” It is also a pronoun the Malays use for the sons of kings. “Chilian,” which is a village in Chile, is a Tagálog word formation, where adding an “an” gives us a term meaning “place,” resulting in “cachilian,” which means “place where there are cormorants.” Mapocho, the location of the city of Santiago, is another Tagálog creation that means “place.” From pocquiot, a type of herb, we derive mapocquiot, meaning a place where that plant is abundant. Apo is the title given to someone in charge, and that name is used by these Indigenous people for anyone with authority in the village. In Chile, words and phrases are often reduplicated, like Ytayta, Biobio, Lemolemo, Colocolo, etc. The same practice occurs in Tagálog, where we say: Ataata, Bilobilo, Lebomlebom, and Colocolo. The other words are either Tagálog or very similar, and the connection between the limited words in these two languages is [too] significant to dismiss as mere coincidence, although it's not enough to claim they are dialects of a single language. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

If on a comparison of the grammar and dictions of these two languages it is found that they originate from one and the same tongue, I would be so bold as to say that the Indians of Philipinas originate from the Indians of South America, and that the language of the latter is the parent language of which all the languages of these islands are dialects. Many will consider this a paradox, for the Malays being so near it would appear that the Filipinos must have originated from them, as our authors have generally believed. I cannot deny that these islands could have been easily settled by the Malays; but how shall we account for the peopling of the islands of Palaos and Marianas which are more than three hundred leguas distant? Where shall we get at those who settled the islands of San Duisk and Otayti, which are two thousand leguas from Philipinas? All these people have the same language, the same features, the same customs, and consequently, the same origin as our Indians. It is impossible that people should go from Philipinas to people those lands, for the east wind dominates constantly throughout the torrid zone, and that wind blowing head on would not permit the ship to sail to those islands. Rather on the contrary we must believe that the inhabitants of all the islands of the South Sea came from the Orient with wind astern as we have seen happen to the Indians of Palaos,15 who have come to our Philipinas several times driven by the wind, and the east winds have not allowed them to return to their land. Let us [122]suppose that if then these islands were not peopled, those Indians would have been the first settlers. We do not know whether our Indians by a like accident, have been carried by the winds to the Oriental islands. On the contrary we believe the opposite, since at times the best pilots cannot make that navigation, and return without finding the islands whither they were sailing, as it is necessary to take a high latitude for that voyage. On this head we must seek the easiest solution, namely, that the settlers came from the east from island to island. Consequently, the most eastern land where the Tagálog language is found must be the country whence our Indians originate.

If, when comparing the grammar and vocabulary of these two languages, it turns out they come from the same root language, I'd be bold enough to suggest that the Filipinos are descended from the Indians of South America, and that their language is the foundation for all the languages spoken in these islands. Many might find this hard to believe, since the Malays are so close by, leading most authors to assume that Filipinos must have originated from them. While I can't deny that the Malays could have easily settled these islands, how do we explain the populations of Palau and the Marianas, which are over three hundred leagues away? What about the people who settled San Duisk and Otayti, which are two thousand leagues from the Philippines? All these groups share the same language, similar features, comparable customs, and thus, a common origin to our Indians. It seems unlikely that people would travel from the Philippines to populate those lands because the east wind constantly blows through the tropical zone, making it impossible for ships to navigate to those islands. Conversely, we should consider that the inhabitants of all the islands in the South Sea came from the East with the wind at their backs, as we've seen happen with the Indians of Palau, who have come to our Philippines several times driven by the wind, only to find that easterly winds prevented their return. Let’s suppose that if these islands were uninhabited, those Indians would have been the first settlers. We don’t know if our Indians were similarly swept away by the winds to the Oriental islands. On the contrary, we believe the opposite to be true since even the best navigators sometimes struggle to find those lands and return without locating the islands they intended to reach, as they must travel at high latitudes for that journey. Therefore, we must find the simplest explanation: that settlers moved from island to island starting from the east. Thus, the furthest eastern land where the Tagalog language is spoken must be where our Indians originated.

One could well hesitate to assent to this truth, moved by the fact that the use of writing in the manner employed by the Malays was found established among these Indians, but it could very well happen that they might derive their origin from other nations and learn to write from the Malays, who would learn that science from the continent of India. The method of writing was by forming the lines from top to bottom, and beginning at the left and finishing at the right as did the Hebrews and Chinese. Their characters were quite different from ours. They had no vowels, for since there are only three vowels in those languages, namely, the a, e, and u, by placing a point above or below the consonant, or by not placing any point, it is easily known what the vowel is, which corresponds to the consonant letter, and it is read very well without the necessity of vowels. Although they knew how to write these people had no written laws, and governed themselves according to their traditions, [123]and by natural law corrupted by the passions. The civil suits were sentenced by the petty rulers with the assistance of some old men. In criminal matters the relatives generally showed justice or it was settled with the aggressor on a gold basis in particular unless death followed. But in that case they did not content themselves except with the penalty of retaliation. If the murderer was of another settlement common cause was made, and the entire village fought against the settlement, from which resulted murders and wars in which slaves were made mutually. When it was suspected that one had robbed another, he was obliged to take a stone from a kettle filled with boiling water. If he did not do it (which we called the vulgar clearance from guilt), he was fined a certain sum of gold, the greater part of which went to the petty ruler. Adultery was punished by a pecuniary fine, as was also lack of respect for old people. But trickery in contracts was not considered wrong and was not punished by any penalty; and usury was common among them in all transactions.

One might hesitate to agree with this truth, noting that the writing style used by the Malays was also found among these Indians. However, it's possible that they originated from other nations and learned to write from the Malays, who themselves learned this writing from the continent of India. The writing method involved forming lines from top to bottom, starting on the left and ending on the right, similar to how the Hebrews and Chinese wrote. Their characters were quite different from ours, lacking vowels. Since those languages only had three vowels: a, e, and u, they indicated the vowel by placing a point above or below the consonant, or leaving it blank, making it easy to identify the corresponding vowel for each consonant and read without needing vowels. Although they could write, these people had no written laws and governed themselves based on traditions [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and a natural law distorted by passions. Civil disputes were settled by local rulers with help from some elders. In criminal cases, the relatives usually administered justice, or it was resolved with the offender through monetary compensation, unless it resulted in death. In that case, they would only accept retaliation as a penalty. If the murderer belonged to another settlement, the entire village would unite and fight against that settlement, leading to mutual killings and wars in which slaves were taken from both sides. When someone was suspected of theft, they had to take a stone from a kettle of boiling water. If they didn't do this (what we would call a common test of innocence), they were fined a certain amount of gold, most of which went to the local ruler. Adultery was punished with a monetary fine, as was disrespect towards elders. However, deceit in contracts wasn’t considered wrong and faced no penalties, and usury was common in all their transactions.

Their customs at marriage were very peculiar. They married only one woman. The chiefs however, had several concubines, who were commonly slaves. They generally married their nearest relative, provided she were not a sister, for they could not contract marriage with sisters. When they grew tired of their wife, they returned her to her parents. It was unnecessary to give cause for the divorce, for it was sufficient to give up the dowry which he himself had given when he was married. That dowry was of two kinds and was always paid by the bridegroom. One kind was called bigay suso, and was the payment for the milk which the mother had given to [124]the damsel, by which he obtained her completely. The other was called bigay caya and was the real dowry. It was given to those recently married for their support. At times, however, the expense of the wedding was discounted from it, as well as the clothes, so that very little or nothing at all remained for the recently married couple. Besides the bridegroom giving that dowry, he had to serve the parents of the bride for some years; to feast them on certain days; to assist in the sowing of the rice and the harvest, and to carry food to the laborers. All the relatives of the bridegroom had to be obsequious to the bride, to her parents, and to all her relatives, so long as those years of service lasted. If they failed in any point, the marriage was dissolved, a thing which was very agreeable to the parents of the woman, for then a new suitor appeared, and they began to suck his blood again. In retaliation for what the bridegroom suffered before marriage, he treated his wife like a slave after marriage. She had to find the sustenance for the family, while her husband was off enjoying himself, and she considered herself fortunate if after that he did not beat her. The self-interest of the parents in their daughters in which this pernicious custom is observed, has been the reason why it has been impossible to uproot this hitherto, notwithstanding the royal cedulas and the decrees of the bishops which prohibit it. The ceremony of the marriage was performed with the sacrifice of a hog, which a priestess killed after going through a thousand gestures. She blessed the couple abundantly, and afterward the old women gave them food in a dish and gave vent to many obscenities, after which the couple were pronounced [125]married. Then followed dances according to their custom, and drunken revels for all the days that the function lasted. The number of days were regulated according to the wealth of the contracting parties. He who went to the feast gave something to the couple, and note was made of it so that they could do the same in a like case.

Their marriage customs were quite unusual. They married only one woman, but the chiefs had multiple concubines, who were usually slaves. They typically married their closest relative, as long as she wasn't a sister, since they couldn't marry siblings. If they became tired of their wife, they would return her to her parents. There was no need to provide a reason for the divorce; it was enough to give back the dowry that he had given when they married. This dowry came in two forms and was always paid by the groom. One type was called bigay suso, which was the payment for the milk the mother had given to [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]the girl, allowing him to claim her fully. The other was called bigay caya and served as the actual dowry. This was given to support the newlyweds, but sometimes the wedding costs and clothing were taken out of it, leaving very little or nothing for the couple. Besides giving that dowry, the groom had to serve the bride's parents for several years, feast them on certain occasions, help with rice planting and harvesting, and deliver food to the workers. All of the groom's relatives had to show utmost respect to the bride, her parents, and all her relatives during this time of service. If they failed in any way, the marriage could be canceled, which pleased the woman's parents, as it meant a new suitor would come along, and they could benefit from him as well. In retaliation for what the groom endured before marriage, he treated his wife like a servant afterward. She was responsible for providing for the family while he enjoyed himself, and she felt fortunate if he didn’t beat her. The self-interest of parents regarding their daughters, which drives this harmful custom, has made it difficult to eliminate it, despite royal decrees and bishops' orders against it. The marriage ceremony involved the sacrifice of a hog, which a priestess killed after performing many rituals. She blessed the couple profusely, and afterward, older women fed them from a dish while making many lewd remarks, after which the couple was officially pronounced [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]married. Then they celebrated with dances according to their traditions and drunken festivities for the duration of the celebrations. The number of days was determined by the wealth of those getting married. Guests who attended the feast would give something to the couple, and it was noted so they could return the favor in a similar situation.

In regard to religion, they had neither idols nor temples, but they offered sacrifices in shady bowers that they had for that purpose. There were priestesses whom they called babailanes or catalonas. They attended to the sacrifices, and taking a lance in the hand and foaming at the mouth with ridiculous and extraordinary gestures, they prophesied on the point for which the sacrifice was offered and killed a hog with the lance. Then they immediately divided the hog among those present and the function was finished with dances and drunken revelries. Those sacrifices were offered to the demons or to the souls of their ancestors, which they thought lived in the large trees, in the crags which they met in isolated places, or in anything out of the common which was found in the fields. They thought that the nono or their forbears lived in all those places, and they never passed by them without asking permission of them—a thing which some of them do even yet. When anyone was dangerously sick they offered in those places rice, wine, and meat, and afterward gave that to the sick man to eat, so that he might be cured, a custom still observed by some of them.

In terms of religion, they had no idols or temples, but they made sacrifices in shady spots set up for that purpose. There were priestesses known as babailanes or catalonas. They managed the sacrifices and, with a lance in hand and foaming at the mouth while making wild and extraordinary gestures, they predicted outcomes related to the sacrifices and killed a pig with the lance. After that, they quickly shared the pig among those present, and the event ended with dancing and partying. These sacrifices were made to spirits or the souls of their ancestors, whom they believed lived in large trees, rocky outcrops found in remote areas, or in anything unusual encountered in the fields. They thought that the nono or their ancestors inhabited all these places, so they never passed by without asking for their permission—a practice that some still follow today. When someone was seriously ill, they would offer rice, wine, and meat at those locations, then give that food to the sick person to help with their recovery, a tradition that some continue to practice.

They had many other superstitions such as that of the patianac, which they say hinders childbirth by its tongue which is very fine and long, and which [126]reaches even to the womb of the woman, where it restrains and whence it does not allow the infant to issue. In order that the patianac may have no effect, the husband tightly bars the portal of the house, lights the fire, and completely naked holds a sword and cuts the wind with it in a furious manner until his wife brings forth. The tigbalang is another of the things of which they are greatly afraid. It is a kind of ghost which they say appears to them in the form of an animal or of some unknown monster and forces them to do things contrary to the laws of our religion. These and other superstitions, which they held in former times, they still observe at times, when the charlatans who are maintained at the cost of simpletons persuade them that they will get better from some dangerous illness or will find the jewel that they have lost, if they will practice them. And so powerful is self-interest or the love of life that although they believe that it is evil to observe those superstitions and not give entire assent to those deceits, they carry them out, for they say that perhaps it will be so. That is a proof that they have very little root in the faith.

They had many other superstitions, like that of the patianac, which they say prevents childbirth with its very fine and long tongue that [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] reaches up to the woman's womb, holding the baby back so it can't be born. To stop the patianac from having any effect, the husband tightly locks the door of the house, lights a fire, and, completely naked, brandishes a sword, wildly cutting through the air until his wife gives birth. The tigbalang is another thing they fear greatly. It’s a type of ghost that they claim appears as an animal or some unknown monster, making them act against the laws of our religion. They still practice these and other old superstitions from time to time, especially when charlatans, supported by the gullible, convince them that they will recover from a serious illness or find a lost treasure if they follow these rituals. So strong is the urge for self-preservation that even though they believe it’s wrong to observe these superstitions and not fully embrace those lies, they still go through with them, thinking it might really work. This shows that their faith is quite shallow.

All their religion was rather a servile fear than true worship. They had no external adoration or any formula of prayers to God or idols; they believed in neither reward nor recompense for the good, nor punishment for the wicked. For although they knew of the immortality of the soul and believed that they could do wrong, that belief was so filled with errors that they thought that the souls had need of sustenance, and all other things that we mortals need. Consequently, at their funerals they placed clothing, weapons, and food in the coffins; and on [127]the fourth day when they generally celebrated the funeral honors, they left an unoccupied seat at table for the deceased, and they believed that he really occupied it, although they could not see him. In order to be sure of that they scattered ashes in the house, in which they at times found the impress of the tracks of the deceased, either through the deceit of the devil or of some other Indian, who left the impress of his feet there to fool the others. Persuaded of that they offered them food so that they should do no harm. Their religion was always directed to that—a circumstance quite in keeping with their natural cowardice and timorousness. [128]

All their religion was more about a fear of servitude than genuine worship. They didn't have any external rituals or set prayers to God or idols; they didn't believe in rewards for the good or punishments for the wicked. Although they understood that the soul is immortal and recognized the possibility of wrongdoing, their beliefs were so misguided that they thought souls needed food and other things that we humans require. As a result, at their funerals, they placed clothes, weapons, and food in the coffins. On [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]the fourth day, when they typically held funeral honors, they saved an empty seat at the table for the deceased, convinced that he truly occupied it, even if they couldn't see him. To confirm this, they scattered ashes in the house, where they sometimes found the footprints of the deceased, either through the trickery of the devil or from another Indian who left his footsteps behind to deceive them. Convinced of this, they offered food so that no harm would come to them. Their religion consistently focused on this, which reflected their inherent timidity and fearfulness. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Jolo and the Sulus

[The following is taken from vol. v, pp. 343–390 (mainly verbatim) of Charles Wilkes’s16 Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition during the years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842 (Philadelphia, 1844). It is one of the earliest accounts written by an American of the island of Joló and its vicinity, and the Joloans. Although containing considerable matter that is descriptive [131]rather than ethnological in character, it has been deemed advisable not to endeavor to separate the matter, in view of its value. Wilkes writes mainly as an eyewitness.]

[The following is taken from vol. v, pp. 343–390 (mainly verbatim) of Charles Wilkes’s16 Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition during the years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842 (Philadelphia, 1844). It is one of the earliest accounts written by an American about the island of Joló and its surroundings, as well as the Joloans. Although it includes a lot of descriptive content [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]instead of purely ethnological information, it has been decided not to try to separate the information due to its significance. Wilkes primarily writes as an eyewitness.]

Plan of the bay and city of Manila; photographic facsimile of map 58 in Aprés de Mannevillette’s Le Neptune oriental (Paris, 1745)

Plan of the bay and city of Manila; photographic facsimile of map 58 in Aprés de Mannevillette’s Le Neptune oriental (Paris, 1745)

Plan of the bay and city of Manila; photographic replica of map 58 in Aprés de Mannevillette’s Le Neptune oriental (Paris, 1745)

[From copy of original map in Library of Congress]

[From a copy of the original map in the Library of Congress]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chapter IX

Sooloo

1842

On the evening of the 21st of January, the Vincennes, with the tender in company, left the bay of Manilla. I then sent for Mr. Knox, who commanded the latter, and gave him directions to keep closely in company with the Vincennes, and at the same time pointed out to him places of rendezvous where the vessels might again meet in case any unavoidable circumstance caused their separation. I was more particular in giving him instructions to avoid losing sight of the Vincennes, as I was aware that my proposed surveys might be impeded or frustrated altogether, were I deprived of the assistance of the vessel under his command.

On the evening of January 21st, the Vincennes, along with the tender, left Manila Bay. I then called for Mr. Knox, who was in charge of the tender, and instructed him to stay close to the Vincennes. I also pointed out meeting points where the ships could regroup in case they got separated due to any unavoidable circumstances. I emphasized the importance of keeping the Vincennes in sight, knowing that my planned surveys could be delayed or completely thrown off if I lost the support of his vessel.

On the 22d, we passed the entrance of the Straits of San Bernadino. It would have been my most direct route to follow these straits until I had passed Mindoro, and it is I am satisfied the safest course, unless the winds are fair, for the direct passage. My object, however, was to examine the ground for the benefit of others, and the Apo Shoal, which lies about mid-channel between Palawan and Mindoro, claimed my first attention. The tender was despatched to survey it, while I proceeded in the Vincennes to examine the more immediate entrance to the Sooloo Sea, off the southwest end of Mindoro.

On the 22nd, we passed the entrance to the Straits of San Bernardino. It would have been the most direct route for me to take through these straits until I got past Mindoro, and I'm confident it would have been the safest option, unless the winds were favorable for the direct passage. However, my goal was to assess the area for the benefit of others, and the Apo Shoal, located roughly in the middle of the channel between Palawan and Mindoro, was my top priority. The tender was sent out to survey it while I continued on the Vincennes to explore the immediate entrance to the Sulu Sea, off the southwest tip of Mindoro.

Calavite Peak is the north point of Mindoro, and [132]our observations made it two thousand feet high. This peak is of the shape of a dome, and appears remarkably regular when seen from its western side. On approaching Mindoro, we, as usual, under high islands, lost the steady breeze, and the wind became light for the rest of the day. Mindoro is a beautiful island, and is evidently volcanic; it appears as if thrown up in confused masses: it is not much settled, as the more southern islands are preferred to it as a residence.

Calavite Peak is the northern point of Mindoro, and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]our observations show that it's about two thousand feet tall. This peak has a dome shape and looks remarkably symmetrical from the west side. As we approached Mindoro, we lost our steady breeze under the high islands, and the wind became light for the rest of the day. Mindoro is a stunning island and clearly volcanic; it looks like it was formed from chaotic eruptions. It's not very populated, as people tend to prefer living on the more southern islands.

On the 23d, we ascertained the elevation of the highest peak of the island by triangulation to be three thousand one hundred and twenty-six feet. The easternmost island of the Palawan Group, Busvagan,17 was at the time just in sight from the deck, to the southwest.

On the 23rd, we determined the height of the highest peak on the island through triangulation to be three thousand one hundred and twenty-six feet. The easternmost island of the Palawan Group, Busvagan, 17 was visible from the deck, to the southwest.

It had been my intention to anchor at Ambolou Island;18 but the wind died away before we reached it, and I determined to stand off and on all night.

It was my plan to stop at Ambolou Island;18 but the wind died down before we got there, so I decided to stay out and circle around all night.

On the 24th, I began to experience the truth of what Captain Halcon had asserted, namely, that the existing charts were entirely worthless, and I also found that my native pilot was of no more value than they were: he had evidently passed the place before; but whether the size of the vessel, so much greater than any he had sailed in, confused him, or whether it was from his inability to understand and to make himself understood by us, he was of no use whatever, and we had the misfortune of running into shoal water, barely escaping the bottom. These [133]dangers were usually quickly passed, and we soon found ourselves again floating in thirty or forty fathoms water.

On the 24th, I started to realize the truth of what Captain Halcon had said, which was that the current charts were completely useless. I also discovered that my local pilot was just as ineffective: he had clearly been to this area before, but whether it was the size of our vessel, which was much larger than any he had previously sailed, that confused him, or if it was his inability to communicate with us, he couldn't help us at all. Unfortunately, we ended up running into shallow water and barely avoided hitting the bottom. These dangers were usually passed quickly, and we soon found ourselves floating again in thirty or forty fathoms of water.

We continued beating to windward, in hopes of being joined by the Flying-Fish, and I resolved to finish the survey toward the island of Semarrara.19 We found every thing in a different position from that assigned it by any of the charts20 with which we were furnished. On this subject, however, I shall not dwell, but refer those who desire particular information to the charts and Hydrographical Memoir.

We kept sailing against the wind, hoping to catch up with the Flying-Fish, and I decided to complete the survey near the island of Semarrara.19 We found everything in a different location than what was shown on any of the charts20 we received. However, I won’t go into detail about this, but I’ll direct those who want more specific information to the charts and Hydrographical Memoir.

Towards evening, I again ran down to the southwest point of the island of Mindoro, and sent a letter on shore to the pueblo, with directions to have it put on board the tender, when she should arrive. We then began to beat round Semarara, in order to pass over towards Panay.

Towards evening, I ran down again to the southwest point of Mindoro Island and sent a letter ashore to the town, asking them to put it on the tender when it arrived. We then started sailing around Semarara to head over to Panay.

The southern part of Mindoro is much higher than the northern, but appears to be equally rough. It is, however, susceptible of cultivation, and there are many villages along its shores.

The southern part of Mindoro is much higher than the northern part, but it looks just as rugged. However, it can be cultivated, and there are many villages along its shores.

Semarara is moderately high, and about fifteen miles in circumference; it is inhabited, and like Mindoro much wooded. According to the native pilot, its shores are free from shoals. It was not until [134]the next day that we succeeded in reaching Panay. I determined to pass the night off Point Potol, the north end of Panay, as I believed the sea in its neighborhood to be free of shoals, and wished to resume our running survey early in the morning.

Semarara is moderately high and about fifteen miles around; it’s inhabited and, like Mindoro, has a lot of trees. According to the local pilot, its shores are clear of shallow areas. It wasn’t until [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]the next day that we managed to reach Panay. I decided to spend the night off Point Potol, at the north end of Panay, because I thought the sea there was clear of shoals, and I wanted to start our survey again early in the morning.

At daylight on the 27th we continued the survey down the coast of Panay, and succeeded in correcting many errors in the existing charts (both English and Spanish). The channel along this side is from twelve to twenty miles wide, and suitable for beating in; little current is believed to exist; and the tides, as far as our observations went, seem to be regular and of little strength.

At daybreak on the 27th, we resumed the survey along the coast of Panay and successfully corrected many mistakes in the current charts (both English and Spanish). The channel on this side is between twelve and twenty miles wide and suitable for sailing; there doesn’t seem to be much current; and the tides, based on our observations, appear to be consistent and not very strong.

The island of Panay is high and broken, particularly on the south end; its shores are thickly settled and well cultivated. Indigo and sugar-cane claim much of the attention of the inhabitants. The Indians are the principal cultivators. They pay to the government a capitation tax of seven rials. Its population is estimated at three hundred thousand, which I think is rather short of the actual number.21

The island of Panay is rugged and uneven, especially at the southern end; its coasts are densely populated and well-farmed. The locals primarily focus on growing indigo and sugarcane. The Indigenous people are the main farmers. They owe the government a head tax of seven rials. The population is estimated to be around three hundred thousand, but I believe that number is below the real figure.21

On all the hills there are telegraphs of rude construction, to give information of the approach of piratical prahus from Sooloo, which formerly were in the habit of making attacks upon the defenceless inhabitants and carrying them off into slavery. Of late years they have ceased these depredations, for the Spaniards have resorted to a new mode of warfare. Instead of pursuing and punishing the offenders, they now intercept all their supplies, both of necessaries and luxuries; and the fear of this has had the effect to deter the pirates from their usual attacks. [135]

On all the hills, there are basic telegraphs to warn about the approach of pirate boats from Sooloo, which used to raid the helpless locals and take them into slavery. In recent years, these attacks have stopped because the Spaniards have adopted a new strategy. Instead of chasing down and punishing the pirates, they now cut off all their supplies, both essentials and luxuries; this has made the pirates think twice about their usual raids. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

We remained off San Pedro for the night, in hopes of falling in with the Flying-Fish in the morning.

We stayed off San Pedro for the night, hoping to catch up with the Flying-Fish in the morning.

On the morning of the 28th, the Flying-Fish was discovered plainly in sight. I immediately stood for her, fired a gun and made signal. At seven o’clock another gun was fired, but the vessel still stood off, and was seen to make sail to the westward without paying any regard whatever to either, and being favoured by a breeze while the Vincennes was becalmed, she stole off and was soon out of sight.22

On the morning of the 28th, the Flying-Fish was clearly in view. I quickly made my way towards her, fired a gun, and signaled. At seven o’clock, I fired another gun, but the ship continued to drift away and was seen setting sail to the west without paying any attention to either signal. With a favorable breeze while the Vincennes was stuck in still air, she slipped away and was soon out of sight.22

After breakfast we opened the bay of Antique, on which is situated the town of San José.23 As this bay apparently offered anchorage for vessels bound up this coast, I determined to survey it; and for this purpose the boats were hoisted out and prepared for surveying. Lieutenant Budd was despatched to visit the pueblo called San José.

After breakfast, we entered the bay of Antique, where the town of San José is located.23 Since this bay seemed to provide anchorage for ships traveling along this coast, I decided to survey it; for this, the boats were lowered and readied for the survey. I sent Lieutenant Budd to check out the town called San José.

On reaching the bay, the boats were sent to different points of it, and when they were in station, the ship fired guns to furnish bases by the sound, and angles were simultaneously measured. The boats made soundings on their return to the ship, and thus completed this duty, so that in an hour or two afterwards the bay was correctly represented on paper. It offers no more than a temporary anchorage for vessels, and unless the shore is closely approached, the water is almost too deep for the purpose.

Upon arriving at the bay, the boats were dispatched to various locations within it. Once they were in position, the ship fired cannons to provide sound bases, and angles were measured at the same time. The boats took soundings as they returned to the ship, completing this task, so that within an hour or two, the bay was accurately mapped out on paper. It provides only a temporary anchorage for vessels, and unless you get very close to the shore, the water is nearly too deep for that purpose.

At San José a Spanish governor resides, who presides over the two pueblos of San Pedro and San [136]José, and does the duty also of alcalde. Lieutenant Budd did not see him, as he was absent, but his lady did the honours. Lieutenant Budd represented the pueblo as cleanly and orderly. About fifteen soldiers were seen, who compose the governor’s guard, and more were said to be stationed at San Pedro. A small fort of eight guns commands the roadstead. The beach was found to be of fine volcanic sand, composed chiefly of oxide of iron, and comminuted shells; there is also a narrow shore-reef of coral. The plain bordering the sea is covered with a dense growth of cocoa-nut trees. In the fine season the bay is secure, but we were informed that in westerly and southwesterly gales heavy seas set in, and vessels are not able to lie at anchor. Several small vessels were lying in a small river about one and a half miles to the southward of the point on which the fort is situated. The entrance to this river is very narrow and tortuous.

At San José, there's a Spanish governor who oversees the two towns of San Pedro and San José, and also serves as the mayor. Lieutenant Budd didn't meet him since he was away, but his wife welcomed them. Lieutenant Budd noted that the town was clean and well-kept. About fifteen soldiers, who make up the governor’s guard, were present, and more were said to be stationed at San Pedro. A small fort with eight cannons overlooks the harbor. The beach has fine volcanic sand, mostly made of iron oxide and crushed shells, along with a narrow coral reef offshore. The area by the sea is thick with coconut trees. During the nice season, the bay is safe, but we were told that during strong westerly and southwesterly winds, heavy waves come in, making it impossible for ships to anchor. Several small boats were docked in a narrow and winding river about one and a half miles to the south of the fort. The entrance to this river is very tight and twisted.

Panay is one of the largest islands of the group. We had an opportunity of measuring the height of some of its western peaks or highlands, none of which exceed three thousand feet.24 The interior and eastern side have many lofty summits, which are said to reach an altitude of seven thousand five hundred feet; but these, as we passed, were enveloped in clouds, or shut out from view by the nearer highlands. The general features of the island are like those of Luzon and Mindoro. The few specimens [137]we obtained of its rocks consisted of the different varieties of talcose formation, with quartz and jasper. The specimens were of no great value, as they were much worn by lying on the beach.

Panay is one of the largest islands in the group. We had the chance to measure the height of some of its western peaks or highlands, none of which rise above three thousand feet. The interior and eastern side have many tall summits, which are reported to reach an altitude of seven thousand five hundred feet; however, these were shrouded in clouds or blocked from view by the nearer highlands as we passed by. The general features of the island are similar to those of Luzon and Mindoro. The few samples we collected of its rocks consisted of different types of talcose formation, along with quartz and jasper. The samples weren't particularly valuable since they were quite worn from lying on the beach.

The higher land was bare of trees, and had it not been for the numerous fertile valleys lying between the sharp and rugged spurs, it would have had a sterile appearance.

The higher land was treeless, and if it weren't for the many fertile valleys nestled between the sharp and rugged ridges, it would have seemed barren.

The bay of Antique is in latitude 10° 40′ N., longitude 121° 59′ 30″ E.

The bay of Antique is located at 10° 40′ N latitude and 121° 59′ 30″ E longitude.

It was my intention to remain for two or three days at a convenient anchorage to enable us to make short excursions into the interior; but the vexatious mismanagement of the tender now made it incumbent that I should make every possible use of the time to complete the operations connected with the hydrography of this sea; for I perceived that the duties that I intended should be performed by her, would now devolve upon the boats, and necessarily expose both officers and men to the hazard of contracting disease. I regretted giving up this design, not only on my own account and that of the Expedition, but because of the gratification it would have afforded personally to the naturalists.

I planned to stay at a good anchorage for two or three days so we could take short trips into the interior. However, the frustrating mismanagement of the tender now meant I had to make the most of the time to finish the hydrographic work in this sea. I realized that the tasks I intended for her would now fall to the boats, which would put both the officers and the crew at risk of getting sick. I was sorry to give up this plan, not just for myself and the Expedition, but also because it would have been personally satisfying for the naturalists.

The town of San José has about thirty bamboo houses, some of which are filled in with clay or mortar, and plastered over, both inside and out. Few of them are more than a single story in height. That of the governor is of the same material, and overtops the rest; it is whitewashed, and has a neat and cleanly appearance. In the vicinity of the town are several beautiful valleys, which run into the mountains from the plain that borders the bay. The landing is on a bamboo bridge, which has been [138]erected over an extensive mud-flat, that is exposed at low water, and prevents any nearer approach of boats. This bridge is about seven hundred feet in length; and a novel plan has been adopted to preserve it from being carried away. The stems of bamboo not being sufficiently large and heavy to maintain the superstructure in the soft mud, a scaffold is constructed just under the top, which is loaded with blocks of large stone, and the outer piles are secured to anchors or rocks, with grass rope. The roadway or top is ten feet wide, covered with split bamboo, woven together, and has rails on each side, to assist the passenger. This is absolutely necessary for safety; and even with this aid, one accustomed to it must be possessed of no little bodily strength to pass over this smooth, slippery, and springy bridge without accident.

The town of San José has about thirty bamboo houses, some of which are filled with clay or mortar and plastered over, both inside and out. Few of them are more than a single story tall. The governor's house is made from the same materials and is taller than the rest; it’s whitewashed and has a neat and clean appearance. Nearby, there are several beautiful valleys that lead into the mountains from the plain next to the bay. The landing is on a bamboo bridge that has been [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]built over a large mudflat that is exposed at low tide, preventing boats from getting any closer. This bridge is about seven hundred feet long, and a unique method has been used to keep it from being washed away. Since the bamboo stems aren’t thick or heavy enough to support the structure in the soft mud, a scaffold is built just under the top that’s weighted down with large stone blocks, and the outer piles are secured to anchors or rocks with grass rope. The road on top is ten feet wide, covered with woven split bamboo, and has rails on each side to help passengers. This is absolutely necessary for safety; and even with this support, someone used to crossing it has to have considerable physical strength to navigate this smooth, slippery, and springy bridge without slipping.

Two pirogues were at anchor in the bay, and on the shore was the frame of a vessel which had evidently been a long while on the stocks, for the weeds and bushes near the keel were six or eight feet high, and a portion of the timbers were decayed. Carts and sleds drawn by buffaloes were in use, and every thing gave it the appearance of a thriving village. Although I have mentioned the presence of soldiers, it was observed on landing that no guard was stationed about or even at the fort; but shortly afterwards a soldier was seen hurrying towards the latter, in the act of dressing himself in his regimentals, and another running by his side, with his cartridge-box and musket. In a little while one was passing up and down on his post, as though he was as permanent there as the fort itself.

Two canoes were anchored in the bay, and on the shore was the frame of a ship that had clearly been there for a long time, as the weeds and bushes near the keel were six or eight feet tall, and some of the wood was rotting. Carts and sleds pulled by buffaloes were around, and everything gave the vibe of a thriving village. Although I mentioned the presence of soldiers, it was noticed upon landing that no guard was stationed anywhere, not even at the fort; but shortly afterward, a soldier was seen rushing towards it, getting dressed in his uniform, while another ran alongside him with his cartridge box and rifle. Before long, one was patrolling his post, looking like he was as permanent there as the fort itself.

After completing these duties, the light airs [139]detained us the remainder of the day under Panay, in sight of the bay. On the 29th, at noon, we had been wafted by it far enough in the offing to obtain the easterly breeze, which soon became strong, with an overcast sky, and carried us rapidly on our course; my time would not permit my heaving-to. We kept on our course for Mindanao during the whole night, and were constantly engaged in sounding, with our patent lead, with from thirty to forty fathoms cast, to prevent our passing over this part of the sea entirely unexamined.

After finishing these tasks, the light winds [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] kept us the rest of the day near Panay, in view of the bay. On the 29th, at noon, we had drifted far enough offshore to catch the easterly breeze, which quickly picked up strength under a cloudy sky, moving us swiftly along our route; I didn't have time to stop. We continued toward Mindanao throughout the night, constantly taking soundings with our patented lead, dropping from thirty to forty fathoms, to make sure we didn't pass over this part of the sea without exploring it.

At daybreak on the 31st, we had the island of Mindanao before us, but did not reach its western peak until 5 P. M. This island is high and broken, like those to the north of it, but, unlike them, its mountains are covered with forests to their very tops, and there were no distinct cones of minor dimensions, as we had observed on the others. If they do exist, they were hidden by the dense forest.

At sunrise on the 31st, we saw the island of Mindanao ahead of us, but we didn't reach its western peak until 5 PM This island is rugged and elevated, similar to those to the north, but unlike them, its mountains are completely covered in forests all the way to the top, and there weren't any noticeable smaller peaks, as we had seen on the others. If there are smaller peaks, they're hidden by the thick forest.

I had determined to anchor at Caldera, a small port on the southwest side of Mindanao, about ten miles distant from Samboangan, where the governor resides. The latter is a considerable place, but the anchorage in its roadstead is said to be bad, and the currents that run through the Straits of Basillan are represented to be strong. Caldera, on the other hand, has a good, though small anchorage, which is free from the currents of the straits. It is therefore an excellent stopping-place, in case of the tide proving unfavourable. On one of its points stands a small fort, which on our arrival hoisted Spanish colours.

I decided to anchor at Caldera, a small port on the southwest side of Mindanao, about ten miles from Samboangan, where the governor lives. Samboangan is a decent-sized place, but the anchorage there is said to be poor, and the currents in the Straits of Basillan are reported to be strong. Caldera, however, has a good, although limited, anchorage that is free from the currents of the straits. Therefore, it’s a great spot to stop if the tide isn't favorable. At one of its points, there’s a small fort that raised the Spanish colors when we arrived.

At six o’clock we came to anchor at Caldera, in seven fathoms water. There were few indications of inhabitants, except at and near the fort. An officer [140]was despatched to the fort, to report the ship. It was found to be occupied by a few soldiers under the command of a lieutenant.

At six o'clock, we anchored at Caldera in seven fathoms of water. There were few signs of people living there, except around the fort. An officer [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]was sent to the fort to notify them about the ship. It turned out to be manned by a few soldiers under the command of a lieutenant.

The fort is about seventy feet square, and is built of large blocks of red coral, which evidently have not been taken from the vicinity of the place, as was stated by the officers of the fort; for, although our parties wandered along the alluvial beach for two or three miles in each direction, no signs of coral were observed. Many fragments of red, gray, and purple basalt and porphyry were met with along the beach; talcose rock and slate, syenite, hornblend, quartz, both compact and slaty, with chalcedony, were found in pieces and large pebbles. Those who were engaged in dredging reported the bottom as being of coral, in from four to six or eight fathoms; but this was of a different kind from that of which the fort was constructed.

The fort is about seventy feet square and is made of large blocks of red coral, which clearly weren’t sourced from the area as the fort’s officers claimed; even though our teams searched along the alluvial beach for two or three miles in each direction, we didn’t see any signs of coral. We found many pieces of red, gray, and purple basalt and porphyry along the beach; talcose rock and slate, syenite, hornblend, quartz in both compact and slaty forms, along with chalcedony, were discovered in fragments and large pebbles. Those who were doing the dredging reported that the bottom was made up of coral, in depths ranging from four to six or eight fathoms; but this was a different type from the coral used to build the fort.

The fort was built in the year 1784,25 principally for protection against the Sooloo pirates, who were in the habit of visiting the settlements, and carrying off the inhabitants as slaves, to obtain ransom for them. This, and others of the same description, were therefore constructed as places of refuge for the inhabitants, as well as to afford protection to vessels.

The fort was built in 1784, 25 mainly to protect against the Sooloo pirates, who often raided the settlements and kidnapped people to ransom them. Because of this, along with similar ones, these were built as safe havens for the locals and to provide protection for the ships.

Depredations are still committed, which render it necessary to keep up a small force. One or two huts which were seen in the neighbourhood of the bay, are built on posts twenty feet from the ground, and into them they ascend by ladders, which are hauled up after the occupants have entered. [141]

Depredations still occur, making it essential to maintain a small force. One or two huts spotted near the bay are built on posts twenty feet above the ground, and the inhabitants climb up using ladders, which are pulled up after they enter. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

These, it is said, are the sleeping-huts, and are so built for the purpose of preventing surprise at night. Before our arrival we had heard that the villages were all so constructed, but a visit to one soon showed that this was untrue. The natives seen at the village were thought to be of a decidedly lighter colour and a somewhat different expression from the Malays. They were found to be very civil, and more polished in manners than our gentlemen expected. On asking for a drink of water, it was brought on a glass tumbler on a china plate. An old woman to whom they had presented some trifles, took the trouble to meet them in another path on their return, and insisted on their accepting a basket of potatoes. Some of the houses contained several families, and many of them had no other means of entrance than a notched stick stuck on to the door.

These, it’s said, are the sleeping huts, built to prevent surprises at night. Before we arrived, we had heard that all the villages were constructed this way, but a visit to one quickly revealed that this wasn’t true. The locals we saw at the village appeared to have lighter skin and a somewhat different demeanor than the Malays. They turned out to be quite polite and more refined in their manners than our men expected. When we asked for a drink of water, it was served in a glass tumbler on a china plate. An older woman who we had given some small gifts to came to meet us on a different path on our way back and insisted we take a basket of potatoes. Some of the houses had multiple families living in them, and many only had a notched stick as an entrance.

The forests of Mindanao contain a great variety of trees, some of which are of large size, rising to the height of one hundred and one hundred and fifty feet. Some of their trunks are shaped like buttresses, similar to those before spoken of at Manilla, from which they obtain broad slabs for the tops of tables. The trunks were observed to shoot up remarkably straight. Our botanical gentlemen, though pleased with the excursion, were disappointed at not being able to procure specimens from the lofty trees; and the day was less productive in this respect than they had anticipated. Large woody vines were common, which enveloped the trunks of trees in their folds, and ascending to their tops, prevented the collection of the most desirable specimens.

The forests of Mindanao have a huge variety of trees, some of which are very tall, reaching heights of one hundred to one hundred and fifty feet. Some of their trunks are shaped like buttresses, similar to those mentioned earlier in Manila, from which they get wide slabs for table tops. The trunks were noticed to grow remarkably straight. Our botanical experts, while enjoying the trip, were disappointed that they couldn't collect samples from the tall trees; the day turned out to be less productive in this regard than they had hoped. Large woody vines were common, wrapping around the tree trunks, and climbing to their tops, making it difficult to collect the most sought-after specimens.

The paths leading to the interior were narrow and much obstructed; one fine stream was crossed. [142]Many buffaloes were observed wallowing in the mire, and the woods swarmed with monkeys and numbers of birds, among them the horn-bills: these kept up a continued chatter, and made a variety of loud noises. The forests here are entirely different from any we had seen elsewhere; and the stories of their being the abodes of large boas and poisonous snakes, make the effect still greater on those who visit them for the first time. Our parties, however, saw nothing of these reptiles, nor any thing to warrant a belief that such exist. Yet the officer at the fort related to me many snake stories that seemed to have some foundation; and by inquiries made elsewhere, I learned that they were at least warranted by some facts, though probably not to the extent that he represented.

The paths leading to the interior were narrow and really blocked; we crossed a beautiful stream. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] We saw many buffaloes wallowing in the mud, and the woods were filled with monkeys and lots of birds, including hornbills, which kept chattering and making a range of loud noises. The forests here are completely different from any we've seen before; the claims that they are home to large boas and venomous snakes add to the intensity for first-time visitors. However, our group didn’t see any of these snakes or anything that would make us believe they exist. Still, the officer at the fort shared many snake stories that seemed believable; and through other inquiries, I found out that they were at least based on some facts, though probably not to the degree he described.

Traces of deer and wild hogs were seen, and many birds were obtained, as well as land and sea shells. Among the latter was the Malleus vulgaris, which is used as food by the natives. The soil on this part of the island is a stiff clay, and the plants it produces are mostly woody; those of an herbaceous character were scarce, and only a few orchideous epiphytes and ferns were seen. Around the dwellings in the villages were a variety of vegetables and fruits, consisting of sugar-cane, sweet-potato, gourds, pumpkins, peppers, rice, water and musk melons, all fine and of large size.

Traces of deer and wild boars were spotted, and many birds were collected, along with land and sea shells. Among the shells was the Malleus vulgaris, which the locals use for food. The soil in this area of the island is hard clay, and the plants that grow here are mostly woody; herbaceous plants were rare, and only a few orchid-like epiphytes and ferns were observed. Around the homes in the villages, there was a variety of vegetables and fruits, including sugar cane, sweet potatoes, gourds, pumpkins, peppers, rice, watermelons, and musk melons, all of which were large and of high quality.

The officer of the fort was a lieutenant of infantry: one of that rank is stationed here for a month, after which he, with the garrison, consisting of three soldiers, are relieved, from Samboángan, where the Spaniards have three companies.

The officer at the fort was an infantry lieutenant: someone of that rank is assigned here for a month, after which he and the garrison, made up of three soldiers, are replaced by troops from Samboángan, where the Spaniards have three companies.

Samboangan is a convict settlement, to which the [143]native rogues, principally thieves, are sent. The Spanish criminals, as I have before stated in speaking of Manilla, are sent to Spain.

Samboangan is a prison settlement where the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]local troublemakers, mainly thieves, are sent. The Spanish criminals, as I mentioned earlier when talking about Manila, are sent back to Spain.

The inhabitants of the island of Mindanao who are under the subjection of Spain, are about ten thousand in number, of whom five or six thousand are at or in the neighbourhood of Samboangan. The original inhabitants, who dwell in the mountains and on the east coast, are said to be quite black, and are represented to be a very cruel and bad set; they have hitherto bid defiance to all attempts to subjugate them. When the Spaniards make excursions into the interior, which is seldom, they always go in large parties on account of the wild beasts, serpents, and hostile natives; nevertheless, the latter frequently attack and drive them back.

The people living on the island of Mindanao, who are under Spanish rule, number about ten thousand, with five or six thousand residing in or near Samboangan. The original inhabitants, who live in the mountains and along the east coast, are said to be quite dark-skinned and are described as very fierce and problematic; they have consistently resisted all efforts to conquer them. When the Spaniards venture into the interior, which is rare, they always travel in large groups due to wild animals, snakes, and hostile locals; however, the native people often launch attacks and push them back.

The little fort is considered as a sufficient protection for the fishermen and small vessels against the pirates, who inhabit the island of Basillan, which is in sight from Mindanao, and forms the southern side of the straits of the same name. It is said that about seven hundred inhabit it. The name of Moor is given by the Spaniards to all those who profess the Mohammedan religion, and by such all the islands to the west of Mindanao, and known under the name of the Sooloo Archipelago, are inhabited.

The small fort provides enough protection for fishermen and small boats against pirates living on Basillan Island, which is visible from Mindanao and sits on the southern side of the straits of the same name. It’s said that around seven hundred people live there. The Spaniards refer to anyone who practices the Muslim faith as Moors, and these individuals inhabit all the islands to the west of Mindanao, known collectively as the Sooloo Archipelago.

The day we spent at Caldera was employed in surveying the bay, and in obtaining observations for its geographical position, and for magnetism. The flood tide sets to the northward and westward, through the straits, and the ebb to the eastward. In the bay we found it to run two miles an hour by the log, but it must be much more rapid in the straits.

The day we spent at Caldera was used to study the bay and gather data on its geographical location and magnetism. The incoming tide flows north and west through the straits, while the outgoing tide goes to the east. In the bay, we measured it at two miles an hour with the log, but it has to be much faster in the straits.

At daylight on the 1st of February, we got under [144]way to stand over for the Sangboys,26 a small island with two sharp hills on it. One and a half miles from the bay we passed over a bank, the least water on which was ten fathoms on a sandy bottom, and on which a vessel might anchor. The wind shortly after failed us, and we drifted with the tide for some hours, in full view of the island of Mindanao, which is bold and picturesque. We had thus a good opportunity of measuring some of its mountain ranges, which we made about three thousand feet high.

At daylight on February 1st, we set off [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] towards the Sangboys,26, a small island with two sharp hills. Just a mile and a half from the bay, we crossed a bank where the shallowest water was ten fathoms on a sandy bottom, and a ship could anchor there. Soon after, the wind died down, and we drifted with the tide for several hours, looking out at the island of Mindanao, which is striking and scenic. This gave us a great chance to assess some of its mountain ranges, which we estimated to be around three thousand feet high.

In the afternoon, a light breeze came from the southwest, and before sunset I found that we were again on soundings. As soon as we had a cast of twenty fathoms, I anchored for the night, judging it much better than to be drifting about without any knowledge of the locality and currents to which we were subjected.

In the afternoon, a gentle breeze blew in from the southwest, and before sunset, I realized we were back in shallower waters. Once we measured twenty fathoms, I dropped anchor for the night, thinking it was much better than just drifting around without knowing the area and the currents we were facing.

On the morning of the 2d, we got under way to proceed to the westward. As the bottom was unequal, I determined to pass through the broadest channel, although it had the appearance of being the shoalest, and sent two boats ahead to sound. In this way we passed through, continuing our surveying operations, and at the same time made an attempt to dredge; but the ground was too uneven for the latter purpose, and little of value was obtained.

On the morning of the 2nd, we set off to head west. Since the seabed was uneven, I decided to go through the widest channel, even though it looked like it was the shallowest, and I sent two boats ahead to check the depth. This way, we made our way through while continuing our surveying work and also tried to dredge, but the ground was too uneven for that, and we didn’t get much of value.

Shortly after passing the Sangboys, we had the island of Sooloo in sight, for which I now steered direct. At sunset we found ourselves within five or six miles of Soung Harbour; but there was not sufficient [145]light to risk the dangers that might be in our course, nor wind enough to command the ship; and having no bottom where we were, I determined again to run out to sea, and anchor on the first bank I should meet. At half past eight o’clock, we struck soundings in twenty-six fathoms, and anchored.

Shortly after passing the Sangboys, we spotted the island of Sooloo, which I now headed towards. By sunset, we were about five or six miles from Soung Harbour; however, there wasn't enough[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]light to risk the dangers that might be ahead, and there wasn't enough wind to control the ship. Since we had no anchor point where we were, I decided to head back out to sea and anchor at the first bank we encountered. At half past eight o’clock, we found soundings in twenty-six fathoms and dropped anchor.

At daylight we continued our position by angles, and found it to correspond with part of the route we had passed over the day before, and that we were about fifteen miles from the large island of Sooloo. Weighing anchor, we were shortly wafted by the westerly tide and a light air toward that beautiful island, which lay in the midst of its little archipelago; and as we were brought nearer and nearer, we came to the conclusion that in our many wanderings we had seen nothing to be compared to this enchanting spot. It appeared to be well cultivated, with gentle slopes rising here and there into eminences from one to two thousand feet high. One or two of these might be dignified with the name of mountains, and were sufficiently high to arrest the passing clouds; on the afternoon of our arrival we had a singular example in the dissipation of a thunderstorm.

At dawn, we took our bearings and found they matched part of the route we had traveled the day before, and that we were about fifteen miles from the large island of Sooloo. After weighing anchor, we were soon carried by the westerly tide and a light breeze toward that beautiful island, which sat in the middle of its small archipelago. As we got closer, we realized that in all our travels, we had seen nothing that compared to this enchanting place. It seemed well cultivated, with gentle slopes rising here and there into hills that were one to two thousand feet high. A couple of these could even be called mountains, and they were tall enough to catch the passing clouds; on the afternoon of our arrival, we witnessed a remarkable example of a thunderstorm clearing up.

Although much of the island was under cultivation, yet it had all the freshness of a forest region. The many smokes on the hills, buildings of large size, cottages, and cultivated spots, together with the moving crowds on the land, the prahus, canoes, and fishing-boats on the water, gave the whole a civilized appearance. Our own vessel lay, almost without a ripple at her side, on the glassy surface of the sea, carried onwards to our destined anchorage by the flowing tide, and scarce a sound was heard except [146]the splashing of the lead as it sought the bottom. The effect of this was destroyed in part by the knowledge that this beautiful archipelago was the abode of a cruel and barbarous race of pirates. Towards sunset we had nearly reached the bay of Soung, when we were met by the opposing tide, which frustrated all our endeavors to reach it, and I was compelled to anchor, lest we should again be swept to sea.

Although much of the island was farmed, it still felt fresh like a forest. The smoke rising from the hills, the large buildings, cottages, and cultivated areas, along with the bustling people on land and the prahus, canoes, and fishing boats on the water, gave everything a civilized look. Our own ship sat almost still beside us on the calm sea, carried gently to our intended anchorage by the flowing tide, with hardly a sound except [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]the splash of the lead as it searched for the bottom. This peaceful scene was partially spoiled by the awareness that this beautiful archipelago was home to a ruthless and savage group of pirates. As sunset approached, we were almost at the bay of Soung when we were met by an opposing tide that thwarted our attempts to reach it, forcing me to anchor to avoid being swept back out to sea.

As soon as the night set in, fishermen’s lights were seen moving along the beach in all directions, and gliding about in canoes, while the sea was filled with myriads of phosphorescent animalculæ. After watching this scene for two or three hours in the calm and still night, a storm that had been gathering reached us; but it lasted only for a short time, and cleared off after a shower, which gave the air a freshness that was delightful after the sultry heat we had experienced during the day.

As soon as night fell, we could see fishermen’s lights flickering along the beach in all directions, and gliding around in canoes, while the sea sparkled with countless glowing microorganisms. After observing this scene for two or three hours in the calm and peaceful night, a storm we had sensed earlier finally hit us; but it only lasted a short time and cleared up after a quick shower, leaving the air feeling fresh and pleasant after the stifling heat we’d dealt with during the day.

The canoes of this archipelago were found to be different from any that we had hitherto seen, not only in shape but in making use of a double out-rigger, which consequently must give them additional security. The paddle also is of a different shape, and has a blade at each end, which are used alternately, thus enabling a single person to manage them with ease. These canoes are built of a single log, though some are built upon. They seldom carry more than two persons. The annexed figure will give a correct figure of one of them.27

The canoes in this archipelago were discovered to be unique compared to any we had seen before, both in shape and in their use of a double outrigger, which likely provides them with extra stability. The paddle is also shaped differently, featuring a blade at both ends, allowing one person to use it easily by alternating strokes. These canoes are crafted from a single log, though some are built on top of others. They usually carry no more than two people. The attached figure will accurately illustrate one of them.27

We saw the fishermen engaged in trolling and using the line; but the manner of taking fish which has been hitherto described is chiefly practised.28 [147]In fishing, as well as in all their other employments, the kris and spear were invariably by their side.

We saw the fishermen busy with trolling and using the line; however, the fishing method that has been described earlier is primarily practiced. 28 [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] In fishing, as in all their other activities, the kris and spear were always at their side.

The next morning at eight o’clock we got under way, and were towed by our boats into the bay of Soung,29 where we anchored off the town in nine fathoms water. While in the act of doing so, and after our intentions had become too evident to admit of a doubt, the Sultan graciously sent off a message giving us permission to enter his port.

The next morning at eight o’clock, we set off and were towed by our boats into Soung Bay, where we anchored near the town in nine fathoms of water. As we were doing this, and after our intentions became clear, the Sultan kindly sent a message granting us permission to enter his port.

Lieutenant Budd was immediately despatched with the interpreter to call upon the Datu Mulu or governor, and to learn at what hour we could see the Sultan. When that officer reached the town, all were found asleep; and after remaining four hours waiting, the only answer he could get out of the Datu Mulu was, that he supposed that the Sultan would be awake at three o’clock, when he thought I could see him.

Lieutenant Budd was sent right away with the interpreter to visit Datu Mulu, the governor, and to find out what time we could meet the Sultan. When he arrived in town, everyone was asleep; after waiting for four hours, the only response he got from Datu Mulu was that he thought the Sultan would be awake at three o’clock, when he believed I could meet him.

During this time the boats had been preparing for surveying; and after landing the naturalists, they began the work.

During this time, the boats had been getting ready for surveying, and after dropping off the naturalists, they started the work.

At the appointed time, Captain Hudson and myself went on shore to wait upon the Sultan. On our approach to the town, we found that a great portion of it was built over the water on piles, and only connected with the shore by narrow bridges of bamboo. The style of building in Sooloo does not differ materially from that of the Malays. The houses are [148]rather larger, and they surpass the others in filth.30

At the scheduled time, Captain Hudson and I went ashore to meet the Sultan. As we got closer to the town, we noticed that a large part of it was built on stilts over the water, and it was only linked to the shore by narrow bamboo bridges. The architecture in Sooloo isn't much different from that of the Malays. The houses are [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]bigger and are even more filthy than the others.30

We passed for some distance between the bridges to the landing, and on our way saw several piratical prahus apparently laid up. Twenty of these were counted, of about thirty tons burden, evidently built for sea-vessels, and capable of mounting one or two long guns. We landed at a small streamlet, and walked a short distance to the Datu’s house, which is of large dimensions and rudely built on piles, which raise it about six feet above the ground, and into which we were invited. The house of the Datu contains one room, part of which is screened off to form the apartment of his wife. Nearly in the center is a raised dais, eight or ten feet square, under which are stowed all his valuables, packed in chests and Chinese trunks. Upon this dais are placed mats for sleeping, with cushions, pillows, &c.; and over it is a sort of canopy, hung round with fine chintz or muslin.

We traveled for a while between the bridges to the landing, and along the way, we spotted several pirate boats seemingly docked. We counted about twenty of these, each around thirty tons, clearly designed for sea travel and able to carry one or two long guns. We landed at a small stream and walked a short distance to the Datu’s house, which is quite large and roughly built on piles, raising it about six feet above the ground, where we were invited inside. The Datu's house has one main room, part of which is sectioned off to create a space for his wife. Almost in the center, there’s a raised platform about eight or ten feet square, where he keeps all his valuables stored in chests and Chinese trunks. On this platform are mats for sleeping, along with cushions and pillows, and above it hangs a sort of canopy made of fine chintz or muslin.

The dais was occupied by the Datu who is, next to the Sultan, the greatest man of this island. He at once came from it to receive us, and had chairs provided for us near his sanctum. After we were seated, he again retired to his lounge. The Datu is small in person, and emaciated in form, but has a quick eye and an intelligent countenance. He lives, as he told me, with all his goods around him, and they formed a collection such as I could scarcely imagine it possible to bring together in such a place. The interior put me in mind of a barn inhabited by a company of strolling players. On one side were hung up a collection of various kinds of gay dresses, here drums [149]and gongs, there swords, lanterns, spears, muskets, and small cannon; on another side were shields, bucklers, masks, saws, and wheels, with belts, bands, and long robes. The whole was a strange mixture of tragedy and farce; and the group of natives were not far removed in appearance from the supernumeraries that a Turkish tragedy might have brought together in the green-room of a theatre.

The platform was occupied by the Datu, who is, next to the Sultan, the most important person on this island. He came over to greet us and had chairs set up for us near his quarters. After we were seated, he went back to his lounge. The Datu is small and thin, but has a sharp eye and a thoughtful expression. He told me he lives surrounded by all his possessions, which formed a collection I could hardly believe could be gathered in such a place. The interior reminded me of a barn where a group of traveling performers might stay. On one side, there was a display of colorful costumes, drums, and gongs; on another side, there were swords, lanterns, spears, muskets, and small cannons; and on yet another side, shields, bucklers, masks, saws, and wheels, along with belts, bands, and long robes. The whole setup was a bizarre mix of tragedy and comedy; the group of locals looked similar to the extras you might find gathered backstage during a Turkish play at a theater.

A set of more cowardly-looking miscreants I never saw. They appeared ready either to trade with us, pick our pockets, or cut our throats, as an opportunity might offer.

A group of more cowardly-looking troublemakers I’ve never seen. They looked ready to either negotiate with us, steal our wallets, or slit our throats whenever the chance arose.

The wife’s apartment was not remarkable for its comforts, although the Datu spoke of it with much consideration, and evidently held his better half in high estimation. He was also proud of his six children, the youngest of whom he brought out in its nurse’s arms, and exhibited with much pride and satisfaction. He particularly drew my attention to its little highly-wrought and splendidly-mounted kris, which was stuck through its girdle, as an emblem of his rank. It was in reality a fine-looking child. The kitchen was behind the house, and occupied but a small space, for they have little in the way of food that requires much preparation. The house of the Datu might justly be termed nasty.

The wife's apartment wasn't remarkable for its comforts, but the Datu spoke of it with great consideration and obviously valued his wife highly. He was also proud of his six kids, the youngest of whom he proudly displayed in the nurse’s arms. He specifically pointed out the little, intricately designed kris that was tucked into its girdle as a symbol of his rank. It really was an attractive child. The kitchen was at the back of the house and took up only a small space, since they didn't have much food that needed a lot of preparation. The Datu's house could honestly be called dirty.

We now learned the reason why the Sultan could not be seen: it was Friday, the Mahomedan Sabbath, and he had been at the mosque from an early hour.31 Lieutenant Budd had been detained, because it was not known when he would finish his prayers; and the ceremonies of the day were more important [150]than usual, on account of its peculiar sanctity in their calendar.

We now understand why the Sultan was unavailable: it was Friday, the Muslim Sabbath, and he had been at the mosque since early morning. 31 Lieutenant Budd had been held up because it was uncertain when he would be done with his prayers, and the day’s rituals were more significant [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] than usual due to its special sacredness in their calendar.

Word had been sent off to the ship that the Sultan was ready to receive me, but the messenger passed us while on our way to the shore. After we had been seated for a while, the Datu asked if we were ready to accompany him to see the Sultan; but intimated that no one but Captain Hudson and myself could be permitted to lay eyes on him. Being informed that we were, he at once, and in our presence, slipped on his silken trousers, and a new jacket, covered with bell-buttons; put on his slippers, strapped himself round with a long silken net sash, into which he stuck his kris, and, with umbrella in hand, said he was ready. He now led the way out of his house, leaving the motley group behind, and we took the path to the interior of the town, towards the Sultan’s. The Datu and I walked hand in hand, on a roadway about ten feet wide, with a small stream running on each side. Captain Hudson and the interpreter came next, and a guard of six trusty slaves brought up the rear.

Word had been sent to the ship that the Sultan was ready to see me, but the messenger passed us while we were heading to the shore. After we had sat down for a bit, the Datu asked if we were ready to join him to meet the Sultan, but made it clear that only Captain Hudson and I were allowed to see him. Once we confirmed that we were ready, he immediately put on his silk trousers and a new jacket covered in bell buttons; he slipped on his slippers, wrapped a long silk sash around himself, tucked his kris into it, and with an umbrella in hand, said he was ready. He then led the way out of his house, leaving the colorful group behind, and we took the path into the town towards the Sultan’s place. The Datu and I walked hand in hand on a road about ten feet wide, with a small stream running on either side. Captain Hudson and the interpreter followed, and a guard of six loyal slaves brought up the rear.

When we reached the outskirts of the town, about half a mile from the Datu’s, we came to the Sultan’s residence, where he was prepared to receive us in state. His house is constructed in the same manner as that of the Datu, but is of larger dimensions, and the piles are rather higher. Instead of steps, we found a ladder, rudely constructed of bamboo, and very crazy. This was so steep that it was necessary to use the hands in mounting it. I understood that the ladder was always removed in the night, for the sake of security. We entered at once into the presence-chamber, where the whole divan, if such it may be called, sat in arm chairs, occupying the half of a [151]large round table, covered with a white cotton cloth. On the opposite side of the table, seats were placed for us. On our approach, the Sultan and all his council rose, and motioned us to our seats. When we had taken them, the part of the room behind us was literally crammed with well-armed men. A few minutes were passed in silence, during which time we had an opportunity of looking at each other, and around the hall in which we were seated. The latter was of very common workmanship, and exhibited no signs of oriental magnificence. Overhead hung a printed cotton cloth, forming a kind of tester, which covered about half of the apartment. In other places the roof and rafters were visible. A part of the house was roughly partitioned off, to the height of nine or ten feet, enclosing, as I was afterwards told, the Sultan’s sleeping apartment, and that appropriated to his wife and her attendants.

When we reached the edge of town, about half a mile from the Datu’s place, we arrived at the Sultan’s residence, where he was ready to welcome us in style. His house was built similarly to the Datu’s, but it was larger, with higher piles. Instead of steps, we found a makeshift ladder made of bamboo, which felt pretty wobbly. It was so steep that we had to use our hands to climb it. I learned that the ladder was taken down at night for security reasons. We immediately entered the audience chamber, where the whole council, if that’s what you’d call it, sat in armchairs around half of a large round table covered with a white cotton cloth. Seats were arranged for us on the opposite side of the table. As we approached, the Sultan and all his advisors stood up and gestured for us to sit down. Once we were seated, behind us was a room packed with well-armed men. We spent a few minutes in silence, giving us a chance to look at each other and take in the hall we were in. The hall was quite plain, showing no signs of eastern splendor. Above us hung a printed cotton cloth, creating a sort of canopy that covered about half of the room. In other areas, the roof and rafters were exposed. A part of the house was roughly divided off to about nine or ten feet high, which, I later learned, was the Sultan’s sleeping quarters and the area for his wife and her attendants.

The Sultan is of the middle height, spare and thin; he was dressed in a white cotton shirt, loose trousers of the same material, and slippers; he had no stockings; the bottom of his trousers was worked in scollops with blue silk, and this was the only ornament I saw about him. On his head he wore a small coloured cotton handkerchief, wound into a turban, that just covered the top of his head. His eyes were bloodshot, and had an uneasy wild look, showing that he was under the effects of opium, of which they all smoke large quantities.32 His teeth were as black as ebony, which, with his bright cherry-coloured lips, contrasted with his swarthy skin, gave him anything but a pleasant look.

The Sultan is of average height, slim and lean; he was wearing a white cotton shirt, loose trousers of the same fabric, and slippers; he had no socks on. The bottom of his trousers was embellished with blue silk scallops, and that was the only decoration I noticed on him. He had a small colored cotton handkerchief wrapped into a turban that barely covered the top of his head. His eyes were bloodshot and had a restless, wild look, indicating he was under the influence of opium, which they all smoke in large amounts. His teeth were as black as ebony, and combined with his bright cherry-colored lips and dark skin, he had anything but a pleasant appearance.

On the left hand of the Sultan sat his two sons, [152]while his right was occupied by his councillors; just behind him, sat the carrier of his betel-nut casket. The casket was of filigree silver, about the size of a small tea-caddy, of oblong shape, and rounded at the top. It had three divisions, one for the leaf, another for the nut, and a third for the lime.33 Next to this official was the pipe-bearer, who did not appear to be held in such estimation as the former.

On the left side of the Sultan sat his two sons, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]while his right was taken up by his advisors; just behind him sat the person responsible for carrying his betel-nut box. The box was made of filigree silver, about the size of a small tea caddy, rectangular in shape, and rounded at the top. It had three compartments: one for the leaf, another for the nut, and a third for the lime.33 Next to this official was the pipe-bearer, who didn’t seem to be regarded as highly as the former.

I opened the conversation by desiring that the Datu would explain the nature of our visit, and tell the Sultan that I had come to make the treaty which he had some time before desired to form with the United States.34

I started the conversation by asking the Datu to explain why we were there and to inform the Sultan that I had come to finalize the treaty he had previously expressed interest in making with the United States.34

The Sultan replied, that such was still his desire; upon which I told him, I would draw one up for him, that same day. While I was explaining to him the terms, a brass candlestick was brought in with a lighted tallow candle, of a very dark colour and rude shape, that showed but little art in the manufacture. This was placed in the center of the table, with a plate of Manilla cigars. None of them, however, were offered to us, nor any kind of refreshment.

The Sultan replied that he still wanted that, and I told him I would prepare one for him that same day. While I was explaining the details to him, a brass candlestick was brought in with a lit tallow candle, which was dark in color and poorly shaped, showing little craftsmanship. This was placed in the center of the table, alongside a plate of Manila cigars. However, none of them were offered to us, nor was any kind of refreshment.

Our visit lasted nearly an hour. When we arose to take our leave, the Sultan and his divan did the same, and we made our exit with low bows on each side.

Our visit lasted almost an hour. When we stood up to say goodbye, the Sultan and his council did the same, and we left with respectful bows to each other.

I looked upon it as a matter of daily occurrence for all those who came to the island to visit the Sultan; [153]but the Datu Mulu took great pains to make me believe that a great favour had been granted in allowing us a sight of his ruler. On the other hand, I dwelt upon the condescension it was on my part to visit him, and I refused to admit that I was under any gratitude or obligation for the sight of His Majesty the Sultan Mohammed Damaliel Kisand, but said that he might feel grateful to me if he signed the treaty I would prepare for him.

I saw it as a regular occurrence for anyone visiting the island to meet the Sultan; [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]but Datu Mulu went out of his way to make me think that it was a huge privilege for us to catch a glimpse of his ruler. On the flip side, I considered it a favor on my part to meet him, and I refused to feel any gratitude or obligation for the opportunity to see His Majesty Sultan Mohammed Damaliel Kisand. Instead, I suggested that he should feel grateful to me if he signed the treaty I planned to prepare for him.

On our return from the Sultan’s to the Datu Mulu’s house, we found even a greater crowd than before. The Datu, however, contrived to get us seats. The attraction which drew it together was to look at Mr. Agate, who was making a sketch of Mohammed Polalu, the Sultan’s son, and next heir to the throne.35 I had hoped to procure one of the Sultan, but this was declared to be impossible. The son, however, has all the characteristics of the Sooloos, and the likeness was thought an excellent one. Mohammed Polalu is about twenty-three years of age, of a tall slender figure, with a long face, heavy and dull eyes, as though he was constantly under the influence of opium.36 So much, indeed, [154]was he addicted to the use of this drug, even according to the Datu Mulu’s accounts, that his strength and constitution were very much impaired. As he is kept particularly under the guardianship of the Datu, the latter has a strong interest in preserving this influence over him, and seems on this account to afford him every opportunity of indulging in this deplorable habit.

On our way back from the Sultan’s to Datu Mulu’s house, we found an even bigger crowd than before. The Datu managed to get us seats. The reason everyone had gathered was to see Mr. Agate, who was sketching Mohammed Polalu, the Sultan’s son and next in line for the throne.35 I had hoped to get a sketch of the Sultan, but that was said to be impossible. The son, however, has all the traits of the Sooloos, and the likeness was considered excellent. Mohammed Polalu is about twenty-three years old, tall and slim, with a long face and heavy, dull eyes, as if he were always under the influence of opium.36 In fact, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]he was so dependent on this drug, according to Datu Mulu, that his strength and health were greatly impaired. Because he is closely watched by the Datu, the latter has a strong interest in maintaining this influence over him and seems to give him every chance to indulge in this harmful habit.

During our visit, the effect of a pipe of this drug was seen upon him; for but a short time after he had reclined himself on the Datu’s couch and cushion, and taken a few whiffs, he was entirely overcome, stupid, and listless. I had never seen any one so young, bearing such evident marks of the effects of this deleterious drug. When but partially recovered from its effects he called for his betel-nut, to revive him by its exciting effects. This was carefully chewed by his attendant to a proper consistency, moulded in a ball about the size of a walnut, and then slipped into the mouth of the heir apparent.

During our visit, we noticed the impact of a pipe of this drug on him; just a short while after he had settled onto the Datu’s couch and cushion and taken a few puffs, he was completely overwhelmed, dazed, and sluggish. I had never seen anyone so young show such clear signs of the effects of this harmful drug. Once he was only partially back to normal, he asked for his betel nut to help him feel more alert. His attendant carefully chewed it to the right consistency, shaped it into a ball about the size of a walnut, and then placed it in the mouth of the heir apparent.

One of the requests I had made of the Sultan was, that the officers might have guides to pass over the [155]island. This was at once said to be too dangerous to be attempted, as the datus of the interior and southern towns would in all probability attack the parties. I understood what this meant, and replied that I was quite willing to take the responsibility, and that the party should be well armed. To this the Sultan replied, that he would not risk his own men. This I saw was a mere evasion, but it was difficult and would be dangerous for our gentlemen to proceed alone, and I therefore said no more. On our return to the Datu’s, I gave them permission to get as far from the beach as they could, but I was afterwards informed by them that in endeavoring to penetrate into the woods, they were always stopped by armed men. This was also the case when they approached particular parts of the town, but they were not molested as long as their rambles were confined to the beach. At the Datu’s we were treated to chocolate and negus in gilt-edge tumblers, with small stale cakes, which had been brought from Manilla.

One of the things I asked the Sultan was for the officers to have guides to cross the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]island. It was immediately declared too risky to attempt, as the leaders from the interior and southern towns would likely attack the groups. I understood this implication and responded that I was more than willing to take on the responsibility, and that the team should be well-armed. The Sultan replied that he wouldn't put his own men at risk. I recognized this as a clear evasion, but it would be difficult and dangerous for our team to go alone, so I dropped the subject. On our way back to the Datu’s, I allowed them to venture as far from the beach as possible, but I was later told by them that when they tried to go into the woods, they were always stopped by armed men. This was also true when they got close to certain areas of the town, but they weren't bothered as long as they stuck to the beach. At the Datu’s, we were served chocolate and negus in fancy tumblers, along with some stale cakes that had been brought from Manila.

After we had sat some time I was informed that Mr. Dana missed his bowie-knife pistol, which he had for a moment laid down on a chest. I at once came to the conclusion that it had been stolen, and as the theft had occurred in the Datu’s house, I determined to hold him responsible for it, and gave him at once to understand that I should do so, informing him that the pistol must be returned before the next morning, or he must take the consequences. This threw him into some consternation, and by my manner he felt that I was serious.

After we sat for a while, I was told that Mr. Dana had lost his bowie-knife pistol, which he had briefly placed on a chest. I immediately concluded that it had been stolen, and since the theft happened in the Datu’s house, I decided to hold him accountable for it. I made it clear to him that I would do so, telling him that the pistol needed to be returned by the next morning, or he would face the consequences. This alarmed him, and he could tell from my attitude that I was serious.

Captain Hudson and myself, previous to my return on board, visited the principal parts of the town. The Chinese quarter is separated by a body of water, [156]and has a gateway that leads to a bridge. The bridge is covered by a roof, and on each side of it are small shops, which are open in front, and thus expose the goods they contain. In the rear of the shops were the dwellings of the dealers. This sort of bazaar contained but a very scanty assortment, and the goods were of inferior quality.

Captain Hudson and I, before I went back on board, explored the main areas of the town. The Chinese quarter is separated by a body of water, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and has a gate that leads to a bridge. The bridge has a roof, and on each side are small shops that are open in front, showcasing the goods inside. Behind the shops were the homes of the sellers. This type of market had only a limited selection, and the goods were of low quality.

We visited some blacksmith-shops, where they were manufacturing krises and spears. These shops were open sheds; the fire was made upon the ground, and two wooden cylinders, whose valves were in the bottom, served for bellows; when used, they had movable pistons which were worked by a man on an elevated seat, and answered the purpose better than could have been expected.

We checked out some blacksmith shops where they were making krises and spears. These shops were open structures; the fire was built on the ground, and two wooden cylinders with valves at the bottom functioned as bellows. When in use, they had movable pistons operated by a person sitting on a raised platform, and they worked surprisingly well.

The kris is a weapon in which this people take great pride; it is of various shapes and sizes, and is invariably worn from infancy to old age; they are generally wavy in their blades, and are worn in wooden scabbards, which are neatly made and highly polished. This weapon is represented in the tailpiece to this chapter.

The kris is a weapon that this culture takes great pride in; it comes in various shapes and sizes, and is typically carried from childhood to old age. The blades are generally wavy, and they are housed in wooden scabbards that are well-crafted and polished. This weapon is shown in the illustration at the end of this chapter.

The market was well stocked with fruit and fish, Among the former the durian seemed to predominate; this was the first time we had seen it. It has a very disagreeable odour, as if decayed, and appears to emit a sulphuretted hydrogen gas, which I observed blackened silver. Some have described this fruit as delicious, but if the smell is not enough, the taste in my opinion will convince any one of the contrary.

The market was full of fruit and fish, and the durian really stood out; this was the first time we had come across it. It has a really unpleasant smell, almost like it's rotten, and seems to release a gas that tarnishes silver. Some people say this fruit is delicious, but if the smell isn't off-putting enough, the taste, in my opinion, will definitely prove otherwise.

Mr. Brackenridge made the following list of their fruits: Durian, Artocarpus integrifolia, Melons, water and musk, Oranges, mandarin and bitter, Pine-apples, [157]Carica papaya, Mangosteen, Breadfruit, Cocoa and Betel-nut. The vegetables were capsicums, cucumbers, yams, sweet-potatoes, garlic, onions, edible fern-roots, and radishes of the salmon variety, but thicker and more acrid in flavour.

Mr. Brackenridge made the following list of their fruits: Durian, Artocarpus integrifolia, melons, both water and musk, oranges, both mandarin and bitter, pineapples, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Carica papaya, mangosteen, breadfruit, cocoa, and betel nut. The vegetables included bell peppers, cucumbers, yams, sweet potatoes, garlic, onions, edible fern roots, and radishes of the salmon variety, but thicker and with a sharper flavor.

In walking about the streets of the town we were permitted to enter, large slabs of cut granite were seen, which were presumed to be from China, where the walls of canals or streamlets are lined with it. But Dr. Pickering in his rambles discovered pieces that had been cut as if to form a monument, and remarked a difference between it and the Chinese kind. On one or two pieces he saw the mark No. 1, in black paint; the material resembled the Chelmsford granite, and it occurred to him that the stone had been cut in Boston.37 I did not hear of this circumstance until after we had left Sooloo, and have little doubt now that the interdiction against our gentlemen visiting some parts of the town was owing to the fact of the discovery of this plunder. This may have been the reason why they so readily complied with my demands, in order to get rid of us as soon as possible, feeling themselves guilty, and being unprepared for defence; for, of the numerous guns mounted, few if any were serviceable.

While walking around the town we were allowed to enter, we saw large slabs of cut granite that were thought to be from China, where canal walls are lined with it. However, Dr. Pickering noticed some pieces that looked like they had been cut for a monument and pointed out the differences compared to the Chinese version. On one or two pieces, he spotted the mark No. 1, painted in black; the stone looked like Chelmsford granite, and he suspected it had been cut in Boston. I didn’t hear about this until after we left Sooloo, and I'm now quite sure that the ban on our gentlemen visiting certain parts of the town was because of this discovery of stolen goods. This might explain why they quickly complied with my requests, wanting to get rid of us as fast as possible, feeling guilty and unprepared for a defense; of the many mounted guns, few, if any, were functional.

The theft of the pistol was so barefaced an affair, that I made up my mind to insist on its restoration. At the setting of the watch in the evening, it had been our practice on board the Vincennes to fire a small brass howitzer. This frequently, in the calm [158]evenings, produced a great reverberation, and rolled along the water to the surrounding islands with considerable noise. Instead of it, on this evening, I ordered one of the long guns to be fired, believing that the sound and reverberation alone would suffice to intimidate such robbers. One was accordingly fired in the direction of the town, which fairly shook the island, as they said, and it was not long before we saw that the rogues were fully aroused, for the clatter of gongs and voices that came over the water, and the motion of lights, convinced me that the pistol would be forthcoming in the morning. In this I was not mistaken, for at early daylight I was awakened by a special messenger from the Datu to tell me that the pistol was found, and would be brought off without delay; that he had been searching for it all night, and had succeeded at last in finding it, as well as the thief, on whom he intended to inflict the bastinado. Accordingly, in a short time the pistol was delivered on board, and every expression of friendship and good-will given, with the strongest assurances that nothing of the kind should happen again.

The theft of the pistol was so shameless that I decided to demand its return. In the evening, it had been our routine on the Vincennes to fire a small brass howitzer as the watch was set. This often caused a loud echo on calm evenings, rolling across the water to the nearby islands with a significant noise. Instead, that evening, I ordered one of the long guns to be fired, thinking that the sound and echo would be enough to scare off the thieves. One was fired toward the town, shaking the island, as they said, and it wasn’t long before I realized that the rascals were fully alerted because of the noise of gongs and voices coming over the water, along with moving lights, which convinced me that the pistol would be returned by morning. I was right, as at dawn I was woken by a messenger from the Datu, who told me that the pistol was found and would be brought to me right away; he had been searching for it all night and had finally located both the pistol and the thief, whom he planned to punish severely. Soon after, the pistol was delivered on board, accompanied by expressions of friendship and goodwill, with strong promises that nothing like this would happen again.

As our naturalists could have no opportunity of rambling over the island of Sooloo, it was thought that one of the neighbouring islands (although not so good a field) would afford them many of the same results, and that they could examine it unmolested. Accordingly, at an early hour, they were despatched in boats for that purpose, with a sufficient guard to attend them in case of necessity. The island on which they landed is called Marongas38 on the map of the [159]group annexed to this chapter. On it are two hills of volcanic conglomerate and vesicular lava, containing angular fragments embedded. The bottom was covered with living coral, of every variety, and of different colours; but there was nothing like a regular coral shelf, and the beach was composed of bits of coral intermixed with dead shells, both entire and comminuted. The centre of the island was covered with mangrove-bushes; the hills were cones, but had no craters on them. The mangroves had grown in clusters, giving the appearance of a number of small islands. This, with the neighbouring islets, were thought to be composed in a great part of coral, but it was impossible for our gentlemen to determine the fact.

Since our naturalists couldn't explore the island of Sooloo, it was decided that one of the nearby islands (though not as promising) would provide them with many similar findings, and they could investigate it without interference. So, early in the morning, they were sent out in boats with enough guards to help if needed. The island they landed on is called Marongas38 on the map of the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] group attached to this chapter. It features two hills made of volcanic rock and frothy lava, with sharp fragments embedded in it. The seabed was covered with living corals of all varieties and colors; however, there wasn’t a proper coral shelf, and the beach consisted of coral pieces mixed with whole and broken shells. The center of the island was filled with mangrove bushes; the hills were cone-shaped but didn’t have any craters. The mangroves grew in clusters, creating the look of several small islands. This, along with the nearby little islands, was believed to be mostly made of coral, but it was impossible for our team to confirm that.

The day was exceedingly hot, and the island was suffering to such a degree from drought that the leaves in many cases were curled and appeared dry. On the face of the rocky cliff they saw many swallows (hirundo esculenta) flying in and out of the caverns facing the sea; but they were not fortunate enough to find any of the edible nests, so much esteemed by Chinese epicures.

The day was extremely hot, and the island was experiencing such severe drought that many of the leaves curled up and looked dry. On the rocky cliff, they saw swallows flying in and out of the caves facing the sea, but they weren't lucky enough to find any of the edible nests that are highly valued by Chinese gourmets.

At another part of the island they heard the crowing of a cock, and discovered a small village, almost hidden by the mangroves, and built over the water. In the neighbourhood were several fish-baskets set out to dry, as well as a quantity of fencing for weirs, all made of rattan. Their shape was somewhat peculiar. After a little while the native fishermen were seen approaching, who evidently had a knowledge of their visit from the first. They came near with great caution in their canoes; but after the first had spoken and reconnoitred, several others landed, [160]exhibiting no signs of embarrassment, and soon motioned our party off. To indicate that force would be resorted to, in case of refusal, at the same time they pointed to their arms, and drew their krises. Our gentlemen took this all in good part, and after dispensing a few trifling presents among them, began their retreat with a convenient speed, without, however, compromising their dignity.

At another part of the island, they heard a rooster crowing and stumbled upon a small village, almost hidden by the mangroves and built over the water. Nearby, several fish-baskets were laid out to dry, along with a bunch of fencing for weirs, all made from rattan. Their shapes were a bit unusual. After a little while, the local fishermen were spotted coming closer, clearly having known about their visit from the start. They approached cautiously in their canoes, but after the first one spoke and checked things out, several others landed, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]showing no signs of being nervous, and soon motioned for our group to leave. To signal that they would use force if necessary, they pointed to their weapons and drew their krises. Our gentlemen took this all in stride, and after handing out a few small gifts, they began to retreat at a quick pace, without losing their dignity.

The excursion had been profitable in the way of collections, having yielded a number of specimens of shrubs and trees, both in flower and fruit; but owing to the drought, the herbaceous plants were, for the most part, dried up. Among the latter, however, they saw a large and fine terrestrial species of Epidendrum, whose stem grew to the height of several feet, and when surmounted by its flowers reached twelve or fifteen feet high. Many of the salt-marsh plants seen in the Feejees, were also observed here. Besides the plants, some shells and a beautiful cream-coloured pigeon were obtained.

The trip had been successful in terms of collecting, yielding various specimens of shrubs and trees, both in bloom and bearing fruit; however, due to the drought, most of the herbaceous plants were dried up. Among those plants, they spotted a large, impressive terrestrial species of Epidendrum, which grew to several feet tall and, when topped with its flowers, reached twelve to fifteen feet high. Many of the salt-marsh plants found in the Feejees were also noticed here. In addition to the plants, they collected some shells and a beautiful cream-colored pigeon.

During the day we were busily engaged in the survey of the harbour, and in making astronomical and magnetical observations on the beach, while some of the officers were employed purchasing curiosities, on shore, at the town, and alongside the ship. These consisted of krises, spears, shields, and shells; and the Sooloos were not slow in comprehending the kind of articles we were in search of.

During the day, we were busy surveying the harbor and taking astronomical and magnetic readings on the beach, while some of the officers were out buying souvenirs in the town and by the ship. These included krises, spears, shields, and shells, and the Sooloos quickly understood the kind of items we were looking for.

Few if any of the Sooloos39 can write or read, though many speak Spanish. Their accounts are all [161]kept by the slaves. Those who can read and write are, in consequence, highly prized. All the accounts of the Datu of Soung are kept in Dutch, by a young Malay from Ternate, who writes a good hand, and speaks English, and whom we found exceedingly useful to us. He is the slave of the Datu, who employs him for this purpose only. He told us he was captured in a brig by the pirates of Basillan, and sold here as a slave, where he is likely to remain for life, although he says the Datu has promised to give him his freedom after ten years.

Few, if any, of the Sooloos39 can read or write, though many speak Spanish. Their records are all [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] kept by the slaves. Those who can read and write are, therefore, highly valued. All the accounts of the Datu of Soung are maintained in Dutch, by a young Malay from Ternate, who has neat handwriting, speaks English, and has proven to be extremely helpful to us. He is a slave of the Datu, who uses him solely for this task. He told us he was captured on a brig by the pirates of Basillan and sold here as a slave, where he is likely to stay for life, although he mentions that the Datu has promised to grant him his freedom after ten years.

Horses, cows and buffaloes are the beasts of burden, and a Sooloo may usually be seen riding either one or the other, armed cap-a-pie, with kris, spear, and target, or shield.

Horses, cows, and buffaloes are the work animals, and a Sooloo can often be seen riding one or the other, fully armed with a kris, spear, and shield.

They use saddles cut out of solid wood, and many ride with their stirrups so short that they bring the knees very high, and the riders look more like well-grown monkeys than mounted men. The cows and buffaloes are guided by a piece of thong, through the cartilage of the nose. By law, no swine are allowed to be kept on the island, and if any are brought, they are immediately killed. The Chinese are obliged to raise and kill their pigs very secretly, when they desire that species of food; for, notwithstanding the law and the prejudices of the inhabitants, the former continue to keep swine.

They use saddles made from solid wood, and many riders have their stirrups so short that their knees are raised high, making them look more like well-grown monkeys than horseback riders. Cows and buffaloes are led by a piece of thong through their nose cartilage. By law, no pigs are allowed on the island, and any that are brought in are immediately killed. The Chinese have to raise and slaughter their pigs very discreetly when they want that type of food; despite the law and the locals' prejudices, they still keep pigs.

The inhabitants of Sooloo are a tall, thin, and effeminate-looking race: I do not recollect to have seen one corpulent person among them. Their faces are peculiar for length, particularly in the lower jaw and chin, with high cheek-bones, sunken, lack-lustre eyes, and narrow foreheads. Their heads are thinly covered with hair, which appears to be kept closely [162]cropped. I was told that they pluck out their beards, and dye their teeth black with antimony.

The people of Sooloo are tall, slim, and have an effeminate appearance: I don’t remember seeing anyone overweight among them. Their faces are quite long, especially the lower jaw and chin, with prominent cheekbones, dull eyes, and narrow foreheads. Their heads have very little hair, which seems to be kept closely [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]cropped. I heard that they remove their beards and dye their teeth black with antimony.

Their eyebrows appear to be shaven, forming a very regular and high arch, which they esteem a great beauty.

Their eyebrows seem to be shaved, creating a very regular and high arch, which they consider a great beauty.

The dress of the common people is very much like that of the Chinese, with loose and full sleeves, without buttons. The materials of which it is made are grass-cloth, silks, satins, or white cotton, from China. I should judge, from the appearance of their persons, that they ought to be termed, so far as ablutions go, a cleanly people. There is no outward respect or obeisance shown by the slave to his master, nor is the presence of the Datu, or even of the Sultan himself, held in any awe. All appear upon an equality, and there does not seem to be any controlling power; yet it may be at once perceived that they are suspicious and jealous of strangers.

The clothing of the common people resembles that of the Chinese, featuring loose and wide sleeves and no buttons. The fabrics used include grass-cloth, silks, satins, or white cotton, sourced from China. Based on their appearance, I would say they are a fairly clean people when it comes to personal hygiene. There is no visible respect or bowing shown by the slave to his master, nor does anyone seem to regard the Datu or even the Sultan with any reverence. Everyone appears equal, and there doesn’t seem to be a dominant authority; however, it is clear that they are wary and suspicious of outsiders.

The Sooloos, although they are ready to do any thing for the sake of plunder, even to the taking of life, yet are not disposed to hoard their ill-gotten wealth, and, with all their faults, cannot be termed avaricious.

The Sooloos, even though they’re willing to do anything for the sake of stealing, including taking a life, are not inclined to hoard their ill-gotten gains and, despite all their flaws, can’t really be called greedy.

They have but few qualities to redeem their treachery, cruelty, and revengeful dispositions; and one of the principal causes of their being so predominant, or even of their existence, is their inordinate lust for power. When they possess this, it is accompanied by a haughty, consequential, and ostentatious bravery. No greater affront can be offered to a Sooloo, than to underrate his dignity and official consequence. Such an insult is seldom forgiven, and never forgotten. From one who has made numerous voyages to these islands, I have obtained many of the above facts, [163]and my own observation assures me that this view of their character is a correct one. I would, however, add another trait, which is common among them, and that is cowardice, which is obvious, in spite of their boasted prowess and daring. This trait of character is universally ascribed to them among the Spaniards in the Philippines, who ought to be well acquainted with them.

They have few qualities to offset their betrayal, cruelty, and vengeful nature; one of the main reasons they are so dominant, or even exist at all, is their excessive desire for power. When they have it, they show a proud, self-important, and showy form of bravery. There's no greater insult to a Sooloo than to underestimate his status and official standing. Such a slight is rarely forgiven and never forgotten. From someone who has traveled to these islands many times, I've gathered a lot of the above information, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and my own observations confirm that this perspective on their character is accurate. However, I would add another characteristic that is common among them: cowardice, which is apparent despite their claimed bravery and boldness. This trait is widely recognized among the Spaniards in the Philippines, who should be well familiar with them.

The dress of the women is not unlike that of the men in appearance. They wear close jackets of various colours when they go abroad, and the same loose breeches as the men, but over them they usually have a large wrapper (sarong), not unlike the pareu of the Polynesian islanders, which is put round them like a petticoat, or thrown over the shoulders. Their hair is drawn to the back of the head, and around the forehead it is shaven in the form of a regular arch to correspond with the eyebrows. Those that I saw at the Sultan’s were like the Malays, and had light complexions with very black teeth. The Datu thought them very handsome, and on our return he asked me if I had seen the Sultan’s beauties. The females of Sooloo have the reputation of ruling their lords, and possess much weight in the government by the influence they exert over their husbands.

The women's clothing looks quite similar to the men's. They wear fitted jackets in different colors when they go out, paired with the same loose trousers as the men. However, they usually have a large wrapper (sarong) over them, similar to the pareu of the Polynesian islanders, which is tied around the waist like a petticoat or draped over their shoulders. Their hair is pulled back, and they have a shaved area around their forehead shaped like an arch that matches their eyebrows. The women I saw at the Sultan’s place resembled Malays, having light skin and very black teeth. The Datu thought they were very attractive, and on our way back, he asked me if I had noticed the Sultan’s beautiful women. The women of Sooloo are known for being in charge of their husbands and have significant influence in the government through the power they hold over their partners.

It may be owing to this that there is little jealousy of their wives, who are said to hold their virtues in no very great estimation. In their houses they are but scantily clothed, though women of rank have always a large number of rings on their fingers, some of which are of great value, as well as earrings of fine gold. They wear no stockings, but have on Chinese slippers, or Spanish shoes. They are as capable of governing as their husbands, and in many cases more [164]so, as they associate with the slaves, from whom they obtain some knowledge of Christendom, and of the habits and customs of other nations, which they study to imitate in every way.

It might be because of this that there's not much jealousy regarding their wives, who are said to not think very highly of their virtues. In their homes, they’re dressed somewhat simply, although women of status often have many rings on their fingers, some of which are quite valuable, as well as earrings made of fine gold. They don’t wear stockings, but they do wear Chinese slippers or Spanish shoes. They are as capable of governing as their husbands, and in many instances even more so, as they interact with the slaves, from whom they gain some understanding of Western culture and the habits and customs of other countries, which they try to imitate in every way. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The mode in which the Sooloos employ their time may be exemplified by giving that of the Datu; for all, whether free or slave, endeavor to imitate the higher rank as far as is in their power. The datus seldom rise before eleven o’clock, unless they have some particular business; and the Datu Mulu complained of being sleepy in consequence of the early hour at which we had disturbed him.

The way the Sooloos spend their time can be illustrated by looking at the Datu's routine; everyone, whether free or a slave, tries to imitate those of higher status as much as they can. The datus rarely get up before eleven o’clock unless they have specific business to attend to, and Datu Mulu expressed that he felt sleepy because of the early hour we had interrupted him.

On rising, they have chocolate served in gilt glass-ware, with some light biscuit, and sweetmeats imported from China or Manilla, of which they informed me they laid in large supplies. They then lounge about their houses, transacting a little business, and playing at various games, or, in the trading season, go to the meeting of the Ruma Bechara.

Upon waking up, they have chocolate served in fancy glassware, along with some light biscuits and sweets imported from China or Manila, which they told me they stockpile in large quantities. They then relax in their homes, handling a bit of business and playing various games, or during the trading season, they go to the meeting of the Ruma Bechara.

At sunset they take their principal meal, consisting of stews of fish, poultry, beef, eggs, and rice, prepared somewhat after the Chinese and Spanish modes, mixed up with that of the Malay. Although Moslems, they do not forego the use of wine, and some are said to indulge in it to a great extent. After sunset, when the air has become somewhat cooled by the refreshing breezes, they sally forth attended by their retainers to take a walk, or proceed to the bazaars to purchase goods, or to sell or to barter away their articles of produce. They then pay visits to their friends, when they are in the habit of having frequent convivial parties, talking over their bargains, smoking cigars, drinking wine and liquors, tea, coffee, and chocolate, and indulging in their [165]favorite pipe of opium. At times they are entertained with music, both vocal and instrumental, by their dependants. Of this art they appear to be very fond, and there are many musical instruments among them. A datu, indeed, would be looked upon as uneducated if he could not play on some instrument.

At sunset, they have their main meal, which consists of fish, chicken, beef, eggs, and rice stews, prepared in a style that combines Chinese, Spanish, and Malay influences. Despite being Muslims, they still enjoy wine, and some are known to indulge quite a bit. After sunset, when the air cools with refreshing breezes, they head out with their servants to take a walk, visit the bazaars to shop or barter for goods, or sell their produce. They often visit friends, where they frequently host lively gatherings, discussing their deals while smoking cigars, drinking wine, liquor, tea, coffee, and chocolate, and enjoying their favorite opium pipe. Sometimes, they are entertained by music, both singing and instruments, performed by their attendants. They seem to really love this art, and many of them have musical instruments. A datu would be considered uneducated if he couldn't play an instrument.

It is considered polite that when refreshments are handed they should be partaken of. Those offered us by the Datu were such as are usual, but every thing was stale. Of fruit they are said to be very fond, and can afford to indulge themselves in some kinds. With all these articles to cloy the appetite, only one set meal a day is taken; though the poorer classes, fishermen and labourers, partake of two.

It’s considered polite to accept refreshments when they’re offered. The ones we received from the Datu were pretty typical, but everything was stale. They’re said to really like fruit and can treat themselves to some kinds. With all these tempting options, they only have one main meal a day; however, the poorer folks, like fishermen and laborers, usually have two.

The government of the Sooloo Archipelago is a kind of oligarchy, and the supreme authority is vested in the Sultan and the Ruma Bechara or trading council. This consists of about twenty chiefs, either datus, or their next in rank, called orangs,40 who are governors of towns or detached provinces. The influence of the individual chiefs depends chiefly upon the number of their retainers or slaves, and the force they can bring into their service when they require it. These are purchased from the pirates, who bring them to Sooloo and its dependencies for sale. The slaves are employed in a variety of ways, as in trading prahus, in the pearl and biche de mar41 fisheries, and in the search after the edible birds’-nests.

The government of the Sooloo Archipelago is an oligarchy, with the main power held by the Sultan and the Ruma Bechara, or trading council. This council is made up of about twenty chiefs, either datus or their immediate subordinates, called orangs, who serve as governors of towns or separate provinces. A chief's power mainly depends on the number of retainers or slaves they have and how many they can mobilize when needed. These individuals are bought from pirates, who bring them to Sooloo and its territories for sale. The slaves are used in various roles, including working on trading boats, in the pearl and biche de mar fisheries, and in the search for edible bird's nests.

A few are engaged in agriculture, and those who [166]are at all educated are employed as clerks. These slaves are not denied the right of holding property, which they enjoy during their lives, but at their death it reverts to the master. Some of them are quite rich, and what may appear strange, the slaves of Sooloo are invariably better off than the untitled freemen, who are at all times the prey of the hereditary datus, even of those who hold no official stations. By all accounts these constitute a large proportion of the population, and it being treason for any low-born freeman to injure or maltreat a datu, the latter, who are of a haughty, overbearing, and tyrannical disposition, seldom keep themselves within bounds in their treatment of their inferiors. The consequence is, the lower class of freemen are obliged to put themselves under the protection of some particular datu, which guards them from the encroachment of others. The chief to whom they thus attach themselves, is induced to treat them well, in order to retain their services, and attach them to his person, that he may, in case of need, be enabled to defend himself from depredations, and the violence of his neighbours.

A few people are involved in farming, and those who [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] have any education work as clerks. These slaves are allowed to own property, which they can keep during their lives, but it reverts to their master when they die. Some of them are quite wealthy, and oddly enough, the slaves in Sooloo are usually better off than the untitled free people, who are constantly at the mercy of the hereditary datus, even those without official roles. These datus make up a large part of the population, and it's considered treason for any low-born free person to harm or mistreat a datu. Because of this, the datus, who are often arrogant and tyrannical, frequently treat their inferiors poorly. As a result, the lower-class free people have to seek protection from a specific datu, which keeps them safe from others. The chief they align themselves with tends to treat them well to maintain their loyalty and keep them close, so that in case of trouble, he can rely on them for defense against robbers and violent neighbors.

Such is the absence of legal restraint, that all find it necessary to go abroad armed, and accompanied by a trusty set of followers, who are also armed. This is the case both by day and night, and according to the Datu’s account, frequent affrays take place in the open streets, which not unfrequently end in bloodshed.

Such is the lack of legal restrictions that everyone feels the need to go out armed, accompanied by a reliable group of followers who are also armed. This happens both during the day and at night, and according to the Datu's account, there are often fights in the streets that frequently end in violence.

Caution is never laid aside, the only law that exists being that of force; but the weak contrive to balance the power of the strong by uniting. They have not only contentions and strife among themselves, but [167]it was stated at Manilla that the mountaineers of Sooloo, who are said to be Christians, occasionally make inroads upon them. At Sooloo, however, it did not appear that they were much under apprehension of these attacks. The only fear I heard expressed was by the Sultan, in my interview with him; and the cause of this, as I have already stated, was probably a desire to find an excuse for not affording us facilities to go into the interior. Within twenty years, however, the reigning Sultan has been obliged to retire within his forts, in the town of Sooloo, which I have before adverted to.

Caution is always present, with the only law being the law of force; but the weak manage to balance the strength of the strong by banding together. They don't just have conflicts and struggles among themselves, but [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]it was reported in Manilla that the mountain people of Sooloo, who are considered to be Christians, sometimes raid them. However, in Sooloo, it didn't seem like they were too worried about these attacks. The only concern I heard came from the Sultan during our meeting, and this was likely just an attempt to justify not allowing us to access the interior. In the last twenty years, though, the current Sultan has had to retreat into his forts in the town of Sooloo, which I mentioned earlier.

These people are hostile to the Sooloos of the coasts and towns, who take every opportunity to rob them of their cattle and property, for which the mountaineers seek retaliation when they have an opportunity. From the manner in which the Datu spoke of them, they are not much regarded. Through another source I learned that the mountaineers were Papuans, and the original inhabitants of the islands, who pay tribute to the Sultan, and have acknowledged his authority ever since they were converted to Islamism.42 Before that time they were considered extremely ferocious, and whenever it was practicable they were destroyed. Others speak of an original race of Dyacks in the interior, but there is one circumstance to satisfy me that there is no confidence to be placed in this account, namely, that the island is not of sufficient extent to accommodate so numerous a population as some ascribe to it.

These people are unfriendly towards the Sooloos from the coastal areas and towns, who seize every chance to steal their cattle and belongings. As a result, the mountaineers look for ways to retaliate when they can. From how the Datu talked about them, it seems they aren’t respected much. I found out from another source that the mountaineers are Papuans, the original inhabitants of the islands, who pay tribute to the Sultan and have recognized his authority since converting to Islam. Before that, they were seen as extremely fierce, and whenever possible, they were eliminated. Others mention an original group of Dyaks in the interior, but there’s one reason that makes me doubt this account: the island isn’t large enough to support such a large population as some claim.

The forts consist of a double row of piles, filled in [168]with coral blocks. That situated on the east side of the small stream may be said to mount a few guns, but these are altogether inefficient; and in another, on the west side, which is rather a rude embankment than a fort, there are some twelve or fifteen pieces of large calibre; but I doubt very much if they had been fired off for years, and many of the houses built upon the water would require to be pulled down before these guns could be brought to bear upon any thing on the side of the bay, supposing them to be in a good condition; a little farther to the east of the town, I was informed they had a kind of stockade, but none of us were permitted to see it.

The forts are made up of two rows of piles filled in [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]with coral blocks. The one on the east side of the small stream can be said to have a few guns, but they are completely useless; while the one on the west side, which is more of a rough embankment than a fort, has about twelve or fifteen large-caliber pieces. However, I seriously doubt they’ve been fired in years, and many of the houses built over the water would need to be torn down before these guns could actually be used against anything in the bay, assuming they were in working order. A bit further east of the town, I was told there’s a kind of stockade, but we were all denied access to see it.

According to our estimates, and the information we received while at Sooloo, the island itself does not contain more than thirty thousand inhabitants, of which the town of Soung may have six or seven thousand. The whole group may number about one hundred and thirty thousand. I am aware, however, that it is difficult to estimate the population of a half-civilized people, who invariably exaggerate their own strength; and visiters are likewise prone to do the same thing. The Chinese comprise about an eighth of the population of the town, and are generally of the lower class. They are constantly busy at their trades, and intent upon making money.

According to our estimates and the information we gathered while in Sooloo, the island has no more than thirty thousand residents, with the town of Soung possibly having six or seven thousand. The entire group might total around one hundred thirty thousand. However, I know it's tough to gauge the population of a semi-civilized society, where they often inflate their own numbers, and visitors tend to do the same. The Chinese make up about one-eighth of the town's population and generally belong to the lower class. They are always busy with their trades, focused on making money.

At Soung, business seems active, and all, slaves as well as masters, seem to engage in it. The absence of a strong government leaves all at liberty to act for themselves, and the Ruma Bechara gives unlimited freedom to trade. These circumstances promote the industry of the community, and even that of the slave, for he too, as before observed, has a life interest in what he earns.

At Soung, business appears to be bustling, with both slaves and masters taking part. The lack of a strong government allows everyone the freedom to act on their own, and the Ruma Bechara provides unrestricted opportunities for trade. These factors boost the community's industry, including that of the slaves, since, as mentioned earlier, they have a personal stake in what they earn.

Soung being the residence of the Sultan, as well [169]as the grand depôt for all piratical goods, is probably more of a mart than any of the surrounding towns. In the months of March and April it is visited by several Chinese junks, who remain trading until the beginning of the month of August. If delayed after that time, they can scarcely return in safety, being unable to contend with the boisterous weather and head winds that then prevail in the Chinese seas. These junks are said to come chiefly from Amoy, where the cottons, &c., best suited for the Sooloos are made. Their cargoes consist of a variety of articles of Chinese manufacture and produce, such as silk, satin goods, cottons, red and checked, grass-cloth clothing, handkerchiefs, cutlery, guns, ammunition, opium, lumber, china and glass-ware, rice, sugar, oil, lard, and butter. In return for this merchandise they obtain camphor, birds’-nests, rattans, biche de mar, pearls and pearl-shells, cocoa, tortoise-shell, and wax; but there is no great quantity of these articles to be obtained, perhaps not more than two or three cargoes during the season. The trade requires great knowledge of the articles purchased, for the Chinese and Sooloos are both such adepts in fraud, that great caution and circumspection are necessary.

Soung, being the home of the Sultan and the main hub for all pirated goods, is likely more of a marketplace than any of the nearby towns. In March and April, it attracts several Chinese junks, which stay to trade until early August. If they are delayed beyond that, they can barely make it back safely due to the rough weather and strong headwinds that hit the China Sea during that time. These junks mainly come from Amoy, where the cottons and other goods most suitable for the Sooloos are produced. Their shipments include a range of Chinese-made and grown products, such as silk, satin, cotton (both red and checked), grass-cloth clothing, handkerchiefs, cutlery, firearms, ammunition, opium, lumber, china, glassware, rice, sugar, oil, lard, and butter. In exchange for these goods, they receive camphor, bird’s nests, rattans, biche de mer, pearls and pearl-shells, cocoa, tortoise-shell, and wax; however, there isn't a large quantity of these items available, possibly only two or three shipments during the season. The trade demands extensive knowledge of the items being bought, as both the Chinese and the Sooloos are skilled at deception, so great caution and care are necessary.

The duties on importation are not fixed, but are changed and altered from time to time by the Ruma Bechara. The following was stated to me as the necessary payments before trade could be carried on.

The import duties aren't set in stone; they change periodically based on the Ruma Bechara. I was informed that these were the required payments before any trade could take place.

A large ship, with Chinese on board, pays $2,000
A large ship, without Chinese on board, pays 1,800
Small ships, 1,500
Large brig, 1,000
Small brig, 500
Schooners, from 150 to 400

This supposes them all to have full cargoes. That [170]a difference should be made in a vessel with or without Chinamen, seems singular; but this, I was told, arose from the circumstance that English vessels take them on board, in order to detect and prevent the impositions of the Sooloos.

This assumes they all have full loads. That [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]a difference should exist between a ship with or without Chinese workers seems odd; however, I was informed that this is due to the fact that British ships bring them on board to uncover and stop the scams of the Sooloos.

Vessels intending to trade at Soung should arrive before the Chinese junks, and remain as long as they stay, or even a few days later. In trading with the natives, all operations ought to be carried on for cash, or if by barter, no delivery should be made until the articles to be taken in exchange are received. In short, it is necessary to deal with them as though they were undoubted rogues, and this pleases them much more than to appear unsuspicious. Vessels that trade engage a bazaar, which they hire of the Ruma Bechara, and it is advisable to secure the good-will of the leading datus in that council by presents, and paying them more for their goods than others.

Vessels looking to trade at Soung should arrive before the Chinese junks and stay as long as they do, or even a few days longer. When trading with the locals, all transactions should be done for cash, or if trading goods, no delivery should happen until the items being exchanged are received. In short, it's essential to engage with them as if they are definitely untrustworthy, which they actually prefer much more than being treated without suspicion. Trading vessels rent a bazaar from the Ruma Bechara, and it’s wise to win the favor of the leading datus in that council by offering gifts and paying them more for their goods than others do.

There are various other precautions necessary in dealing with this people; for they will, if possible, so act as to give rise to disputes, in which case an appeal is made to their fellows, who are sure to decide against the strangers. Those who have been engaged in this trade, advise that the prices of the goods should be fixed upon before the Sultan, and the scales of the Datu of Soung employed; for although these are quite faulty, the error is compensated by the articles received being weighed in the same. This also secures the Datu’s good-will, by the fee (some fifty dollars) which he receives for the use of them. Thus it will be perceived that those who desire to trade with Sooloo, must make up their minds to encounter many impositions, and to be continually watchful of their own interests. [171]

There are several other precautions you need to take when dealing with these people; they will, if they can, act in ways that lead to disputes. When that happens, they'll appeal to their peers, who will definitely side against outsiders. Those who have been in this trade recommend that the prices of goods be agreed upon in front of the Sultan, and that the scales used should belong to the Datu of Soung; even though these scales are not very accurate, the mistake is balanced out by weighing the goods on the same scales. This also wins the Datu's favor, since he gets a fee (around fifty dollars) for using them. Therefore, it's clear that anyone wanting to trade with Sooloo needs to be prepared to face many scams and to constantly look out for their own interests. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Every possible precaution ought to be taken; and it will be found, the treatment will depend upon, or be according to the force or resolution that is displayed. In justice to this people it must be stated, there have been times when traders received every kindness and attention at the island of Sooloo, and I heard it even said, that many vessels had gone there to refit; but during the last thirty or forty years, the reigning sultans and their subjects have become hostile to Europeans, of whom they plunder and destroy as many as they can, and this they have hitherto been allowed to do with impunity.

Every possible precaution should be taken; and it's clear that the treatment will depend on the level of force or determination shown. To be fair to this people, it should be noted that there have been times when traders received every kindness and attention on the island of Sooloo, and I even heard it said that many vessels went there to refit; however, over the last thirty or forty years, the ruling sultans and their people have become hostile towards Europeans, plundering and destroying as many as they can, and so far, they've been allowed to do this without consequences.

Although I have described the trade with Sooloo as limited, yet it is capable of greater extension; and had it not been for the piratical habits of the people, the evil report of which has been so widely spread, Sooloo would now have been one of the principal marts of the East. The most fertile parts of Borneo are subject to its authority. There all the richest productions of these Eastern seas grow in immense quantities, but are now left ungarnered in consequence of there being no buyers. The cost of their cultivation would be exceedingly low, and I am disposed to believe that these articles could be produced here at a lower cost than any where else.

Although I initially described trade with Sooloo as limited, it has potential for much more growth. If it weren't for the pirates in the area, which has given it a bad reputation, Sooloo could have become one of the main trading hubs in the East. The most fertile regions of Borneo fall under its control. There, all the richest products of these Eastern seas grow in huge quantities but are left unharvested due to a lack of buyers. The cost of growing them is extremely low, and I believe these items could be produced here at a lower cost than anywhere else.

Besides the trade with China, there is a very considerable one with Manilla in small articles, and I found one of our countrymen engaged in this traffic, under the Spanish flag. To him I am indebted for much information that his opportunities for observation had given him.

Besides trading with China, there’s also a significant trade with Manila involving small items, and I came across one of our fellow countrymen involved in this business under the Spanish flag. I owe him a lot of information based on what he had observed.

The materials for the history of Sooloo are meagre, and great doubts seem to exist in some periods of it. That which I have been able to gather is as follows. [172]

The sources for the history of Sooloo are limited, and there are significant uncertainties during certain periods. What I've managed to collect is as follows. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The island of Sooloo is generally believed to have been originally inhabited by Papuans, some of whom, as I have already stated, are still supposed to inhabit the mountainous part. The first intercourse had with them was by the Chinese, who went there in search of pearls. The Orang Dampuwans were the first of the Malays to form settlements on the islands; but after building towns, and making other improvements, they abandoned the islands, in consequence, it is said, of the inhabitants being a perfidious race, having previously to their departure destroyed as many of the natives as they could.

The island of Sooloo is generally thought to have been originally settled by Papuans, some of whom, as I’ve mentioned before, are still believed to live in the mountainous areas. The first interactions with them were by the Chinese, who came searching for pearls. The Orang Dampuwans were the first Malays to establish settlements on the islands; however, after building towns and making improvements, they abandoned the islands, reportedly because the locals were considered treacherous, having killed as many of the natives as they could before leaving.

The fame of the submarine riches of this archipelago reached Banjur, or Borneo, the people of which were induced to resort there, and finding it to equal their expectation, they sent a large colony, and made endeavours to win over the inhabitants, and obtain thereby the possession of their rich isle. In order to confirm the alliance, a female of Banjarmassing,43 of great beauty, was sent, and married to the principal chief; and from this alliance the sovereigns of Sooloo claim their descent. The treaty of marriage made Sooloo tributary to the Banjarmassing empire.

The fame of the submarine riches in this archipelago reached Banjur, or Borneo, prompting its people to travel there. Finding it lived up to their expectations, they sent a large colony and tried to win over the locals to gain control of their wealthy island. To solidify the alliance, a beautiful woman from Banjarmassing, 43, was sent and married to the main chief; from this marriage, the rulers of Sooloo claim their lineage. The marriage treaty made Sooloo a tribute state to the Banjarmassing empire.

After the Banjars had thus obtained possession of the archipelago, the trade in its products attracted settlers from the surrounding islands, who soon contrived to displace the aborigines, and drive them to the inaccessible mountains for protection. [173]

After the Banjars gained control of the archipelago, the trade in its products drew settlers from nearby islands, who quickly managed to push out the native population and force them into the remote mountains for safety. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

When the Chinese took possession of the northern parts of Borneo, under the Emperor Songtiping, about the year 1375,44 the daughter of that prince was married to a celebrated Arabian chief named Sherif Alli, who visited the shores of Borneo in quest of commerce. The descendants of this marriage extended their conquests not only over the Sooloo Archipelago, but over the whole of the Philippines, and rendered the former tributary to Borneo. In three reigns after this event, the Sultan of Borneo proper married the daughter of a Sooloo chief, and from this union came Mirhome Bongsu, who succeeding to the throne while yet a minor, his uncle acted as regent. Sooloo now wished to throw off the yoke of Borneo, and through the intrigues of the regent succeeded in doing so, as well as in retaining possession of the eastern side of Borneo, from Maludu Bay on the north to Tulusyan on the south, which has ever since been a part of the Sooloo territory.

When the Chinese took control of the northern parts of Borneo under Emperor Songtiping around the year 1375, the daughter of that prince married a famous Arabian chief named Sherif Alli, who came to Borneo looking for trade. The descendants of this marriage expanded their influence not just over the Sooloo Archipelago but also throughout the Philippines, making the former a vassal of Borneo. Three reigns later, the Sultan of Borneo married the daughter of a Sooloo chief, and from this union came Mirhome Bongsu, who became king while still a minor, with his uncle serving as regent. Sooloo now wanted to break free from Borneo's rule, and with the regent's intrigues, they succeeded in doing so while also keeping control of the eastern side of Borneo, from Maludu Bay in the north to Tulusyan in the south, which has remained part of Sooloo territory ever since.

This event took place before Islamism became the prevailing religion; but which form of idolatry, the Sooloos pretend, is not now known. It is, however, believed the people on the coast were Bud[d]hists, while those of the interior were Pagans.

This event happened before Islam became the dominant religion; however, the specific form of idolatry that the Sooloos claim was practiced is no longer known. It is believed, though, that the people on the coast were Buddhists, while those in the interior were Pagans.

The first Sultan of Sooloo was Kamaludin, and during his reign one Sayed Alli, a merchant, arrived at Sooloo from Mecca. He was a sherif, and soon converted one-half the islanders to his own faith. He was elected sultan on the death of Kamaludin, and [174]reigned seven years, in the course of which he became celebrated throughout the archipelago. Dying at Sooloo, a tomb was erected to him there, and the island came to be looked upon by the faithful as the Mecca of the East, and continued to be resorted to as a pilgrimage until the arrival of the Spaniards.

The first Sultan of Sooloo was Kamaludin, and during his time, a merchant named Sayed Alli arrived at Sooloo from Mecca. He was a sherif and soon converted half the islanders to his faith. After Kamaludin's death, he was elected sultan and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] reigned for seven years, during which he became famous across the archipelago. He died in Sooloo, and a tomb was built for him there. The island became known as the Mecca of the East and continued to be a pilgrimage site until the Spaniards arrived.

Sayed Alli left a son called Batua, who succeeded him. The latter had two sons, named Sabudin and Nasarudin, who, on the death of their father, made war upon each other. Nasarudin, the youngest, being defeated, sought refuge on Tawi Tawi, where he established himself, and built a fort for his protection. The difficulties were finally compromised, and they agreed to reign together over Sooloo. Nasarudin had two sons, called Amir and Bantilan, of whom the former was named as successor to the two brothers, and on their deaths ascended the throne. During his reign another sherif arrived from Mecca, who succeeded in converting the remainder of the population to Islamism. Bantilan and his brother Amir finally quarrelled, and the latter was driven from Sooloo to seek refuge in the island of Basillan, where he became sultan.45

Sayed Alli had a son named Batua, who took over after him. Batua had two sons, Sabudin and Nasarudin, who went to war with each other after their father died. The youngest, Nasarudin, was defeated and fled to Tawi Tawi, where he set up a fort for his protection. Eventually, they reached a compromise and agreed to rule Sooloo together. Nasarudin had two sons, Amir and Bantilan, with Amir being named as the successor for the two brothers. When they died, he took the throne. During his reign, another sherif arrived from Mecca and successfully converted the rest of the population to Islam. Bantilan and Amir eventually had a falling out, leading Amir to flee to Basillan, where he became sultan.45

On the arrival of the Spaniards in 1566, a kind of desultory war was waged by them upon the various islands, in the hope of conquering them and extending their religion. In these wars they succeeded in gaining temporary possession of a part of Sooloo, and destroyed the tomb of Sayed Alli. The Spaniards always looked upon the conversion of the Moslems to the true Catholic faith with great interest; [175]but in the year 1646, the sultan of Magindanao succeeded in making peace, by the terms of which the Spaniards withdrew from Sooloo, and were to receive from the sultan three cargoes of rice annually as a tribute.

When the Spaniards arrived in 1566, they engaged in a sort of sporadic war across the islands, aiming to conquer them and spread their religion. In these conflicts, they managed to temporarily take control of part of Sooloo and destroyed the tomb of Sayed Alli. The Spaniards were always very interested in converting the Muslims to the true Catholic faith; [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] however, in 1646, the sultan of Magindanao negotiated peace, under which the Spaniards pulled out of Sooloo and were to receive three cargoes of rice annually as tribute from the sultan.

In 1608, the small-pox made fearful ravages, and most of the inhabitants fled from the scourge. Among these was the heir apparent, during whose absence the throne became vacant, and another was elected in his stead. This produced contention for a short time, which ended in the elected maintaining his place.

In 1608, smallpox spread rapidly, and most of the people fled from the disease. Among those who left was the heir apparent, and during his absence, the throne became vacant, leading to another person being elected in his place. This caused some conflict for a short time, which ended with the elected official keeping his position.

This tribute continued to be paid until the flight of Amir to Basillan, about the year 1752, where he entered into a secret correspondence with the authorities at Samboangan, and after two years a vessel was sent from Manilla, which carried him to that capital, where he was treated as a prisoner of state.

This tribute continued until Amir fled to Basillan around 1752, where he started a secret correspondence with the authorities in Samboangan. After two years, a ship was sent from Manila to take him to that capital, where he was treated as a political prisoner.

In June, 1759, an English ship, on board of which was Dalrymple, then in the service of the East India Company, arrived at Sooloo on a trading voyage. Dalrymple remained at Sooloo for three months, engaged in making sales and purchases. The Sultan Bantilan treated him with great kindness, and sought the interest of Dalrymple to obtain the liberation of his brother, who was now held prisoner by the Spaniards at Manilla, by telling him of his brother’s wife, who had been left behind when Amir quitted the island, and had been delivered of twins, after he had been kidnapped by the Spaniards. Dalrymple entered into a pledge to restore Amir, and at the same time effected a commercial treaty between the East India Company and the Sooloo [176]chiefs. By this it was stipulated that an annual cargo should be sent to Sooloo, and sold at one hundred per cent. profit, for which a return cargo should be provided for the China market, which should realize an equal profit there, after deducting all expenses. The overplus, if any, was to be carried to the credit of the Sooloos. This appears to have been the first attempt made by the English to secure a regular commercial intercourse with this archipelago.

In June 1759, an English ship carrying Dalrymple, who was working for the East India Company, arrived in Sooloo on a trading trip. Dalrymple stayed in Sooloo for three months, focused on buying and selling goods. The Sultan Bantilan treated him very kindly and sought Dalrymple’s help in securing the release of his brother, who was imprisoned by the Spaniards in Manila. The Sultan shared the story of his brother’s wife, who had been left behind when Amir was taken from the island and had given birth to twins after his kidnapping. Dalrymple committed to helping free Amir and also established a trade agreement between the East India Company and the Sooloo chiefs. This agreement stated that an annual shipment would be sent to Sooloo, sold at a one hundred percent profit, and a return cargo would be prepared for the China market, aiming for an equal profit after all expenses. Any surplus would be credited to the Sooloos. This marked the first effort by the English to create a regular trading relationship with this archipelago.

In the year 1760, a large fleet of Spanish vessels sailed from Manilla, with about two thousand men, having the Sultan Amir on board, to carry on a war against Sooloo.

In 1760, a large fleet of Spanish ships sailed from Manilla with around two thousand men, including Sultan Amir, to wage war against Sooloo.

On their arrival, they began active operations. They were repelled on all sides, and after seven days’ ineffectual attempts, they gave up their design. They returned to Manilla, it is said, with a loss of half their number, and without having done any injury to the Sooloos. Not discouraged with this failure, the Spaniards, about two years after, organized a still larger force, which is estimated by some accounts as high as ten thousand men. Although this failed in its attempts on the fort at Soung, the Spaniards obtained possession of Tanjong Matonda, one of the small ports on the island, where they erected a church and fort. Here they established a colony, and appointed a governor. The inhabitants upon this deserted their habitations in the neighbourhood, and fled to the mountains, which, it is said, excited the mountaineers, a host of whom, with their chief, whose name was Sri Kala, determined to rush upon the Spaniards, and annihilate them. Having to contend against disciplined troops, it was not an easy [177]task to succeed. But Sri Kala had a follower, named Sigalo, who offered to lead the host to battle against the Spaniards, and to exterminate them, or to die in the attempt. The chief accepted his offer, and Sigalo, with a chosen few, marched towards the fort, leaving the rest of the mountaineers in readiness to join them at an appointed signal, and rush into the fort en masse.

Upon their arrival, they started active operations. They were pushed back on all sides, and after seven days of unsuccessful attempts, they abandoned their plan. They returned to Manila, reportedly losing half of their number and without having inflicted any harm on the Sooloos. Not discouraged by this failure, the Spaniards organized an even larger force about two years later, which some estimates suggest was as high as ten thousand men. Although they failed in their attempts on the fort at Soung, the Spaniards gained control of Tanjong Matonda, one of the small ports on the island, where they built a church and a fort. They established a colony here and appointed a governor. The local inhabitants abandoned their homes in the area and fled to the mountains, which, it is said, angered the mountain dwellers, a large number of whom, led by their chief named Sri Kala, decided to attack the Spaniards and wipe them out. Facing well-trained troops, it was no easy task to succeed. However, Sri Kala had a warrior named Sigalo, who volunteered to lead the charge against the Spaniards and promised to either eliminate them or die trying. The chief accepted his offer, and Sigalo, along with a select group, marched toward the fort, leaving the rest of the mountain warriors ready to join them at a prearranged signal and storm the fort all together.

Sri Kala and Sigalo, in order to lull the watchfulness of the Spaniards, took with them a young woman, of exquisite beauty, named Purmassuri. The lustful Spaniards were thus thrown off their guard, the signal was given, and the host, rushing forward, entered the fort, every Spaniard within which was slain. A few only, who were on the outside, escaped to the vessels, which set sail, and after encountering various mishaps, returned to Manilla

Sri Kala and Sigalo, to distract the vigilance of the Spaniards, brought along a young woman named Purmassuri, who was incredibly beautiful. The lustful Spaniards were caught off guard, the signal was given, and the warriors rushed in and took over the fort, killing every Spaniard inside. Only a few who were outside managed to escape to the ships, which set sail and, after facing several challenges, returned to Manila.

Some time after this the Sultan Bantilan died, and his son Alimud-deen was proclaimed sultan. Dalrymple did not return until 1762, with a part of the appointed cargo; but the vessel in which the larger part had been shipped, failed to arrive, from not being able to find Sooloo, and went to China. Thence she proceeded to Manilla, and afterwards to Sooloo. The captain of the latter vessel gave a new credit to the Sooloos, before they had paid for their first cargo; and on the arrival of Dalrymple the next time, he found that the small-pox had carried off a large number of the inhabitants, from which circumstance all his hopes of profit were frustrated. He then obtained for the use of the East India Company, a grant of the island of Balambangan, which lies off the north end of Borneo, forming one side of the Straits of Balabac, the western entrance to the [178]Sooloo Sea. Here he proposed to establish a trading port, and after having visited Madras, he took possession of this island in 1763.

Some time later, Sultan Bantilan passed away, and his son Alimud-deen was named the new sultan. Dalrymple didn't return until 1762 with part of the planned cargo; however, the ship carrying the larger portion couldn't find Sooloo and instead went to China. From there, it moved on to Manila and then to Sooloo. The captain of that ship extended new credit to the Sooloos before they had even paid for their first shipment. When Dalrymple returned the next time, he discovered that smallpox had taken a heavy toll on the local population, which dashed all his hopes for profit. He then secured a grant for the East India Company to use the island of Balambangan, located off the north coast of Borneo and forming one side of the Straits of Balabac, the western entrance to the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Sooloo Sea. He aimed to set up a trading port there and, after visiting Madras, took possession of the island in 1763.

In October, 1763, the English took Manilla,46 where the Sultan Amir was found by Dalrymple, who engaged to reinstate him on his throne, if he would cede to the English the north end of Borneo, as well as the south end of Palawan. This he readily promised, and he was, in consequence, carried back to Sooloo, and reinstated; his nephew, Alim-ud-deen, readily giving place to him, and confirming the grant to the East India Company, in which the Ruma Bechara joined.

In October 1763, the English captured Manila, 46 where Dalrymple found Sultan Amir. He agreed to help restore him to his throne on the condition that the Sultan would give the English the northern part of Borneo and the southern part of Palawan. The Sultan readily agreed, and as a result, he was taken back to Sooloo and reinstated. His nephew, Alim-ud-deen, willingly stepped aside for him and confirmed the agreement with the East India Company, which the Ruma Bechara also supported.

After various arrangements, the East India Company took possession of Balambangan, in the year 1773, and formed a settlement there with a view of making it an emporium of trade for Eastern commodities. Troops and stores were sent from India, and the population began to increase by settlers, both Chinese and Malays, who arrived in numbers. In the year 1775, the fort, notwithstanding all the treaties and engagements between Dalrymple and the Sultan, was surprised by the Sultan, and many of the garrison put to death. This virtually put an end to the plans of the English, although another attempt was made to re-establish the settlement by Colonel Farquhar, in 1803; but it was thought to be too expensive a post, and was accordingly abandoned in the next year. This act of the Sooloos fairly established their character for perfidy, and ever since that transaction they have been looked upon as treacherous in the highest degree, and, what is singular, [179]have been allowed to carry on their piracies quite unmolested. The taking of Balambangan has been generally imputed to the treacherous disposition and innate love of plunder among the Sooloos, as well as to their fear that it would destroy the trade of Sooloo by injuring all that of the archipelago. But there are strong reasons for believing that this dark deed owed its origin in part to the influence of the Spaniards and Dutch, who looked with much distrust upon the growth of the rival establishment. Such was the jealousy of the Spaniards, that the governor of the Philippines peremptorily required that Balambangan should be evacuated. The Sooloos boast of the deed, and admit that they received assistance from both Samboangan and Ternate, the two nearest Spanish and Dutch ports. These nations had great reasons to fear, the establishment of a power like that of the East India Company, in a spot so favorably situated to secure the trade of the surrounding islands, possessing fine harbours, and in every way adapted to become a great commercial depôt. Had it been held by the East India Company but for a few years, it must have become what Singapore is now.

After various arrangements, the East India Company took control of Balambangan in 1773 and established a settlement there to create a trading hub for Eastern goods. Troops and supplies were sent from India, and the population began to grow with settlers from both China and Malaysia arriving in large numbers. In 1775, despite all the treaties and agreements between Dalrymple and the Sultan, the fort was attacked by the Sultan, and many of the garrison were killed. This effectively ended the English plans, although Colonel Farquhar made another attempt to revive the settlement in 1803; however, it was deemed too costly and was abandoned the following year. This act by the Sooloos firmly established their reputation for treachery, and since then, they have been regarded as extremely untrustworthy, yet oddly, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] they have been allowed to continue their piracy without interference. The capture of Balambangan is generally attributed to the Sooloos' treacherous nature and inherent desire for plunder, as well as their fear that it would damage their trade by threatening the commerce of the archipelago. However, there are strong reasons to believe that this dark act was partly instigated by the influence of the Spaniards and Dutch, who were suspicious of the rival establishment’s growth. The jealousy of the Spaniards was so intense that the governor of the Philippines demanded the evacuation of Balambangan. The Sooloos take pride in this exploit and acknowledge that they received support from both Samboangan and Ternate, the nearest Spanish and Dutch ports. These countries had strong incentives to fear the establishment of a power like the East India Company in such a strategically located spot that was ideal for controlling trade in the surrounding islands, boasting excellent harbors and every feature needed to become a major commercial depot. Had the East India Company maintained control for just a few years, it could have developed into what Singapore is today.

The original planner of this settlement is said to have been Lord Pigot; but the merit of carrying it forward was undoubtedly due to Dalrymple, whose enterprising mind saw the advantage of the situation, and whose energy was capable of carrying the project successfully forward.

The original planner of this settlement is said to be Lord Pigot; however, the credit for its progress clearly goes to Dalrymple, whose innovative thinking recognized the benefits of the location and whose determination was able to move the project forward successfully.

Since the capture of Balambangan, there has been no event in the history of Sooloo that has made any of the reigns of the Sultans memorable, although fifteen have since ascended the throne.

Since the capture of Balambangan, nothing in the history of Sooloo has made any of the reigns of the Sultans memorable, even though fifteen have taken the throne since then.

Sooloo has from all the accounts very much [180]changed in its character as well as population since the arrival of the Spaniards, and the establishment of their authority in the Philippines. Before that event, some accounts state that the trade with the Chinese was of great extent, and that from four to five hundred junks arrived annually from Cambojia, with which Sooloo principally traded. At that time the population is said to have equalled in density that of the thickly-settled parts of China.

Sooloo has changed significantly in both character and population since the arrival of the Spaniards and the establishment of their authority in the Philippines. Before that, some reports suggest that trade with the Chinese was extensive, with around four to five hundred ships arriving each year from Cambodia, which Sooloo primarily traded with. At that time, the population was said to be as densely populated as the heavily populated areas of China.

The government has also undergone a change; for the sultan, who among other Malay races is usually despotic, is here a mere cipher, and the government has become an oligarchy. This change has probably been brought about by the increase of the privileged class of datus, all of whom are entitled to a seat in the Ruma Bechara until about the year 1810, when the great inconvenience of so large a council was felt, and it became impossible to control it without great difficulty and trouble on the part of the sultan. The Ruma Bechara was then reduced until it contained but six of the principal datus, who assumed the power of controlling the state. The Ruma Bechara, however, in consequence of the complaints of many powerful datus, was enlarged; but the more powerful, and those who have the largest numerical force of slaves, still rule over its deliberations. The whole power, within the last thirty years, has been usurped by one or two datus, who now have monopolized the little foreign trade that comes to these islands. The sultan has the right to appoint his successor, and generally names him while living. In default of this, the choice devolves upon the Ruma Bechara, who elect by a majority.

The government has changed as well; the sultan, who is typically authoritarian among other Malay races, is now just a figurehead, and the government has turned into an oligarchy. This shift has likely been driven by the growth of the privileged class of datus, all of whom had a seat in the Ruma Bechara until around 1810, when it became clear that having such a large council was problematic, making it hard for the sultan to manage. The Ruma Bechara was then reduced to just six of the main datus, who took on the power to control the state. However, due to complaints from other influential datus, the Ruma Bechara was expanded, but the more powerful ones, particularly those with the most slaves, still dominate its discussions. Over the past thirty years, one or two datus have seized all the power and now control the limited foreign trade that comes to these islands. The sultan has the authority to appoint his successor and usually names him while still alive. If he doesn't, the decision falls to the Ruma Bechara, which elects by majority vote.

From a more frequent intercourse with Europeans [181]and the discovery of new routes through these seas, the opportunities of committing depredations have become less frequent, and the fear of detection greater. By this latter motive they are more swayed than by any thing else, and if the Sooloos have ever been bold and daring robbers on the high seas, they have very much changed.

From more frequent interactions with Europeans [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and the discovery of new routes through these seas, opportunities for committing acts of piracy have become less common, and the fear of getting caught has increased. They are influenced more by this fear than by anything else, and if the Sooloos were ever bold and daring pirates on the high seas, they have changed significantly.

Many statements have been made and published relative to the piracies committed in these seas, which in some cases exceed, and in others fall short, of the reality. Most of the piratical establishments are under the rule, or sail under the auspices of the Sultan or Ruma Bechara of Sooloo, who are more or less intimately connected with them. The share of the booty that belongs to the Sultan and Ruma Bechara, is twenty-five per cent. on all captures, whilst the datus receive a high price for the advance they make of guns and powder, and for the services of their slaves.

Many statements have been made and published about the piracy happening in these waters, which in some instances accurately reflect the situation and in others do not. Most of the pirate groups operate under the authority or support of the Sultan or Ruma Bechara of Sooloo, who are more or less closely linked to them. The Sultan and Ruma Bechara take a twenty-five percent cut of all loot, while the datus charge a high price for the guns and ammunition they provide, as well as for the services of their slaves.

The following are the piratical establishments of Sooloo, obtained from the most authentic sources, published as well as verbal. The first among these is the port of Soung, at which we anchored, in the island of Sooloo; not so much from the number of men available here for this pursuit, as the facility of disposing of the goods. By the Spaniards they are denominated Illanun or Lanuns pirates.47 There [182]are other rendezvous on Pulo Toolyan, at Bohol, Tonho, Pilas, Tawi Tawi, Sumlout, Pantutaran, Parodasan, Palawan, and Basillan, and Tantoli on Celebes.48 These are the most noted, but there are many minor places, where half a dozen prahus are fitted out. Those of Sooloo, and those who go under the name of the Lanuns, have prahus of larger size, and better fitted. They are from twenty to thirty tons burden and are propelled by both sails and oars. They draw but little water, are fast sailers, and well adapted for navigating through these dangerous seas. These pirates are supposed to possess in the whole about two hundred prahus, which usually are manned with from forty to fifty pirates; the number therefore engaged in this business, may be estimated at ten thousand. They are armed with muskets, blunderbusses, krises, hatchets, and spears, and at times the vessels have one or two large guns mounted. They infest the Straits of Macassar, the Sea of Celebes, and the Sooloo Sea. Soung is the only place where they can dispose of their plunder to advantage, and obtain the necessary outfits. It may be called the principal resort of these pirates, where well directed measures would result in effectually suppressing the crime.

The following are the pirate strongholds of Sooloo, gathered from the most reliable sources, both written and spoken. The first among these is the port of Soung, where we anchored on the island of Sooloo; not so much because of the number of men available for this activity, but because it's easy to sell the stolen goods here. The Spaniards refer to them as Illanun or Lanuns pirates.47 There [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]are other meeting places at Pulo Toolyan, Bohol, Tonho, Pilas, Tawi Tawi, Sumlout, Pantutaran, Parodasan, Palawan, and Basillan, with Tantoli on Celebes.48 These are the most famous, but there are many smaller locations where a handful of prahus are outfitted. The pirates from Sooloo, and those known as the Lanuns, have larger and better-equipped prahus. They range from twenty to thirty tons and are powered by both sails and oars. They have a shallow draft, are fast sailors, and are well-suited for navigating these treacherous waters. These pirates are believed to have around two hundred prahus, typically manned by forty to fifty pirates each; therefore, the total number involved in this activity can be estimated at about ten thousand. They are armed with muskets, blunderbusses, krises, hatchets, and spears, and sometimes their ships carry one or two large cannons. They are active in the Straits of Macassar, the Sea of Celebes, and the Sooloo Sea. Soung is the only place where they can profitably sell their loot and acquire the supplies they need. It can be considered the main hub for these pirates, where effective measures could lead to the successful suppression of their crimes.

Besides the pirates of Sooloo, the commerce of the [183]Eastern islands is vexed with other piratical establishments. In the neighbouring seas, there are the Malay pirates, who have of late years become exceedingly troublesome. Their prahus are of much smaller size than those of Sooloo, being from ten to twelve tons burden, but in proportion they are much better manned, and thus are enabled to ply with more efficiency their oars or paddles. These prahus frequent the shores of the Straits of Malacca, Cape Romania, the Carimon Isles, and the neighbouring straits, and at times they visit the Straits of Rhio. Some of the most noted, I was informed, were fitted out from Johore, in the very neighbourhood of the English authorities at Singapore; they generally have their haunts on the small islands on the coast, from which they make short cruises.

Besides the pirates of Sooloo, trade in the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Eastern islands is troubled by other pirate groups. In the nearby waters, there are the Malay pirates, who have become increasingly problematic in recent years. Their boats are much smaller than those of Sooloo, weighing between ten to twelve tons, but they are much better manned in proportion, allowing them to use their oars or paddles more effectively. These boats often patrol the shores of the Straits of Malacca, Cape Romania, the Carimon Isles, and the nearby straits, and sometimes they venture into the Straits of Rhio. I was told that some of the most notorious ones are based in Johore, right next to the English authorities in Singapore; they typically have hideouts on the small islands along the coast, from which they embark on short trips.

They are noted for their arrangements for preventing themselves from receiving injury, in the desperate defences that are sometimes made against them. These small prahus have usually swivels mounted, which, although not of great calibre, are capable of throwing a shot beyond the range of small-arms. It is said that they seldom attempt an attack unless the sea is calm, which enables them to approach their victims with more assurance of success, on account of the facility with which they are enabled to manage their boats. The frequent calms which occur in these seas between the land and sea breezes, afford them many opportunities of putting their villa[i]nous plans in operation; and the many inlets and islets, with which they are well acquainted, afford places of refuge and ambush, and for concealing their booty. They are generally found in small flotillas of from six to twenty prahus, and when they [184]have succeeded in disabling a vessel at long shot, the sound of the gong is the signal for boarding, which if successful, results in a massacre more or less bloody, according to the obstinacy of the resistance they have met with.

They are known for their strategies to avoid getting hurt, especially in the desperate defenses made against them. These small boats, called prahus, usually have swivel guns mounted on them that, while not very powerful, can shoot further than small firearms. It's said that they rarely attack unless the sea is calm, which allows them to approach their targets with more confidence of success due to their ability to maneuver their boats easily. The frequent calm periods between the land and sea breezes give them many chances to carry out their wicked plans, and the numerous inlets and islets they know well provide spots for hiding, ambushing, and concealing their loot. They typically operate in small groups of six to twenty prahus, and when they [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] have managed to disable a ship from a distance, the sound of a gong signals them to board. If they succeed, it often leads to a massacre that is more or less bloody depending on how fiercely the victims resist.

In the winter months, the Straits of Malacca are most infected with them; and during the summer, the neighbourhood of Singapore, Point Romania, and the channels in the vicinity. In the spring, from February to May, they are engaged in procuring their supplies, in fishing, and refitting their prahus for the coming year.

In the winter months, the Straits of Malacca are most affected by them; and during the summer, the areas around Singapore, Point Romania, and the nearby channels. In the spring, from February to May, they focus on gathering their supplies, fishing, and repairing their prahus for the upcoming year.

I have frequently heard plans for the suppression of these pirates, particularly of those in the neighbourhood of the settlements under British rule. The European authorities are much to blame for the quiescent manner in which they have so long borne these depredations, and many complaints are made that Englishmen, on being transplanted to India, lose that feeling of horror for deeds of blood, such as are constantly occurring at their very doors, which they would experience in England. There are, however, many difficulties to overcome before operations against the pirates can be effective. The greatest of these is the desire of the English to secure the goodwill of the chiefs of the tribes by whom they are surrounded. They thus wink at their piracies on the vessels of other nations, or take no steps to alleviate the evils of slavery. Indeed the language that one hears from many intelligent men who have long resided in that part of the world is, that in no country where civilization exists does slavery exhibit so debasing a form as in her Indian possessions. Another difficulty consists in the want of minute [185]knowledge of the coasts, inlets, and hiding-places of the pirates, and this must continue to exist until proper surveys are made. This done, it would be necessary to employ vessels that could pursue the pirates every where, for which steamers naturally suggest themselves.49

I have often heard about plans to deal with these pirates, especially those near the settlements under British rule. The European authorities are quite at fault for the passive way they've allowed these attacks to continue for so long, and many people complain that Englishmen, when they move to India, lose their sense of horror regarding violent acts that happen right around them, which they would still feel back in England. However, there are many challenges to address before any actions against the pirates can be effective. The biggest issue is the desire of the English to maintain good relations with the local tribal chiefs surrounding them. As a result, they turn a blind eye to the piracy against ships from other nations or do nothing to improve the situation of slavery. In fact, many educated individuals who have lived in that region for a long time say that no other country where civilization exists has slavery in such a degrading form as in the Indian territories. Another challenge is the lack of detailed knowledge about the coasts, inlets, and hiding spots of the pirates, which will persist until proper surveys are conducted. Once that’s done, it would be necessary to use ships that can chase the pirates everywhere, and steamers naturally come to mind.

What will appear most extraordinary is, that the very princes who are enjoying the stipend for the purchase of the site whereon the English authority is established, are believed to be the most active in equipping the prahus for these piratical expeditions; yet no notice is taken of them, although it would be so easy to control them by withholding payment until they had cleared themselves from suspicion, or by establishing residents in their chief towns.

What seems most astonishing is that the very princes who are receiving funding to buy the land where English authority is set up are thought to be the most involved in getting the boats ready for these piratical missions. Yet, no action is taken against them, even though it would be so simple to hold back payments until they prove themselves innocent, or to set up representatives in their main towns.

Another, and a very different race of natives who frequent the Sooloo Archipelago, must not be passed by without notice. These are the Bajow50 divers or fishermen, to whom Sooloo is indebted for procuring the submarine treasures with which her seas are stored. They are also very frequently employed in the biche de mar or tripang fisheries among the islands to the south. The Bajows generally look upon Macassar as their principal place of resort. They were at one time believed to be derived from Johore, on the Malayan peninsula; at another to be Buguese; but they speak the Sooloo dialect, and are certainly derived from some of the neighbouring [186]islands. The name of Bajows, in their tongue, means fishermen. From all accounts, they are allowed to pursue their avocations in peace, and are not unfrequently employed by the piratical datus, and made to labour for them. They resort to their fishing-grounds in fleets of between one and two hundred sail, having their wives and children with them, and in consequence of the tyranny of the Sooloos, endeavour to place themselves under the protection of the flag of Holland, by which nation this useful class of people is encouraged. The Sooloo seas are comparatively little frequented by them, as they are unable to dispose of the produce of their fisheries for want of a market, and fear the exactions of the datus. Their prahus are about five tons each. The Bajows at some islands are stationary, but are for the most part constantly changing their ground. The Spanish authorities in the Philippines encourage them, it is said, to frequent their islands, as without them they would derive little benefit from the banks in the neighbouring seas, where quantities of pearl-oysters are known to exist, which produce pearls of the finest kind. The Bajows are inoffensive and very industrious, and in faith Mahomedans.

Another very different group of natives who frequent the Sooloo Archipelago deserves mention. These are the Bajows, divers or fishermen, who are responsible for gathering the underwater treasures found in Sooloo's waters. They are often hired for the biche de mar or tripang fisheries among the islands to the south. The Bajows typically see Macassar as their main hub. At one time, they were thought to have originated from Johore on the Malayan Peninsula; at another time, they were considered to be Buginese, but they speak the Sooloo dialect and are definitely from some nearby islands. In their language, the name Bajows means fishermen. By all accounts, they are allowed to carry out their work peacefully and are occasionally employed by the piratical datus, being forced to work for them. They head to their fishing grounds in fleets of between one and two hundred boats, often with their wives and children. Because of the oppression from the Sooloos, they try to place themselves under the protection of the Dutch flag, which supports this valuable group of people. The Sooloo seas are not often visited by them, as they cannot sell their catch due to the lack of a market and they fear the demands of the datus. Their prahus are about five tons each. The Bajows at some islands are permanent, but most change locations frequently. It's said that the Spanish authorities in the Philippines encourage them to visit their islands, as without them, they would get little benefit from the nearby banks that are known to have abundant pearl oysters producing some of the finest pearls. The Bajows are peaceful, very hardworking, and are followers of the Islamic faith.

The climate of Sooloo during our short stay, though warm, was agreeable. The time of our visit was in the dry season, which lasts from October to April, and alternates with the wet one from May till September. June and July are the windy months, when strong breezes blow from the westward. In the latter part of August and September, strong gales are felt from the south, while in December and January the winds are found to come from the northward; but light winds usually prevail from the southwest during the wet season, and from the opposite [187]quarter, the dry, following closely the order of the monsoons in the China seas. As to the temperature, the climate is very equable, the thermometer seldom rising above 90° or falling below 70°.

The climate in Sooloo during our short stay was warm but pleasant. We visited during the dry season, which runs from October to April, alternating with the wet season from May to September. June and July are the windy months, with strong breezes coming from the west. In late August and September, we experience strong winds from the south, while in December and January, the winds are typically from the north. However, light winds usually dominate from the southwest during the wet season and from the opposite direction during the dry season, closely following the monsoon patterns in the China seas. As for the temperature, the climate is quite stable, with the thermometer rarely rising above 90°F or dropping below 70°F.

Diseases are few, and those that prevail arise from the manner in which the natives live. They are from that cause an unhealthy-looking race. The smallpox has at various times raged with great violence throughout the group, and they speak of it with great dread. Few of the natives appear to be marked with it, which may have been owing, perhaps, to their escaping this disorder for some years. Vaccination has not yet been introduced among them, nor have they practised inoculation.

Diseases are rare, and the ones that do exist are a result of how the locals live. Because of this, they appear to be an unhealthy-looking group. Smallpox has often swept through the area violently, and they talk about it with a lot of fear. Few of the locals seem to have scars from it, which might be because they've avoided this illness for a number of years. Vaccination has not yet been introduced to them, nor have they practiced inoculation.

Notwithstanding Soung was once the Mecca of the East, its people have but little zeal for the Mahomedan faith. It was thought at one time that they had almost forgotten its tenets, in consequence of the neglect of all their religious observances. The precepts which they seem to regard most are that of abstaining from swine’s flesh, and that of being circumcised. Although polygamy is not interdicted, few even of the datus have more than one wife.

Not long ago, Soung was like the Mecca of the East, but its people show very little enthusiasm for the Muslim faith. There was a time when it seemed they had nearly forgotten its principles due to neglecting their religious practices. The rules they seem to follow the most are abstaining from pork and being circumcised. While polygamy isn’t banned, very few of the leaders have more than one wife.

Soung Road offers good anchorage; and supplies of all kinds may be had in abundance. Beef is cheap, and vegetables and fruit at all seasons plenty.

Soung Road has great anchorage, and you can find all kinds of supplies in abundance. Beef is affordable, and there are plenty of vegetables and fruits available year-round.

Our observations placed the town in latitude 6° 10′ N., longitude 120° 55′ 51″ E.

Our observations determined that the town is located at latitude 6° 10′ N., longitude 120° 55′ 51″ E.

On the 6th, having concluded the treaty (a copy of which will be found in Appendix XIII)51 and the [188]other business that had taken me to Sooloo, we took our departure for the Straits of Balabac, the western entrance into this sea, with a fine breeze to the eastward. By noon we had reached the group of Pangootaaraang,52 consisting of five small islands. All of these are low, covered with trees, and without lagoons. They presented a great contrast to Sooloo, which was seen behind us in the distance. The absence of the swell of the ocean in sailing through this sea is striking, and gives the idea of navigating an extensive bay, on whose luxuriant islands no surf breaks. There are, however, sources of danger that incite the navigator to watchfulness and constant anxiety; the hidden shoals and reefs, and the sweep [189]of the tide, which leave him no control over his vessel.

On the 6th, after finalizing the treaty (a copy of which can be found in Appendix XIII)51 and handling the other matters that had taken me to Sooloo, we set off for the Straits of Balabac, the western entrance to this sea, with a nice breeze coming from the east. By noon, we arrived at the Pangootaaraang group,52 which consists of five small islands. All of these islands are low, tree-covered, and lack lagoons. They stood in sharp contrast to the distant view of Sooloo behind us. The noticeable lack of ocean swell while sailing through this sea creates the impression of navigating a vast bay, where no surf crashes against the lush islands. However, there are hidden dangers that keep the navigator alert and constantly anxious; the unseen shoals and reefs, along with the strong tidal currents, leave no control over the vessel.

Through the night, which was exceedingly dark, we sounded every twenty minutes, but found no bottom; and at daylight on the 7th, we made the islands of Cagayan Sooloo,53 in latitude 7° 03′ 30″ N., longitude 118° 37′ E. The tide or current was passing the islands to the west-southwest, three-quarters of a mile per hour; we had soundings of seventy-five fathoms. Cagayan Sooloo has a pleasant appearance from the sea, and may be termed a high island. It is less covered with undergrowth and mangrove-bushes than the neighbouring islands, and the reefs are comparatively small. It has fallen off in importance, and by comparing former accounts with those I received, and from its present aspect, it would seem that it has decreased both in population and products. Its caves formerly supplied a large quantity of edible birds’-nests; large numbers of cattle were to be found upon it; and its cultivation was carried on to some extent. These articles of commerce are not so much attended to at the present time, and the biche de mar and tortoise-shell, formerly brought hither, are now carried to other places. There is a small anchorage on the west side, but we did not visit it. There are no dangers near these small islands that may not be guarded against. Our survey extended only to their size and situation, as I deemed it my duty to devote all the remainder of the time I had to spare to the Straits of Balabac.

Through the night, which was very dark, we took soundings every twenty minutes, but found no bottom; at daylight on the 7th, we reached the islands of Cagayan Sooloo, located at latitude 7° 03′ 30″ N., longitude 118° 37′ E. The tide or current was passing the islands to the west-southwest at three-quarters of a mile per hour; we measured seventy-five fathoms. Cagayan Sooloo looks nice from the sea and can be described as a high island. It has less undergrowth and mangrove bushes compared to the nearby islands, and the reefs are relatively small. It has declined in importance, and when comparing past descriptions with what I see now, it seems to have decreased in both population and products. Its caves used to provide a large amount of edible bird nests; there were many cattle on the island; and it had some agricultural activity. These commercial products are not as valued now, and the biche de mer and tortoise shell, which were once brought here, are now taken elsewhere. There is a small anchorage on the west side, but we didn’t check it out. There are no dangers near these small islands that can't be managed. Our survey only covered their size and location, as I decided it was my responsibility to spend the remaining time I had focused on the Straits of Balabac.

[Proceeding, our author relates the stay of the vessel in, and describes, the Mangsee Islands, Balabac, [190]and Balambangan, about which various scientific observations were carried on. “Lieutenant Perry, ... near a small beach on the island of Balambangan, encountered some Sooloos, who were disposed to attack him. The natives, no doubt, were under the impression that the boats were from some shipwrecked vessel. They were all well-armed, and apparently prepared to take advantage of the party if possible; but, by the prudence and forbearance of this officer, collision was avoided, and his party saved from an attack.” The British colony established on this island in 1773, dwindled steadily until 1775 when the pirates rushed the garrison and massacred almost every man. The work of Rajah Brooke in Sarawak is mentioned, and the Dyaks described. Continuing Mr. Wilkes says:]

[Proceeding, our author talks about the time the ship spent in, and describes, the Mangsee Islands, Balabac, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]and Balambangan, where various scientific observations were conducted. “Lieutenant Perry, ... near a small beach on the island of Balambangan, ran into some Sooloos, who were ready to attack him. The locals likely thought the boats belonged to a shipwrecked vessel. They were all well-armed and seemed prepared to take advantage of the situation, but thanks to the caution and restraint of this officer, a conflict was avoided, and his party was saved from an attack.” The British colony established on this island in 1773 steadily declined until 1775 when pirates overwhelmed the garrison and killed almost every man. The work of Rajah Brooke in Sarawak is mentioned, and the Dyaks are described. Continuing, Mr. Wilkes says:]

As the principal objects of my visit were to ascertain the disposition and resources of the Sooloos for trade, and to examine the straits leading into the Sooloo seas, in order to facilitate the communication with China, by avoiding on the one hand the eastern route, and on the other the dangers of the Palawan Passage, it may be as well to give the result of the latter inquiry, referring those who may be more particularly interested to the Hydrographical Atlas and Memoir.

As the main goals of my visit were to understand the Sooloos' attitude and resources for trade and to look into the straits that lead into the Sooloo Seas, in order to improve communication with China by avoiding the eastern route and the dangers of the Palawan Passage, it’s helpful to share the results of that investigation, directing those who might be particularly interested to the Hydrographical Atlas and Memoir.

The difficulties in the Palawan Passage arising from heavy seas and fresh gales do not exist in the Sooloo Sea, nor are the shoals so numerous or so dangerous. In the place of storms and rough water, smooth seas are found, and for most of the time moderate breezes, which do not subject a vessel to the wear and tear experienced in beating up against a monsoon. [191]

The challenges in the Palawan Passage fromrough seas and strong winds aren't present in the Sooloo Sea, and there aren't as many or as hazardous shoals. Instead of storms and choppy waters, you find calm seas and mostly gentle breezes, which don't put a boat through the same wear and tear that comes from battling a monsoon. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Straits of Balabac may be easily reached, either from Singapore, or by beating up along the western shore to Borneo. When the straits are reached, a vessel by choosing her time, may easily pass through them by daylight, even by beating when the wind is ahead. Once through, the way is clear, with the exception of a few coral lumps; the occasional occurrence of the north wind will enable a vessel to pass directly to the shores of the island of Panay. A fair wind will ordinarily prevail along that island, and, as I have already mentioned, it may be approached closely. The passage through to the eastward of Mindoro Island may be taken in preference to that on the west side through the Mindoro Strait, and thus all the reefs and shoals will be avoided. Thence, the western coast of Luzon will be followed to the north, as in the old route.

The Straits of Balabac can be easily reached, either from Singapore or by sailing up along the western shore to Borneo. Once you get to the straits, a vessel can choose the right time to pass through during the day, even if the wind is against you. After you’re through, the path is clear except for a few coral bumps; a north wind may help a vessel go straight to the shores of Panay Island. A nice breeze usually blows along that island, and as I mentioned earlier, you can get pretty close to it. It’s better to take the east passage around Mindoro Island instead of the west side through the Mindoro Strait, which helps you avoid all the reefs and shallow areas. From there, you can follow the western coast of Luzon north, just like the old route.

I do not think it necessary to point out any particular route through the Sooloo Sea, as vessels must be guided chiefly as the winds blow, but I would generally avoid approaching the Sooloo Islands, as the currents are more rapid, and set rather to the southward. Wherever there is anchorage, it would be advisable to anchor at night, as much time might thus be saved, and a knowledge of the currents, or sets of the tides obtained. Perhaps it would be as well to caution those who are venturesome, that it is necessary to keep a good look-out, and those who are timid, that there does not appear to be much danger from the piratical prahus, unless a vessel gets on shore: in that case it will not be long before they will be seen collecting in the horizon in large numbers.

I don’t think it’s necessary to highlight a specific route through the Sooloo Sea since ships should mainly navigate based on the wind patterns. However, I would generally recommend avoiding the Sooloo Islands because the currents are stronger and tend to flow southward. Wherever you can drop anchor, it's wise to do so at night, as this could save time and help you get a better understanding of the currents and tide movements. It might also be a good idea to warn adventurous sailors to keep a close watch, while reminding those who are more cautious that there doesn’t seem to be much threat from piratical prahus unless a ship runs aground. If that happens, it won’t take long before you start to see them gathering in large numbers on the horizon.

The treaty that I made with the Sultan, if strictly [192]enforced on the first infraction, will soon put an end to all the dangers to be apprehended from them. To conclude, I am satisfied that under ordinary circumstances, to pass through the Sooloo Sea will shorten by several days the passage to Manilla or Canton, and be a great saving of expense in the wear and tear of a ship and her canvass.

The treaty I made with the Sultan, if strictly [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]enforced at the first violation, will quickly eliminate all risks we face from them. In conclusion, I believe that under normal circumstances, traveling through the Sooloo Sea will cut down the journey to Manila or Canton by several days and significantly reduce the costs related to the wear and tear on a ship and its sails.

[On the eighteenth of February, the ship reaches the Straits of Singapore, where they find the other three vessels of the fleet, namely, the “Porpoise,” the “Oregon,” and “Flying-Fish.”] [193]

[On February 18th, the ship arrives at the Straits of Singapore, where they meet the other three vessels in the fleet: the “Porpoise,” the “Oregon,” and the “Flying-Fish.”] [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Letter from Father Quirico More, to the Father Superior of the Mission

Pax Christi.
My well beloved in Christ, the Father Superior:

Pax Christi.
My dear ones in Christ, the Father Superior:

Several times I have designed to address your Reverence in regard to the Moros of this gulf, but after the observation of your Reverence of the second of last December, I have been unwilling to postpone longer to set about this matter.

Several times I have intended to speak to you about the Moros of this gulf, but after what you said on the second of last December, I have been reluctant to delay any longer in tackling this issue.

I have read some statistical works, both official and semi-official, which treat of the population54 of this gulf, and I have noticed that in general more importance is given to the Moros of this district than is theirs, and a greater number of people than in reality exists. The reason for this general error lies in the fact that the Moros quite regularly live along the coasts and at the mouths of the large rivers, while the heathens of other races live as a general rule in the interior of the island. Consequently, the Moros form, as it were, a sort of barrier or screen which prevents the heathens from being seen, and [194]worse yet, hinders us from becoming acquainted with them, and alluring and gaining them for God and the fatherland. That would be easy of attainment, if once this phantom of the Moros were laid. That can be easily attained if one remembers what the Moros of Dávao are, whom I shall endeavor to show forth in this letter.

I have read some statistical studies, both official and unofficial, about the population of this gulf, and I've noticed that generally, more importance is placed on the Moros of this area than they actually warrant, and a larger number of people is reported than really exists. The reason for this widespread misconception is that the Moros usually live along the coasts and at the mouths of big rivers, while the non-Muslim people of other races typically inhabit the interior of the island. As a result, the Moros act as a sort of barrier or screen that makes it difficult to see the others, and even worse, prevents us from getting to know them, and attracting them for God and our homeland. This could be easily achieved if the illusion surrounding the Moros was dispelled. That can be accomplished if one keeps in mind who the Moros of Dávao are, which I will attempt to explain in this letter.

We are making a bit of history, as one commonly says. Shortly before the conquest, which was concluded by Don José Oyangúren55 in the year 1848, the pontin56 “San Rufo,” which had been equipped by one of the commercial houses of Manila, had come to Dávao. The captain and second officer of the said boat were Spaniards, and in addition they were accompanied by an Italian who was a private trader. They had a letter of recommendation from [195]the sultan of Mindanao, for the datos of the sea of Dávao, which charged those datos to receive those of the “San Rufo” as friends. The Moros of this place pretended to respect the letter of the sultan, and engaged in trade with the men of the boat, offering them friendship and a considerable quantity of wax in exchange for their effects. But taking advantage of the opportunity, when the majority of the crew were some distance from the boat fishing with the ship’s skiff, the Moros presented themselves armed with krises, spears, and balaraos, bringing with them, in order to conceal their mischievous intentions, considerable wax for barter. The interpreter informed the captain that so many Moros, so well armed on an occasion when there were scarcely any men in the boat gave rise to suspicions regarding their intentions. The captain replied that he did not fear the Moros. The pilot remonstrated, saying that it would not do any harm to take a few precautions. To this the captain replied: “Are you afraid of the Moros?” “Although we do not fear them,” added the pilot, “that is no reason why we should scorn the advice of the interpreter.” “Well, if you wish it,” said the captain, “have a sentinel posted with musket ready.” Accordingly the sentinel was posted, and in addition one of the Europeans and the interpreter prepared their arms also. All this time more and more Moros were continually arriving. They contrived to isolate the Europeans and separate them from one another. When they were most busily engaged in examining and weighing the wax, those assassins drew their krises at a given signal. Two reports rang out and two Moros fell dead, but in a few moments, the heads of the Christians rolled [196]on the ground. The only ones left alive were two servants, that of the captain and that of the Italian, whom the Moros retained as slaves. These men after a few days, seized a baroto and escaped in it, made the crossing to Pundaguítan, whence they went to Surigao to give notice of what had occurred in the “San Rufo,” believing that the seamen who were fishing at the time of the attack, had also been assassinated. Those seamen on seeing what was occurring on the “San Rufo” escaped in a small boat to the Hijo River, whence they went overland to Línao (now Bunáuan). All of the above was told me by one of the two servants, who had been captured and had escaped. That servant returned later with Oyangúren, and acted on several occasions as my helmsman, and finally died in the shipwreck of Father Vivero.

We’re making a bit of history, as people often say. Just before the conquest, which was completed by Don José Oyangúren in 1848, the pontin “San Rufo,” equipped by a commercial house in Manila, arrived in Dávao. The captain and second officer of the boat were Spanish, accompanied by an Italian private trader. They had a recommendation letter from the sultan of Mindanao for the datos of the sea of Dávao, instructing those datos to treat the “San Rufo” as friends. The Moros in the area pretended to respect the sultan's letter and engaged in trade with the boat’s crew, offering friendship and a significant amount of wax in exchange for their goods. However, seizing the opportunity while most of the crew were far from the boat fishing with the ship's skiff, the Moros showed up armed with krises, spears, and balaraos, bringing a lot of wax to mask their malicious intentions. The interpreter warned the captain that so many well-armed Moros showing up when most crew members were absent raised suspicions. The captain replied that he wasn’t afraid of the Moros. The pilot argued that it wouldn’t hurt to take some precautions. The captain then said, “Are you scared of the Moros?” The pilot added, “Even though we don’t fear them, that doesn’t mean we should ignore the interpreter’s advice.” “Well, if that’s what you want,” the captain said, “post a sentinel with a musket ready.” So, a sentinel was posted, and one of the Europeans and the interpreter also readied their weapons. Meanwhile, more and more Moros kept arriving, isolating the Europeans and separating them from one another. When they were busy examining and weighing the wax, the attackers drew their krises at a signal. Two shots rang out, and two Moros fell dead, but soon after, the heads of the Christians rolled on the ground. The only survivors were two servants, the captain's and the Italian's, whom the Moros captured as slaves. A few days later, these men seized a baroto and escaped, crossing to Pundaguítan, and then traveling to Surigao to report what had happened on the “San Rufo,” thinking that the seamen who had been fishing during the attack were also killed. Those seamen, seeing what was happening on the “San Rufo,” escaped in a small boat to the Hijo River and then made their way overland to Línao (now Bunáuan). I learned all of this from one of the two servants who had been captured and escaped. This servant returned later with Oyangúren and often acted as my helmsman before ultimately dying in the shipwreck of Father Vivero.

When that crime was reported in Manila, satisfaction was demanded of the sultan of Mindanao. The latter answered that he had no subjects in Dávao, and that he did not consider the Moros of this bay as such, since they had disobeyed his orders; and accordingly that the Spanish government was to deal with them directly. By virtue of that, from that moment the Moros of Dávao must be considered as independent and separate from the rest of the Moros. Consequently, if the Spanish government has complete liberty of action anywhere in regard to the Moros, it is doubtless in this gulf of Dávao.

When that crime was reported in Manila, the sultan of Mindanao was called to answer. He replied that he had no subjects in Dávao and didn't see the Moros in that bay as his subjects since they had ignored his orders; therefore, the Spanish government was to deal with them directly. Because of this, from that moment on, the Moros of Dávao should be considered independent and separate from the other Moros. As a result, if the Spanish government has full freedom to act regarding the Moros anywhere, it’s certainly in this gulf of Dávao.

Thereupon the expedition of Oyangúren came, and had made the conquest of this gulf in a very short time, those Moros who had remained here after a great part of them had emigrated to the bay of Sarangani and the lake of Bulúan surrendering at discretion. [197]

Thereafter, the Oyangúren expedition arrived and quickly conquered this bay. The Moros who stayed here after many of them had moved to Sarangani Bay and Bulúan Lake surrendered unconditionally. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

When Oyangúren came, the Moros were complete masters of the island of Sámal,57 whose inhabitants had risen en masse to unite with the Spanish against their oppressors the Moros. They also dominated the Mandayas, and collected tribute from all of them even from those of the ilaya58 of Caraga, and were engaged in continual war with the Bilanes, Manobos, and Atas.59 At present the Mandayas, who are in some manner subject to the Moros, number, according to my calculation, some seven thousand. One cannot estimate or approximate to the number of the Atas who pay tribute to them. The other races are not at all subject to the Moros and do not pay any tribute to them.

When Oyangúren arrived, the Moros were completely in control of the island of Sámal,57 where the inhabitants had come together to ally with the Spanish against their oppressors, the Moros. They also had authority over the Mandayas and collected tribute from everyone, including those from the ilaya58 of Caraga, while being in a constant state of war with the Bilanes, Manobos, and Atas.59 Currently, the Mandayas, who are somewhat under the Moros’ influence, number around seven thousand, according to my estimate. It’s hard to gauge the exact number of Atas who pay tribute to them. The other groups are not subject to the Moros at all and do not pay any tribute to them.

It is difficult to fix exactly the number of the Moros who live on this gulf at present. Their nomadic customs and the ease with which they change their habitation, sometimes moving to a great distance, make a little less than impossible an exact list of them. However, I believe that their approximate number is 4,000. If they exceed that number, I do not believe that they reach 5,000, and as well I [198]do not believe that they are less than 3,000. The place that they generally choose for their home, as I have before suggested, is the coast or the mouth of rivers navigable for their small boats.

It’s hard to determine the exact number of Moros living in this gulf right now. Their nomadic lifestyle and their ability to move their homes easily, sometimes over long distances, make it nearly impossible to provide an accurate count. However, I estimate their population to be around 4,000. If there are more than that, I doubt it exceeds 5,000, and I also believe they are not fewer than 3,000. The locations they typically choose for their homes, as I mentioned earlier, are the coastline or the mouths of rivers that are navigable for their small boats.

When any governor of this district urges them with instance to make a village, they make, as it were, an excuse for a settlement, carrying out the plan which the governor himself, or some Spaniard in the name of the governor, or some other intelligent person, gives them. They will construct, if it is desired, their so-called houses at the distances which are marked out for them, but they will never reconcile themselves with any kind of cultivation, or with cleanliness, or the repair of what gets out of order. In reality, in the short time that their villages have form, the filth, the nakedness, and the general wretchedness, cause them to present so repugnant an aspect, that no one can show a desire for their preservation; and as soon as the governor ceases to investigate them, those villages melt away like salt in water.

When a governor of this district pushes them to create a village, they often come up with excuses to justify a settlement, following the plan laid out by the governor himself, or by some Spaniard acting on the governor's behalf, or by another knowledgeable person. They will build their so-called houses at the designated distances if asked to, but they will never come to terms with any form of farming, cleanliness, or fixing things that break down. In reality, within a short time after their villages take shape, the dirt, lack of clothing, and overall squalor make them look so unappealing that no one wants to see them preserved; and as soon as the governor stops checking on them, those villages disappear like salt in water.

To the right of Dávao, several attempts have been made to form the Moro village of Daron by bringing together the small Moro rancherías of Taúmo, Baludo, and Obango, which are the only rancherías between Dávao and the point of Culáman in sight of Sarangani. That village, in the days of its greatest apogee, would lodge at most one hundred Moro families, who always tend to be split up into small rancherías.

To the right of Dávao, there have been several efforts to create the Moro village of Daron by uniting the small Moro rancherías of Taúmo, Baludo, and Obango, which are the only rancherías located between Dávao and the Culáman point visible from Sarangani. At its peak, that village could accommodate up to one hundred Moro families, who often tend to live in smaller rancherías.

On the other side of Point Bánus, from which one can begin to descry the islands of Sarangani there was another ranchería of Sanguil.60 Moros of about [199]one hundred families. That ranchería was settled there under the protection of an Indian, who had served his time in the navy, who fixed his residence there in the quality of agent or abonado [i.e., representative] of the traders of Dávao. At the present time that petty trader has moved his residence to Núin opposite the islands of Sarangani, and it appears that those Moros have followed him. But wherever they have fixed their residence, left to themselves, they are threatened with destruction. For that swarm of Bilanes, Manobos, and Tagacaolos61 which surrounds them, warlike races who have never been subdued by the Moros, will always consider them as enemies, and will always reckon them in the first line to give an end to their personal and racial vengeance.

On the other side of Point Bánus, where you can start to see the islands of Sarangani, there was another small community of Sanguil Moros with about [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]one hundred families. This community was established there under the protection of an Indian who had served in the navy and had set up his home as the agent or abonado [i.e., representative] for the traders from Dávao. Currently, that small trader has moved to Núin, across from the islands of Sarangani, and it seems that those Moros have followed him. But wherever they settle, they are at risk of destruction. The surrounding groups of Bilanes, Manobos, and Tagacaolos61—warrior races that have never been conquered by the Moros—will always view them as enemies and will see them as the first targets for their personal and ethnic revenge.

In support of my assertion, I shall tell your Reverence an episode just as it was told to me a long while ago. Some years before the conquest of Dávao, the Moros, pursuing the piratical habits peculiar to their race, knifed the crew of a banca which was on its way from Pundaguítan, a Christian village at Cape San Agustin, to the tortoise-shell fisheries at the island of Olaníban, the third and smallest island of the Sarangani. It was a coincidence that the said banca was manned by members of the most influential families of both shores of this gulf from San [200]Agustin and Culáman. Vengeance in the Manobo style was not long delayed. The members of the latter race beheaded as many of the Moros as they could find alone. But later some sort of a settlement was made among them. The Moros paid the fine imposed on them by the other races, but the latter did not cease to be hostile for all that. They have reduced the few Mahometans remaining between Malálag and Sarangani to so precarious a situation that, according to my mode of thinking, their greatest and only guaranty is in the respect that those heathens profess for the Spanish banner.

In support of my claim, I want to share a story just like it was told to me a while back. A few years before the conquest of Dávao, the Moros, following their notorious pirate ways, attacked the crew of a banca that was traveling from Pundaguítan, a Christian village at Cape San Agustin, to the tortoise-shell fisheries on the island of Olaníban, the third and smallest island of the Sarangani. It was a coincidence that this banca was manned by members of the most influential families from both sides of this gulf, from San [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Agustin and Culáman. Vengeance in the Manobo tradition didn’t take long to come. The Manobos beheaded as many Moros as they could find on their own. But eventually, some sort of agreement was reached between them. The Moros paid the fine that was imposed by the other groups, but that didn’t stop the hostility. They have pushed the few Muslims left between Malálag and Sarangani into such a precarious situation that, in my opinion, their greatest and only guarantee lies in the respect those heathens have for the Spanish flag.

It is not my design to discuss now the islands and bay, or harbor of Sarangani, places which formed my gilded dream for many years. I shall not be many months in writing to your Reverence a letter with the data which I have gathered, and other data which I am acquiring in regard to those islands and that bay.62 In that letter I will relate my opinion of those kindly heathens who left so pleasing an impression on the minds of us five missionaries who have visited them, namely Fathers Lluch, Bové, Púntas, Vivero, and the writer.

I don't intend to talk about the islands, bay, or harbor of Sarangani right now, places that have been part of my dream for many years. I won't take long to write your Reverence a letter with the information I've gathered, along with more that I'm currently collecting about those islands and that bay.62 In that letter, I'll share my thoughts on those friendly locals who made such a positive impression on the five missionaries who visited them: Fathers Lluch, Bové, Púntas, Vivero, and myself.

Just a few words now concerning the Moros to the left of Dávao. One legua from this capital, and along the beach, lies the Moro village of Lánang, which has passed through the same sudden changes as has the village of Daron. The said village is formed by the malcontents of the various datarías63 of this gulf, beginning with the ilayas of Dávao. Their progress and setbacks have been proportioned to the tact and vigilance of the governors. Some [201]cultivation of cocoas is seen on that coast, in part by the Moros and in part by the Christians of the vicinity. At the present time there are no more than twenty-five houses (if their huts can be so called), of which very few are finished. The greater part of them remain since a long time ago in process of construction.

Just a few words now about the Moros to the left of Dávao. One league from this capital, along the beach, is the Moro village of Lánang, which has gone through the same sudden changes as the village of Daron. This village is made up of the discontented members of the various datarías63 in this gulf, starting with the ilayas of Dávao. Their progress and setbacks have depended on the skill and watchfulness of the governors. Some [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]cultivation of cocoa can be seen along that coast, partly done by the Moros and partly by the nearby Christians. Right now, there are only about twenty-five houses (if they can be called that), and very few of them are complete. Most of them have been under construction for a long time.

Following the same coast toward the north of the gulf, and some three leguas distant, one encounters the ranchería of the river Lásan. The most remarkable thing about that ranchería is that it shelters one of the most famous of the directors of Moro politics in this gulf, namely, one Lásad. Some Christians from Cagayan in Misamis have come to their ilaya, according to report. The Moros have never even formed an excuse for a village there, but live scattered in tiny hamlets, or in miserable huts more or less contiguous to one another over a territory spread out over two or three leguas up stream.

Following the same coast heading north of the gulf, and about three leagues away, you’ll find the settlement of the river Lásan. The most interesting thing about that settlement is that it’s home to one of the most notable figures in Moro politics in this gulf, named Lásad. Reportedly, some Christians from Cagayan in Misamis have visited their area. The Moros have never managed to establish an actual village there; instead, they live scattered in small communities or in rundown huts that are somewhat close to one another, spread out over a territory of two or three leagues upstream.

Some two leguas farther, and following the coast, and near the Tugánay River is situated the Moro ranchería of Tágum, a name which is derived from the largest river of this bay which empties near the Tugánay. That ranchería is the most ungovernable and the most famous for the gloomy tragedies that have happened there from time immemorial even to our days. When the murders of four Christians in July of last year happened, the Moros of that ranchería had a village of about forty houses in process of construction, but it is now almost entirely abandoned.

Some two leagues farther along the coast, near the Tugánay River, is the Moro settlement of Tágum, which gets its name from the largest river in this bay that flows near the Tugánay. That settlement is known for being the most unruly and infamous for the dark tragedies that have occurred there throughout history up to the present day. When four Christians were murdered in July of last year, the Moros from that settlement were building a village of about forty houses, but it is now almost entirely abandoned.

Some two leguas farther following the same coast are found the river and ranchería of Madáum, which contains, it is reported, about one hundred families.

Some two leagues further along the same coast is the river and settlement of Madáum, which is said to have about one hundred families.

A very short distance from the preceding lies the [202]ranchería of the Hijo River, which is famous for having been the last bulwark of the Moros at the time of the conquest of Dávao. Señor Oyangúren and a distinguished chief of our militia went there in the steamboat “Elcano.” It is said that after the Moros had surrendered, and while Oyangúren and the datos were arranging the conditions of submission, a young Mahometan snatched the sword from the hands of the leader alluded to, and took to his heels without the balls of the sentinels being able to reach him. That was a boldness that gave the Christians much to think over. A few years ago I was told that they still preserved the hilt of the said sword. At present that ranchería is governed by Dato Nónong, one of the most highly-considered Moros of this gulf. It has scarcely one hundred families, and the attempt has been made several times to make that dato form a village.

A very short distance from the previous spot lies the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] settlement of the Hijo River, which is known for being the last stronghold of the Moros during the conquest of Dávao. Señor Oyangúren and a notable leader of our militia traveled there on the steamboat "Elcano." It's said that after the Moros surrendered, while Oyangúren and the datos were working out the terms of submission, a young Muslim snatched the sword from the leader's hands and ran away before the sentinels could catch him. That act of bravery left the Christians with much to consider. A few years ago, I heard they still have the hilt of that sword. Currently, that settlement is led by Dato Nónong, one of the most respected Moros in this region. It has barely a hundred families, and there have been several attempts to make that dato establish a village.

The small rancherías of Cupiat and Lají which may be considered as small suburbs or barrios of Hijo and Matiao respectively have absolutely no importance.

The small rancherías of Cupiat and Lají, which could be seen as small suburbs or neighborhoods of Hijo and Matiao respectively, have no significance at all.

Matiao, famed during these last few years for the frequent sacrifices of heathen Mandayas, is the landing-place for the small boats that ply from Liboac in the northern part of Sámal to the eastern shore of the gulf. There are about one hundred Moro families there, who have never formed a village, but live scattered along both sides of the Matiao River, and in the neighboring places of Quínquin and Canipa. Dato Lásad, of whom I have already made mention, is, as it were, lord of the lives and possessions, not only of his Moro subjects, but as well of those unfortunate Mandayas who live in the vicinity of Matiao. [203]

Matiao, known in recent years for the frequent sacrifices of the pagan Mandayas, is the docking point for small boats that travel from Liboac in the northern part of Sámal to the eastern shore of the gulf. About one hundred Moro families live there, not forming a village, but instead scattered along both sides of the Matiao River and in nearby areas like Quínquin and Canipa. Dato Lásad, who I’ve mentioned before, is essentially the lord of the lives and possessions not just of his Moro subjects, but also of the unfortunate Mandayas living near Matiao. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

On the other side of the mountains called Línao, whose spurs reach the sea, is found a large plain, extending from the salt-water river called Pisó to Cuabu. Scattered through that plain and especially on the banks of the rivers there, live also about one hundred and twenty Moro families, who are under the datos Tumárus, Compao, and Patarandan.

On the other side of the mountains known as Línao, which stretch down to the sea, there is a large plain that goes from the salt-water river called Pisó to Cuabu. Living throughout that plain, especially along the riverbanks, are about one hundred and twenty Moro families, who are under the leaders Tumárus, Compao, and Patarandan.

On the beach and near the mouth of the Súmlug River, lies an excuse for a Moro village, which consists of about twenty houses which were built by order, and under the general conditions of the Moro villages of this gulf.

On the beach near the mouth of the Súmlug River, there’s a makeshift Moro village made up of about twenty houses that were constructed by order and follow the typical layout of the Moro villages in this gulf.

Your Reverence knows already that there is not a single Moro family in all the peninsula of San Agustin. It remains for me, then, to tell your Reverence of the last and most numerous Moro ranchería of this district of Dávao. It is the ranchería of Mayo, so called because it took its name from the bay of Mayo, the point where its most principal datos live. However, in appearance all those Moros owe homage to Dato Tumárus of Súmlug. Including all the Moros of the harbor of Mati, the bay of Mayo, and the Baguan River to the other side of Point Tagóbon, there are about one hundred and fifty families. They have never formed a village. Some years back a governor ordered all those Moros to form a village in Súmlug, but they had sufficient cunning to frustrate that just and wise order, in order that they might continue to live in the manner in which they had lived thitherto.

Your Reverence already knows that there isn't a single Moro family in the entire San Agustin peninsula. So, I’ll tell you about the last and largest Moro community in the Dávao district. It’s the Mayo community, named after Mayo Bay, where most of its key leaders live. However, on the surface, all these Moros show respect to Dato Tumárus of Súmlug. Including all the Moros from the harbor of Mati, Mayo Bay, and along the Baguan River past Point Tagóbon, there are about one hundred and fifty families. They have never established a village. A few years ago, a governor ordered all these Moros to create a village in Súmlug, but they were clever enough to evade that fair and wise order so they could continue living as they always had.

The Moros who live about this large gulf, Father, are the remains of those powerful and warlike Moros who in the not distant past collected tribute from the Mandayas and other heathens as far as those living on the Caraga River, and who extended their [204]piratical raids to the villages of the Pacific. But they were completely conquered by worthy Don José Oyangúren in the year 1848.

The Moros living around this large gulf, Father, are the remnants of the once powerful and fierce Moros who not long ago demanded tribute from the Mandayas and other non-believers as far as those along the Caraga River, and who took their [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]pirate raids to the villages along the Pacific. However, they were fully defeated by the esteemed Don José Oyangúren in 1848.

Two classes in the manner of two races must be distinguished among these Moros: that of the datos which is, as it were, the aristocracy; and that of the plebeians who obey the datos. The panditas (for so do they call the priests of their false religion) are included among both classes, although it is more general for them to belong to the first. They form, as it were, an hereditary priesthood.

Two groups similar to two races can be distinguished among these Moros: the datos, which represent the aristocracy, and the plebeians who follow the datos. The panditas (as they refer to the priests of their false religion) are part of both groups, though they usually belong to the first. They essentially form an inherited priesthood.

In general, the datos and their families do not work. At the most they fish and hunt for sport, and to stifle the pangs of hunger. Their chief and most honorable receipts are from the tributes which they collect from their subjects and from the heathens whom they have subdued. That tribute is called the pagdato. Although that source of wealth is the chief, it is not the only source. Although the Moros of this gulf are conquered and subdued, they have not completely forgotten their former customs of piracy. Slavery and captivity with their awful accompaniment of murders, thefts, poisons, and violence of every sort, and further, the human sacrifices which accompany them at times, form a very productive source of wealth for the ever exhausted chests of their treasuries. I could write a very thick volume of the deeds of this particular people which are very well known to me.

In general, the datos and their families don’t have jobs. At most, they fish and hunt for sport and to ease their hunger. Their main and most honorable income comes from the tributes they collect from their subjects and from the enemies they’ve conquered. That tribute is called the pagdato. While this source of wealth is the main one, it's not the only source. Even though the Moros of this gulf have been conquered, they haven’t completely abandoned their old customs of piracy. Slavery and captivity, along with the horrific acts of murder, theft, poisonings, and all kinds of violence, plus the occasional human sacrifices that come with them, create a very profitable source of income for their ever-depleted treasuries. I could write a very thick book about the actions of this particular group, which I know well.

All the heathens dominated by the Moros, and even many of the Moros themselves, on approaching me, through the little confidence that my person inspires, molest me by the relation of the Moro misdeeds, telling me of the troubles and injustice which [205]they suffer from the Moros, and the acts of inhumanity of which they are the victims; for they hope that I will protect them by causing that the guilty ones will be given their deserts.

All the non-Muslims under the control of the Moros, and even many of the Moros themselves, when they come to me, due to the little trust that my presence inspires, trouble me by recounting the wrongs done by the Moros. They tell me about the hardships and injustices they face at the hands of the Moros, and the inhumane acts they have suffered; they hope that I will help them by ensuring that those responsible are punished.

As a proof of what I have said, and of the many things which I could add, I give below the relation of what happened to me about one year ago. I was on my way from Cuaba to Mati, and was accompanied by a young man of about twenty years of age of the Mandaya race. He together with his mother and two younger sisters had formerly been captured by the Moro datos of the bay of Mayo. When we reached Valete, pointing to a gagátpat tree,64 he said to me: “Father, they bound my mother by the hands and neck to that branch, and left her half hanging there while they ate and rested.” “And what was their reason for binding your mother there in so inhuman a manner,” I asked. “In order that, since she would be tired out,” he replied, “by the forced position in which they kept her, she might not have the strength to escape on the journey from this place to Súmlug.” I believe that that unfortunate woman is no longer living. The Moros took her to Daron and no more has been heard of her, in spite of the repeated efforts which her son has made to find her. The latter having escaped from that bondage and having become a Christian, has not ceased to employ all the resources that his filial love has roused in him in order to see whether he can discover the abiding-place of his dear mother. He thinks that the Moros [206]of Daron sold her to the Bagabos, and that the latter sacrificed her according to their custom.

As proof of what I've said, and of the many things I could add, I’ll share what happened to me about a year ago. I was traveling from Cuaba to Mati, accompanied by a young man around twenty years old from the Mandaya tribe. He, along with his mother and two younger sisters, had previously been captured by the Moro leaders from the bay of Mayo. When we reached Valete, he pointed to a gagátpat tree, and said to me: “Father, they tied my mother by her hands and neck to that branch and left her half-hanging there while they ate and rested.” “What did they tie your mother there for?” I asked. “So that, since she would be exhausted from the forced position they kept her in, she wouldn’t have the strength to escape on the journey from here to Súmlug,” he replied. I believe that unfortunate woman is no longer alive. The Moros took her to Daron, and no one has heard from her since, despite her son’s repeated efforts to find her. He managed to escape that bondage and became a Christian, and he hasn’t stopped using all the resources that his love for her has inspired to see if he can locate his dear mother. He believes the Moros of Daron sold her to the Bagabos, who sacrificed her according to their custom.

That slave trade, sa pag sucad, as it is graphically expressed by Moros and heathen, or something to cover their necessities, is not yet the worst thing of the Moro race. More mischievous to my way of thinking is it for the progress and stability of this district, both in religious matters and in civil and political matters, that the Moros of this part have not yet lost their hope of being able to recover their ancient power. They show this openly whenever any opportunity arises. On that account they endeavor by all their efforts to maintain their own organization in the very face of our government. They call the dato of their choice Principal [i.e., Chief] and the captain or gobernadorcillo and the other agents of justice appointed among them by the governor of the district, they call Salíling, which is equivalent to our Interino [i.e., incumbent of an office ad interim]. At times they simply call the members of justice appointed by the governor for them interinos, and consider them as secondary or entrusted authorities. For as they say of themselves in their manner of speech, “We are friendly to the Castilians, through force.” Consequently, they endure our rule for the present, but do not accept it.

That slave trade, sa pag sucad, as it's vividly described by the Moros and non-believers, or something to meet their needs, isn't even the worst of the Moro people. In my opinion, what's more damaging to the progress and stability of this area, both in terms of religion and civil and political matters, is that the Moros here still hope to reclaim their ancient power. They openly express this whenever an opportunity arises. Because of this, they do everything they can to maintain their own organization despite our government. They refer to the dato of their choice as Principal [i.e., Chief], and the captain or gobernadorcillo and other justice officials appointed by the district governor as Salíling, which means our Interino [i.e., acting officeholder ad interim]. Sometimes they simply call the justice officials appointed by the governor interinos, viewing them as secondary or temporary authorities. As they put it in their own words, “We are friendly to the Castilians, out of necessity.” So, they tolerate our rule for now, but they don't truly accept it.

One of the recent occurrences which place in relief this desire of the Moros in opposing our domination and recovering their lost prestige, is found in the island of Sámal. Those islanders who on seeing the boats of Oyangúren remove the Mahometan yoke, and had passed over en masse to the Spanish camp, gradually allowed their affection toward us to cool, and again took the advice of their ancient [207]masters, and have opposed all the attempts that have been made for their formal and real reduction. Taúpan, who was, as it were, the dato or petty king of the Sámals, and who during the last year of his life, had kept at a certain distance from the Spaniards, although he did not for all that return entirely to the Moros, whom he had considered as a very bad lot, died. His eldest son, named Severo, although a heathen, showed us affection and respect, and had expressed to a Visayan in his confidence his desire to have one of his children baptized. The conversion of Severo would have been a great defeat for the party of the Moros in Sámal. Consequently, the eminent men among the Moro faction took alarm before the thought of Severo converted. No less than fourteen Moro datos of this gulf went to Sámal, and when they were all assembled, they elected as dato or chief of the Sámals not Severo to whom it belonged by hereditary right to succeed his father, according to the custom of the Sámals, but one who was thoroughly trusted by the Moros. That was one Captain Batúnun, that old man whom your Reverence saw in Sámal, and who talking as a Moro with Father Juanmartí, held that long spear in front of the governor of the district. Now then, there are two gobernadorcillos in Sámal: Severo, who besides being the legitimate successor of his father, was appointed captain or gobernadorcillo by Governor Don Joaquin Rajal; and Batúnun, elected by the Moro datos, as I have related, and that later than the official appointment of Severo. That means that they are resisting the orders of our government directly, in order to oppose our domination, and in order to recover the Moro practice of intermeddling in the [208]matters of the interior of the island of Sámal. It is to be noted that throughout the island of Sámal, and along its coasts, there does not exist any ranchería or group of Moros. Those who exercise that baleful influence over the Sámals are the Moros from other points, of which I have already made mention.

One of the recent events that highlights the Moros' desire to oppose our rule and regain their lost status happened on the island of Sámal. The islanders, who initially cast off the Muslim yoke upon seeing Oyangúren's boats and moved en masse to join the Spanish camp, gradually let their affection for us fade. They then returned to the advice of their traditional masters and resisted all efforts for their complete and actual subjugation. Taúpan, the leader or petty king of the Sámals, had distanced himself from the Spaniards during the last year of his life, though he didn't fully side with the Moros, whom he viewed as unsavory. He passed away, and his oldest son, Severo, despite being a pagan, showed us kindness and respect. He even confided in a Visayan his wish to have one of his children baptized. Severo's conversion would have dealt a significant blow to the Moro faction in Sámal. Consequently, the prominent figures among the Moros were alarmed at the prospect of Severo converting. Fourteen Moro datos from the gulf went to Sámal, and when they gathered, they chose a chief or dato for the Sámals not from Severo, who was supposed to inherit his father's position by Sámal tradition, but from someone deeply trusted by the Moros. This was Captain Batúnun, the old man your Reverence saw in Sámal, who, while talking as a Moro with Father Juanmartí, held a long spear in front of the district governor. So now there are two gobernadorcillos in Sámal: Severo, the legitimate heir to his father's title and appointed by Governor Don Joaquin Rajal, and Batúnun, elected by the Moro datos after Severo's official appointment. This means they are directly resisting our government's orders to oppose our domination and to reassert the Moro practice of interfering in the internal matters of Sámal. It's important to note that throughout Sámal and along its coasts, there are no rancherías or groups of Moros. The ones who exert that harmful influence over the Sámals are Moros from other areas, which I have previously mentioned.

In regard to the Mandayas, whom the Moros will by no means recognize as freed [from their rule], they will neither recognize them as independent authorities, even with official titles which are sent by the governor of the district, and are stamped with the seal of the government, if the latter when appointed, do not communicate with them by means of the Moro datos. If the Mandayas show a decided desire to break that secular slavery, the Moros tell them without circumlocutions that they will disappear without knowing how; and they cause them to know underhandedly that the means which they will use to finish them, will be by the poisons which they possess—some of them feigned and named only to terrify the Mandayas, but others only too real and true.

Regarding the Mandayas, whom the Moros completely refuse to recognize as free from their control, they also won't acknowledge them as independent authorities, even if they have official titles sent by the district governor and stamped with the government seal. This is only true if the governor, once appointed, does not communicate with them through the Moro datos. If the Mandayas express a strong desire to break free from this long-standing oppression, the Moros bluntly tell them that they will disappear without realizing it. They subtly let them know that the methods they will use to eliminate them include poisons—some of which are just fake and meant to scare the Mandayas, while others are very real and dangerous.

As the crown to what I have related, and in order that your Reverence may be convinced of the resolute will of these Moros of opposing by all means the reduction of the heathens and the gathering of themselves together into formal villages, I will mention the most transcendent deed that has happened in this district since the coming of Oyangúren. This is the unfortunate killing and awful murder committed by the Moros of Tágum on the person of Governor Don José Pinzon y Purga and those who were with him.

As the final point to what I've shared, and so that you may understand the unwavering determination of these Moros to resist the conversion of the non-believers and their efforts to unite into organized villages, I want to mention the most significant event that has occurred in this area since Oyangúren arrived. This is the tragic killing and horrific murder carried out by the Moros of Tágum against Governor Don José Pinzon y Purga and his companions.

By certain ill-informed persons, that tragic event has been ascribed to the urgency with which Pinzon, it is said, begged to wife the daughter of a dato of [209]Tágum. But being well informed by trustworthy persons contemporaneous with the event, who accompanied the governor on that sad journey, I am able to state that that idea is a calumny and destitute of every foundation of truth. The deed as is related by those persons, happened in the following manner. Señor Pinzon had proposed to establish a numerous reduction of Mandayas at the mouth of the Tágum River; and worked at it with great enthusiasm and good success. Everything was ready and the heathens were summoned for a given day, on which the said governor intended to go to inaugurate the said reduction. The Moros, seeing that the project was succeeding, and that all their plots in order to frustrate it were in vain, called in the rest of their malice, and resolved to kill the governor. In effect, they feigned that they were friendly to and desired the reduction. On the appointed day they assembled at the place where the Mandayas were to await the governor in order to plan the village. The first chief of the village arrived and the datos received him with great and feigned demonstrations of joy, and consented in all things to what the governor proposed. Then they invited him to one of their rancherías, where they said that they had prepared feasts in order to serve him and to solemnize the inauguration of the new village, with another unworthy offering, but one very suitable to the degrading customs of the Moros. There were not lacking those so bold as to advise the governor not to trust the Moros, for they were plotting some trick against him. But they say that he laughed at everything, and replied “I want to see whether what they tell me is true.” Therefore he took eight companions [210]and went with the datos to their ranchería. A feast was held there, and there was playing on culintángan, dances, etc., but not a woman, large or small, was to be seen in the whole ranchería. At the end of the ceremony, a dato invited the governor to enter an apartment, and when the latter was about to lift the curtain, at that moment the dato stabbed him violently in the back with his kris. Pinzon turned, and wounded as he was, advanced toward the murderer. Already did he have the latter at his mercy and unarmed, but before he could rise, another dato ran in, and cut off Pinzon’s head with a two-handed blow. Meanwhile the other Moros were murdering the eight companions of the unfortunate Pinzon in the lower part of the house.

By some misinformed people, that tragic event has been wrongly attributed to the urgency with which Pinzon allegedly asked to marry the daughter of a chief of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Tágum. However, thanks to reliable accounts from trustworthy people who were present during the event and accompanied the governor on that unfortunate journey, I can confidently say that this notion is completely false and without any basis in truth. The events, as described by those eyewitnesses, unfolded as follows. Señor Pinzon had proposed to establish a significant settlement of Mandayas at the mouth of the Tágum River, and he worked on this project with great enthusiasm and success. Everything was prepared, and the indigenous people were invited for a specified day when the governor planned to inaugurate the settlement. Seeing that the project was progressing and that their efforts to thwart it were futile, the Moros gathered their malice and decided to kill the governor. They pretended to be supportive of the project and, on the appointed day, gathered at the location where the Mandayas were to meet the governor to plan the village. The village chief arrived, and the datos welcomed him with feigned joy, agreeing to everything the governor proposed. They then invited him to one of their rancherías, claiming to have prepared a feast for him in celebration of the new village, along with another unworthy offering, fitting the degrading customs of the Moros. Some bold individuals advised the governor not to trust the Moros, warning that they were planning a trick against him. However, he reportedly laughed it off, saying, “I want to see if what they say is true.” So, he took eight companions [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]and went with the datos to their ranchería. A feast was held there, complete with music from the culintángan, dancing, etc., but not a single woman, young or old, was anywhere to be seen in the entire ranchería. At the end of the ceremony, a dato invited the governor to enter a room, and just as he was about to lift the curtain, the dato suddenly stabbed him violently in the back with his kris. Pinzon turned, and despite his injuries, he moved toward his attacker. He nearly had the dato at his mercy and unarmed, but before he could strike, another dato rushed in and decapitated Pinzon with a two-handed blow. Meanwhile, the other Moros were murdering the eight companions of the unfortunate Pinzon in the lower part of the house.

Such is the blackest event registered by the annals of this gulf, which paralyzed for many years the reduction of the heathens.

Such is the darkest event recorded in the history of this gulf, which stalled the conversion of the heathens for many years.

In my opinion the means that will resist the evil influence of the Moros are: 1. To eliminate the offices of dato and pandita, implanting in their stead in the Moro villages the legislation in force in the Christian villages by naming municipalities with which the government will deal directly. 2. The exclusion of holding public offices to those who have been datos or panditas and their children. 3. Absolute prohibition to the datos to continue the collection of tribute from their own people and the heathens of other races. 4. The stipulation and publication of the autonomy of the heathens in regard to the Moros, prohibiting the latter absolutely from meddling in the affairs of the heathens. 5. The intimation to all the heathens and Moros of their obligation as men and as subjects of the crown of [211]España, to live in villages in a civilized manner. 6, and last. To reduce the Moros into the least possible number of groups and away from the mouths of the Tágum and Hijo rivers, where the members of the Mandaya race must construct their villages, that being the nearest location.

In my view, the ways to counter the negative influence of the Moros are: 1. To abolish the roles of dato and pandita, replacing them in the Moro villages with the laws that apply to Christian villages by designating municipalities that the government will interact with directly. 2. To bar anyone who has been a dato or pandita, as well as their children, from holding public office. 3. To completely prohibit datos from continuing to collect tribute from their own people and from non-Moro groups. 4. To establish and announce the autonomy of non-Moros regarding the Moros, strictly preventing the latter from interfering in the matters of the non-Moros. 5. To remind all non-Moros and Moros of their duty as individuals and subjects of the crown of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]España, to live in villages in a civilized manner. 6. Lastly, to reduce the number of Moro groups as much as possible and move them away from the areas around the Tágum and Hijo rivers, where the members of the Mandaya race are to build their villages, as that is the closest location.

In my opinion the above are the means which, if faithfully followed out, will reduce the pernicious influence of the Moros to a cipher, and in a few years would cause an infinite number of villages to flourish, which could be formed from the great multitude of heathens of the various races who are scattered about the extensive gulf of Dávao. With that system, I also shelter the hope that very many Moros, who do not belong to the class of the datos and panditas, will enter, if it is not delayed, the net of Jesus Christ.

In my view, the methods mentioned above, if diligently implemented, will diminish the harmful influence of the Moros to nothing. In just a few years, countless villages could thrive, emerging from the large number of nonbelievers of various races scattered around the vast Dávao Gulf. With this approach, I also hope that many Moros, who are not part of the datos and panditas class, will soon come into the fold of Jesus Christ, if we act quickly.

With the half company which is on duty here, together with the cuadrilleros and the marine forces who guard these waters, there is more than sufficient for the accomplishment of all that I have stated in the present letter.

With the half company that is on duty here, along with the cuadrilleros and the marine forces protecting these waters, there is more than enough to accomplish everything I've mentioned in this letter.

I commend myself many times to the holy prayers of your Reverence.

I often commend myself to your holy prayers.

Your Reverence’s servant in Christ,

Your Reverence’s servant in Christ,

Quiríco Moré, S. J. [212]

Quiríco Moré, S.J. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]


1 Fray Tomás Ortiz took the Augustinian habit at the age of nineteen, at the Valladolid convent in 1687. Within a short time after his arrival in Manila he became lecturer there (1695), and acted as secretary of the province. Soon however he went to China to engage in the mission work of that empire, and upon the expulsion of the missionaries in 1713, he was appointed prior of Manila, and in 1716 provincial. He filled other important posts in the mission work of the islands, and died at Manila in 1742. He composed numerous works in Spanish, Tagálog, and Chinese. See Perez’s Catálogo, pp. 167–173. A fuller account of his life is also given in vol. xxix of Revista Agustiniana.

1 Fray Tomás Ortiz joined the Augustinian order at nineteen years old, at the Valladolid convent in 1687. Shortly after arriving in Manila, he became a lecturer there in 1695 and served as the province's secretary. However, he soon went to China to participate in mission work there, and after the missionaries were expelled in 1713, he was appointed prior of Manila and became provincial in 1716. He held various important roles in the mission work across the islands and died in Manila in 1742. He wrote many works in Spanish, Tagálog, and Chinese. See Perez’s Catálogo, pp. 167–173. A more detailed account of his life is also found in vol. xxix of Revista Agustiniana.

2 The calumpang tree (Sterculia fœtida—Linn.) grows to a great size; its roots branch out half way up the trunk, and are so large that a roof could be laid over them so that they could be used as a dwelling. The fruit of this tree resembles a pomegranate, which divides when ripe into four quarters having certain kernels, from which an oil is extracted which is used for medicine, and which the natives use to anoint the hair. The wood is easy to work but is not very durable. See Delgado’s Historia, p. 457; Blanco’s Flora, p. 524; and Official Handbook of the Philippines, p. 346.

2 The calumpang tree (Sterculia fœtida—Linn.) can grow quite large; its roots spread out halfway up the trunk and are so big that a roof could be placed over them to create a dwelling. The tree's fruit looks like a pomegranate, which splits open into four sections when ripe, containing certain seeds from which oil is extracted. This oil is used for medicinal purposes and is also used by locals to style their hair. The wood is easy to work with but isn’t very long-lasting. See Delgado’s Historia, p. 457; Blanco’s Flora, p. 524; and Official Handbook of the Philippines, p. 346.

3 Many instances of ancestor worship by the peoples of the Philippines are recorded in this series. There is no evidence that suggests that the custom was borrowed from the Chinese. It had become the general rule almost in the Philippines to refer many things, the origin of which was unknown, to the Chinese.

3 Many examples of ancestor worship by the people of the Philippines are documented in this series. There’s no evidence indicating that this practice was adopted from the Chinese. It has become a common belief in the Philippines to attribute many things, whose origins are unclear, to the Chinese.

4 This is the anting-anting. See Retana’s Aniterías, which gives examples of formulas, most of which are a meaningless conglomeration of words.

4 This is the anting-anting. Check out Retana’s Aniterías, which provides examples of formulas, most of which are just a random collection of words.

5 A Tagálog word for a sort of earthen vessel. See Noceda and Sanlucar’s Vocabulario de la lengua tagala.

5 A Tagalog word for a type of clay pot. See Noceda and Sanlucar’s Vocabulario de la lengua tagala.

6 The translation of the title-page of the Historia is as follows: “History of the Philipinas Islands, composed by the reverend father lector, Fray Joaquin Martinez de Zuñiga of the Order of St. Augustine, ex-definitor of his province, calificador of the Holy Office, and regular parish priest of the village of Parañaque. With the necessary licenses. Printed in Sampaloc, by Fray Pedro Argüelles de la Concepcion, Franciscan religious, in the year 1803.”

6 The translation of the title page of the Historia is as follows: “History of the Philippine Islands, written by the reverend Father Lector, Fray Joaquin Martinez de Zuñiga of the Order of St. Augustine, former definitor of his province, reviewer for the Holy Office, and regular parish priest of the village of Parañaque. With the necessary permissions. Printed in Sampaloc by Fray Pedro Argüelles de la Concepcion, a Franciscan, in the year 1803.”

Joaquin Martínez de Zúñiga was one of the most illustrious men of the Augustinian order who ever labored in the Philippines. He was born in Aguilar in Navarra, February 19, 1760, and deciding to embrace the religious life professed in the Augustinian college at Valladolid January 26, 1779. Setting out for the Philippines in 1785, he remained one year in Mexico, before going to them, arriving in Manila, August 3, 1786. In the islands he learned the Tagálog language, and acted as minister-associate in Batangas and Tambobon for four years. In 1790 he was appointed lector [i. e., reader or lecturer], but was soon appointed parish priest of Hagonoy (1791). In 1792 he acted as secretary of the province, and in 1794 and 1797 administered the villages of Calumpit and Pasig respectively. Being invited by General Álava to accompany him on his tour of inspection among the islands, he did so, and the Estadismo (published in Madrid in 1893 by W. E. Retana) is the fruit of that journey. After returning to Manila, he took charge of the parish of Parañaque (1801–1806). In 1806 he was elected provincial of the order. He had also filled the office of definitor in 1794, and was a calificador of the Holy Office. After his provincialate he resumed charge of the ministry of Parañaque which he held until his death (March 7, 1818). The Historia has been translated into English by John Maver and printed in two editions. He is said also to have translated, annotated, and printed the work of Le Gentil, but which Retana (Estadismo, i, pp. xviii, xxix) says cannot now be found. Apropos of this, Dr. T. H. Pardo de Tavera sends a copy of the title-page of a MS. of this Spanish work which is as follows: “Voyage of M. Le Gentil, to the Philipinas Islands, translated from the French into the Spanish, by the very reverend father lector, Fray Joaquin Martinez de Zuñiga.... The translator adds some notes in which he reveals and refutes many errors of the author.” Pardo de Tavera says that this MS. is unpublished and that its existence is unsuspected and not known even by the Augustinians. See Pérez’s Catáloga, pp. 346–348, and Pardo de Tavera’s Biblioteca Filipina (Washington, 1903), p. 252.

Joaquin Martínez de Zúñiga was one of the most notable members of the Augustinian order who worked in the Philippines. He was born in Aguilar, Navarra, on February 19, 1760, and chose to dedicate his life to religion at the Augustinian college in Valladolid on January 26, 1779. He left for the Philippines in 1785, spending a year in Mexico before arriving in Manila on August 3, 1786. While in the islands, he learned the Tagalog language and served as a minister-associate in Batangas and Tambobon for four years. In 1790, he was appointed lector [i.e., reader or lecturer], but soon became the parish priest of Hagonoy in 1791. In 1792, he served as secretary of the province, and in 1794 and 1797, he managed the villages of Calumpit and Pasig, respectively. After being invited by General Álava to join him on his inspection tour of the islands, he participated, and the Estadismo (published in Madrid in 1893 by W. E. Retana) resulted from that trip. Upon returning to Manila, he took over the parish of Parañaque from 1801 to 1806. In 1806, he was elected provincial of the order. He had also served as definitor in 1794 and held the position of calificador in the Holy Office. After his term as provincial, he returned to serve in the ministry of Parañaque until his death on March 7, 1818. The Historia has been translated into English by John Maver and printed in two editions. He is also said to have translated, annotated, and published the work of Le Gentil, though Retana (Estadismo, i, pp. xviii, xxix) claims it cannot currently be found. In this regard, Dr. T. H. Pardo de Tavera shares a title page of a manuscript of this Spanish work, which states: “Voyage of M. Le Gentil, to the Pilipinas Islands, translated from French to Spanish by the very reverend father lector, Fray Joaquin Martinez de Zuñiga.... The translator adds some notes where he exposes and corrects many errors of the author.” Pardo de Tavera notes that this manuscript is unpublished and that its existence is unknown, even to the Augustinians. See Pérez’s Catáloga, pp. 346–348, and Pardo de Tavera’s Biblioteca Filipina (Washington, 1903), p. 252.

7 Louis Lapicque, chief of the laboratory of the faculty of Medicine in Paris, was commissioned by the Minister of Public Instruction in 1892 to study the question of the distribution of the Negrito and to collect data concerning that race. He spent the months of March-December 1893 in this study, working in the Andaman Islands, the Mergui Islands in the Bay of Bengal, and the Malay Peninsula, and considering also in his report the inhabitants of other places, especially the Philippines. He brings out the interesting conclusion that the inhabitants of the Andaman Islands are perhaps the purest race in existence, and that they are closely allied to the Negritos of the Philippines. Both being brachycephalic, they are thus differentiated from the African negro, who is dolichocephalic. See Annales de Géographie, v, pp. 407–424. Wm. A. Reed (Negritos of Zambales, p. 34) gives the average of the cephalic index of the nineteen individuals whom he was able to measure as 82 for the males and 86 for the females.

7 Louis Lapicque, head of the laboratory at the Faculty of Medicine in Paris, was tasked by the Minister of Public Instruction in 1892 to investigate the distribution of the Negrito people and gather information about that race. He spent from March to December 1893 on this study, working in the Andaman Islands, the Mergui Islands in the Bay of Bengal, and the Malay Peninsula, while also considering in his report the inhabitants of other regions, especially the Philippines. He makes the intriguing observation that the people of the Andaman Islands may be the purest race still in existence and that they are closely related to the Negritos of the Philippines. Both groups have a brachycephalic skull shape, which sets them apart from African negros, who possess a dolichocephalic skull shape. See Annales de Géographie, v, pp. 407–424. Wm. A. Reed (Negritos of Zambales, p. 34) reports that the average cephalic index for the nineteen individuals he measured was 82 for males and 86 for females.

8 Angola, formerly called Dongo or Ambonde, is located on the west coast of Africa. Its coast was discovered in 1486 by the Spaniards who still own it.

8 Angola, once known as Dongo or Ambonde, is situated on the west coast of Africa. Spanish explorers discovered its coastline in 1486, and they still hold ownership of it.

9 Of the Bontoc Igorot, Albert Ernest Jenks, chief of the Ethnological Survey of the Philippines, says (The Bontoc Igorot, Manila, 1905, p. 14): “He belongs to that extensive stock of primitive people of which the Malay is the most commonly named. I do not believe he has received any of his characteristics, as a group, from either the Chinese or Japanese, though this theory has frequently been presented.”

9 Regarding the Bontoc Igorot, Albert Ernest Jenks, head of the Ethnological Survey of the Philippines, states (The Bontoc Igorot, Manila, 1905, p. 14): “He is part of the large group of indigenous people often referred to as Malays. I don't think he has inherited any of his group characteristics from the Chinese or Japanese, even though this idea has been suggested many times.”

10 That the theory of the origin of the Filipino peoples here expressed is false needs no demonstration. The peoples of the Philippines show two stocks—the Malayan and the Negrito. The inhabitants of the Polynesian Islands (using the term in its restricted sense) probably migrated from the East Indies and hence are allied to the modern Malayan peoples, and the same is true of the Huvas of Madagascar, having migrated from the parent stock from which the latter peoples originated. Sec Cust’s Modern Languages of East India (London, 1878); and New International Encyclopædia; Lesson’s Les Polynésiens (Paris, 1880–84); and Ratzel’s History of Mankind (English translation, London, 1898).

10 It’s clear that the theory regarding the origins of the Filipino peoples presented here is incorrect. The people of the Philippines have two primary ancestral groups—the Malayan and the Negrito. The inhabitants of the Polynesian Islands (in a more specific sense) likely migrated from the East Indies and are therefore related to the modern Malayan peoples; the same applies to the Huvas of Madagascar, who also migrated from the original stock that these peoples came from. See Cust’s Modern Languages of East India (London, 1878); and New International Encyclopædia; Lesson’s Les Polynésiens (Paris, 1880–84); and Ratzel’s History of Mankind (English translation, London, 1898).

11 The San Duisk Islands are the Sandwich or Hawaiian Islands; and the Otayti Islands are the Society Islands, so called from their largest island O-Taiti, Taiti, or Tahiti. The group of the Society Islands, of which Tahiti is chief, is called Windward Islands.

11 The San Duisk Islands are the Sandwich or Hawaiian Islands, while the Otayti Islands are known as the Society Islands, named after their largest island, O-Taiti, Taiti, or Tahiti. The Society Islands group, with Tahiti as the main island, is referred to as the Windward Islands.

12 Easter Island, so called because discovered by Roggeveen on Easter of 1772; called also Waihu, Teapi, and by the natives Rapanui. The inhabitants of this island are the last outpost of the Malayo-Polynesian race. It has belonged to Chile since 1888.

12 Easter Island, named this way because it was discovered by Roggeveen on Easter in 1772; it's also known as Waihu, Teapi, and by the locals as Rapanui. The people living on this island are the last representatives of the Malayo-Polynesian race. It has been part of Chile since 1888.

13 The Tagálog word for “house” is bahay, not balay.

13 The Tagálog word for “house” is bahay, not balay.

14 A reference to La Araucana, a Spanish epic poem written by Alonso de Ercilla y Zuñiga, the first part of which (15 cantos) was published at Madrid, 1569. This is the first work of literary merit known to have been composed upon either American continent. Ercilla y Zuñiga accompanied Felipe II to England on the occasion of his marriage to Mary Tudor. Thence he went to Chile with the army to fight the rebellious Araucanians. He was accused of having plotted an insurrection, and was condemned to death but the sentence was commuted to exile to Callao. He returned to Spain in 1562 and being coldly received wandered through various European countries until 1580 when he died in Madrid poor and forgotten. The continuations of his poem consisting of 37 cantos in all, were published in 1578 and 1590. The complete poem is published in vol. 17 of Autores españoles (Madrid, 1851). See New International Encyclopædia, and Grande Encyclopédie.

14 A reference to La Araucana, a Spanish epic poem written by Alonso de Ercilla y Zuñiga, the first part of which (15 cantos) was published in Madrid in 1569. This is the first work of literary significance known to have been created on either American continent. Ercilla y Zuñiga traveled with Felipe II to England for his marriage to Mary Tudor. Afterward, he went to Chile with the army to fight against the rebellious Araucanians. He was accused of plotting an uprising and sentenced to death, but the penalty was changed to exile in Callao. He returned to Spain in 1562 and, after being received coldly, traveled through several European countries until 1580, when he died in Madrid, poor and forgotten. The continuations of his poem, totaling 37 cantos, were published in 1578 and 1590. The complete poem is included in vol. 17 of Autores españoles (Madrid, 1851). See New International Encyclopædia, and Grande Encyclopédie.

15 In May, 1874, three canoes containing sixteen savages were driven by gales from the Pelew Islands, and after drifting on the ocean sixty days reached Formosa, distant 1,600 miles; and all but one survived these hardships—a striking example of endurance in both themselves and their craft (Davidson, Formosa, p. 215).

15 In May 1874, three canoes carrying sixteen indigenous people were blown off course by strong winds from the Pelew Islands, and after drifting at sea for sixty days, they arrived in Formosa, which is 1,600 miles away; and all but one of them survived these challenges—a remarkable demonstration of resilience in both the people and their canoes (Davidson, Formosa, p. 215).

16 Charles Wilkes was born in New York City, in 1798. He entered the U. S. navy as midshipman in 1818, and sailed in the Mediterranean and Pacific. He became lieutenant in 1826, and was placed in charge of the department of charts and instruments in 1830. In 1838, he was placed in charge of the expedition authorized by Congress in 1836 for the purpose of exploring and surveying the southern ocean. This was the first scientific expedition fitted out by the United States government, and much valuable information resulted from it. Of the record of the expedition (which lasted during the years 1838–1842) consisting of nineteen volumes, Wilkes wrote the six containing the narrative and the volumes on meteorology and hydrography. In 1843 he was made a commander, and a captain in 1855. He served through most of the Civil war on the northern side and was the one who removed the Confederate commissioners Slidell and Mason from the English mail boat “Trent,” November 8, 1861. He was made a commodore in July 1862, retired in June 1864, and created a rear admiral on the retired list, in 1866. His death occurred in 1877. The names of the vessels in his fleet were the sloops of war “Vincennes” and “Peacock,” the brig “Porpoise,” the store-ship “Relief,” and the two tenders, “Sea-Gull,” and “Flying-Fish.” See Introduction to Vol. i. of Wilkes’s narrative, and New International Encyclopædia.

16 Charles Wilkes was born in New York City in 1798. He joined the U.S. Navy as a midshipman in 1818 and sailed in the Mediterranean and Pacific. He became a lieutenant in 1826 and took charge of the charts and instruments department in 1830. In 1838, he led the expedition authorized by Congress in 1836 to explore and survey the Southern Ocean. This was the first scientific expedition organized by the U.S. government, and it yielded a lot of valuable information. Of the expedition's record, which lasted from 1838 to 1842 and consisted of nineteen volumes, Wilkes wrote six that included the narrative, as well as the volumes on meteorology and hydrography. In 1843, he was promoted to commander and became a captain in 1855. He served on the Northern side during most of the Civil War and was responsible for removing the Confederate commissioners Slidell and Mason from the English mail boat "Trent" on November 8, 1861. He was made a commodore in July 1862, retired in June 1864, and was promoted to rear admiral on the retired list in 1866. He passed away in 1877. The ships in his fleet included the sloops of war "Vincennes" and "Peacock," the brig "Porpoise," the store ship "Relief," and two tenders, "Sea-Gull" and "Flying-Fish." See Introduction to Vol. i. of Wilkes’s narrative, and New International Encyclopædia.

17 i.e., The island of Busuang̃a, the largest of the Calamianes group, which has an area of 390 square miles. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 274.

17 i.e., The island of Busuang̃a, the biggest in the Calamianes group, covering an area of 390 square miles. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 274.

18 i.e., The island of Ambolón, south of Mindoro, of four square miles. See ut supra, i, p. 267.

18 i.e., The island of Ambolón, located south of Mindoro, covers four square miles. See ut supra, i, p. 267.

19 The island of Simara, near Romblón.

19 The island of Simara, close to Romblón.

20 “Although Spain had jurisdiction over these islands for more than three centuries, little topographic information had been acquired regarding them, except such as was of a very general character. The coasts were badly mapped, and in many places are now known to have been miles out of position. The coast charts, made from Spanish surveys, are so inaccurate as to be, on the whole, worse than useless to mariners, while of the interior of the larger islands, little was known except what could be seen from the sea.” Census of the Philippines, i, p. 51.

20 “Even though Spain controlled these islands for over three hundred years, they didn’t gather much detailed information about them, and what they did know was quite basic. The coastlines were poorly mapped, and in many cases, they’ve since been found to be miles off. The coastal charts created from Spanish surveys are so inaccurate that they are, overall, more of a hindrance than a help for sailors, and regarding the interior of the larger islands, there was little information available beyond what could be viewed from the sea.” Census of the Philippines, i, p. 51.

21 The population is given by the Census for 1903 (ii, p. 30) as 743,646.

21 The population is reported in the Census for 1903 (ii, p. 30) as 743,646.

22 On my arrival at Singapore, this circumstance was investigated by a court of inquiry. The result showed that Mr. Knox had no knowledge of the Vincennes having been seen; for the officer of the watch had not reported to him the fact.—Wilkes.

22 When I arrived in Singapore, a court of inquiry looked into this situation. The outcome demonstrated that Mr. Knox was unaware of the Vincennes being spotted, as the officer on watch hadn't informed him of that. —Wilkes.

23 The full name of this village is San José de Buenavista. It is the capital of Antique.

23 The full name of this village is San José de Buenavista. It is the capital of Antique.

24 The crest of the mountains in Panay is a few miles inland from the west coast. Among the peaks of that range, are the following: Usigan, 4,300 ft.; Agótay, 3,764 ft.; Madiaás, 7,466 ft.; Nangtud, 6,834 ft.; Maymagui, 5,667 ft.; Llorente, 4,466 ft.; Tiguran, 4,900 ft.; and Igbanig, 4,343 ft. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 69.

24 The peaks of the mountains in Panay are situated a few miles inland from the west coast. Among these peaks are the following: Usigan, 4,300 ft.; Agótay, 3,764 ft.; Madiaás, 7,466 ft.; Nangtud, 6,834 ft.; Maymagui, 5,667 ft.; Llorente, 4,466 ft.; Tiguran, 4,900 ft.; and Igbanig, 4,343 ft. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 69.

25 Wilkes accompanies (p. 349) this description of Caldera fort with a sketch.

25 Wilkes includes (p. 349) this description of Caldera fort along with a sketch.

26 There are two islands called Sangboy, one called the north island and the other the south island. They both belong to the Pilas group of the Sulu Archipelago, and are less than one square mile in area. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 283.

26 There are two islands named Sangboy, one referred to as the north island and the other as the south island. Both belong to the Pilas group of the Sulu Archipelago and are less than one square mile in size. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 283.

27 Wilkes presents figures of both the whole canoe and a cross section, on p. 353.

27 Wilkes shows images of the entire canoe and a cross-section on page 353.

28 For the methods of fishing in the Philippines, see Official Handbook, p. 151. Wilkes also mentions (v, pp. 321, 322) various methods, namely, by weirs, hooks, and seine. The former are made of bamboo stakes in the shallow waters of the lake of Bay where it empties into the Pasig. The nets used in the bay are suspended by the four corners from hoops attached to a crane by which they are lowered into the water. The fishing-boats are little better than rafts and are called saraboas.

28 For the methods of fishing in the Philippines, see Official Handbook, p. 151. Wilkes also mentions (v, pp. 321, 322) various methods, including weirs, hooks, and seines. The weirs are made of bamboo stakes in the shallow waters of Lake Bay where it flows into the Pasig. The nets used in the bay are held up by four corners from hoops attached to a crane that lowers them into the water. The fishing boats are little more than rafts and are called saraboas.

29 Evidently at the village of Joló.

29 Clearly in the village of Joló.

30 On p. 354, Wilkes presents a sketch of houses at Soung—the typical Moro house.

30 On p. 354, Wilkes shares a drawing of houses in Soung—the typical Moro house.

31 A full-page engraving of the “Mosque in the town of Sooloo” faces page 354 of Wilkes’s narrative.

31 A full-page engraving of the “Mosque in the town of Sooloo” is on page 354 of Wilkes’s story.

32 Chewing the betel-nut and pepper-leaf also produce this effect, and is carried on to a great extent among these islanders.—Wilkes.

32 Chewing betel nut and pepper leaf also creates this effect and is widely practiced among these islanders.—Wilkes.

33 Cf. the description of the betel caskets given by Morga, VOL. XVI, p. 99.

33 See the description of the betel caskets provided by Morga, VOL. 16, p. 99.

34 The Sultan, on the visit of one of our merchant-vessels, had informed the supercargo that he wished to encourage our trade, and to see the vessels of the United States coming to his port.—Wilkes.

34 The Sultan, during the visit of one of our merchant ships, told the supercargo that he wanted to support our trade and see the vessels from the United States arriving at his port.—Wilkes.

35 An engraving made from this sketch is given by Wilkes facing p. 358.

35 An engraving created from this sketch is provided by Wilkes on page 358.

36 Opium is known by its Arabic name “afyun” throughout the Eastern Archipelago. Crawfurd asserts that its moderate use produces no worse results than does the moderate use of wine, spirits, and perhaps smoking. Shortly after American occupation of the Philippines, the necessity for taking some action in regard to the traffic was seen. The Philippine Commission were convinced that the smoking of opium was increasing among the Filipinos. Accordingly a committee was appointed to study the conditions, and restrictions of other Oriental countries in regard to opium. There were then practically no restrictions in regard to the smoking of the drug. On August 1, 1903, there were 190 opium dens in Manila, and no license was required, as they had no authority in law. The vice was mainly restricted to the Chinese. In 1904 a considerable amount of opium was smuggled into the district of Lanao in Mindanao. “Nothing has had a more demoralizing effect upon the Moros and savage peoples than opium, and it will absolutely destroy them if its importation and use is authorized.... It is believed that a license to smoke opium, sufficiently low to escape fraud, should be issued for those hopelessly addicted to the habit, and that exceedingly severe penalties should attach to those who furnish opium to youth or those who are nonsmokers.... It is a poor policy in developing a people to count on the income of legalized vice for a large portion of the revenue, as is done in most eastern colonies.” The importation of opium has shown considerable increase during American occupation. See Crawfurd’s Dictionary, pp. 312–314; and the following reports of the Philippine Commission—for 1903, pt. i, p. 63, pt. 2, p. 96; for 1904, pt. 2, pp. 590, 591, pt. 3, p. 545.

36 Opium is referred to by its Arabic name “afyun” throughout the Eastern Archipelago. Crawfurd claims that moderate use causes no more harm than moderate consumption of wine, spirits, or possibly smoking. Shortly after the American occupation of the Philippines, the need to address the opium trade became evident. The Philippine Commission recognized that opium smoking was increasing among Filipinos. As a result, a committee was formed to examine the regulations in other Asian countries regarding opium. At that time, there were virtually no restrictions on the smoking of the drug. On August 1, 1903, there were 190 opium dens in Manila, and no licenses were required because there was no legal authority. The issue was primarily limited to the Chinese population. In 1904, a significant amount of opium was smuggled into the Lanao district in Mindanao. “Nothing has had a more damaging impact on the Moros and indigenous people than opium, and it will completely destroy them if its importation and use are permitted.... It is suggested that a license to smoke opium, set low enough to discourage fraud, should be issued for those who are hopelessly addicted, with very strict penalties for those who supply opium to young people or non-smokers.... Relying on revenue from legalized vice to develop a population is a poor strategy, as seen in most eastern colonies.” The importation of opium has increased significantly during American occupation. See Crawfurd’s Dictionary, pp. 312–314; and the following reports of the Philippine Commission—for 1903, pt. i, p. 63, pt. 2, p. 96; for 1904, pt. 2, pp. 590, 591, pt. 3, p. 545.

37 Since our return, inquiries have been made by him, which resulted in proving that such was in truth their origin, and that the vessel in which they were shipped was for a long time missing. The identical stones which he saw were a part of a monument that was on its way to Canton.—Wilkes.

37 Since our return, he has made inquiries that confirmed their true origin, and that the ship carrying them had been missing for a long time. The exact stones he saw were part of a monument that was headed to Canton.—Wilkes.

38 Marongas belongs to the Joló group of the Sulu Archipelago, and has an area of .4 square miles. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 284.

38 Marongas is part of the Joló group in the Sulu Archipelago and covers an area of 0.4 square miles. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 284.

39 The Sulug or Sulus were the dominant people of Joló before their conversion to Mahometanism, and still maintain that position. The bulk of the Moro Sulus is on the island of Joló and the islands immediately south as far as Siassi and Pandami. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 463, 464.

39 The Sulug or Sulus were the main people of Jolo before they converted to Islam, and they still hold that status. Most of the Moro Sulus are on the island of Jolo and the nearby islands all the way down to Siassi and Pandami. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 463, 464.

40 Orang is the Malay term for man or human being. As used here it would mean “the men,” i. e., “nobles.”

40 Orang is the Malay word for man or human being. In this context, it refers to “the men,” i. e., “nobles.”

41 The tripang or sea-slug (Holothuria edulis), which is esteemed as a great delicacy by the Chinese.

41 The tripang or sea slug (Holothuria edulis) is highly valued as a delicious dish by the Chinese.

42 Evidently the people called Guimbajanos by the historians of the eighteenth century. From Wilkes’s description, they would appear to be at least partially Negrito.

42 Clearly, the people referred to as Guimbajanos by eighteenth-century historians. Based on Wilkes’s description, they seem to be at least partly Negrito.

43 Banjarmasin is a principality and river on the southern side of Borneo, the word meaning in Javanese “salt or saline garden.” The sovereignty of Banjarmasin is said in olden times to have extended over all of southeastern Borneo. See Crawfurd’s Dictionary (pp. 36, 37), where an historical sketch of the principality is given.

43 Banjarmasin is a principality and a river on the southern side of Borneo, with the name meaning "salt or saline garden" in Javanese. It is said that in ancient times, the sovereignty of Banjarmasin extended over all of southeastern Borneo. See Crawfurd’s Dictionary (pp. 36, 37), which provides a historical overview of the principality.

44 The Chinese emperor at this time was Choo Yuen Chang, the founder of the Ming dynasty, who defeated Chunti, the last of the Mongol dynasty, in 1367, and ruled from then until the year 1398. He adopted as emperor the name of Hongwon. The statements in the text may be only common report. See Boulger’s Short History of China, pp. 79–87.

44 The Chinese emperor during this time was Choo Yuen Chang, who started the Ming dynasty after defeating Chunti, the last emperor of the Mongol dynasty, in 1367. He ruled until 1398 and took on the name Hongwon as emperor. The claims in this text might just be common knowledge. See Boulger’s Short History of China, pp. 79–87.

45 See Montero y Vidal’s account of Joloan affairs during this period, in his Historia, i, pp. 475–548, 561–581, ii, pp. 6–77, 575, 576.

45 Check out Montero y Vidal’s take on Joloan affairs during this time in his Historia, i, pp. 475–548, 561–581, ii, pp. 6–77, 575, 576.

46 Manila was captured by the English October 6 (or, October 5, according to Spanish reckoning), 1762 (not 1763). See A plain Narrative (London, 1565?), p. 4.

46 Manila was taken by the English on October 6 (or October 5, according to the Spanish calendar), 1762 (not 1763). See A Plain Narrative (London, 1565?), p. 4.

47 This name is derived from the large bay that makes in on the south side of the island of Mindanao, and on which a set of free-booters reside.—Wilkes.

47 This name comes from the large bay located on the southern side of Mindanao Island, where a group of pirates live.—Wilkes.

This is the bay of Illana. Illano or Illanum means “people of the lake.” At present they inhabit the south coast of Mindanao from Punta [de] Flechas to Polloc. They are but few in number, but in the past have been bold pirates. They are probably closely connected with the Malanao or Moros dwelling in the valley of Lake Lanao. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 466, 472.

This is the bay of Illana. Illano or Illanum means "people of the lake." Currently, they live along the south coast of Mindanao from Punta [de] Flechas to Polloc. They are few in number, but in the past, they were daring pirates. They are likely closely related to the Malanao or Moros who live in the valley of Lake Lanao. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 466, 472.

48 Pulo Toolyan is Tulaian of the Jolo group of the Sulu Archipelago, with an area of .5 sq. mi.; Tonho may be Tang̃o or Tangu of the Tawi Tawi group; Pilas is the chief island of its group, with an area of 8.2 sq. mi.; Tawi Tawi is the chief island of its group, with an area of 232 sq. mi.; Sumlout is perhaps Simaluc, of the Tawi Tawi group, with an area of 1.3 sq. mi.; Pantutaran is perhaps Pantocunan, of the Joló group, with an area of .6 sq. mi.; Parodasan is perhaps Parangaan of the Tawi Tawi group, or Parang̃an of the Tapul group; Basilan is the chief island of its group, with an area of 478 sq. mi. See Census of Philippines, i.

48 Pulo Toolyan is Tulaian from the Jolo group of the Sulu Archipelago, covering an area of 0.5 square miles; Tonho might be Tang̃o or Tangu from the Tawi Tawi group; Pilas is the main island of its group, covering 8.2 square miles; Tawi Tawi is the main island of its group, with an area of 232 square miles; Sumlout could be Simaluc, from the Tawi Tawi group, covering 1.3 square miles; Pantutaran might be Pantocunan, from the Joló group, with an area of 0.6 square miles; Parodasan could be Parangaan from the Tawi Tawi group, or Parang̃an from the Tapul group; Basilan is the main island of its group, covering 478 square miles. See Census of Philippines, i.

49 In 1861 a number of light steam gunboats with steel hulls and of twenty or thirty horsepower were constructed in England for the Spaniards for use against the Moro pirates; and they were very effective in reducing piracy, both in the Lake Lanao district and that of Mindanao and the adjacent islands. See Montero y Vidal’s Historia, iii, pp. 327, 328, and elsewhere; and Historia de la piratería, ii.

49 In 1861, several light steam gunboats with steel hulls and around twenty to thirty horsepower were built in England for the Spaniards to combat the Moro pirates. They were quite successful in decreasing piracy in the Lake Lanao region, as well as Mindanao and the nearby islands. See Montero y Vidal’s Historia, iii, pp. 327, 328, and elsewhere; and Historia de la piratería, ii.

50 The sea-gypsies. See VOL. XXXVI, p. 199, note 38.

50 The sea-gypsies. See VOL. 36, p. 199, note 38.

51 This treaty is as follows:

51 This treaty states:

[Preceding the text of the treaty are some Arabic characters.]

[Preceding the text of the treaty are some Arabic characters.]

I, Mohamed, Sultan of Sooloo, for the purpose of encouraging trade with the people of the United States of America, do promise hereby and bind myself that I will afford full protection to all vessels of the United States, and their commanders and crews visiting any of the islands of my dominions, and they shall be allowed to trade on the terms of the most favoured nation, and receive such provisions and necessaries as they may be in want of.

I, Mohamed, Sultan of Sooloo, in order to promote trade with the people of the United States of America, promise and commit to fully protect all vessels from the United States, as well as their captains and crews, visiting any of the islands in my territory. They will be permitted to trade under the most favored nation’s terms and receive any provisions and essentials they may need.

2dly. In case of shipwreck or accident to any vessel, I will afford them all the assistance in my power, and protect the persons and property of those wrecked, and afford them all the assistance in my power for its preservation and safe-keeping, and for the return of the officers and crews of said vessels to the Spanish settlements, or wherever they may wish to proceed.

2dly. In the event of a shipwreck or accident to any vessel, I will provide all the help I can and protect the people and property of those affected, offering all the support in my power for its preservation and safekeeping, and for the return of the officers and crews of said vessels to the Spanish settlements, or wherever they wish to go.

3dly. That any one of my subjects who shall do any injury or harm to the commanders or crews belonging to American vessels, shall receive such punishment as his crime merits.

3dly. That any of my subjects who cause any injury or harm to the commanders or crews of American vessels will receive punishment that fits their crime.

In witness whereof I have hereunto set my hand and seal, in presence of the datus and chiefs at Soung, island of Sooloo.

In witness whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and seal, in the presence of the datus and chiefs at Soung, island of Sooloo.

February 5th, 1842.

February 5, 1842.

[Here follows a signature in Arabic characters.]

[Here follows a signature in Arabic characters.]

Witnesses:

Witnesses:

Charles Wilkes,
Commanding Exploring Expedition.

Charles Wilkes,
Leader of the Exploring Expedition.

William L. Hudson,
Late Commanding U. S. Ship Peacock.

William L. Hudson,
Former Commander of the U.S. Ship Peacock.

R. R. Waldron,
Purser, U. S. Exploring Expedition.

R.R. Waldron,
Purser, U.S. Exploring Expedition.

52 Pang̃utárang is the largest island of the numerous group of the same name belonging to the Sulu Archipelago, and has an area of 42 square miles. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 284.

52 Pang̃utárang is the largest island in the group of the same name that belongs to the Sulu Archipelago, covering an area of 42 square miles. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 284.

53 Cagayan Sulu has an area of 27 square miles. It is located in a group of 31 islands. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 286.

53 Cagayan Sulu covers 27 square miles and is part of a cluster of 31 islands. Refer to Census of Philippines, i, p. 286.

54 According to Census of Philippines (i, p. 28, ii, p. 123), the area of the Davao district is 9,707 square miles, and the total population 65,496, of whom 45,272 are uncivilized.

54 According to Census of Philippines (i, p. 28, ii, p. 123), the Davao district covers an area of 9,707 square miles, with a total population of 65,496, of which 45,272 are considered uncivilized.

55 José Oyangúren was a native of Guipúzcoa who went to the Philippines in 1825, leaving Spain for political reasons. He passed several years in the province of Caraga (now Surigao), engaged in business, and in the Calamianes. For a number of years also he occupied the judicial post in Tondo. In 1846 he was deprived of that post because such officials were thereafter appointed in Madrid. On hearing of the cession of the gulf of Davao by the sultan to the Spaniards, he visited that region. On his return he proposed to Governor Clavería to conquer and subdue the entire gulf district, expel or pacify the Moros there, and establish the Christian religion, if he were given supplies and equipment, the command of the district, and exclusive rights of trade therein. A decree issued by Clavería February 27, 1847, gave him the command for ten years and exclusive rights of trade for the first six years. He was also given artillery, muskets, and ammunition, and permission to raise a company. By the beginning of 1849 he was in peaceful possession of the entire coast-line of the gulf and then turned his attention into the interior. The government, however, did not live up to its promises, and Oyangúren after the death of Clavería was removed from his command. The last years of his life (1852–1859) were spent in the fruitless endeavor to obtain what had been promised him. See Montero y Vidal’s Hist. piratería, i, pp. 382–403.

55 José Oyangúren was originally from Guipúzcoa and moved to the Philippines in 1825 due to political issues in Spain. He spent several years in the province of Caraga (now Surigao), working in business, and also in the Calamianes. For several years, he held a judicial position in Tondo. In 1846, he lost that position because officials were then appointed from Madrid. After hearing about the sultan’s cession of the Gulf of Davao to the Spaniards, he traveled to the area. On his return, he proposed to Governor Clavería that he conquer and control the entire gulf region, expelling or pacifying the Moros there and establishing Christianity, provided he received supplies and equipment, leadership of the district, and exclusive trading rights. A decree from Clavería on February 27, 1847, granted him command for ten years and exclusive trading rights for the first six years. He was also given artillery, muskets, and ammunition, and permission to raise a company. By early 1849, he had peacefully taken control of the entire coastline of the gulf and then focused on the interior. However, the government did not fulfill its promises, and Oyangúren, after Clavería's death, was removed from his command. The last years of his life (1852–1859) were spent in a fruitless effort to secure what had been promised to him. See Montero y Vidal’s Hist. piratería, i, pp. 382–403.

56 A vessel for the coasting trade in the Philippines. See New Velázquez Dictionary.

56 A ship used for coastal trading in the Philippines. See New Velázquez Dictionary.

57 The island of Sámal is located in the Gulf of Davao, and has an area of 147 square miles. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 282.

57 The island of Sámal is situated in the Gulf of Davao and covers an area of 147 square miles. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 282.

58 This is the Tagálog word for the upper part of a village. It seems here to mean the eastern mountainous district of Surigao.

58 This is the Tagalog word for the upper part of a village. It appears to refer to the eastern mountainous area of Surigao.

59 Of the tribes of Mindanao, Census of Philippines, i, p. 462, says: “Going eastward in Mindanao and passing by the central lake region, which is inhabited entirely by Lanao Moros, we come to other tribes, which, so far as I have seen, differ in no essential from the Subanon.... Around the headwaters of the Rio Grande de Mindanao they are called Manobo. South of the Rio Grande they are called Tiruray, Bilan, Manobo, and other names. The reason for the use of these different terms is not satisfactorily explained. There are doubtless changes of dialect between them comparable to the changes we find among the Igorots in northern Luzón, but I believe it is hardly justifiable to break up into separate tribes or divisions a population so thoroughly homogeneous as these pagans of Mindanao appear to be.”

59 Of the tribes of Mindanao, Census of Philippines, i, p. 462, states: “Traveling east in Mindanao and passing through the central lake region, which is entirely inhabited by the Lanao Moros, we come across other tribes that, as far as I can tell, are not fundamentally different from the Subanon... Around the headwaters of the Rio Grande de Mindanao, they are known as Manobo. South of the Rio Grande, they are referred to as Tiruray, Bilan, Manobo, and other names. The reason for these different terms isn't clearly explained. There are likely dialect variations among them similar to those we see among the Igorots in northern Luzón, but I think it's questionable to categorize a population as distinct tribes or divisions when these pagans of Mindanao seem to be so homogenous.”

60 Sangil is a local term apparently derived from the volcano of the same name. It is sometimes applied as a collective title for pagan tribes of that region and sometimes to the Maguindanao Moros, who have settled between Craan and Makar. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 476.

60 Sangil is a local term that seems to come from the volcano of the same name. It’s sometimes used as a collective title for the pagan tribes in that area and at other times for the Maguindanao Moros, who have settled between Craan and Makar. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 476.

61 The Tagacaolos are closely related to the Bagobos. The word is probably derived from “olo,” meaning “head,” and thus “source” (of a river), the particle ka, “toward,” and the prefix taga. The entire word thus means “people who go up toward the source of the river,” to distinguish them from the “Tagabawa,” people who live in the lowlands, bawa meaning “down,” the “region low down.” See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 462, 476.

61 The Tagacaolos are closely related to the Bagobos. The name likely comes from “olo,” which means “head,” and by extension “source” (of a river), along with the particle ka, meaning “toward,” and the prefix taga. So the full term translates to “people who go up toward the source of the river,” setting them apart from the “Tagabawa,” who are the people living in the lowlands, with bawa meaning “down,” referring to the “region low down.” See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 462, 476.

62 This promise was fulfilled June 21 of the same year, and the letter is given in the Cartas, pp. 93–111.

62 This promise was fulfilled on June 21 of the same year, and the letter can be found in the Cartas, pp. 93–111.

63 i. e., The district ruled over by a dato.

63 that is to say, The area managed by a dato.

64 The pagatpat (Sonneratia), called also palapad and palatpat, is frequently found along the beaches. It grows to the height of twenty feet or so. Its wood is strong and is used in ordinary construction. The fruit is very sour and a vinegar is made from it. See Blanco, pp. 296, 297.

64 The pagatpat (Sonneratia), also known as palapad and palatpat, is commonly found along the beaches. It can grow up to about twenty feet tall. Its wood is sturdy and is used in regular construction. The fruit is quite sour, and vinegar is made from it. See Blanco, pp. 296, 297.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Letter from Father Pedro Rosell1 to the Father Superior of the Mission2

My dearly beloved Father Superior in Christ:

My dear Father Superior in Christ:

Although it is scarcely three weeks since my arrival from the visit which Father Pastells and I made to the villages of the southern part of this mission, I received your Reverence’s both affectionate and short letter of December 30 of last year, together with the authorizations which you were pleased to send me under separate covers. Ex intimo corde3 I acknowledge to your Reverence both letter and authorizations, and give you a thousand thanks for them. And now desiring to pay so pleasing a favor with something more [than thanks], I am going to write you a minute relation of the last two excursions that we two fathers made together, for I know the great consolation that your Reverence receives by the reading of such relations, for besides the fact that you learn from them of the condition and progress [213]of your dear missions and of the fathers and brothers who work in them, whom your Reverence loves with the true love of a father, there is also seen in the same relations the not small fruit that is obtained in souls by the mercy of God. Almost never is there lacking the relation of some remarkable event or edifying deed in the conquest of the heathens to our holy faith, which recreates the spirit and invites one to praise the goodness of our sweet Jesus. Some events of such a nature have occurred during the last two excursions which I have carefully noted in order to relate them to your Reverence.

Although it's been just three weeks since I returned from the trip that Father Pastells and I took to the villages in the southern part of this mission, I received your kind but brief letter dated December 30 of last year, along with the authorizations you were kind enough to send me separately. Ex intimo corde3 I acknowledge both your letter and the authorizations and thank you immensely for them. Now, wanting to repay such a nice gesture with something more than just thanks, I’m going to write you a detailed account of the last two excursions we undertook together. I know how much comfort you find in reading such accounts because they inform you about the condition and progress [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] of your beloved missions and the fathers and brothers working there, whom you love with the true affection of a father. You can also see the significant spiritual fruits harvested by God’s mercy. There are usually remarkable events or inspiring deeds in the conversion of non-believers to our holy faith that uplift the spirit and inspire praise for the goodness of our dear Jesus. Some such events have taken place during the last two excursions, which I’ve carefully noted to share with you.

We made our first excursion in December of last year, after the feast of the Immaculate Conception of the most holy Virgin to the visita of Santa Fe, which is distant two hours’ journey from this capital, and which is located at the end of the small bay which is the terminal of Points Alisud de Caraga, and Sancol de Manurigao. About five hundred and sixty-nine Christians who have been reduced from the beliefs of the Mandayas in the space of the eight years since it was founded by our fathers, form its population. This village is one of the three which have been for a considerable time the aim of the repeated attacks of the Baganís or assassins of the mountains of Bungádon and Manlubúan. During the same days that we stayed there, the murder of three Mandayas, sácopes of Captain Ciriaco Lanquibo, who was recently converted to Christianity, happened in the fields which are located between that village and that of Manurígao. A week after we had returned to Caraga, we were informed that another like murder had been committed on another unfortunate friendly Mandaya near the said village [214]of San Luis. So bold do those barbarians show themselves, because there is no force with which to pursue them, and they feel so secure in the places where they reside!

We took our first trip in December of last year, after the feast of the Immaculate Conception of the Virgin Mary, to the visit of Santa Fe, which is a two-hour journey from this capital. It's located at the end of the small bay that marks the terminal of Points Alisud de Caraga and Sancol de Manurigao. The population consists of about five hundred sixty-nine Christians who have converted from the beliefs of the Mandayas over the eight years since it was established by our forebears. This village is one of three that have been repeatedly targeted by the Baganís, or assassins, from the mountains of Bungádon and Manlubúan. During our stay, three Mandayas, who were followers of Captain Ciriaco Lanquibo, a recent convert to Christianity, were murdered in the fields between that village and Manurígao. A week after we returned to Caraga, we were informed that another murder had occurred involving another unfortunate friendly Mandaya near the village of San Luis. Those barbarians are so bold because there is no force to pursue them, and they feel completely secure in their territories!

At the date on which we went to Santa Fe, it had been quite a long time since the said village had experienced any aggression from the baganis. Consequently, the people were living somewhat free from their past misery, and relieved of the frequent alarms and consequent frights. However, they were suffering great famine on account of the said aggressions, and because they had lost almost all the crops of maize and sweet potatoes (the only things which they cultivate), during that time because of the great and prolonged heat and the lack of rain. They were supporting themselves on the few sweet potatoes that had been saved, thanks to the humidity of the ground, and the shade of the trees, and on the soft parts of convolvulus and palms which grow along the shores of the rivers. In spite of so many and so severe troubles, thanks be to God, there has not been hitherto, but two families of San Luis who have become fugitives. That action has not at all been because they repent of having become Christians, but for other very different reasons. Those families have, however, now established relations with the father and promised him to abandon the Dacungbanua or lands of Magdagasang, where they are living at present, as soon as they shall have harvested the palay of their fields, and settle in a village other than the one in which they lived formerly. What a fine example, then, Father Superior, of Christian fidelity and resignation have those newly-reduced people given us in general, and how evident a proof [215]of their true conversion to Christianity! In my opinion, these are results that ought to be attributed, after divine Grace (without which no good thing can be done), especially to the plan which Father Pastells has always followed in so far as it has been allowed him, in the reduction of heathens. It is exclusively a system of attraction by means of great charity, great mildness, continual patience, and solid foundations upon which the village recently established rests; namely, the foundations of a good inspector who continues to form gradually in the village the good customs of the Christians, of good authorities who rule and govern the people without exactions and injustice, or excessive rigor, of good masters who instruct and educate the children, with the visit of the father, as often as possible in order further to exercise his spiritual ministries, and to ascertain how they all observe their important obligations.

At the time we went to Santa Fe, it had been quite a while since the village had faced any aggression from the baganis. As a result, the people were living somewhat free from their past hardships and relieved from the constant fear and anxiety. However, they were suffering from severe famine due to those aggressions and because they had lost nearly all their crops of maize and sweet potatoes (the only things they cultivate) during that time of extreme heat and lack of rain. They were surviving on the few sweet potatoes that had been salvaged, thanks to the moisture in the ground and the shade of the trees, and on the tender parts of convolvulus and palms that grow along the riverbanks. Despite so many severe troubles, thank God, only two families from San Luis have become fugitives up to now. This action is not at all because they regret becoming Christians, but for entirely different reasons. Those families have now established contact with the father and promised him that they would leave the Dacungbanua or lands of Magdagasang, where they currently live, as soon as they harvest the rice from their fields, and settle in a different village from the one they used to live in. What a great example, then, Father Superior, of Christian fidelity and resignation these newly-converted people have shown us in general, and how clear a proof of their true conversion to Christianity! In my opinion, these results should be attributed, after divine grace (without which no good thing can be accomplished), especially to the approach that Father Pastells has always taken, as much as circumstances have allowed, in the conversion of pagans. It is entirely a system of attraction through great charity, great gentleness, ongoing patience, and solid foundations upon which the newly established village rests; namely, the foundations of a good inspector who continues to instill good Christian customs in the village, of capable authorities who govern the people without exploitation or injustice, and good teachers who educate the children, with the father's visit as often as possible to further carry out his spiritual duties and ensure everyone is meeting their important obligations.

Coming back, now, from this long digression, your Reverence, Father Superior, could not imagine with what pleasure and blessings the Christians of those three visitas above mentioned, of Santa Fe, Manurígao, and San Luis, received the palay which your Reverence gave as an alms for the relief of those places because of that great scarcity of food of which I have spoken above. The heads of the families could not restrain their joy when they found themselves with palay which could be distributed to each one, although it was, it is true, very little compared to their great necessity. “How troublesome we are to you, Fathers,” they said, “and how much patience you must have with us. But God will be able to repay you superabundantly for the good that [216]you are doing us. Had we not received help, of a truth, our sick and stricken would have died of hunger and poor food. But now with this palay, we shall have enough to put new life into us, and we shall keep some of it for a small field, which will give us hopes of enduring the famine better later on.” So did the poor wretches express themselves. They really planted their fields with the little palay which they could set aside for it; and at the date of the writing of this letter, some fields are seen so luxuriant and with so fine a heading of grain that within one month they are promised a moderate harvest. May God in His goodness preserve those fields and cause them to bear one hundred per cent.

Coming back now from this long digression, your Reverence, Father Superior, you can't imagine the joy and blessings the Christians from the three mentioned visitas—Santa Fe, Manurígao, and San Luis—received from the palay you offered as alms for those places suffering from the severe food shortage I mentioned earlier. The heads of families couldn’t contain their happiness when they found themselves with palay that could be distributed to everyone, even though it was, admittedly, very little compared to their great need. “We must be such a burden to you, Fathers,” they said, “and you must have a lot of patience with us. But God will reward you abundantly for the good you’re doing for us. If we hadn’t received help, truly, our sick and struggling would have died from hunger and inadequate food. But now with this palay, we will have enough to revive us, and we’ll save some for a small field, which gives us hope of surviving the famine better in the future.” That's how the poor people expressed themselves. They indeed planted their fields with the little palay they could spare for it; and as of the date of this letter, some fields are so lush and have such a fine heading of grain that they are expected to yield a moderate harvest within a month. May God in His goodness protect those fields and ensure they produce abundantly.

The day following our arrival at Santa Fe, and the succeeding days, we managed to assemble in the convent all the Mandayas who appeared in the village. Father Pastells exhorted them to receive the faith of our Lord Jesus Christ, and many of them were baptized. Some of them obstinately refused, giving no other reason for their refusal, if reason it can be called, than Ualay gusto co, “I do not wish it.” And they could not be changed from that decision, notwithstanding all our arguments and eloquence. That happens to us at various times so that we missionaries may learn that the faith and baptism are gifts of his divine generosity, and that if God do not illumine and impel them with His powerful grace, in vanum laboravimus.4 But if some of them resisted divine Grace, others, God be thanked, yielded to it, and gladly received holy baptism. All together, adults and children, we baptized forty. Among that number three women whom we call bailanas are [217]worthy of special mention. Those women were clad in their baro or doublet, of a deep-red color throughout, a dress which is peculiar to their profession, and which differentiates them from other women. Since I have mentioned these important persons of Mandaya society, it will not be outside of my design, nor will it be without interest for your Reverence, to say something about the same. The bailanas are, as it were, the priestesses of the Mandayas. They exercise the functions of priestesses, for they offer sacrifices and other offerings to their false gods, invoke them for the cure of their sick, consult them in cases of necessity, etc., etc. Consequently, they possess considerable authority and influence among the Mandayas, since the latter look upon them as mediators between them and their gods, the instruments through whom is transmitted the will and mysterious orders of the gods, and, finally, as persons superior to themselves, although they may be baganis or petty kings, inasmuch as they believe them to be in direct communication with their gods or invisible spirits. This class of sharpers are not few among the Mandayas, both because those people are very superstitious and believe that their persons and whatever surrounds them are under the influence of good and evil spirits, and because the profession of bailan is a lucrative trade. For, for every religious act that the bailanas perform at the request of another, they receive their fee or at least they have a share of the sacrifice or offering that is made to the gods. Hence those women are the most difficult to attract to our holy faith, and even to enter the presence of the father missionary. For they fear that they will lose their influence, their repute, and their [218]easy living, if they become Christians. Poor creatures, how mistaken they are!

The day after we arrived in Santa Fe and in the following days, we gathered all the Mandayas who showed up in the village at the convent. Father Pastells encouraged them to accept the faith of our Lord Jesus Christ, and many of them were baptized. Some stubbornly refused, offering no other explanation for their refusal—if you can call it a reason—than Ualay gusto co, “I don’t want to.” They couldn’t be swayed from that choice, despite all our arguments and persuasive efforts. This happens to us sometimes so that we missionaries can learn that faith and baptism are gifts from His divine generosity, and that if God doesn’t enlighten and drive them with His powerful grace, in vanum laboravimus.4 But while some resisted divine grace, others, thank God, accepted it and happily received holy baptism. In total, we baptized forty people, including three women we refer to as bailanas, who deserve special mention. These women wore their deep-red baro or doublet, a dress unique to their profession, setting them apart from other women. Since I’ve brought up these significant figures in Mandaya society, it’s worth noting something about them for your Reverence. The bailanas are essentially the priestesses of the Mandayas. They perform priestly duties, offering sacrifices and other offerings to their false gods, calling upon them to heal the sick, and consulting them in times of need, among other things. Therefore, they hold considerable authority and influence among the Mandayas, who view them as mediators between themselves and their gods, the channels through which the will and mysterious commands of the gods flow, and ultimately as people superior to themselves, even if they are merely baganis or minor kings, since they believe the bailanas communicate directly with their gods or unseen spirits. This class of opportunists is not small among the Mandayas, partly due to their superstition and belief that their lives and surroundings are influenced by good and evil spirits, and partly because being a bailan is a profitable occupation. For every religious act the bailanas perform at someone else’s request, they receive payment or at least a portion of the sacrifice or offering made to the gods. As a result, these women are the hardest to draw into our holy faith and even to approach the missionary. They fear losing their influence, reputation, and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]easy lifestyle if they become Christians. Poor souls, how mistaken they are!

And now your Reverence may behold one of their pagdiuatas or sacrifices which they perform in honor of their gods, Mansilátan and Badla. Several bailanas assemble in the place assigned for the purpose, together with those persons interested and invited to take part in it. They erect a sort of small altar on which they place the manáugs or images of the said gods which are made of the special wood of the báyog tree,5 which they destine exclusively for this use. When the unfortunate hog which is to serve for the sacrifice is placed above the said altar, the chief bailana approaches with balarao or dagger in hand, which she brandishes and drives into the poor animal, which will surely be grunting in spite of the gods and of the religious solemnity, as it is fearful of what is going to happen to it; and leaves the victim sweltering in its blood. Then immediately all the bailanas drink of the blood in order to attract the prophetic spirit to themselves and to give their auguries or the supposed inspirations of their gods. Scarcely have they drunk the blood, when they become as though possessed by an infernal spirit which agitates them and makes them tremble as does the body of a person with the ague or like one who shivers with the cold. They seize in their hands a gong to which they give repeated blows with the third finger, snapping it with the thumb, thus making a kind of toccata with it. While they are doing this, after having belched forth a few dozen of times, [219]they invoke the above-mentioned gods Mansilátan and Badla, to whom they chant the following Mandayan song:

And now your Reverence can see one of their pagdiuatas or sacrifices that they perform in honor of their gods, Mansilátan and Badla. Several bailanas gather in the designated area, along with those interested and invited to join in. They set up a small altar where they place the manáugs or images of the said gods made from the special wood of the báyog tree, which they reserve exclusively for this use. When the unfortunate hog designated for the sacrifice is placed on the altar, the chief bailana steps forward with a balarao or dagger in hand, which she waves before driving into the poor animal, which is surely grunting despite the gods and the solemnity, fearing what is about to happen; she leaves the victim lying in its blood. Immediately after, all the bailanas drink the blood to attract the prophetic spirit to themselves and provide their auguries or the supposed inspirations of their gods. No sooner have they drunk the blood than they become seemingly possessed by a frantic spirit that agitates them and makes them tremble like someone with a fever or who is shivering from cold. They grab a gong and strike it repeatedly with their third finger, snapping it with their thumb, creating a kind of toccata. While doing this, after belching several times, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] they call upon the aforementioned gods Mansilátan and Badla, to whom they sing the following Mandayan song:

Miminsad, miminsad si Mansilátan

Mansilátan is a bummer

Opod si Badla nga magadayao nang dunia.

Opod si Badla nga magandayao nang dunia.

Bailan, managunsáyao,

Bailan, managing director,

Bailan, managunlíguit.6

Bailan, take care.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

This means in Spanish: “Mansilátan has come down, has come down. Later [will come] Badla, who will preserve the earth. Bailanas, dance; bailanas, turn ye round about.” As soon as the invocation has concluded bailanas and non-bailanas, that is to say, all the people who have gathered, dance and cry out like disorderly persons, devour the hog, and end by getting drunk. Such is the conclusion and end of the demoniacal bucolic feast to the gods Mansilátan and Badla.

This means in Spanish: “Mansilátan has come down, has come down. Later will come Badla, who will take care of the earth. Bailanas, dance; bailanas, turn around.” As soon as the invocation is over, both bailanas and non-bailanas, meaning everyone who has gathered, dance and shout like wild folks, feast on the hog, and eventually get drunk. This is how the chaotic rural celebration for the gods Mansilátan and Badla wraps up.

And although these things are so, the Catholic apologist will not fail to comprehend the most important teachings which he could utilize as a confirmation of the most transcendental questions of our true religion. For leaving aside the action of the sacrifice and the ceremonies that accompany it, is there not some glimpse in that song, Miminsad, miminsad si Mansilátan, etc., although an imperfect one, of the dogmas of the plurality of persons in God, and of the creation and redemption of the world? Indeed, it is so, and more if one keep in mind the signification in which the Mandayas understand it, according to the ancient and constant oral tradition received from their ancestors. That tradition which [220]gives the true meaning to those verses has been taken down by Father Pastells from the mouth of many tigúlang or old men who have been converted to Christianity. It is as follows. Mansilátan, the principal god and father of Badla, descended from the heavens where he dwells in order to create the world. Afterward his only son Badla came down also to preserve and protect the world—that is men and things—against the power and trickery of the evil spirits, Pudaúgnon and Malímbung, the latter a woman and the former a man, who are trying by continual artifices to harm and injure them. Those evil spirits did not obtain nor will they ever obtain their most evil intents to destroy the earth and mankind, for they are under the power and protection of the powerful and invisible god Badla. Consequently, and in view of so great love and mercy on the part of the latter and because of so much goodness on the part of his father Mansilátan, the bailanas who are the priestesses of the same, can never do less than be joyful, and in the transports of their joy invite one another to dance and circle about their revered images as an act of reverence to so great benefactors. Also there is not wanting among the beliefs of the Mandayas one which gives, although in a confused and corrupted manner, the idea of the Holy Spirit, thereby completing the mystery of the holy Trinity. For they say that, from Mansilátan, the father of Badla his only son, also proceeds the god Búsao, who is nothing else than the omnipotent virtue of the former. This last is communicated to some men preeminent in valor and skill for their combats, so that it makes them strong and valiant above other men. Those privileged men who are animated by the spirit [221]of Búsao are called in the Mandaya language baganis, which means valiant.

And even though these things are true, the Catholic defender will certainly understand the most important teachings that he can use to support the fundamental questions of our genuine faith. Setting aside the actions of the sacrifice and the accompanying ceremonies, isn't there a glimpse in that song, Miminsad, miminsad si Mansilátan, etc., even if it's imperfect, of the doctrines of the plurality of persons in God, and of the world's creation and redemption? Indeed, there is, especially when one considers the meaning that the Mandayas associate with it, based on the ancient and lasting oral tradition passed down from their ancestors. That tradition which [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]provides the true meaning of those verses has been recorded by Father Pastells from conversations with many tigúlang or elders who have converted to Christianity. It goes as follows. Mansilátan, the main god and father of Badla, came down from the heavens where he resides to create the world. Later, his only son Badla also descended to preserve and protect the world—that is, humans and things—against the power and deception of the evil spirits, Pudaúgnon and Malímbung, the latter a woman and the former a man, who continuously attempt to harm and injure them. Those evil spirits did not achieve nor will they ever achieve their malicious intentions to destroy the earth and humanity, for they are under the power and protection of the mighty and invisible god Badla. Therefore, in light of such immense love and mercy from Badla, and because of so much goodness from his father Mansilátan, the bailanas, who are the priestesses, can only be joyful and, in their joy, invite each other to dance and circle around their revered images as an act of reverence for such great benefactors. Also, among the Mandaya beliefs, there is one that provides, albeit in a confused and corrupted way, an idea of the Holy Spirit, thus completing the mystery of the Holy Trinity. For they say that from Mansilátan, the father of Badla, his only son, also comes the god Búsao, who is nothing other than the omnipotent power of the former. This last is bestowed upon certain men distinguished for their courage and skill in battle, making them stronger and braver than others. Those favored men who are inspired by the spirit [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]of Búsao are called baganis in the Mandaya language, which means valiant.

And now I desire to call your Reverence’s attention to those two spirits, Pudaúgnon and Malímbung, of whom I made mention above. Does it not seem to you, Father Superior, that they are an image, although disfigured, of that malign spirit and chief of all tempters, Lucifer, who caused Eve to fall by his lies and deceit, and by means of the latter, conquered and overthrew Adam, from which originated the ruin of all the human race and the innumerable ills that inundate the earth? It is quite apparent that there is something in that, and that opinion does not seem ill founded if we consider the etymology of the words Pudaúgnon and Malímbung, and the explanation which the Mandayas give of the said spirits. For, first, the word Pudaúgnon is derived from the root daug, which means “to conquer,” “to tempt,” and from the particles pu or pa, and non or on, which make the root a substantive adjective, and the resultant meaning is, if the person is a man, as in this case, “he who tempts” or “the tempter.” So also Malímbung is composed of the root límbung, which means “to deceive,” and the particle ma which makes it a substantive adjective. Thus it means, the subject being a woman, “she who deceives” or “the deceiver.” The Mandayas say, then, of those evil spirits that Pudaúgnon, the wicked and mortal enemy of mankind, strong as a man (which he is) and powerful as a spirit, pursues, attacks, and injures poor mortals as much as he is allowed; and that Malímbung, cunning and artful as a wicked woman, and endowed with an irresistible force of seduction like a spirit (which she is also) seduces by [222]her deceits, and causes the strongest men, who do not guard against her wiles, to fall. In this woman, is there not a picture of Eve, the unhappy Eve, possessed for her sin, by the spirit of her tempter Lucifer, seduced and seductive, with whose golden cords, Adam, the most lofty cedar of Lebanon in this world, was bound and was dashed into the deepest depths of evil?7

And now I want to bring your attention to those two spirits, Pudaúgnon and Malímbung, that I mentioned earlier. Don’t you think, Father Superior, that they represent, albeit in a twisted way, that evil spirit and the master of all tempters, Lucifer, who led Eve to her downfall through lies and deceit, and through these means defeated Adam, resulting in the downfall of all humanity and the countless troubles that plague the earth? It’s quite clear that there’s truth in this, and the opinion seems justified when we consider the origins of the words Pudaúgnon and Malímbung, along with the explanations provided by the Mandayas about these spirits. First, the word Pudaúgnon comes from the root daug, meaning “to conquer” or “to tempt,” and the particles pu or pa, and non or on, which turn the root into a descriptive noun; thus, it means, when referring to a man as in this case, “he who tempts” or “the tempter.” Similarly, Malímbung is formed from the root límbung, which means “to deceive,” and the particle ma that makes it a descriptive noun. Therefore, when the subject is a woman, it means “she who deceives” or “the deceiver.” The Mandayas say that these evil spirits include Pudaoñon, the wicked and mortal enemy of humanity, strong like a man (which he is) and powerful as a spirit, who chases, attacks, and harms poor mortals as much as he can; and that Malímbung, cunning and crafty like a wicked woman, and possessing an irresistible seductive power as a spirit (which she also is), entices through her deceptions, causing even the strongest men, who are unaware of her tricks, to fall. In this woman, is there not a reflection of Eve, the unfortunate Eve, who, for her sin, was possessed by the spirit of her tempter Lucifer, seductive and seductive, with whose golden chains, Adam, the greatest cedar of Lebanon in this world, was bound and plunged into the deepest depths of evil?7

But let us return to those three bailanas of whom I spoke above, and who have given rise to this digression. One of them, an old woman, indeed very old, since she was about seventy years old, at the exhortation of Father Pastells to become a Christian and abandon the foolishness of the Mandayas, which are no other than the deceits of the devil, became possessed or rather seemed to become possessed with that bailan spirit of which I spoke above, and began to tremble from head to foot. Did that knavish bailan divinity know beforehand what was about to happen to him, and that he had to leave the house in which he had lived for so long a time? But his apparent possession of the foolish old woman, and the trembling of her body did not last long, when he saw and heard the derisive guffaws of laughter from all the Christians who were present. Ah! this was without doubt the reason which made that invisible spirit, in shame at having been so illtreated by the fathers and by the Christians present, hasten to issue forth, and escape with all speed toward hell, [223]or to the body of another bailana of the mountain who would treat him better. Finally the poor old woman, like her associates in the profession, surrendered to the exhortations of the father, or rather, to the grace of the Holy Spirit, and they consented to receive holy baptism. How beautiful and how consoling it was to hear from those lips which had invoked more than a thousand times perhaps, the infernal spirits hidden under the names of Mansilátan, Badla, Búsao, Tagabánua, etc., respond affirmatively and with deep conviction of spirit to the following questions of Father Pastells. “Do you believe,” he asked each one, “all that God has revealed and what the holy Catholic Church teaches us?” “Yes, I believe.” “Do you renounce the beliefs of the Mandayas, and all their lies and works of iniquity?” “Yes, I renounce.” “Do you give your heart wholly and without reserve to God, the Creator of heaven and earth, and to Jesus Christ his only son, the Redeemer of the world?” “Yes, in truth, I do give it entirely.” “Do you desire in good faith to receive holy baptism?” “I wish it right gladly.” After that so express profession of faith, the three bailanas, together with the other baptized adults, were fittingly instructed in the mysteries of our holy religion and in their duties as Christians. Then, according to the custom introduced by our fathers, they were stript of the garments of their heathenism, and they were clothed in the garments of the Christians, which were lent for the occasion, as the new clothes which were given to them as a present were not yet made; and holy baptism was conferred on them to the great joy of all.

But let's go back to those three bailanas I mentioned earlier, who led to this little digression. One of them, an old woman—very old, around seventy—was encouraged by Father Pastells to become a Christian and leave behind the foolish beliefs of the Mandayas, which are just the devil's deceptions. She seemed to become possessed by that bailan spirit I talked about before and started trembling all over. Did that tricky bailan spirit know in advance what was about to happen and that he had to leave the home where he had lived for so long? However, her apparent possession and trembling didn’t last long once he heard the mocking laughter of all the Christians who were present. Ah! This was undoubtedly why that invisible spirit, ashamed of being mistreated by the fathers and the Christians there, hurried to leave and flee toward hell, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] or find the body of another bailana in the mountains who would treat him better. Eventually, the poor old woman, like her fellow practitioners, gave in to the father’s encouragement, or rather, to the grace of the Holy Spirit, and they agreed to receive holy baptism. It was beautiful and uplifting to hear from those lips, which had perhaps called upon infernal spirits more than a thousand times—under names like Mansilátan, Badla, Búsao, Tagabánua, etc.—respond with firm conviction to Father Pastells' questions: “Do you believe,” he asked each of them, “everything that God has revealed and what the holy Catholic Church teaches us?” “Yes, I believe.” “Do you renounce the beliefs of the Mandayas, along with all their lies and evil deeds?” “Yes, I renounce.” “Do you give your heart completely and without reserve to God, the Creator of heaven and earth, and to Jesus Christ, His only son, the Redeemer of the world?” “Yes, indeed, I give it entirely.” “Do you sincerely wish to receive holy baptism?” “I want it very much.” After that clear profession of faith, the three bailanas, along with the other baptized adults, were properly instructed in the mysteries of our holy religion and their duties as Christians. Then, following the custom established by our fathers, they were stripped of their heathen garments and dressed in Christian clothing, which was borrowed for the occasion since the new clothes given to them as gifts weren’t ready yet; and they received holy baptism to the great joy of everyone.

On the thirteenth of the same month of December, [224]when we had concluded our occupation in the holy faith, we returned to Caraga, postponing for a later time, although we regretted it keenly, the visit to the small villages near Manurígao and San Luis; for we were compelled to return as I had not yet performed the holy exercises of the year, and it was near the feast of the nativity of our Lord Jesus Christ.

On the thirteenth of December, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]after we finished our mission in the holy faith, we went back to Caraga, putting off the visit to the small villages near Manurígao and San Luis for later, even though we felt bad about it. We had to return because I still hadn’t done the annual religious exercises, and the feast of the birth of our Lord Jesus Christ was approaching.

That fine feast came, and I saw for the first time how the good inhabitants of Caraga celebrated it. I noted no rich jewels and refined music in the church. All was simplicity and poverty, like a new parish recently separated from its metropolitan, and given over to its own life with few resources, in a most wretched country. Neither did I observe in the village anything of that excessive luxury, and the annoying diversions with which in other parts, the Christians of divided heart try falsely to honor God. Caraga, in spite of its antiquity of two centuries, with its excellent lands, and its established reputation of producing excellent cacao, coffee,8 and [225]tobacco, is a small, poor, and simple village. The chief causes of that are that it has been deserted by several old families who have settled in the small villages recently established, and although it has increased somewhat with the new Christians, who have been converted from the beliefs of the Mandayas, the latter are as a rule, both simple and indolent and but little accustomed to work, and they need rather to be aided, instead of being able to give aid to the others. But the reason which has had, and has, most influence in the above is their isolation which is caused by the very poor sea and land communication which make that region the most remote and forgotten one of these islands and (if I may use the word), as it were, the finis terræ.9 Hence, it receives but little life from without, and is forced to live on its narrow resources and few means of subsistence.

That great feast arrived, and I saw for the first time how the good people of Caraga celebrated it. I noticed there were no rich jewels or fancy music in the church. Everything was simple and lacking, like a new parish just separated from its main church, trying to manage with limited resources in a very poor area. I didn’t see any of the excessive luxury or annoying distractions that people in other places use to falsely honor God. Caraga, despite being around for two centuries, with its great land and solid reputation for producing quality cacao, coffee, 8 and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] tobacco, is a small, poor, and simple village. The main reasons for this are that it has been abandoned by several old families who moved to new, smaller villages, and while it has seen some growth with the new Christians converted from Mandaya beliefs, these individuals tend to be simple and lazy, not used to working hard; they need support rather than being in a position to help others. However, the biggest factor affecting all of this is their isolation caused by the very poor sea and land connections, which make this region the most remote and overlooked part of these islands, if I may say so, almost the finis terræ.9 As a result, it receives very little external life and is forced to survive on its limited resources and few means of subsistence.

Consequently, wholly and precisely for the above reasons, its method of existence and of celebrating its feasts has, I know not what, which attracts and satisfies. This is born of the characteristic simplicity and open and jovial nature of these people of Caraga, from the fraternal union with which all, both great and small, those who have something and those who have nothing, unite to take part in the feasts and common joy, and finally from the expansive communication, without an admixture of any sort of fear, which they have with the father missionaries whom they regard and love as their dear fathers.

As a result, for all the reasons mentioned above, the way they live and celebrate their festivals has an indescribable charm that attracts and fulfills. This comes from the genuine simplicity and friendly, cheerful nature of the people of Caraga, who all come together—regardless of their social status, whether rich or poor—to join in the celebrations and share in the joy. Additionally, it stems from the open, fearless communication they have with the missionary fathers, whom they hold dear and love like their own fathers.

And now you shall see, Father Superior, the religious ceremonies with which we managed to honor [226]the birth of our Blessing, Jesus. As a preparation for the feast [of Christmas] the [feast of the] expectation of the delivery of our Lady was celebrated one week beforehand, and a daily mass of the Queen [i.e., of the Virgin] which a moderate number of persons attended. On the last day or the vigil of the feast, a pleasing, although simple Belen10 was made at one side of the presbytery in which were placed the images of the Child, Mary, and Joseph. Christmas eve came, and at eleven o’clock the bells were rung loudly, and from half past eleven until twelve, a continual ringing of bells two at a time announced to the people that the mass called Gallo11 was to be celebrated in memory of that holy hour in which the eternal Son of God the Father, made man in the most pure entrails of the Virgin Mary willed to be born on that poor and abandoned manger threshold [portal de Belen]. Hence when twelve o’clock had struck, the missa-cantata12 was said, which was followed by the adoration of the holy Child. That was made enjoyable by the singing of some fine Christmas carols. The twenty-fifth dawned bright and joyful. At eight o’clock in the morning solemn mass13 was celebrated, which was chanted according to custom by the choir of singers of the [227]church, with the accompaniment of two flutes and a tambourine. About one hundred persons took communion at it. There was a sermon, and at the end of the mass, there was another adoration of the Child Jesus. At the end of the function, the authorities and chiefs of the village came to visit us as they are wont to do during all the great feasts of the year. After that the musicians and singers congratulated us for the good Christmas from the hall of the convent, with toccatas according to the custom of this country, and Christmas carols. After them followed a crowd of people of all classes. What arrested my attention most was the liberty with which they went up and down stairs, hither and thither, and addressed the fathers and begged for what they needed. I will say it: the convent appeared nothing more nor less than a Casa-Pairal.14 Since the ceremonies of the morning were so long, nothing was done in the afternoon except to have the adoration of the holy Child, a thing which those excellent and simple people enjoy greatly and never tire of doing. With that the feast of the nativity of our Lord ended.

And now you will see, Father Superior, the religious ceremonies with which we honored [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]the birth of our Blessing, Jesus. To prepare for the feast [of Christmas], we celebrated the [feast of the] expectation of our Lady's delivery one week prior, along with a daily mass for the Queen [i.e., of the Virgin] that a modest number of people attended. On the last day, or the vigil of the feast, a charming but simple Belen10 was set up on one side of the presbytery with the images of the Child, Mary, and Joseph. Christmas Eve arrived, and at eleven o’clock, the bells rang loudly. From half past eleven until twelve, continuous ringing of bells announced to the people that the mass called Gallo11 was to be held in remembrance of that sacred hour when the eternal Son of God the Father, made man in the purest womb of the Virgin Mary, chose to be born in that humble, abandoned manger [portal de Belen]. When the clock struck twelve, the missa-cantata12 was celebrated, followed by the adoration of the holy Child, which was made enjoyable by the singing of beautiful Christmas carols. The twenty-fifth dawned bright and joyful. At eight o’clock in the morning, a solemn mass13 was celebrated, chanted by the choir of singers from [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]church, accompanied by two flutes and a tambourine. About one hundred people received communion. There was a sermon, and after the mass, another adoration of the Child Jesus took place. At the end of the service, the village authorities and leaders came to visit us, as they always do during the major feasts of the year. After that, the musicians and singers congratulated us on the joyous Christmas from the convent hall, performing toccatas in the local style and Christmas carols. Following them was a crowd of people from all walks of life. What struck me the most was the freedom with which they moved around, going up and down stairs, addressing the fathers, and asking for what they needed. I must say, the convent resembled nothing more than a Casa-Pairal.14 Since the morning ceremonies took so long, nothing else happened in the afternoon except for the adoration of the holy Child, something that those wonderful and simple people greatly enjoy and never tire of. With that, the celebration of the nativity of our Lord came to an end.

Father Pastells and I passed that feast excellently, as also those of the new year and twelfth night. So far as I am concerned, the three days exercise for the renewal of the holy vows which I made on the last named day, according to the custom of the Society, contributed much to it. One thing only was lacking to us in order to complete in some manner the joy of Christmas, namely, the traditional nougat which had not reached us from Surigao. But the good Jesus did not neglect to have it reach us, although late, in order that we might be regaled with it on His [228]glorious day of the feast of the Resurrection. May He be forever blessed and may He give us His holy grace in order that we may love and serve Him until death, et ultra.15

Father Pastells and I enjoyed that feast wonderfully, along with the celebrations for the New Year and Twelfth Night. As for me, the three days dedicated to renewing the holy vows I took on Twelfth Night, following the Society's tradition, played a big part in this. The only thing we missed to fully complete our Christmas joy was the traditional nougat that hadn't arrived from Surigao. But good Jesus made sure it arrived, albeit late, so we could enjoy it on His [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] glorious day of the Resurrection. May He be forever blessed, and may He grant us His holy grace so that we may love and serve Him until death, et ultra.15

We two fathers stayed here in Caraga until Ash Wednesday. After that we undertook the second journey of which I spoke at the beginning of my letter. But, since I see that this letter is growing too long, I shall keep the relation of the events of that journey for another letter, which I shall endeavor to send by next post.

We two fathers stayed here in Caraga until Ash Wednesday. After that, we started the second journey I mentioned at the beginning of my letter. However, since I notice this letter is getting too long, I’ll save the details of that journey for another letter, which I’ll try to send in the next post.

I commend myself to the holy prayers and sacrifices of your Reverence.

I commend myself to your holy prayers and sacrifices.

Your servant in Christ,

Your servant in Christ,

Pedro Rosell, S. J. [229]

Pedro Rosell, S.J. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]


1 Pedro Rosell, S. J., was born at Lérida September 4, 1849, and entered his novitiate in the Society of Jesus, October 2, 1878, being already a priest. He went to the Philippines in 1880, and died in Caraga, January 4, 1888. See Sommervogel’s Bibliothèque.

1 Pedro Rosell, S. J., was born in Lérida on September 4, 1849, and started his novitiate in the Society of Jesus on October 2, 1878, while already a priest. He arrived in the Philippines in 1880 and passed away in Caraga on January 4, 1888. See Sommervogel’s Bibliothèque.

2 This mission belongs to the district of Misámis.

2 This mission is part of the Misámis district.

3 i.e., From my inmost heart.

3 i.e., From my deepest heart.

4 i.e., We have labored in vain.

4 i.e., We have worked hard for nothing.

5 The bayog (Pterospermum hastatum) is often found along the Batangas beach and in other places. Oars are made of the wood which is soft and light. See Blanco, pp. 367, 368.

5 The bayog (Pterospermum hastatum) is frequently found along the Batangas beach and in other locations. Oars are made from this wood, which is soft and lightweight. See Blanco, pp. 367, 368.

6 See citation of these verses and brief description of the sacrifice by Pablo Pastells, in VOL. XII, p. 270, note 83.

6 See the citation of these verses and a brief description of the sacrifice by Pablo Pastells, in VOL. 12, p. 270, note 83.

7 It is difficult to believe that this eloquent passage was written so recently as 1885. It furnishes a striking proof of the medievalism of thought that persevered even among the Jesuits—a medievalism that is not yet, unfortunately, entirely eliminated from the Christian sects, both Catholic and Protestant. This same thought prevails throughout the document.

7 It’s hard to believe that this articulate passage was written as recently as 1885. It provides a clear example of the persistent medieval mindset that continued even among the Jesuits—a mindset that, unfortunately, is still not completely gone from Christian groups, both Catholic and Protestant. This same way of thinking runs throughout the document.

8 The coffee of the Philippines has a fine aroma and excellent flavor, and will compare favorably with either Java or Mocha coffee. It is said to have been brought to the islands by Spanish missionaries during the latter part of the eighteenth century and its systematic cultivation to have commenced early in the nineteenth century, although it was neglected considerably and did not in consequence attain the advanced state to which it should have attained. It was first cultivated in the province of Laguna, and subsequently in other provinces, notably Batangas and Cavite, coffee becoming quite an extensive industry. Most of the coffee was produced in the provinces named and in Tayabas, in Luzón and in Misamis and the district of Cottabatto, in Mindanao, though appreciable quantities were grown in other provinces. The highest grades of the berry were grown in Batangas Province and the most inferior in Mindanao. In 1890 and for several preceding years coffee ranked fourth in exports, falling not far short of tobacco. See Census of Philippines, iv, pp. 76–78; and Official Handbook, pp. 106, 107.

8 The coffee from the Philippines has a wonderful aroma and great flavor, and it stands up well against both Java and Mocha coffee. It’s believed that Spanish missionaries introduced coffee to the islands in the late eighteenth century, with systematic cultivation starting in the early nineteenth century. However, it was largely neglected, so it didn’t reach the level of advancement it could have. It was first grown in Laguna province and later spread to other provinces, especially Batangas and Cavite, becoming a significant industry. Most of the coffee was produced in these provinces, as well as in Tayabas in Luzón and in Misamis and the Cottabato district in Mindanao, although decent amounts were also cultivated in other provinces. The best quality beans came from Batangas Province, while lower quality ones were found in Mindanao. By 1890 and for several years prior, coffee was the fourth largest export, closely following tobacco. See Census of Philippines, iv, pp. 76–78; and Official Handbook, pp. 106, 107.

9 i.e., The end of the earth.

9 i.e., The edge of the world.

10 Beléno: Birth, in the sense of representing that of our Lord Jesus Christ (Echegaray’s Diccionario etimológico). Hence it was the representation of a manger.

10 Beléno: Birth, in the context of symbolizing the birth of our Lord Jesus Christ (Echegaray’s Diccionario etimológico). Therefore, it represented a manger.

11 Literally the “mass of the cock;” the mass that is said at midnight on Christmas Eve, and hence equivalent to midnight mass.

11 Literally the “mass of the rooster;” the service that takes place at midnight on Christmas Eve, and therefore known as midnight mass.

12 This mass is also called media. It is a mass sung, but without deacon and sub-deacon and the ceremonies proper to High Mass. In some American dioceses the use of incense is permitted at such masses. See Addis and Arnold’s Catholic Dictionary, p. 565.

12 This mass is also known as media. It's a mass that is sung, but without a deacon and sub-deacon, and the ceremonies typical of a High Mass. In some American dioceses, the use of incense is allowed at these masses. See Addis and Arnold’s Catholic Dictionary, p. 565.

13 Or Missa solemnis, the high mass. See Addis and Arnold’s Catholic Dictionary, p. 565.

13 Or Missa solemnis, the high mass. See Addis and Arnold’s Catholic Dictionary, p. 565.

14 Possibly a “house with festal decorations.”

14 Maybe a “house with party decorations.”

15 i.e., And beyond.

15 i.e., and beyond.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Letters from Father Mateo Gisbert to the Reverend Fathers and Brothers of Veruela

Pax Christi.

Peace of Christ.

My most beloved Fathers and Brothers in Christ:

My dear Fathers and Brothers in Christ:

Now I have to answer your fine letter, by telling you something of these missions, which I do not doubt will interest you greatly. In this and in the other letters which I plan to write you, I shall limit myself to mentioning things which I have either seen myself or have heard from eyewitnesses.

Now I need to respond to your wonderful letter by sharing some details about these missions that I’m sure will interest you a lot. In this letter and the others I plan to write you, I will only mention things I’ve either witnessed myself or have heard from people who saw them firsthand.

The matter of the Carolinas1 has alarmed us a [230]trifle hereabout; for as those islands are so near these coasts, and these peoples are so fearful, Christians and heathens have more than once believed themselves enslaved by the Germans. Even yet they do not have all the confidence that would be advisable to make them settle down and quietly build their villages; for any evil information although without foundation and improbable is enough to make them take to the mountains. The reverend father superior of the mission sent us some Spanish banners from Manila for the reductions of these coasts, and we told them all that if they flung the Spanish banners, although a foreign boat should approach, they ought not to fear anything.

The situation in the Carolinas has raised some concerns around here; since those islands are so close to our shores, and people here are quite anxious, both Christians and non-Christians have often felt threatened by the Germans. Even now, they don’t have enough trust to settle down and peacefully build their villages; any bad news, even if it's unfounded or unlikely, is enough to drive them to the mountains. The reverend father in charge of the mission sent us some Spanish flags from Manila for the communities along these coasts, and we told everyone that if they raised the Spanish flags, even if a foreign boat came near, they shouldn't be afraid of anything.

Map of the Coraline Islands; photographic facsimile of map in Lettres édifantes (Paris, 1728)

Map of the Coraline Islands; photographic facsimile of map in Lettres édifantes (Paris, 1728)

Map of the Coraline Islands; photographic copy of the map in Lettres édifantes (Paris, 1728)

[From copy in library of Harvard University]

[From copy in library of Harvard University]

You must already have had news of the numerous races of heathens that people the mission of Dávao. The heathens nearest to this capital are the Guiangas, who are scattered among the rivers and rancherías of Dulían; Guimálan, Tamúgan, Ceril, and Biao, and number in all six thousand four hundred souls. They talk a language difficult to understand, for it does not resemble the languages of other races. Those heathens sow rice, maize, sweet potatoes, bananas, and sugarcane. In addition they gather a considerable quantity of wax in their forests. There are some excellent smiths among them, and in general they reveal a sufficient amount of intelligence. But since they are still in a savage state, they commit many acts of barbarism, among which are human sacrifices. As yet they have not heard a father missionary who can talk to them in their language, [233]and only a few of those who come to Dávao have been baptized. I have had something to do at times with the nearest who understand and talk the language of the Bagobos, their neighbors. This very week I am to visit those of the Malá River where there are some Christians and catechumens who are constructing a chapel for me when I go.

You must have heard about the many groups of non-believers that inhabit the mission in Dávao. The closest ones to this capital are the Guiangas, who are spread out among the rivers and settlements of Dulían; Guimálan, Tamúgan, Ceril, and Biao, totaling six thousand four hundred individuals. They speak a language that's hard to understand because it doesn’t resemble those of other groups. These people farm rice, corn, sweet potatoes, bananas, and sugarcane. They also collect a good amount of wax from their forests. Some of them are excellent blacksmiths, and generally, they show a decent level of intelligence. However, since they are still in a primitive stage, they engage in many barbaric acts, including human sacrifices. They have not yet encountered a missionary who can speak their language, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]and only a few of those who come to Dávao have been baptized. I have occasionally interacted with those nearest to me who understand and speak the language of the Bagobos, their neighbors. This week, I plan to visit those by the Malá River where there are some Christians and catechumens building a chapel for my arrival.

The Bagobos are another race of heathens, who, occupying the folds of the volcano of Apo,2 extend along the southwest part of Dávao between the Taomo and Bolotúcan rivers. They number approximately ten or twelve thousand souls. About eight hundred have as yet been reduced, and only about four hundred have been baptized in the new reductions of Santa Cruz, Astorga, Daliao, Bagó, and Taomo. The Bagobos differ scarcely from the Guiangas, except in the language that is peculiar to the latter. They are reported, nevertheless, to be great sacrificers [of human flesh], and are very much set in the customs of their ancestors. They have two feasts annually: one before the sowing of the rice, and the other after its harvest. This last is of an innocent enough character and is called the feast of women. At that feast all the people gather at the house of their chief or the master of the feast, at the decline of the afternoon. That day they feast like nobles, and drink until it is finished the sugarcane wine which has been prepared for that purpose. There is music, singing, and dancing almost all the night, and the party breaks up at dawn of the following [234]day. The feast which they hold before the sowing is a criminal and repugnant trago-comedy. The tragical part is the first thing that is done. When they have assembled in the middle of the woods, after taking all the precautions necessary, so that the matter may not reach the ears of the authority of the district or of the father missionary, they tightly bind the slave whom they are going to sacrifice. When once assured that they will not be discovered, all armed with sharp knives, they leap and jump about the victim striking him one after the other, or several at one time amid infernal cries and shouts, until the body of the victim sacrificed has been cut into bits. From the place of the sacrifice they then go to the house of their chief or the master of the feast, holding branches in their hands which they place in a large bamboo, which is not only the chief adornment but the altar of the house in which they meet. Here comes the comical part, for like one who has done nothing, they all eat and drink, and some of the most joyful play on musical instruments, and dance. The principal part is reserved for the old man or master of the feast. He standing near the bamboo which I have mentioned above, holding the vessel of wine in his hand, and talking with his comrades, addresses the great demon called Daragó, whose feast they are celebrating, in the following words: “Daragó, we are making you this feast, with great good will and gladness, offering you the blood of the sacrifice which we have made and this wine which we drink so that you may be our friend, accompany us, and be propitious in our wars.” Afterward and as a continuation of what I have said, he begins a kind of litany in which all the [235]most celebrated Daragós whom they know or believe that they know, and whose names are repeated by all at the same time, enter.

The Bagobos are another group of non-believers, who live on the slopes of Mount Apo, extending through the southwest part of Davao between the Taomo and Bolotúcan rivers. Their population is around ten to twelve thousand people. About eight hundred have been converted, and only around four hundred have been baptized in the new settlements of Santa Cruz, Astorga, Daliao, Bagó, and Taomo. The Bagobos are very similar to the Guiangas, except for the unique language spoken by the latter. However, they are known to be heavy sacrificers [of human flesh] and are very traditional in their customs. They have two annual feasts: one before planting rice and the other after the harvest. The latter is quite innocent and is called the feast of women. During this feast, everyone gathers at the home of their chief or the master of the feast in the late afternoon. They celebrate like nobility and drink as much sugarcane wine as has been prepared for the occasion. There is music, singing, and dancing throughout the night, and the celebration ends at dawn the next day. The pre-planting feast, on the other hand, is a grim and gruesome spectacle. The tragic part happens first. Once assembled in the woods and after taking necessary precautions to avoid being discovered by the district authority or the missionary, they tightly bind the slave meant for sacrifice. Once they’re sure they won’t be caught, armed with sharp knives, they leap and dance around the victim, striking him one after the other or all at once amid horrifying screams until the victim's body is dismembered. From the sacrifice site, they proceed to the house of their chief or the master of the feast, carrying branches which they place in a large bamboo structure that serves as both decoration and the altar of the gathering place. Now comes the humorous part, as they eat and drink as if nothing has happened, with some of the happiest performers playing music and dancing. The main event is led by the elder or master of the feast. Standing by the mentioned bamboo, holding a vessel of wine, he addresses the great demon known as Daragó, to whom the feast is dedicated, saying: “Daragó, we are holding this feast for you, with great goodwill and joy, offering you the blood of our sacrifice and this wine we drink so that you may be our ally, accompany us, and favor us in our battles.” Following that, he begins a sort of chant where they call out the names of the most famous Daragós they know or believe to know, and everyone repeats these names together.

The Bagobos recognize two beginnings: and say that they have each two souls. God, or Tiquiama is very good they say and has created all things, although he has been aided by other small gods who are under his orders: such as Mamale, who made the earth; Macacóret, the air; Domacólen, the mountains; and Macaponguis, the water. Of the two souls, one goes to heaven and the other to hell. For they believe that both in this life and in the other, they belong to the devil, to whom they concede the same rights and almost the same power as to God, only with the difference that the devil is very bad, and fond of blood, and the beginning of all evil and confusion. On that account, quite neglectful of God, the being whom they serve and adore in all things is the devil. When they marry, if the lovers think that it will be of any use, they make a human sacrifice so that they may have a good marriage, so that the weather may be good, so that they may have no storm, sickness, etc.: all, things which they attribute to the devil. In the same way also when they learn that there is any contagious disease, or fear death, several of them assemble and make a human sacrifice, asking the devil to let them live, since they generously offer him that victim. They also believe that the disease can be conjured. But the time that it appears that it is necessary to make a sacrifice according to the law of the Bagobos is at the death of any one of the family, before they can remove the laláoan or mourning. In that case the sacrifice announced among them as a feria or a pilgrimage is [236]usually announced among the Christians. At the point and on the day assigned, all the sacrificers assemble, or possibly one member of each of the families who are in mourning, at times fifty or more. The value of the slave sacrificed is paid among them all, and he who pays most has the right to sacrifice first. The victims cry out at such times as long as they can and ask pity of all; but instead of pitying them, they drown the pitiful cries with the most horrible and terrifying shouts that can be imagined. If they perform the sacrifice near the Christians, then they strike without any shouts, and even gag the mouth of the victim.

The Bagobos recognize two beginnings and believe that each person has two souls. They say that God, or Tiquiama, is very good and has created everything, although other lesser gods help him. These include Mamale, who made the earth; Macacóret, the air; Domacólen, the mountains; and Macaponguis, the water. Of the two souls, one goes to heaven and the other to hell. They believe that in this life and the next, they are under the influence of the devil, whom they grant nearly the same rights and power as God, with the key difference being that the devil is evil, bloodthirsty, and the source of all wrongdoing and chaos. Because of this, they often overlook God and ultimately serve and worship the devil in all things. When they marry, if the couple thinks it will help, they perform a human sacrifice to ensure a good marriage, fair weather, and protection from storms, sickness, etc.—all of which they attribute to the devil. Similarly, when they hear about a contagious disease or fear death, some gather to make a human sacrifice, asking the devil to spare their lives in exchange for that offering. They also believe that diseases can be driven away. However, a sacrifice is most critical when a family member dies, as they must perform it before they can remove the jaláoan or mourning. This sacrifice is often announced like a festival or pilgrimage, and it’s usually communicated among nearby Christians. On the designated day, all the participants gather, possibly one member from each mourning family, sometimes fifty or more. They share the cost of the sacrificed person, and the one who pays the most gets to be the first to offer the sacrifice. The victims cry out as long as they can, pleading for mercy, but instead of showing compassion, the participants drown their cries with the loudest, most terrifying shouts imaginable. If the sacrifice occurs near Christians, they do it silently, even gagging the victim's mouth.

But let us leave for another letter the relation of not less horrible barbarities. O Fathers and Brothers of my soul, pray for the conversion of these wretched beings, and do not be forgetful of me in your holy sacrifices and prayers.

But let's save for another letter the account of equally horrific atrocities. O Fathers and Brothers of my soul, please pray for the conversion of these miserable beings, and don't forget me in your holy sacrifices and prayers.

The servant in Christ of you all,

The servant of Christ for all of you,

Mateo Gisbert, S. J.

Mateo Gisbert, S.J.

My dearly beloved Fathers and Brothers in Christ:

My dear beloved Fathers and Brothers in Christ:

On reading the horrible sacrifices that I described in my last letter, you will have asked: “How has the father been able to learn so minutely the inhuman customs which the savages conceal so carefully in the midst of their forests?” Your Reverences will understand indeed that I have not been able to be present at those sacrifices, but they have been explained to me by the Bagobos, who, having been baptized, recount those and other barbarities of heathenism. I have learned it also from the mouth of some victims who, being at the very point of being [237]sacrificed, managed to escape by the aid and management of the father missionary.

On reading the terrible sacrifices that I described in my last letter, you may have wondered: “How has the father been able to learn so much about the brutal customs that the savages keep hidden deep in their forests?” You will understand that I haven’t been able to witness those sacrifices myself, but they have been explained to me by the Bagobos, who, after being baptized, share the details of those and other atrocities of paganism. I've also learned from some victims who, just as they were about to be [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]sacrificed, managed to escape with the help and guidance of the father missionary.

I am going to mention some of the customs of the Bagobos to you which must, I believe, arrest the attention because of their ridiculousness and superstition. When the Bagobos have an evil presentiment, for which it is enough for them to see a snake in the house, or that the jar breaks in the fire, etc., they hasten to their matánom, in order to have him conjure the misfortune by means of his great wisdom. The matánom, who preserves the customs and religions of their ancestors, makes a doll with his knife, giving it the face of a man, and then addressing God, says the following words: “O God, Thou Who hast created men and trees, and all things, do not deprive us of life, and receive in exchange this bit of wood, which has our face.” After that ceremony with or without the doll, they set in the water a small bag containing a little morisqueta or rice, to which they at times add a cock. By this means they think that they have rid themselves of the disease. When they are sick, they perform the diuata in their tambaro. That consists in a dish on top of a bamboo which is fixed in the ground, on which they place buyo, bonga, lime, and tobacco, while they say to their god: “We offer thee this. Give us health.” When they visit a sick person, they have the custom of placing copper rings on their wrists or on their legs, in order that the soul which they call limócod may not leave. When anyone dies, they never bury him without placing for him his share of rice to be eaten on the journey. When they harvest their rice or maize, they give the first fruits to the diuata, and do not eat them, or sell a grain without first having [238]made their hatchets, bolos, and other tools which they use in clearing their fields eat first. The song of the limócon is for them the message from God. It is of good or evil augury according to circumstances. Accordingly, when the limócon sings, every Bagobo stops and looks about him. If he sees for instance, a fallen tree, the limócon advises him not to advance farther for the fate of that tree awaits him, and he turns back. If he sees no particular thing which indicates or prognosticates any ill, he continues, for then the song of the limócon is good. Sneezing is always a bad omen for them, and accordingly if anyone sneezes by chance when they are about to set out on a journey, the departure is deferred until next day.

I'm going to talk about some of the customs of the Bagobos that I think will catch your attention because of their absurdity and superstition. When the Bagobos feel a sense of impending doom, which can happen if they see a snake in the house or if a jar breaks in the fire, they rush to their matánom to have him ward off the bad luck with his great wisdom. The matánom, who upholds the traditions and beliefs of their ancestors, carves a doll with a man's face and then addresses God, saying: “O God, You Who created men, trees, and all things, do not take our lives away, and accept this piece of wood that looks like us in its place.” After this ceremony, with or without the doll, they place a small bag containing a bit of morisqueta or rice in the water and sometimes add a rooster. They believe this will rid them of illness. When they are unwell, they perform the diuata in their tambaro. This consists of a dish placed on top of a bamboo that’s fixed in the ground, where they put buyo, bonga, lime, and tobacco, while saying to their god: “We offer you this. Grant us health.” When visiting a sick person, they have the custom of placing copper rings on their wrists or legs so that the soul, which they call limócod, doesn't leave. When someone dies, they never bury him without offering him his portion of rice for the journey. When they harvest rice or maize, they give the first fruits to the diuata and do not eat or sell any of it without first having [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] made their hatchets, bolos, and other tools eat first. The song of the limócon is considered a message from God, carrying either good or bad omens depending on the situation. Thus, when the limócon sings, every Bagobo stops and looks around. If they see, for example, a fallen tree, the limócon warns them not to go any further, as the fate of that tree might await them, and they turn back. If there are no specific signs predicting bad fortune, they will continue on, as the song of the limócon is then seen as favorable. Sneezing is always seen as a bad omen, so if someone sneezes just before they are about to leave on a journey, they postpone their departure until the next day.

There are not as a rule many thefts among the Bagobos, for they believe that the thief can be discovered easily by means of their famous bongat. That consists of two small joints of bamboo, which contain certain mysterious powders. He who has been robbed and wishes to determine the robber, takes a hen’s egg, makes a hole in it, puts a pinch of the abovesaid powder in it, and leaves it in the fire. If he wish the robber to die he has nothing else to do than to break the egg; but since the thief may sometimes be a relative or a beloved person the egg is not usually broken, so that there may be or may be able to be a remedy. For under all circumstances, when this operation is performed, if the robber lives, wherever he may be, he himself must inform on himself by crying out, “I am the thief; I am the thief;” as he is compelled to do (they say) by the sharp pain which he feels all through his body. When he is discovered, he may be cured by putting powder [239]from the other joint into the water and bathing his body with it. This practice is very common here among heathens and Moros. A Bagobo, named Anas, who was converted, gave me the bongat, with which he had frightened many people when a heathen.

There aren't usually many thefts among the Bagobos because they believe a thief can easily be found using their famous bongat. This consists of two small pieces of bamboo that hold certain mysterious powders. When someone has been robbed and wants to identify the thief, they take a hen's egg, poke a hole in it, add a pinch of the mentioned powder, and leave it in the fire. If they want the thief to die, they just need to break the egg; however, since the thief might be a relative or loved one, the egg typically isn’t broken to allow for a possible remedy. Under any circumstances, when this is done, if the thief is alive, they must reveal themselves by shouting, “I am the thief; I am the thief;” which they are said to do because of the intense pain they feel throughout their body. Once discovered, they can be healed by adding powder [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] from the other piece into water and bathing with it. This practice is very common among heathens and Moros. A Bagobo named Anas, who was converted, gave me the bongat, which he had used to scare many people when he was still a heathen.

This would be the place to write you some very interesting Bagobo stories and legends; but in order to be understood, I should have to precede it by a long preamble, for which I have no time at present; and hence I shall leave it for another time. I should like to tell you something about the other races of heathens whom we have in this mission. The Bilanes,3 are beyond doubt, the most industrious of all the heathens that inhabit these mountains. This race numbers approximately about twenty thousand souls, who are divided among a considerable number of rancherías between the Bulatúcan River and the bay of Sarangáni, and occupying the beautiful plains of the interior where they grow considerable rice. They have some of the customs of the Bagobos their neighbors, but their language which is very different separates them as does also the natural hostility that always arms the heathen savage against the savage, and one race against the other. The [240]Bilanes are very intelligent, and some who have been baptized, give good proof of themselves. But although it causes me the greatest pain to say it, as they are a race which deserves that we all interest ourselves in them, as they are very numerous, and capable of receiving the evangelical light and civilization, I must tell you that there is no reduction as yet among that race of heathens.

This would be the perfect spot to share some fascinating Bagobo stories and legends, but to truly convey them, I'd need to set the stage with a lengthy introduction, which I don’t have time for right now; so I’ll save it for another time. I’d like to tell you about other groups of indigenous people we have in this mission. The Bilanes, 3, are undoubtedly the hardest workers among all the indigenous people living in these mountains. This group consists of about twenty thousand individuals, spread across several communities between the Bulatúcan River and the bay of Sarangáni, occupying the beautiful plains where they cultivate a lot of rice. They share some customs with their Bagobo neighbors, but their very different language and the natural hostility that often exists between different groups keep them separate. The [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Bilanes are quite intelligent, and some who have been baptized show great promise. However, it pains me to say this, as they are a group that deserves our attention because they are numerous and capable of embracing enlightenment and civilization, but I must inform you that there is currently no effort to integrate this group of indigenous people.

Enough for today. Another time I shall speak of the Tagacaolos, Manobos, and Atás. Meanwhile, will you pray the sacred heart of Jesus for them all and for your most affectionate brother and servant in Christ.

Enough for today. Another time I'll talk about the Tagacaolos, Manobos, and Atás. In the meantime, will you pray to the sacred heart of Jesus for them all and for your most loving brother and servant in Christ?

Mateo Gisbert, S. J.

Mateo Gisbert, S.J.

My dearly beloved Fathers and Brothers in Christ:

My beloved Fathers and Brothers in Christ:

In order that you may all be encouraged more and more to aid us with your prayers in the great undertaking that we are engaged upon, I am going to mention, as I promised, a few of the customs of several races of this mission. The Tagacaolos belong to a numerous race of heathens, who inhabit the mountains of Culáman from Sarangani to Malálag. The whole mission contains approximately about twelve or fourteen thousand. Their language is easy to understand to him who knows Visayan. They are much divided among themselves and are continually at war, the weak being the slave of the stronger, and being frequently sold to the Moros. The Bagobos almost always supply themselves from this race for their human sacrifices. Do not believe, however, that they are a people inferior to those of other races. The Tagacaolos are lighter complexioned and more [241]docile than the other known heathens. They also have human sacrifices at times, but they easily abandon their barbarous customs.

To encourage all of you to keep supporting us with your prayers for the important work we're doing, I'm going to share, as I promised, some customs from different groups within this mission. The Tagacaolos are part of a large group of non-Christians who live in the mountains of Culáman, stretching from Sarangani to Malálag. The entire mission has about twelve or fourteen thousand people. Their language is easy to understand for anyone who knows Visayan. They are very divided among themselves and are constantly at war, with the weaker tribes becoming slaves to the stronger ones, and often sold to the Moros. The Bagobos frequently take people from this group for their human sacrifices. However, don’t think they are inferior to other groups. The Tagacaolos tend to have lighter skin and are more [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]gentle than other known non-Christians. They also perform human sacrifices occasionally but can easily give up these savage practices.

The Manobos4 are another numerous and savage race of heathens, who live along various points of the coast, from Malálag to Sarangani. These Manobos have little liking for work, and are warlike and valiant, being usually on the hunt for slaves. They possess firearms, which the Moros sell them in exchange for slaves. This is a misfortune which we regret, but which has no remedy, until with the progress of the reduction the action of authority may be more effectual. The Moros hereabout are a race of thieves, the most shameful that are known. They do not work and live ordinarily on the slave trade which they are always able to procure. I know some Moros in this mission who pass themselves off as friends, but are very evil. There is a pandita named Gúbat, who asserts that he likes me and respects me more than he does his own father, and comes into my presence as if he were the most friendly and obedient person in all the reductions of the coast, telling me always that he is going to collect what they owe him. As it will not take long, I shall recount one of [242]his evil deeds. Two years ago he went to Tubálan, where, uniting with Basíno, Alivao, Mínquil, Batuga, Joac, and Agbay, he went to a ranchería of Tagacaolos and enslaved them to the number of seven, namely, Bayó, Eloy, Salió, Arac, Agueda, Cáoy, and Dila, and brought them to the coast. There they were apportioned as slaves, after the one called Eloy had been knifed, because they feared that they would be exposed by him if opportunity offered. Along the Culáman coast, when they knife one or many, they generally set the head on a pole and keep them for days and months. With that object in view they cut off the head of Eloy, which Batuga carried, while the pandita Gúbat, my friend, carried an arm. But a short time ago, I have been able to rescue and baptize Bayó and Dila, and the latter’s wife and two daughters. From the last named, I learned the history which I have briefly recounted. It is a sample of many others which I could relate to you. Consequently, they are wont to make slaves here treacherously and by violence. Although these Manobos, as I have said, are savage and warlike, there are some rancherías of them, which, having been reduced by the father missionary, have abandoned their evil customs. In Piapi we have already one hundred and ninety baptized persons, almost all Manobos. Their language is somewhat difficult to understand, but one can conquer that difficulty by living among them for a short time. The number of Manobos in this mission is not less than one thousand two hundred.

The Manobos4 are another large and fierce group of people who live along various parts of the coast, from Malálag to Sarangani. These Manobos aren’t fond of work and are known for being warlike and brave, often hunting for slaves. They have firearms, which the Moros sell to them in exchange for slaves. This is a situation we regret, but there's no solution until authority can act more effectively as progress continues. The Moros in this area are a thieving race, the most disgraceful that exist. They don’t work and typically sustain themselves through the slave trade, which they can always access. I know some Moros in this mission who pretend to be friends but are actually quite treacherous. There’s a pandita named Gúbat who claims he likes me and respects me more than his own father, coming to me as if he were the most friendly and obedient person along the coast, always telling me that he is going to collect what they owe him. It won’t take long; I’ll recount one of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]his misdeeds. Two years ago, he went to Tubálan, where, teaming up with Basíno, Alivao, Mínquil, Batuga, Joac, and Agbay, he attacked a ranchería of Tagacaolos and enslaved seven of them: Bayó, Eloy, Salió, Arac, Agueda, Cáoy, and Dila, taking them to the coast. There, they were distributed as slaves after Eloy was knifed, as they feared he would expose them if given the chance. Along the Culáman coast, when they kill one or many, they typically put the head on a pole and leave it on display for days or even months. With that in mind, they decapitated Eloy, which Batuga carried, while my friend Gúbat carried an arm. Recently, I managed to rescue and baptize Bayó and Dila, along with Dila’s wife and two daughters. From them, I learned the story I’ve just summarized. It’s just one of many I could share with you. As a result, they often capture slaves here in a treacherous and violent manner. Although these Manobos, as I’ve mentioned, are savage and warlike, there are some groups among them that, having been converted by the missionary, have abandoned their evil ways. In Piapi, we already have one hundred and ninety baptized individuals, almost all of whom are Manobos. Their language is somewhat challenging to understand, but living among them for a short time can help overcome that difficulty. The number of Manobos in this mission is at least one thousand two hundred.

The Atás are another race of wild and savage heathens who live in the interior. Only the ranchería of Dato Lasiá, which is the nearest, has been [243]visited as yet. It is the least known race, but it is believed with foundation, to be the most numerous, aggregating not less than twenty-five thousand souls. They speak their own tongue. I have baptized a few Atás, by making myself understood in Visayan or Bagobo. On that day that the Atás hear a father missionary speak their language, I have no doubt of their conversion. The difficulty, even supposing that there were father missionaries who could give their work to the mission, will always be very great, because it is in the interior, through mountains, rivers, and woods remote from the coast, where there are no roads or any human aid. Nevertheless, one must pray for them, confident that God will open the way through His infinite mercy.

The Atás are another group of wild and untamed people who live in the interior. Only the Dato Lasiá settlement, which is the closest, has been [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]visited so far. They are the least known group, but it is believed with good reason that they are the most numerous, totaling at least twenty-five thousand individuals. They speak their own language. I have baptized a few Atás by managing to communicate in Visayan or Bagobo. The day the Atás hear a missionary speaking their language, I have no doubt they will convert. The challenge, even if there were missionaries available for the mission, will always be significant because it’s in the interior, through mountains, rivers, and dense woods far from the coast, where there are no roads or any human assistance. Still, we must pray for them, trusting that God will open the way through His infinite mercy.

In the island of Sámal I have also a Christian village, where the heathen Sámals are gradually becoming reduced and baptized. There are now some hundred and thirty-seven baptized.

In the island of Sámal, I have a Christian village where the non-Christian Sámals are gradually decreasing and being baptized. There are now about one hundred thirty-seven baptized individuals.

The other reductions in my care are all on the southern part of this coast, extending from Dávao to Malálag, inclusive. They are Malálag, Piapi, Dígos, Santa Cruz, Astorga, Daliao, Bagó, and Taumo. Among them all there are nine hundred who have been baptized. In general they follow the instructions of the father missionary docilely. Almost all of them possess their little homes on the suitable street, and many of them are beginning to cultivate cacao and other plants which are given to them here, and are highly esteemed. The majority of those baptized as yet in these reductions belong to the Tagacaolo and Bagobo races. Then follow successively the Manobos, Sámals, and Calágars. I shall also endeavor to open the door quite soon to the [244]Guiangas, Bilanes, and Atás. In order to begin, nevertheless, as is fitting, and to carry on this work, some father missionaries are needed, not only because of the great number of the heathens to be administered, but also because they talk several languages, and have habits and customs that differ considerably among themselves.

The other areas I oversee are all located along the southern coast, from Dávao to Malálag, including. They are Malálag, Piapi, Dígos, Santa Cruz, Astorga, Daliao, Bagó, and Taumo. Among them, there are nine hundred baptized individuals. Generally, they follow the instructions of the missionary father willingly. Almost all of them have their own homes on the main street, and many are starting to grow cacao and other valued plants supplied to them. Most of those baptized so far in these areas belong to the Tagacaolo and Bagobo groups. Following them are the Manobos, Sámals, and Calágars. I also plan to soon reach out to the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Guiangas, Bilanes, and Atás. However, to start this work properly and continue it, we need more missionary fathers, not only because of the large number of people to help, but also because they speak different languages and have diverse customs and traditions.

I conclude this letter by commending myself to the holy prayers and sacrifices of all the Fathers and Brothers of that holy house. From your most affectionate servant in Christ,

I end this letter by asking for your holy prayers and sacrifices, and those of all the Fathers and Brothers of that sacred place. From your most loving servant in Christ,

Mateo Gisbert, S. J.

Mateo Gisbert, S. J.

Pax Christi.
My dearly beloved Father Superior in Christ:5

Pax Christi.
My beloved Father Superior in Christ:5

I have just received your favor of the fourteenth inst. I am very glad that you have returned from your long journey without having experienced any misfortune. Welcome to the Fathers and Brothers of the new mission! A fraternal embrace to them all!

I just got your message from the 14th. I'm really happy that you made it back from your long trip safely. Welcome to the Fathers and Brothers of the new mission! Sending a brotherly hug to all of them!

I desired to write your Reverence a long letter, but since the post has found me alone, in Dávao, for Fathers Perelló and Moré have not returned from their excursion to Libuac, I shall not be able to write at great length, as I must attend to the other duties necessary here during the days for the steamboat. May God repay your Reverence for the charity which you extend me in the good news that you give me. What shall I tell you on this occasion? The circumstances of this mission offer me some material, especially the consideration of the condition [245]of the various races of heathens who inhabit it, and especially the race of the Bagobos. To what extremities do their ignorance and the malice of the common enemy reduce them! This latter, being the prince of darkness, rules them thoroughly, no longer by insinuating himself and presenting himself under the forms of apparent goodness, in order to take possession of their hearts and souls without intimidating them, acting as a seductive deceiver, but in the midst of the shadows of this heathenism, he does not fear to appear so frightfully horrible and cruel as he is in reality.

I wanted to write you a long letter, but since I’m alone here in Dávao, as Fathers Perelló and Moré haven’t returned from their trip to Libuac, I won’t be able to write at length. I have other responsibilities to take care of while waiting for the steamboat. May God reward you for the kindness you’ve shown me with the good news you shared. What should I say this time? The situation here gives me some topics to discuss, particularly regarding the state of the various tribes of people living here, especially the Bagobos. Their ignorance and the wickedness of our common enemy drive them to such extremes! This enemy, the prince of darkness, controls them completely, no longer pretending to be good to win their hearts and souls without scaring them. Instead, in the darkness of their paganism, he isn’t afraid to show himself in all his terrifying and cruel reality.

I have considered, at times, as did our holy Father, Ignacio, Satan on his throne of smoke and fire, with horrible and frightful face, in the great field of Babilonia, and this formula, which is feigned by means of the imagination to aid the understanding in consideration of the truth that it claims, is here a reality. What is it but that large field inhabited by so many heathen races, whose confusion of tongues forms the labyrinth of the mission in which we work! What signifies this volcanic mountain Apo, in which the great Mandarángan lives as in his throne of smoke and fire, as is believed and related by the Bagobos, who bathe themselves in the blood of thousands upon thousands of human victims! Is not this truly the field of Babilonia, where the prince of darkness reigns? And who can tell the years of his dominion here? The Bagobos of Sibúlan usually show their antiquity by the following genealogies. Mánip, the present dato, had for father Panguílan; Panguílan was the son of Taópan; Taópan, son of Maliadí; Maliadí, son of Banga; Banga, son of Lúmbay; Lúmbay, son of Basian; [246]Basian, son of Bóas; Bóas, son of Bató; Bató, son of Salingólop. They say that of all their ancestors, Salingólop was the most powerful, and his name was always preserved among all his descendants. Before him there were already Bagobos with the same customs as those of today, that is, they were heathens and slaves of the great Mandarángan or Satan, to whom it appears that they always sacrificed human victims. The father of Mánip was the dato of Sibúlan, who died a few months ago at a very old age (perhaps he was as much as a hundred), and whom they say had already attained to the condition of immortality, which was due to the matuga guinaua, or good heart of Mandarángan, because of the many victims that he had offered that being. It is said that when he was yet a youth, he sought a wife, but did not obtain her until he had cut off fifty human heads, as was attested by the hundred ears which he carried in a sack from the river Libagánon to Sibúlan. How many victims must that single Bagobo have offered up! Even after his death it was necessary to seal his sepulcher with the blood of human victims. For his son Mánip and his other relatives did not remove the mourning or lalaoan, as they call it, until after they had barbarously sacrificed seven slaves, according to the relation of Itang. That man fearing to be one of the victims, presented himself to the father missionary in order to place his temporal and eternal life in safety, and that was quickly done for he was baptized a while ago under the name of Juan.

I have thought at times, just like our holy Father, Ignacio, about Satan sitting on his throne of smoke and fire, with a terrifying and awful face, in the vast field of Babilonia. This idea, imagined to help understand the truth it conveys, is in fact a reality. What else can this massive field be, with so many different pagan races whose confusing languages create a maze for our mission work! What does this volcanic mountain Apo symbolize, where the great Mandarángan lives like on his throne of smoke and fire, as the Bagobos believe and tell, who bathe themselves in the blood of thousands of human sacrifices! Is this not truly the field of Babilonia, where the prince of darkness rules? And who knows how long he has reigned here? The Bagobos of Sibúlan often demonstrate their ancient lineage with these genealogies. Mánip, the current dato, had Panguílan as his father; Panguílan was the son of Taópan; Taópan, son of Maliadí; Maliadí, son of Banga; Banga, son of Lúmbay; Lúmbay, son of Basian; Basian, son of Bóas; Bóas, son of Bató; Bató, son of Salingólop. They claim that of all their ancestors, Salingólop was the most powerful, and his name has always been remembered by all his descendants. Before him, there were already Bagobos with the same customs as today; that is, they were pagans and slaves of the great Mandarángan or Satan, to whom they always sacrificed human victims. The father of Mánip was the dato of Sibúlan, who passed away a few months ago at a very old age (perhaps he was almost a hundred), and they say he had achieved immortality, thanks to the matuga guinaua, or good heart of Mandarángan, due to the countless victims he had offered to that being. It is said that when he was still young, he sought a wife but didn’t get one until he had taken fifty human heads, as evidenced by the hundred ears he brought in a sack from the Libagánon River to Sibúlan. How many victims must that one Bagobo have sacrificed! Even after his death, it was necessary to seal his tomb with the blood of human victims. His son Mánip and his other relatives did not end their mourning or lalaoan, as they call it, until they brutally sacrificed seven slaves, according to Itang's account. That man, fearing he might be one of the victims, approached the father missionary to secure both his temporal and eternal life, which was quickly done as he was baptized recently under the name of Juan.

Quite patent is the barbarity of these people and the complete dominion of the prince of darkness in the field of the Bagobo heathenism. But perhaps one will ask: “How can so paradoxical a barbarity [247]exist, since by sacrificing their slaves,6 those people lose slave and money? Leaving to one side even the inhumanity revealed by so barbarous a custom, only by not attacking so directly their own interests by depriving themselves of arms for their work, etc., it appears that they would have to refrain from sacrificing their slaves; but necessarily they are very much given to human sacrifices, not only in order to preserve a custom of their ancestors, but also in order not to lose a kind of trade that is sufficiently lucrative, and of which I made mention in one of my former letters.

Clearly, the brutality of these people and the total control of the prince of darkness over the Bagobo's pagan practices is evident. But someone might wonder: “How can such a contradictory brutality [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] exist, when sacrificing their slaves causes them to lose both slaves and money?” Setting aside the inhumanity demonstrated by such a savage tradition, it seems they should avoid sacrificing their slaves to protect their own interests by not depriving themselves of laborers, etc. Yet they are indeed very invested in human sacrifices, not only to maintain a tradition from their ancestors but also to avoid losing a type of trade that is quite profitable, which I mentioned in one of my earlier letters.

Nevertheless, it will not be too much to relate the following case in support of my assertion. Maglándao, a good lad, and yet single, was the name of the victim. His master was not a Bagobo, but he was married to a Bagobo woman, and far from following the customs of his country which are more humane and civilized, he immediately committed so evil a deed that he could well have been graduated as master from the Bagobo school. Maglándao was the son of Apat, a Bagobo, and from childhood had never been the slave of any person. But in order to obtain some pamáran or pendents of ivory which were worth eight or ten pesos, he gave his word to work for a certain length of time for the owner of the pamáran. The latter, considering him as his slave, or rather, as if he were a wild boar of the woods, having grown angry at him one day because [248]he did not do as he was ordered, fired his gun point blank at him so that the ball entered his back and came out in front just below the right breast, also going through his arm. The wound was mortal, especially as he was left, just as his master left him, totally abandoned. But, since in spite of all, two days had passed, and Maglándao had not died, his master bethought him that he could make use of him for the sacrifice which the Bagobos of Cáuit were about to make on the occasion of the death of the old Balolo. The sacrificers, in number about twenty heathens, agreed to kill or sacrifice the wounded youth, giving his master seventy paves,7 or about fourteen cavans of palay. That was a stroke of business that was considered as profitable by both parties to the contract. The sacrifices believed that they were the gainers in it, for since the victim was nearly dead when he came into their hands, they obtained him ipso facto at a lower price, and thus saved money and stabbing. He who sold the victim also thought himself the gainer, because by handing him over for the sacrifice, he saved the labor and expenses of burial, and had enough palay to eat throughout the year.

Nevertheless, it won’t be too much to share the following case to back up my point. Maglándao, a good guy who was still single, was the name of the victim. His boss wasn’t a Bagobo, but he was married to a Bagobo woman, and instead of following the more humane and civilized customs of his country, he committed such an evil act that he could easily have graduated as a master from the Bagobo school. Maglándao was the son of Apat, a Bagobo, and had never been anyone's slave since childhood. However, to get some pamáran or ivory pendants worth eight or ten pesos, he agreed to work for a certain time for the owner of the pamáran. The latter, seeing him as his slave—or rather, like a wild boar from the woods—got angry with him one day because he didn’t follow orders, so he shot him point-blank, with the bullet entering his back and exiting below his right breast, also going through his arm. The wound was fatal, especially since he was left completely abandoned just as his master had left him. Still, after two days had passed and Maglándao hadn’t died, his master thought about using him for the sacrifice that the Bagobos of Cáuit were planning on the occasion of the old Balolo's death. The sacrificers, about twenty in total, agreed to kill the wounded youth, giving his master seventy paves, or around fourteen cavans of palay. This deal was seen as profitable by both parties. The sacrificers thought they were getting a good deal since the victim was nearly dead when he came into their hands, allowing them to get him ipso facto at a lower price, thus saving money and effort. The person who sold the victim also thought he benefited because by handing him over for the sacrifice, he saved the trouble and cost of burial and had enough palay to eat for the entire year.

I have been able to ascertain the facts about this and other horrible sacrifices through the sacrificers themselves who have been converted to the Catholic faith, who have not hesitated to relate them to me with the above details and others which I omit. The above will suffice for your Reverence to understand that human sacrifices are a real business here, and are maintained not only by Bagobos, but also by [249]Moros and other heathen races. It is an infamous traffic which can only be wiped out by means of the civilizing action which España is exercising over Mindanao. Some heathens having been reprimanded on a certain occasion by the governor of this district in regard to so barbarous a custom, had the audacity to reply to him in the following manner: “Sir, is not every one allowed to spend his money as he pleases? Slaves answer the purposes of money among us, and we spend that money according to our pleasure and custom.”

I’ve been able to learn the details about this and other horrible sacrifices from the sacrificers themselves, who have converted to the Catholic faith and have openly shared their stories with me, including the details I am leaving out. This should be enough for you to understand that human sacrifices are a real issue here, practiced not only by the Bagobos but also by [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Moros and other pagan groups. It’s a shocking practice that can only be eliminated through the civilizing efforts that España is bringing to Mindanao. On one occasion, some pagans were reprimanded by the governor of this area for such a barbaric custom, and they had the nerve to reply: “Sir, isn’t everyone allowed to spend their money as they wish? Slaves serve the purpose of money for us, and we use that money however we like based on our customs.”

Much more barbarous are they than the Ammonites, who sacrificed their sons to Moloch, and those other idolaters who sacrificed to Saturn, for both of them did it only several times a year, for the Bagobos sacrifice very frequently. There is no ranchería in which they do not annually make their feasts to the demon—Búsao, Mandarángan, or Daragó, for they are wont to give him these and many other names. On the day of the great assembly at the house of the dato or chief of the ranchería, they only eat and drink, sing and dance with joy, and there is no appearance of anything evil, except the scandals which reveling and the worship of Daragó generally occasion. There with cup of wine in hand, they mutually pledge one another, and yielding the word to the old man or chief of the feast, they drink toasts with him in honor of the great Daragó, whom they promise to follow and honor forever, offering to him, as did their ancestors, the blood of many human victims, so that he may be their friend and aid them in their wars. Curious persons who are present at those feasts, do not understand the language of the old men nor see anything that hints of a human sacrifice, [250]but those who are fully initiated in the Bagabo customs, will note immediately the token of the human sacrifice which was made in the woods on the preceding day among the branches placed in the bamboo or drum, before which the old men above mentioned make their invocation to Daragó.

They are much more brutal than the Ammonites, who sacrificed their sons to Moloch, and those other idol worshippers who sacrificed to Saturn, because they only did it a few times a year, while the Bagobos sacrifice very frequently. There is no village where they don’t hold annual feasts for the demon—Búsao, Mandarángan, or Daragó, as they like to call him by various names. On the day of the big gathering at the house of the dato or chief of the village, they eat and drink, sing, and dance joyfully, with no sign of anything wrong, except for the scandals that typically arise from the revelry and the worship of Daragó. With cups of wine in hand, they toast each other, and as the elder or chief of the feast takes the floor, they drink toasts with him in honor of the great Daragó, whom they promise to honor and follow forever, offering him, just like their ancestors did, the blood of many human victims so that he may be their ally and help them in their wars. Curious onlookers at these feasts don’t understand the language of the elders or see any hints of human sacrifice, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] but those who are well-versed in Bagabo customs will immediately recognize the signs of the human sacrifice made in the woods the day before among the branches placed in the bamboo or drum, before which the elders mentioned earlier perform their invocation to Daragó.

When any contagious disease appears, or whenever any of their relatives die, the Bagobos believe that the demon is asking them for victims, and they immediately hasten to offer them to him so that he may not kill them. They are accustomed generally to show their goodwill in the act of sacrifice in the following words: Aoaton no ian dipánoc ini manobo, tímbac dipánoc co, so canac man sapi, [that is] “Receive the blood of this slave, as if it were my blood, for I have paid for it to offer it to thee.” These words which they address to Búsao, when they wound and slash the victim, show clearly that they believe in and expect to have the demon as their friend by killing people for him. For they hope to assure their life in proportion to the number of their neighbors they deliver to death, which they believe is always inflicted by Búsao or the demon who is devoured continually by hunger for human victims.

When any contagious disease shows up, or whenever one of their relatives dies, the Bagobos believe that the demon is demanding victims, and they quickly rush to offer them so he won't kill them. They usually express their goodwill during the act of sacrifice with these words: Aoaton no ian dipánoc ini manobo, tímbac dipánoc co, so canac man sapi, [which means] “Receive the blood of this slave, as if it were my blood, for I have paid for it to offer it to you.” These words they say to Búsao when they wound and cut the victim clearly show that they believe in and hope to have the demon as their ally by killing people for him. They expect to secure their own lives in proportion to the number of neighbors they send to death, which they think is always caused by Búsao or the demon who is constantly hungry for human victims.

Now it is seen, your Reverence, my Father, whether I said with reason that this place appears the kingdom of the prince of darkness as horrible and cruel as it is in reality. His subjects, or better, his slaves, although they easily comprehend the existence of a god, creator and omnipotent, since they believe as they do, that sickness and death come from Búsao, and that the latter is only fond of blood and revolution, dedicate their altars and sacrifices to him, consenting to the impious and iniquitous pact [251]of eternal servitude, which their ancestors, deceived and reduced by the great Mandarángan, made at the foot of the Apo Volcano. Let us beseech the intercession of the angels and the saints, and especially that of the Queen and Lady, our Mother, the most holy Virgin, before God our Lord, so that by His grace, He may unite the hearts of all those who can aid us in the material and spiritual conquest of these peoples.

Now it’s clear, Your Reverence, my Father, whether I was right to say that this place seems like the kingdom of the prince of darkness, as horrible and cruel as it truly is. His subjects, or rather, his slaves, easily understand that there is a god, a creator, and an omnipotent being. They believe that sickness and death come from Búsao, who only revels in blood and chaos, and so they dedicate their altars and sacrifices to him, accepting the impious and unjust pact [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] of eternal servitude that their ancestors, deceived and manipulated by the great Mandarángan, made at the foot of the Apo Volcano. Let us ask for the intercession of the angels and the saints, especially that of the Queen and Lady, our Mother, the most holy Virgin, before God our Lord, so that by His grace, He may bring together the hearts of all those who can help us in the material and spiritual conquest of these people.

Here I take leave of your Reverence, saluting all the Fathers and Brothers of those colleges, to whose holy prayers and sacrifices I commend myself.

Here I say goodbye to you, respectfully greeting all the Fathers and Brothers of those colleges, to whose prayers and sacrifices I entrust myself.

Your Reverence’s servant in Christ,

Your Reverence’s servant in Christ,

Mateo Gisbert, S. J.

Mateo Gisbert, S.J.

Pax Christi.
My dearly beloved Father Superior in Christ:

Pax Christi.
My dear Father Superior in Christ:

[Once] since the seven months in which I have been able to visit San José of Sámal, I went there lately to say mass and preach to those poor people, at that time solemnizing eight baptisms and one marriage. It is fitting for the Sámals who were always visited and cared for by the father missionaries of Dávao, to be specially visited and cared for now when some of those who formerly showed most opposition, offer themselves for baptism. During this last visit I baptized Mal-lúyan, the headman, a son-in-law of Captain Baguísan. The latter has become a fury, and refuses to allow any of those whom he calls his sácopes to be baptized, and he threatens with his gun the one who does not conform to him, and commits real outrages. He is a madman of a bad kind, worse than Búsao himself. For if the [252]demon looses the chains of heathenism on anyone and that person becomes baptized through the mercy of God, Baguísan hastens to fasten them on again. That happened lately to Cabáis, who, one day going to get his wife in order that they two might be baptized and live in San José with two daughters already Christians, has been detained and rigorously forbidden to present himself before the father.

[Once] since the seven months in which I have been able to visit San José of Sámal, I went there recently to say mass and preach to those poor people, during which I solemnized eight baptisms and one marriage. It’s important for the Sámals, who were always visited and cared for by the father missionaries of Dávao, to be especially visited and looked after now that some of those who previously opposed strongly are coming forward for baptism. During this last visit, I baptized Mal-lúyan, the headman, who is a son-in-law of Captain Baguísan. The latter has become aggressive, refusing to allow anyone he calls his sácopes to be baptized, threatening those who don’t obey him with his gun, and committing real outrages. He is a dangerous kind of madman, worse than Búsao himself. For if the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]demon frees anyone from the chains of heathenism and that person is baptized by the mercy of God, Baguísan rushes to rebind them. That recently happened to Cabáis, who, one day, went to get his wife so that they could both be baptized and live in San José with their two daughters, who are already Christians, but he was detained and strictly forbidden to present himself before the father.

On account of this war against baptism by Baguísan, which is both obligatory and of long standing in Sámal, it is advisable to pay heed to that field of Christendom, so that it may increase, although that increase be but gradual, and so that the entire island may finally be converted. The appointment, by the governor, of the Christians of San José as captain, lieutenant, etc., has produced an excellent result. It might be said that those Christians are the real datos of the island, and the only ones who obey the orders that they receive, who cultivate cacao, and form a true village.

Due to the ongoing conflict against baptism by Baguísan, which is both mandatory and has been around for a long time in Sámal, it’s important to pay attention to that area of Christianity so it can grow, even if that growth is slow, and ultimately lead to the conversion of the entire island. The governor's appointment of the Christians of San José as captain, lieutenant, and other positions has had a great outcome. It could be said that these Christians are the true leaders of the island, as they are the only ones who follow the orders they receive, cultivate cacao, and create a genuine community.

The village which your Reverence saw in the old Casalúcan has remained talis qualis.8 These people if they are not baptized, live in the manner of Baguísan. “A village—and on the beach—in order to live under guard and subject—bah!” they say. “We don’t want it! We don’t want it!” There is a race, however, or to speak more accurately, the remnant of what was the Moro race, which was formerly predominant on these coasts, whose datos and captains, for fear of being abandoned by the few sácopes whom they still have, are the first ones to present themselves and beg for a village. And since they know that that petition is generally heeded by [253]all the governors who succeed to the district, they easily obtain the support that they ask, and form something that resembles a village, if it be looked at especially from the sea. Thus do they oblige the scattered sácopes to reunite under their datos and panditas, and that is the very thing that they desire, in order that they might maintain their customs and mode of living.

The village that your Reverence saw in the old Casalúcan has stayed talis qualis. 8 These people, if they aren’t baptized, live like the Baguísan. “A village—and by the beach—to live under guard and control—ugh!” they say. “We don’t want it! We don’t want it!” However, there’s a group, or to be more precise, what’s left of the Moro race, which used to dominate these coasts. Their datos and captains, fearing that the few sácopes they still have will abandon them, are the first to come forward and ask for a village. And since they know that this request is usually granted by [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] all the governors who take over the district, they easily get the support they seek and create something that looks like a village, especially when viewed from the sea. This compels the scattered sácopes to gather under their datos and panditas, which is exactly what they want, to maintain their customs and way of life.

Since the Moros do not agree in any part, and much less here, where we have so many other good and numerous races, it would be very politic, in my opinion, to encourage the spirit of the Moros who are attempting to separate from their datos and panditas, so that the latter may become isolated and without any authority. If it is thought advisable to assemble them into a settlement, since, counting all the Moros of the gulf, their number does not reach five thousand, it would be an excellent thing to assemble them in one village, at a point where they can be better watched and governed. But if they were ordered to assemble in one single village, it would always be necessary to permit those Moros who wished, to separate from their datos and panditas in order that they might take root in the villages and reductions as do the other heathens. Being baptized like them, if they wish, they may do it freely without the obstacle of datos and panditas. As they are now, although there are but few here, they fill and dirty the whole thing; for scarcely is there a river or a valley whose mouth has not its dato and pandita, who, together with their sácopes, the latter of whom do not number ten at times, say that they are making a village by order of the governor. But what they are really doing is to prevent other heathens from [254]being reduced and making a village, which would actually be of real advantage for the future.

Since the Moros don’t agree on anything, especially here where we have so many other good and numerous groups, I think it would be smart to support the Moros who are trying to break away from their datos and panditas. This way, those leaders might become isolated and lose their authority. If it seems wise to gather them into a settlement, considering that the total number of Moros in the gulf doesn’t reach five thousand, it would be a great idea to bring them together in one village where they could be monitored and governed more effectively. However, if they are instructed to gather in a single village, it’s important to allow those Moros who want to separate from their datos and panditas to do so, so they can settle in villages and communities like other non-believers. If they want to be baptized like the others, they should be able to do that freely without the interference of datos and panditas. As things stand now, even though there are only a few here, they take over and mess everything up; there’s hardly a river or valley that doesn’t have its dato and pandita, who, along with their sácopes, often numbering fewer than ten, claim they’re forming a village by the governor’s order. But what they’re really doing is blocking other non-believers from being settled and establishing a village, which would actually be beneficial for the future.

I will close by asking your Reverence to commend me to God in your holy prayers and sacrifices.

I’ll wrap up by asking you to remember me in your prayers and sacrifices to God.

Mateo Gisbert, S. J. [255]

Mateo Gisbert, S. J. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Letter from Father Pablo Cavalleria to Father Francisco Sanchez

Pax Christi.

Peace of Christ.

My very dearly beloved in Christ, Father Sánchez:

My dearly beloved in Christ, Father Sánchez:

Replying to your favor, in which your Reverence asks for information concerning the inhabitants of this island of Basílan, I have deemed it best to write the following.

Replying to your message, in which you ask for information about the inhabitants of this island of Basílan, I thought it best to write the following.

Races

The races of this island are the indigenous race and the Moros. The indigenous is Christian and there is little or nothing to say of them, since they are well known to your Reverence.

The people of this island are the indigenous group and the Moros. The indigenous are Christian, and there’s not much to say about them since you already know them well, Your Reverence.

The Moro9 race is infidel, and lives on the coast and in the interior.

The Moro9 people are non-believers and live along the coast and in the inland areas.

The indigenous race forms the settlement of Isabela de Basílan, consisting of some eight hundred souls.

The local community makes up the settlement of Isabela de Basílan, which consists of about eight hundred people.

Further sixteen families of Christian Indians reside in the visita called San Pedro de Guibáuan distant six leguas from Isabela. Their absolute lieutenant in chief is Pedro Cuévas. [256]

Further, sixteen families of Christian Indians live in the visita called San Pedro de Guibáuan, which is six leagues away from Isabela. Their main leader is Pedro Cuévas. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Moro race is now greatly degenerated, for many are coming down from the Bisayas who were formerly captives.

The Moro people have greatly declined now, as many are coming down from the Visayas who were once captives.

The Moros of the interior of the island are called Yácanes,10 and are employed, although but little, in the cultivation of palay, sweet-potatoes, cacao, etc.

The Moros from the interior of the island are called Yácanes,10 and they are used, though not very often, in growing rice, sweet potatoes, cacao, and so on.

The Moros of the coast are called Sámales Laút. They are employed, although little, in fishing. They are pirates, and whenever they can do so with impunity, they capture the Christians, or the Moros of the interior themselves, or those of distant Sámal rancherías, or those of other islands. On that account there is a certain hostility between the Sámales and the Yácanes. At present, Pedro Cuévas, so far as he is able, executes justice upon those who exercise such boldness, and applies the law to them.

The Moros along the coast are known as Sámales Laút. They are involved, although minimally, in fishing. They're also pirates, and whenever they can get away with it, they capture Christians or other Moros from the interior, or those from distant Sámal rancherías, or from other islands. Because of this, there's some hostility between the Sámales and the Yácanes. Currently, Pedro Cuévas, as best as he can, enforces justice on those who act so boldly and applies the law to them.

Among the Sámales Laút, there are Joloan Moros, and Malays.

Among the Sámales Laút, there are Joloan Moros and Malays.

The total number of the Moros of this island is ten or twelve thousand.11 Their skin is of a deep bronze color, and they have black eyes, rather meager eyebrows, thin beard and their cranium is flattened on the occipital part.

The total number of Moros on this island is around ten to twelve thousand.11 Their skin is a deep bronze, and they have black eyes, somewhat sparse eyebrows, a thin beard, and their skulls are flattened at the back.

Religion

They are not very observant in their ceremonies. [257]

They aren't very attentive during their ceremonies. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

They omit many of the rules of their false prophet Mahomet, add others which are not prescribed, and observe some, but in the time and manner that appears best to them. For example, they do not pray even at least once a day, almost never observe Friday, and it is never seen that any of them has gone to Meca.12

They ignore many of the rules of their false prophet Muhammad, add others that aren't specified, and follow some, but only in ways and at times that they think are best. For example, they don't pray at least once a day, rarely observe Friday, and it's never seen that any of them has gone to Mecca.12

They practice baptism or gúnting, which they have learned, although badly, from the Christian captives.

They practice baptism or gúnting, which they have learned, although not very well, from the Christian captives.

For the administration of baptism, they prepare cocoanut oil, rice flour, water from the cocoanut and natural water. When the child is four or six months old, on that day that they think best, the imam takes a little of each of those ingredients abovesaid, and places them on the forehead of the child, at the same time uttering certain words from the Koran. At the end of the ceremony the feast follows, and the imam is the first to whom the large tray of food must be presented.

For the baptism, they get coconut oil, rice flour, coconut water, and regular water ready. When the child is four to six months old, on a day they choose, the imam takes a bit of each of those ingredients and puts them on the child's forehead while reciting specific words from the Quran. After the ceremony, a feast takes place, and the imam is the first person to be served from the large tray of food.

Marriage

The fathers or owners of the young girls rather sell than give them for wives. Fees are assigned for the petitions made by the young men to the fathers or masters of their sweethearts. Consequently, it is seldom that the young woman is given to the suitor at his first or second petition. The young woman is granted to the suitor, who pays greater or less fees, [258]according as the family is more or less principal and as the young woman is more or less good-looking. Consequently, thirty, fifty, or more pesos are demanded for her delivery, besides the marriage feast.

The fathers or owners of the young girls prefer to sell them rather than give them away as wives. Fees are set for the requests made by the young men to the fathers or guardians of their sweethearts. As a result, it’s rare for a young woman to be given to a suitor after his first or second request. Instead, the young woman is given to the suitor who pays higher or lower fees, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]depending on the family's status and how attractive the young woman is. Therefore, thirty, fifty, or more pesos are asked for her release, in addition to the cost of the wedding feast.

The ceremonies observed by them, as I have seen them, are as follows. The groom chews his buyo as he is required, then goes into the midst of the guests, makes some wry faces, and passes his hands along his face. By that means they say that he is asking pardon of God by confessing his sins. This is called magtanbat. Then if the groom has not paid because of poverty, for a suitable banquet, some of the chiefs present strike him several blows on the back with a rattan formed like a hand, more or less numerous, according to what he has neglected to prepare for the banquet.

The ceremonies they observe, as I've witnessed, are as follows. The groom chews his betel nut as required, then goes into the midst of the guests, makes some grimaces, and runs his hands across his face. They say this is his way of asking God for forgiveness by confessing his sins. This is called magtanbat. If the groom hasn't been able to pay for a proper banquet due to lack of money, some of the chiefs present will strike him several times on the back with a rattan shaped like a hand, with the number of strikes depending on what he failed to prepare for the feast.

Then the groom goes to wash his feet and clothe himself in white garments. On coming out he seats himself on a mat, and places his right hand between the two hands of one chief, and his left upon the right hands of the other chiefs. Then the imam covers his right hand and that of the groom with a white handkerchief, and thus being united, they utter some words from the Koran. The imam lifts his hands, and extends them so that his palms are turned outwards and at a distance of two cuartas,13 and lifts them to his head. The groom does the same, but the palms of his hands are turned toward his face. They clasp hands again with the chiefs in the manner abovesaid, and then the feast immediately follows. At the end of the feast, they go to the home of the bride, and the same ceremonies are there repeated with her as with the groom. [259]

Then the groom goes to wash his feet and puts on white clothes. When he comes out, he sits on a mat and places his right hand between the two hands of one chief and his left hand on the right hands of the other chiefs. The imam covers the groom's right hand and the imam's hand with a white handkerchief, and together they say some words from the Quran. The imam lifts his hands, extends them with palms facing outward at a distance of two cuartas, 13 and raises them to his head. The groom does the same, but with his palms facing his face. They clasp hands again with the chiefs in the same way, and then the feast begins immediately after. At the end of the feast, they go to the bride's home, and the same ceremonies are repeated with her as they were with the groom. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

At intervals they play the culintíngan, and if the groom is an influential person, there is a discharge of musketry, and a cow or carabao is killed, and innumerable Moros invited in. The richer one is the more guests there are; and at intervals there is generally a war dance.

At certain times, they play the culintíngan, and if the groom is a prominent figure, there’s a volley of gunfire, and a cow or carabao is sacrificed, with countless Moros invited. The wealthier the person, the more guests there are; and periodically, there’s usually a war dance.

Burial

When the sickness is severe, the imam performs the magtaual, by sprinkling a little water on the sick person, and reciting some prayers to their false prophet. They clothe the deceased in a white garment which covers them from top to toe. Those who are present or who visit the deceased, are invited to a feast. The grave that is made is deep or shallow according to the rank of the person who is to be buried, but it is always one and one-half or two varas deep, and in the shape of a crescent. In one side of it they open a kind of cave, where the body is to be buried. Once the body is deposited there, they set upright stakes in the cave and then make a platform over the hole while two persons scare away the flies with a white cloth so that they may not come near. At the ends of the grave they place a tabo14 of water and food. The imam comes, recites some Mahometan prayers, approaches the dish of food which they have placed there for him, and there at the very grave, he stuffs himself with dexterity, and retires. At the termination of that gastronomic operation, the death-guards (or tunguquibul) who watch the dead for the space of a few days and nights, enter. This is [260]done by various families in turn, according to the wealth or property of the family of the deceased, for they are paid in food and cloth whenever they stand guard. When the deceased, or rather his relatives have nothing more with which to recompense them, the guards cease to watch the dead.

When the illness is serious, the imam performs the magtaual by sprinkling a bit of water on the sick person and reciting prayers to their false prophet. They dress the deceased in a white garment that covers them completely. Those present or visiting the deceased are invited to a feast. The grave is dug either deep or shallow based on the status of the person being buried, but it is always one and a half to two varas deep, shaped like a crescent. On one side, they create a kind of cave where the body will be buried. Once the body is placed there, they set upright stakes inside the cave and build a platform over the hole, while two people wave a white cloth to keep the flies away. At the ends of the grave, they place a tabo14 of water and food. The imam arrives, recites some Muslim prayers, approaches the dish of food placed there for him, and right at the grave, he eats heartily and then leaves. After he finishes eating, the death-guards (or tunguquibul), who keep watch over the deceased for several days and nights, take their turn. This is [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] done by different families in rotation, depending on how wealthy the family of the deceased is, as they are compensated with food and clothing for their service. When the deceased's relatives can no longer pay them, the guards stop watching over the body.

If any of the family of the deceased do not wish that guard to be made, the imams and some others circulate the rumor that the dead person has escaped and is running through the hills terrifying the passers-by. That ghost they call pañata, and until the guard has been made, that rumor does not cease to be circulated.

If any family members of the deceased don’t want the guard to be made, the imams and some others spread the rumor that the dead person has escaped and is roaming the hills, scaring people who pass by. They call that ghost pañata, and the rumor continues until the guard is established.

Religious feasts

When they unite for public worship, which is when it pleases them, the people are summoned by loud sounds produced by the blows of a stick upon a sort of drum. The imam begins an invocation in a sad tone to their impostor and reads a bit of the Koran. In the meantime the people chew buyo, talk, lie down, laugh, scream, and then they retire without either the imam or the people having understood what has been read.

When they come together for public worship, at their convenience, the people are called by loud sounds from a stick hitting a type of drum. The imam starts with a sad invocation to their false prophet and reads a passage from the Quran. Meanwhile, the people chew betel, chat, lie around, laugh, yell, and then leave without either the imam or the people having grasped what was read.

The principal feast, and almost the only one that they celebrate is the maúlut or birth of Mahomet. Each ranchería, and at times each family even, celebrates it on whatever day they choose. They ought to hold it on the tenth night of the month called Rabié aual, which corresponds to the month of September. But they generally celebrate it after the harvest. This year the Moros of this place have celebrated it in December. I asked them once why they did not celebrate it on a fixed day. They replied [261]that they celebrated it when they had food for a good feast. On the said occasions several chiefs are accustomed to meet with the imam and sing in so doleful a voice that the song appears to come from a cavern, the while the women prepare the feast. This year I have noted that the imam of Panigáyan has gone on separate days to celebrate the feast at different rancherías.

The main celebration, and almost the only one they observe, is the maúlut or birth of Muhammad. Each village, and sometimes even each family, celebrates it on a day of their choosing. They should ideally hold it on the tenth night of the month called Rabié aual, which lines up with September. However, they usually celebrate it after the harvest. This year, the Moros in this area celebrated it in December. I once asked them why they didn't observe it on a specific day. They answered [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] that they celebrate it when they have enough food for a proper feast. During these occasions, several chiefs typically gather with the imam and sing in such a mournful way that the song seems to echo from a cave, while the women prepare the meal. This year, I noticed that the imam from Panigáyan has visited different villages on separate days to celebrate the feast.

They are very superstitious, and greatly fear Saítan (the devil) whom they endeavor to placate. When the epidemic of 1882 was here, the Moros of Panigáyan, among whom the cholera made especially severe ravages (for one-half of them died), threw boatloads of food into the sea, so that on encountering them, the devil might be satisfied with the food and leave them in peace. They also hung food to the trees with the same end in view.

They are very superstitious and deeply fear Saítan (the devil), whom they try to appease. During the epidemic of 1882, the Moros of Panigáyan, where cholera hit particularly hard (with half of them dying), tossed boatloads of food into the sea so that the devil would be satisfied with the offering and leave them alone. They also hung food in the trees for the same purpose.

On that occasion, the sherif reaped a fine harvest by selling clear water, which had curative properties, as he asserted. In return for the cure they had to recite some Moro prayers. If they were cured, it was by the water; but if they were not cured, it was because they had not recited well the prayers of Mahomet. The affair did not result ill for him.

On that occasion, the sheriff made a good profit by selling clear water, which he claimed had healing properties. In exchange for the cure, customers had to chant some Moro prayers. If they got better, it was because of the water; if not, it was because they hadn't recited the prayers to Muhammad correctly. Overall, he ended up doing pretty well from it.

In January 1883, I had occasion to observe another superstition in Lucbútun, a Moro ranchería one legua distant from this place by sea. A sailing fragata, which they called an enchantress, because they did not descry at a distance more than its sails passed not far from the said ranchería. Then because they did not salute it, they believed that they had irritated the devil, and in order to repair the fault they made two closets, and placed in the midst of them burning brasiers and lamps. [262]

In January 1883, I had a chance to observe another superstition in Lucbútun, a Moro village about a league away from this place by sea. A sailing ship, which they called an enchantress because they couldn’t see anything beyond its sails, passed not far from the village. Since they didn’t greet it, they believed they had upset the devil, so to make up for the mistake, they built two altars and placed burning braziers and lamps between them. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Some Moros believe also that the sherif can by his mere will send a sickness on whom he pleases. All is for the purpose of terrifying them and so that the sherif can get whatever he wishes from them. Whenever I have opposed this error, I have asked them why, if the sherif had this power, he did not send diseases upon the Christian village, since he is hostile to the Christians, but they do not reply to the question, but remain in their obstinacy.

Some Moros also believe that the sherif can, just by his will, inflict sickness on whoever he wants. This is all meant to frighten them so the sherif can get whatever he wants from them. Whenever I challenge this belief, I ask them why, if the sherif had this power, he doesn’t send diseases to the Christian village since he is against the Christians. They never answer the question; they just stick to their stubbornness.

Once when there was an eclipse of the moon, the Moros of Pasanjan began to make a great racket with their culintíngans and other things. When they were asked why they made so much noise, they answered that it was in order to scare the serpent which was eating the moon.15

Once, during a lunar eclipse, the Moros of Pasanjan started making a loud noise with their culintíngans and other instruments. When someone asked why they were being so noisy, they replied that it was to scare away the serpent that was consuming the moon.15

For their long voyages they look at the cuticáan, which is a book containing certain figures. By means of that they try to discover whether they have fortunate voyages or not.

For their long journeys, they refer to the cuticáan, a book that contains specific symbols. They use it to try to determine whether their voyages will be successful or not.

Follies

He who knows most among them is the sherif yet his learning does not go beyond the ability to write a few words in Arabian characters. In regard to heaven and hell they know nothing more than their existence. In regard to the soul they know almost nothing.

He who knows the most among them is the sheriff, but his knowledge doesn't go beyond being able to write a few words in Arabic characters. When it comes to heaven and hell, they know nothing more than that they exist. Regarding the soul, they know hardly anything at all.

The following is what a sherif asserted regarding heaven and hell. There are seven heavens and seven hells to express the various rewards or punishments:

The following is what a sheriff claimed about heaven and hell. There are seven heavens and seven hells to represent the different rewards or punishments:

1. A heaven called Yattu Atúan. Here there is only rest. [263]

1. A paradise called Yattu Atúan. Here, there is only peace. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

2. A heaven, [called] Firdéos. Here there are good things to eat.

2. A paradise, known as Firdéos. Here, there are delightful things to eat.

3. A heaven [called] Naím. If one wishes to eat, there is plenty of food [here].

3. A paradise called Naím. If you want to eat, there's plenty of food here.

4. A heaven [called] Nauá. The water [here] has the taste that one desires.

4. A paradise called Nauá. The water here tastes just the way you want it to.

5. Aínum naím. Here [there is] great wealth.

5. Here there is great wealth.

6. Salsabila. Here [there are] golden vessels from which to drink.

6. Salsabila. Here are golden containers to drink from.

7. Jatard al Cots. Here [there are] pearls and diamonds.

7. Jatard al Cots. Here, there are pearls and diamonds.

Hells

1. Naruk Yahanna. Here [there is] confusion.

1. Naruk Yahanna. There's confusion here.

2. Naruk Sacar. [Here there are] contrivances and animals for inflicting torture.

2. Naruk Sacar. [Here there are] devices and animals used for causing pain.

3. Naruk Sigmilti. [Here there are] tortures in language.

3. Naruk Sigmilti. [Here there are] tortures in language.

4. Naruk abus. [Here there are] most ugly things.

4. Naruk abuse. [Here there are] really ugly things.

5. Naruk Jauya. Here one is run through with spears.

5. Naruk Jauya. This is where someone is pierced with spears.

6. Naruk Zaalt. Here one suffers thirst.

6. Naruk Zaalt. This is where you experience thirst.

7. Naruk Jamia. Here one is tortured with fire.

7. Naruk Jamia. Here, people are tortured with fire.

So did one Tuan Sarib describe heaven and hell. On a certain occasion several chiefs and imams gathered together; and when speaking of Adam and Eve, they did not succeed in telling who were their parents, and they had recourse to the missionary in order that he might instruct them on that point. They do not know either, the day on which their Mahomet was born, or much less any of his history.

So did one Tuan Sarib describe heaven and hell. At one point, several chiefs and imams came together, and when discussing Adam and Eve, they couldn't identify who their parents were, so they turned to the missionary for guidance on that issue. They also don't know the day their Mahomet was born, let alone any details about his life.

They scarcely know their era, nor do they know how old they are. Once a man asked me to tell him how old he was. They count by moons, saying [264]“Only two moons have passed;” “Three moons from now we shall do this;” etc., etc.

They hardly know their time, nor do they know their age. One time, a man asked me to tell him how old he was. They measure time by moons, saying [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]“Only two moons have passed;” “In three moons, we’ll do this;” and so on.

Much more might be said of their errors and foolishness, but I consider this sufficient, and it would be a prolixity to adduce more facts to prove those errors and follies.

Much more could be said about their mistakes and foolishness, but I think this is enough, and it would be overly verbose to provide more examples to demonstrate those errors and foolishness.

Dress

The dress consists of pantaloons narrow at the bottom and wide at the top and a tight shirt. The women dress like the men except that they cover themselves with a loosely sewed mantle (jábul) which covers them from top to toe and is fastened under the armpit thus forming folds.

The dress includes pantaloons that are tight at the bottom and loose at the top, along with a fitted shirt. Women wear similar outfits to men, but they also wear a loosely sewn cloak (jábul) that covers them from head to toe and is secured under the armpit, creating folds.

They cut their hair to a little fringe on the forehead, and shave themselves. Their teeth are dyed black in order to distinguish them from the Christians.

They trim their hair into a short fringe on their foreheads and shave themselves. Their teeth are dyed black to set them apart from Christians.

The Sámal Moros dress in pantaloons that are tight from top to bottom.

The Sámal Moros wear pants that are snug from top to bottom.

The Moro will not eat flesh,16 unless the imam sacrifices the animal, and performs the Sumbálig.

The Moro won't eat meat, 16 unless the imam sacrifices the animal and performs the Sumbálig.

The Moros are dirty, lazy, fickle, importunate, stingy in giving, and fond of conversation and amusements.

The Moros are unkempt, lazy, unpredictable, overly demanding, stingy with generosity, and enjoy chatting and entertainment.

They fight without giving quarter, and in the attack, advance, stop, give ground, leap, creep among the cógon,17 cover themselves with their shields, etc. [265]

They fight fiercely, not holding back, and during the attack, they charge, halt, retreat, jump, and carefully move among the cógon,17 shielding themselves with their armor, and so on. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

In their wars against the Spaniards or Christians, they build forts defended by ditches, and invested with thick earthen walls. They are fierce and bold, and when dripping with blood they fight until death on the field of battle, impelled by their hatred toward the Christian or Spaniard.

In their battles against the Spaniards or Christians, they construct forts protected by ditches and surrounded by thick earthen walls. They are fierce and brave, and when covered in blood, they fight to the death on the battlefield, driven by their hatred for the Christian or Spaniard.

Below are some verses of a song of theirs which was dictated to me by a Moro chief, so that your Reverence may better see the hatred with which they fight.18

Below are some lines from a song of theirs that a Moro chief told me, so you can better understand the hatred with which they fight.18

Pagcalanta acó isá

Pagcalanta acó isá

Saliban Sáuan da sa

Saliban Sáuan da sa

Sábab aun súcut dasa.

Sábab aún súcut dasa.

Tumulak acó salasa.

Tumulak, the story.

Maluag can sanchata

Maluag can sanchata

Bacucús in sacay in sa

Bacucús in sacay in sa

Bisan uay bantata

Even if there's no warning

Marayao pañab quita.

Marayao, handle this.

Yari Saliban Sauan

Yari Saliban Sauan

Mallo pa Zamboangan

Mallo in Zamboanga

Bisan uay dangat

Bisan walang dangat

Midda pa subangan.

Midda to the future.

Castila piañgayu

Castile is beautiful

Simacat na tinuyo

Simacat na tinuyo

Catacus niangayu

Catacus niangayu

Ynacujan sa nag buno.

Ynacujan in the backyard.

Aco catcal magbuno na

Aco catcal magbuno na

Ampa lasa aun co na

Ampa lasa aun co na

Bauk aco dumungu na

Bauk is still there

Sagui na Bismil-lá.

Surrender to God.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Jida manung lasap

Jida is missing

Magcalis samsil dasak

Magcalis samsil dasak

Minsan co dugu nasak

Minsan co dugu nasak

Limagut parrán lisak.

Limagut parrán lisak.

Un canto entonaré

I will sing a song

Que es del Saliban Sauan

¿Qué pasa con el Saliban Sauan?

Para tener suerte

Para tener suerte

Al embarcarme el mártes.

Upon boarding on Tuesday.

Busca las lantacas

Find the lances

Las armas en la embarcacion

Weapons on the vessel

Y aunque no haya enemigos

Even if there are no enemies

Bueno es èstar prevenidos.

It's good to be cautious.

Este Saliban Sauan

This Saliban Sauan

Vá para Zamboanga

Go to Zamboanga

Aunque no haya comercio

Aunque no haya comercio

Volverá pronto.

It'll be back soon.

Al castila pidió

Al castillo pidió

Subió con traicion

He climbed with betrayal

Sus armas pidió

He asked for his guns.

Se las cogió con la muerte.

Se las cogió con la muerte.

Yo siempre pelearé

I will always fight

Y hasta gusto tendré si caigo

Y hasta gusto tendré si caigo

Arrostraré el peligro

I will face the danger.

En nombre de Dios.

In the name of God.

Tengo gusto en hablar

Me gusta hablar.

Esgrimiré con valor el cris afilado

Esgrimiré con valor el cuchillo afilado

Y aunque mi sangre corra por el suelo

Y aunque mi sangre corra por el suelo

Tajearé al oir tocar.

Tajearé when I hear it.

A song I will chant,

A song I'll sing,

Which is that of the Saliban19 Sauan,

Which is that of the Saliban19 Sauan,

In order that I may have luck

In order for me to have luck

At my sailing on Tuesday.

At my sailing session on Tuesday.

Look after the lantacas,

Take care of the lantacas,

The weapons at embarking;

The weapons at boarding;

And though there are no enemies

And even though there are no enemies

It is wise to be prepared.

Be prepared.

This Saliban Sauan

This Saliban Sauan

Is going to Zamboanga;

Heading to Zamboanga;

Although there is no trade,

Although there's no trade,

He will return quickly.

He'll be back soon.

He begged from the Castilian;

He begged from the Spaniard;

He mounted treacherously;

He climbed dangerously;

The Castilian demanded his arms;

The Castilian demanded his weapons;

He got them with his death.

He won them with his death.

Ever will I fight,

I will always fight,

And even glad will I be if I fall;

And I’ll be happy if I fall;

I will encounter danger

I will face danger

In the name of God.

In God's name.

I take pleasure in talking;

I enjoy talking;

I will fight valiantly with my keen kris;

I will fight bravely with my sharp kris;

And although my blood is poured on the ground,

And even though my blood is spilled on the ground,

I will slash on hearing it fall.

I will cut it down when I hear it fall.

[267]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The language that they speak consists of Tagálog, Visayan, and Malayan words. But they make no difficulty about changing, omitting, and adding letters and syllables.

The language they speak includes Tagálog, Visayan, and Malayan words. However, they have no trouble changing, dropping, and adding letters and syllables.

This is as much as I have to tell your Reverence. Pray excuse me for not having written before, for I have already stated the reason. I beg you to overlook the faults of this document.

This is all I have to share with you, Your Reverence. Please forgive me for not writing sooner; I've already explained why. I ask that you overlook the mistakes in this document.

I have no time to copy it, for I have to go to Joló.

I don't have time to copy it because I need to go to Joló.

Your Reverence’s most affectionate servant in Christ,

Your Reverence’s most devoted servant in Christ,

Pablo Cavalleria, S. J. [268]

Pablo Cavalleria, S.J. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Extract from a Letter written by Father Pablo Pastells to the Father Provincial, Juan Capell, S. J.20

... Now considering Mindanao under its social and political aspect, its population is divided into Christians, heathens, and Moros, all of whom proceed in general from the Malay, Indonesian races,21 and the indigenous or Negrito race, and from crosses of the same races among themselves and with other superior races, especially the Chinese and Spaniards. The Christians are divided into old and new. The old Christians number about [269]186,000, and occupy in the ethnographical map accompanying our letters, the place represented by color no. 1. Their customs smell of the greater or less familiarity that they have or have had with the heathens from whose races they proceed. Without the powerful and efficacious influence of religion one would note in them a marked tendency to idleness, drunkenness, gambling, and lust. On the other side they are naturally hospitable, docile, and generous. They are pious in the performance of their religion. In their family and married life considerable morality is observed when there exist no rocks of scandal in the villages. I have observed in certain parish books which register more than two hundred baptisms per year, that two or three years pass without the notice of a single natural child.22 They are given to the cultivation of rice, abacá, sugar-cane, coffee, tobacco, bananas, lumbias, cocoa-palms, and other fruit trees, and to that of tubers such as sweet potatoes, gabe, and arorú, which are an article of prime necessity for them in times of famine. They extract mastic and other resins, as for example piao and guísog, and refine the oil of cocoanuts, biao, and balao, but do not extract castor or peanut oil as they are ignorant of their use.23 Wax and honey are very abundant. From the latter, and from sugar-cane, [270]nipa, cocoanuts, rice and cabo negro they prepare their drinks, and their vinegars from the last named and from camagon.24 They also get salt from sea-water by means of rapid evaporation.25 In general, the men are farmers, but among them there are carpenters, smiths, metal workers, masons, tailors, and even some who devote themselves to the making of weapons. The women weave the filaments of piña, tindog,26 abacá, cotton, and silk. They embroider and sew most delicately and tastefully. In certain seasons of the year, many Indians of the coasts, travel and fish especially for sea-turtles, whether they have any shell or not.27

... Now considering Mindanao in terms of its social and political aspects, its population is divided into Christians, non-Christians, and Moros, all of whom generally originate from Malay and Indonesian races, along with the indigenous Negrito race, and from intermixing of these races among themselves and with other superior races, especially the Chinese and Spaniards. The Christians are categorized into old and new. The old Christians number about [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]186,000, and occupy the area shown in color no. 1 on the ethnographical map that accompanies our letters. Their customs reflect the extent of their familiarity with the non-Christians from whom they descend. Without the strong influence of religion, one might notice a significant tendency towards idleness, drunkenness, gambling, and immorality among them. On the flip side, they tend to be hospitable, obedient, and generous. They are devout in practicing their religion. In their family and marital lives, considerable morality is observed when there are no scandals in the villages. I’ve seen in some parish records, which document more than two hundred baptisms a year, that two or three years can pass without a single report of an illegitimate child.22 They engage in cultivating rice, abacá, sugar cane, coffee, tobacco, bananas, lumbias, cocoa palms, and other fruit trees, as well as tubers like sweet potatoes, gabe, and arorú, which are essential for them during times of famine. They harvest mastic and other resins, like piao and guísog, and refine coconut oil, biao, and balao, but they don’t extract castor or peanut oil as they are unfamiliar with its uses.23 Wax and honey are plentiful. From honey and sugar cane, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]nipa, coconuts, rice, and cabo negro, they make their drinks, and they produce vinegars from the latter and from camagon.24 They also obtain salt from sea water through quick evaporation.25 Generally, the men are farmers, but there are also carpenters, blacksmiths, metal workers, masons, tailors, and even some who specialize in making weapons. The women weave fibers from piña, tindog, 26 abacá, cotton, and silk. They embroider and sew in a delicate and tasteful manner. During certain times of the year, many coastal Indians travel and fish, especially for sea turtles, regardless of whether they have any shells or not.27

The Philippine barangay

The Philippine barangay

The Philippine neighborhood

[From photograph taken by Otto Fischer, 1888; procured in Madrid]

[From a photograph taken by Otto Fischer, 1888; acquired in Madrid]

They live in humble houses of nipa, bamboo, and even of wood, which are quite luxurious among the most powerful. The animals that they use for their work, conveyance, and travel are the carabao, the ox, and the horse. Their implements for farming are reduced to the plow and the bolo. Their domestic animals are the dog, cat, cock, and swine. Their games are cockfighting, cards, and sipa, a hollow ball of split bamboo, which they move with [273]the feet. They also use dancing as a means of diversion, especially the moro-moro dance and the tapáiron. During their principal feasts, they adorn their houses with hangings and hold modest banquets. They are very fond of excitement and noise, especially that caused by fireworks. Their usual cutting weapons are the hatchet, súndan, lígdao, kris, campilan, tabas, and the badí for the women. The missile weapons are the spear which may be of four kinds, namely, púyus, búdiac, lináyas, and pinuipui; arrows of bamboo, palma brava,28 iron, and steel. Those weapons used both for cutting and thrusting are balaraos or two edged daggers, whose hilts and scabbards are usually adorned with various designs in silver engraved by themselves. The boats used by them are vintas, barotos, bancas, bilus, pancos, falúas, paraos, and lancanes. For fishing they make use of the harpoon, arrows, bolos, corrals, and nets. For the same object they also use the bark of the tree called tuble and the fruits of the tuba-tuba, and lagtan.29 There trade is, as a rule, reduced to the articles of prime necessity in food, drink, clothing, and work utensils. Among the old Christians of Mindanao, tulisanes by profession are not known, and if there are any in the south, they are deported. [274]

They live in simple houses made of nipa, bamboo, and even wood, which can be quite luxurious for the well-off. The animals they use for work, transportation, and travel include carabaos, oxen, and horses. Their farming tools consist of just the plow and the bolo. Their domestic animals are dogs, cats, roosters, and pigs. Their pastimes include cockfighting, card games, and sipa, a hollow ball made of split bamboo that they kick with [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]their feet. They also enjoy dancing for entertainment, especially the moro-moro dance and the tapáiron. During their major celebrations, they decorate their homes with hangings and host simple banquets. They love excitement and noise, particularly from fireworks. Their common cutting tools include hatchets, súndans, lígdaos, krises, campilans, tabases, and the badí for women. Their projectile weapons include spears of four types: púyus, búdiac, lináyas, and pinuipui; and arrows made of bamboo, palma brava, iron, and steel. Weapons that can be used for both cutting and thrusting are balaraos, or double-edged daggers, which often feature hilts and scabbards decorated with various silver designs etched by them. The boats they use are vintas, barotos, bancas, bilus, pancos, falúas, paraos, and lancanes. For fishing, they utilize harpoons, arrows, bolos, corrals, and nets. They also use the bark of a tree called tuble and the fruits of the tuba-tuba and lagtan for the same purpose. Their trade primarily consists of essential items for food, drink, clothing, and work tools. Among the old Christians of Mindanao, professional bandits are not known, and if they exist in the south, they are exiled. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The new Christians, from 1876 to the present time, reach some 25,000. In their general characteristics and customs, they are not distinguished from the races to which they owe their origin. Nevertheless, after they receive holy baptism, and while they live as Christians under the civil and religious organization to which they are subjected by the father missionaries, a very marked difference is noted, for by the habit of subjection to law which they acquire by means of the mild means of Christian education which the missionary who has been able to merit their confidence, strikes, the change of their customs is facilitated in a remarkable manner, and in a short time the moral condition of their families and individuals is changed. I mean [that the above is true] when they persevere [in the Christian life] for in regard to this, there are some tribes who are more fickle than others. Thus for example, the converted Mandaya is much less inconstant than the Manobo, for the importance of being subject to a beginning of authority is more impressed on his mind.

The new Christians, from 1876 to now, number about 25,000. In terms of their general characteristics and customs, they are not different from the races they originated from. However, after they are baptized and live as Christians under the civil and religious structure established by the missionary fathers they trust, a significant difference emerges. The practice of obeying the law, which they learn through the gentle approach of Christian education provided by the missionaries they respect, makes it much easier for them to change their customs. In a short time, the moral condition of their families and individuals improves. This holds true when they remain committed to the Christian lifestyle, as some tribes are more inconsistent than others. For example, the converted Mandaya is much more stable than the Manobo, as he understands the importance of adhering to a certain authority more clearly.

The heathen to the number of about 300,000, are divided into different nations or families of three races properly so called: the Malay, the Indonesian, and the Negrito. They have many crosses with other superior races, as the Chinese, Japanese, and even according to some, the European.30

The non-believers, numbering around 300,000, are divided into different nations or families belonging to three main races: the Malay, the Indonesian, and the Negrito. They have mixed with various other superior races, including the Chinese, Japanese, and according to some, Europeans.30

The Mamanuas (man-banua, “inhabitant of the country”) are the true indigenous aborigines of the country.31 Their color is dark, and their hair is oily, [275]woolly, and curly. They are nomadic and go naked. They pass the night where it overtakes them, taking shelter under an improvised hut of palásan32 or of any tree branch. Their food is the fruit and the roots of the forest and the flesh of deer, boars, monkeys, snakes, and reptiles. Their weapons are the bow and arrow, spear, and knife. They have an idea of God and of a worship, as well as some maxims of natural law. They are timid, and miserable creatures, moved by necessity, and loving of ease. They inhabit the small peninsula of Surigao and extend to Tago through the mountains. Their chiefs generally contract marriage with the Manobo women. This race is almost extinct in consequence of the privations incident to their wandering life. Four small villages of Mamanuas exist in the parish of Mainit and another in that of Gigáquit. The total number of this tribe does not exceed two or three thousand. Those baptized number about five hundred. In the map they occupy color number 2.

The Mamanuas (man-banua, “inhabitant of the country”) are the true indigenous people of the land.31 They have dark skin, and their hair is oily, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]woolly, and curly. They are nomadic and often go without clothes. They sleep wherever night finds them, taking refuge under makeshift huts made of palásan32 or tree branches. Their diet includes fruits and roots from the forest, as well as the meat of deer, boars, monkeys, snakes, and other reptiles. Their weapons include bows and arrows, spears, and knives. They have some understanding of God and worship, along with principles of natural law. They are shy, struggling individuals driven by necessity, and they prefer a life of ease. They live on the small peninsula of Surigao and stretch to Tago through the mountains. Their leaders typically marry Manobo women. This group is nearly extinct due to the hardships of their wandering lifestyle. There are four small Mamanuas villages in the parish of Mainit and another in Gigáquit. The total population of this tribe is no more than two or three thousand, with about five hundred having been baptized. On the map, they occupy color number 2.

The Manobos or Manuba (man-subá,33 “river dweller”) as is indicated by their name itself live near the rivers. They inhabit the valley of the Agúsan, which extends from Butúan to Oloagúsan. They live besides on the point of San Agustin on the southern shore of the bay of Malálag, and in the district of Cottabato, as may be seen in the ethnographical map, accompanying these letters, color no. 3.

The Manobos or Manuba (man-subá, 33 "river dweller") as their name suggests, live near rivers. They reside in the Agúsan valley, which stretches from Butúan to Oloagúsan. Additionally, they live at the point of San Agustin on the southern shore of Malálag Bay and in the Cottabato district, as shown in the ethnographical map accompanying these letters, color no. 3.

This tribe is numerous, wild, fickle, easy to reduce,34 somewhat difficult to preserve, and suspicious [276]and treacherous in their attacks. They build their houses near the rivers and often in the forks of trees. Their religion is very like that of the Mandayas. They annually change their abode in order to make new fields, being compelled to do so because of the grass and briars which spring up. As they have no means for the deep working of the soil, consequently permanent possession has no charm for them. They abandon their houses as soon as anyone dies in them, and if the deceased is an outsider, they demand the worth of the abandoned house from his relatives. Their system of life is the patriarchal, under the protection of their respective bagani. The Manobo, according to Dr. Montano,35 presents two extreme types: one athletic, and of much slighter build than the other. Those two types combined in the majority of the individuals constitute another medium type whose characters are more plainly marked in the Manobos of Dávao, than in those of the Agúsan. Their clothing, weapons, and ornaments closely resemble those of the [277]Mandayas, with the exception of the strings of glass beads, which are black rather than red among the Manobos. Tattooing is practiced among the Manobos, and is done by means of a needle and powdered charcoal. The number of the Manobos in the valley of Agúsan is about 20,000, half of whom are now reduced. The number of those of the district of Dávao and Cottabato is unknown.

This tribe is large, untamed, unpredictable, easy to diminish, somewhat hard to keep intact, and wary and deceitful in their assaults. They build their homes near rivers, often in the forks of trees. Their religion is quite similar to that of the Mandayas. They move their homes annually to create new fields, forced to do so because of the grass and thorns that grow up. Since they lack tools for deep soil cultivation, they aren’t attached to owning land permanently. They leave their homes as soon as someone dies in them, and if the deceased is an outsider, they expect the deceased's family to pay for the abandoned house. Their way of life is patriarchal, led by their respective bagani. The Manobo, according to Dr. Montano, presents two extreme types: one athletic and much lighter in build than the other. These two types combine in most individuals to create a medium type that is more distinctly seen in the Manobos of Dávao than in those of Agúsan. Their clothing, weapons, and ornaments are very similar to those of the Mandayas, except the glass bead strings are black instead of red among the Manobos. Tattooing is common among the Manobos, done with a needle and powdered charcoal. The population of the Manobos in the Agúsan valley is about 20,000, with half of them now settled. The number of those in the Dávao and Cottabato areas is unknown.

The Mandayas (man-daya, “people of the upland”—ilaya) is a tribe extending from Tago to Mati, and from Gandía to the source of the Agúsan, and in the district below the Sálug, as may be seen at color no. 34, of the adjoined ethnographical map. The manners and customs of the Mandayas are described in a letter written by Father Héras, June 8, 1878. The Mandayas number about 30,000 of whom 8,000 are already reduced and baptized.

The Mandayas (man-daya, “people of the upland”—ilaya) are a tribe that stretches from Tago to Mati, and from Gandía to the source of the Agúsan, including the area below the Sálug, as shown at color no. 34 on the attached ethnographical map. The traditions and customs of the Mandayas are detailed in a letter written by Father Héras on June 8, 1878. There are about 30,000 Mandayas, of which 8,000 have already been converted and baptized.

The Manguangas36 (man-gulangas, “people of the woods”) live on the upper part of the Sálug. They are warlike and have continual quarrels with the Manobos and Mandayas of the Agúsan, the Moros of the Hijo, and the Atás. They are easy to reduce. In the map, they occupy the place corresponding to color no. 5.

The Manguangas36 (man-gulangas, “people of the woods”) live in the upper region of the Sálug. They are aggressive and frequently have conflicts with the Manobos and Mandayas from Agúsan, the Moros from Hijo, and the Atás. They are relatively easy to subdue. On the map, they are located in the area marked with color no. 5.

The Monteses (Buquid-non)37 of the second district of Mindanao are divided into two groups: those adjacent to the Manobos of the Agúsan between Gingóog and Nasípit, who approach to the habits, and the social and religious life of the latter; [278]and those who people the mountains and valleys of the Tagalóan River. Comprehended in the parish of Balingasag, there are several reductions of them. Their number is about 4,000. They are shown in the map at color no. 6.

The Monteses (Buquid-non)37 from the second district of Mindanao are split into two groups: those living near the Manobos of Agúsan between Gingóog and Nasípit, who share similar habits and aspects of social and religious life; [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and those who inhabit the mountains and valleys of the Tagalóan River. Included in the parish of Balingasag, there are several communities of them. Their population is around 4,000. They are indicated on the map in color no. 6.

The Atás (from itaas, ataas, atás, “those who live on the heights”) are the indigenous natives who generally live about the western districts of Mount Apo.38 They are warlike and fight against the Moros and the Bagobos. The Atás extend to the northwest of Dávao, and in their ramifications finally reach to the borders of the Bagobos, Guiangas, Mandayas, and even to the Subanos and the Monteses of Cagayan and Maguindánao. The number of this tribe is unknown, even approximately, but it is conjectured with foundation that it must be very numerous. In the map they occupy the place corresponding to color no. 7.

The Atás (from itaas, ataas, atás, “those who live on the heights”) are the indigenous people who mainly live in the western areas around Mount Apo.38 They are known for being fierce and often go to battle against the Moros and the Bagobos. The Atás extend northwest of Dávao, and their territory eventually reaches the borders of the Bagobos, Guiangas, Mandayas, and even the Subanos and Monteses of Cagayan and Maguindánao. The number of this tribe is not known, even approximately, but it is reasonably believed to be quite large. On the map, they occupy the area corresponding to color no. 7.

The Guiangas39 (guanga, gulanga “inhabitant of the woods”) live, according to Father Gisbert, scattered between the rivers and rancherías of Dulían, Guimálan, Tamúgan, Ceril, and Biao near Dávao, and they number about 6,400. Their dialect is entirely different from those of the others, and they show sufficient intelligence, but they are very barbarous, and human sacrifices are still held among them. In the map they occupy color no. 8. [279]

The Guiangas39 (guanga, gulanga “inhabitant of the woods”) live, according to Father Gisbert, scattered between the rivers and rancherías of Dulían, Guimálan, Tamúgan, Ceril, and Biao near Dávao, and they number about 6,400. Their dialect is completely different from those of the others, and they show enough intelligence, but they are quite primitive, and human sacrifices are still practiced among them. On the map, they occupy color no. 8. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Bagobos40 inhabit the eastern slopes of the Apo. They are of moderate stature, and well built, for the deformed children are smothered at birth. They are fond of work. They perform human sacrifices in order to placate Daragó (Da-dagó, Du-dugó, Mu-dugó, “he who sheds blood,” or “the shedder of blood”) or Mandarangan. They believe in two beginnings, are difficult to reduce, and easy to keep after reduction. They are warlike and cruel, excellent horsemen, and daring fishermen. They dress luxuriantly, and at times wear shirts which cost them two or three slaves. They drink íntus (the sap of the fermented sugar-cane) and offer it when they make visits to all those in the assembly beginning with the most worthy. The number of the Bagobos, according to Father Gisbert, is about 12,000, of whom 800 have been reduced and baptized. In the map they are found at color no. 9.

The Bagobos inhabit the eastern slopes of Mount Apo. They are of average height and well-built, as deformed children are smothered at birth. They enjoy working. They perform human sacrifices to appease Daragó (Da-dagó, Du-dugó, Mu-dugó, “he who sheds blood,” or “the shedder of blood”) or Mandarangan. They believe in two beginnings, are hard to conquer, and easy to manage once subdued. They are aggressive and fierce, excellent horse riders, and daring fishermen. They dress lavishly and sometimes wear shirts that cost them two or three slaves. They drink íntus (the sap of fermented sugar-cane) and offer it when visiting everyone in the assembly, starting with the most respected. According to Father Gisbert, the Bagobos number about 12,000, of whom 800 have been converted and baptized. On the map, they are marked with color no. 9.

The Caláganes41 are not Moros. Their captain and all his family have been baptized, and, in consequence of that, a new reduction has been formed from the individuals of this tribe in Dígos, between Píapi and Santa Cruz. They are fine fellows and very tractable. In the map they occupy the color corresponding to no. 10.

The Caláganes41 are not Moros. Their captain and his whole family have been baptized, which has led to the creation of a new group formed from this tribe in Dígos, located between Píapi and Santa Cruz. They are great guys and very easy to deal with. On the map, they are marked in the color for no. 10.

The Tagacaolos42 (taga-ca-olo, “inhabitant of the head,” or “source of rivers”) are as capable as the Bagobos, without being as cruel and superstitious [280]as they. In their contests they are generally very valiant especially those who are widowed; for to become a murderer is a good recommendation for the contraction of second nuptials. The Tagacaolos are of good figure and of a somewhat clearer complexion than those of the other tribes with the exception of the Mandayas. The Tagacaolos occupy the mountains of Haguimítan in the small peninsula or the cape of San Agustin. Between Malálag, Malita, and Lais, are found 7,000 and about 2,000 in the peninsula of San Agustin. There is a small village of this tribe in Malálag of those newly reduced, which has already 186 Christians. The Loac are wild Tagacaolos still more degraded than the Mamanuas who live on the heights of Haguimítan. In the map they will be found at color no. 11.

The Tagacaolos (42) (taga-ca-olo, “inhabitant of the head” or “source of rivers”) are just as skilled as the Bagobos but are not as cruel or superstitious [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]. In competitions, they are typically very brave, especially the widowed ones; becoming a murderer is seen as a good reason to remarry. The Tagacaolos have a good physique and a somewhat lighter complexion compared to other tribes, except for the Mandayas. They inhabit the Haguimítan mountains on the small peninsula or cape of San Agustin. There are around 7,000 of them between Malálag, Malita, and Lais, with about 2,000 in the San Agustin peninsula. A small village of recently converted Tagacaolos in Malálag has 186 Christians. The Loac are wild Tagacaolos, even more disadvantaged than the Mamanuas who reside on the heights of Haguimítan. On the map, they are marked in color no. 11.

The Dulanganes (Gulanganes) called also Bangal-bangal, like the Manguangas, are people of the woods, and live in the mountains, about fifteen leguas from the Rio Grande, toward the southern coast. They are savage and fierce, and the Moros themselves who do not dare to meddle with them call them a bad race. It could be that the so cried-up ferocity of the Dulanganes bugaboo was invented by the Moros for their own ends, according to a note in one of the letters of Father Moré. Their number is unknown. They go completely naked, and for the most indispensable covering they use a kind of small apron made of bark or the leaves of trees. Their food is the same as that of the Mamanuas. They do not have houses either, and live in caves or inside the trunks of trees, or like the Mamanuas. Their weapons are usually arrows poisoned as I have heard with the curare. Is this perchance the same curare that [281]is discussed by Father Gumilla in his Orinoco ilustrado?43 They will be found at color no. 12 in the map.

The Dulanganes (Gulanganes), also known as Bangal-bangal, like the Manguangas, are people of the forest who live in the mountains, about fifteen leguas from the Rio Grande, toward the southern coast. They are wild and fierce, and even the Moros, who do not dare to engage with them, refer to them as a bad race. It's possible that the notorious ferocity of the Dulanganes was exaggerated by the Moros for their own purposes, according to a note in one of Father Moré's letters. Their population is unknown. They go completely naked, and for the most essential covering, they use a type of small apron made from bark or leaves. Their food is similar to that of the Mamanuas. They don't have houses either, living in caves or the trunks of trees, similar to the Mamanuas. Their weapons are usually poisoned arrows, which I have heard are made with curare. Is this possibly the same curare that [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] is discussed by Father Gumilla in his Orinoco illustrated? 43 They will be found at color no. 12 in the map.

The Tedurayes or Tirurayes44 live on the slopes at the left of the lower Pulangui. They number from 8,000 to 10,000 at the most. They occupy on the map the place corresponding to color no. 13. They are amiable, friendly to the Spaniards, but oppressed by the Moros. Their fear of molestation from the Moros together with their nomadic tendencies, due to the lack of carabaos and farm implements, make their complete reduction difficult at present. Their system of government is patriarchal, and the chief of the tribe is called bandarra. They pay their tributes to the Moro datos as an annual rent for the lands which they cultivate. The women adorn their hands and legs in an insupportable manner, with huge brass rings; and they pierce their ears in which they place pendants more than one centimeter in diameter. The men allow their hair to grow like the heathens of other tribes, but do not tie it up like those tribes. Their weapons and industry show the influence that they have received from the Moros. They gird the body with belts interwoven [282]from brass wire a decimeter or so in width. Their religion is a shapeless aggregation of superstitious ideas. It is not accurate to say that the Tirurayes have so low an idea of their self respect that they believe themselves to be honored in prostituting their wives and daughters with the Spaniards. Given the supposition of some isolated deed which might seem to prove the abovesaid, a general rule could not be deduced therefrom against the integrity of the customs of the Tirurayes in this matter, against which the nature itself, not only of man but also of the brute animals themselves, cries out with a loud voice.

The Tedurayes or Tirurayes44 live on the slopes to the left of the lower Pulangui. Their population is between 8,000 and 10,000 at most. On the map, they occupy the area marked with color no. 13. They are friendly towards the Spaniards but are oppressed by the Moros. Their fear of trouble from the Moros, along with their nomadic lifestyle due to a lack of water buffalo and farming tools, makes it hard for them to settle completely at this time. Their government system is patriarchal, and the tribe leader is called bandarra. They pay tributes to the Moro datos as an annual rent for the land they farm. The women embellish their hands and legs excessively with large brass rings and pierce their ears to wear pendants that are more than one centimeter in diameter. The men let their hair grow like the pagans of other tribes, but they don’t tie it up like those tribes do. Their weapons and crafts show the influence they’ve received from the Moros. They wear belts made from brass wire about a decimeter wide. Their religion is a confusing mix of superstitious beliefs. It's not accurate to say that the Tirurayes have such a low sense of self-respect that they feel honored by letting their wives and daughters engage with the Spaniards. While there may be isolated incidents that seem to support this idea, it’s incorrect to make a general claim about the integrity of the Tirurayes' customs in this regard, which goes against the very nature of humanity, as well as that of animals themselves, which is loud and clear.

The Tagabili or Taga-bulú are, together with the Bilanes, the owners of the lake of Bulú-an, and live on the southern shore of that lake. This tribe is warlike and friendly to the Moros, Tirurayes, and Manobos, who live near them. The Moros of Sarangani are wont to ally themselves with the Bilanes of Bálud and Tumánao in order to fight against the Tagabilíes. I believe that their reduction will be as easy as is that of the Bilanes. In the map they occupy the place corresponding to no. 14.

The Tagabili or Taga-bulú, along with the Bilanes, own the lake of Bulú-an and live on its southern shore. This tribe is both fierce and friendly with the Moros, Tirurayes, and Manobos who live nearby. The Moros from Sarangani often join forces with the Bilanes from Bálud and Tumánao to fight against the Tagabilíes. I think controlling them will be as simple as it is with the Bilanes. On the map, they are located in the area marked as no. 14.

The Sámales45 of the island of Sámal near Dávao are Moro and Mandaya mestizos. They are brave and well inclined to the Spaniards. Their population reaches about 2,000. There is a new reduction of Christians in Sámal. They are not so [283]difficult to reduce as are the Moros. They occupy color no. 15 in the map.

The Sámales45 of the island of Sámal near Dávao are mixed ancestry between Moro and Mandaya. They are courageous and friendly towards the Spaniards. Their population is around 2,000. There’s a new group of Christians in Sámal. They are easier to convert than the Moros. They are located in color no. 15 on the map.

The Bilanes or Buluanes (Bil-an, Bul-u-an, Bulú-an)46 reside in the vicinity about the lake of Bulúan and in the mountains between the said lake and the bay of Sarangani. They are the most exploited tribe and the most degraded physically except the Mamanuas. They are fugitive, timid, docile, amiable, and easy to reduce. In two of the islands of Sarangani, Bálud and Tumánao, live also about 1,500 Bilanes who maintain good relations with those of their race in Mindanao, and with the Manobos of Culáman. They occupy color no. 16 on the map.

The Bilanes or Buluanes (Bil-an, Bul-u-an, Bulú-an)46 live near the lake of Buluan and in the mountains between the lake and Sarangani Bay. They are the most exploited tribe and the most physically degraded, apart from the Mamanuas. They are fleeing, shy, docile, friendly, and easy to control. On two islands in Sarangani, Bálud and Tumánao, there are also about 1,500 Bilanes who have good relations with their people in Mindanao and with the Manobos of Culáman. They are marked as color no. 16 on the map.

The Subánon (“people of the river”)47 are a tribe that has become degenerate because of the persecutions which they have had to endure from the Moros who collect large tributes from them. They are husbandmen, but the Moros gain the benefit of their sweat. They are long-suffering and pacific for they are not accustomed to the handling of arms; and they are superstitious and ignorant. Their docility would render their complete reduction very easy. They occupy almost all the peninsula of Sibuguey, and are contiguous to the Moros of Lánao and of the bay of Illana. The latter make use of them, for they enslave them in order to make them work their fields. The military road from Tucúran [284]to Maránding which has been ordered to be built by his Excellency, Captain-general Terrero,48 will destroy the dominion exercised by the Illanos Moros and those of Lánao over the Subanos, for it will destroy the piracy and captivity because of the impossibility of communication. At the same time it will facilitate the action of the missionaries in the reduction of the said heathens. At the present time there are five reductions of Subanos in the Dapitan district, which have about 2,000 new Christians; another in the Zamboanga district in the jurisdiction of Ayala; while three reductions have already been begun successfully on the bay of Sibuguey, namely, Tupilak, Bulúan, and Bancálan. The Subanos are designated on the map at color no. 17.

The Subánon ("people of the river")47 are a tribe that has declined due to the persecutions they've faced from the Moros, who impose heavy tributes on them. They are farmers, but the Moros benefit from their hard work. They are patient and peaceful, as they are not used to handling weapons; they are also superstitious and uneducated. Their submissiveness would make their total domination quite easy. They inhabit almost the entire Sibuguey peninsula and are near the Moros of Lánao and the bay of Illana. The latter exploit them, enslaving them to work in their fields. The military road from Tucúran [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] to Maránding, which has been ordered by His Excellency, Captain-general Terrero,48 will undermine the control that the Illano Moros and those of Lánao have over the Subánon, as it will put an end to piracy and captivity due to the inability to communicate. At the same time, it will assist missionaries in their efforts to convert these non-Christians. Currently, there are five Subánon settlements in the Dapitan district, which have about 2,000 new Christians; another one in the Zamboanga district under Ayala's jurisdiction; while three settlements have already been successfully established on the bay of Sibuguey, namely, Tupilak, Bulúan, and Bancálan. The Subánon are marked on the map with color no. 17.

The Lutangos Moros are Calibuganes. They are of a timid and peaceful nature and live in Silanga de la Olutanga. They engage in fishing, and have no other dwelling, according to Figueroa, than their vintas in which they live. Each family carries with it its miserable possessions, and they pass years without setting foot on the land for even the fuel that they need is furnished by the mangrove trees. They [285]generally go naked. Their number does not exceed three or four hundred. On the map they occupy color no. 20.

The Lutangos Moros are Calibuganes. They are timid and peaceful people who live in Silanga de la Olutanga. They fish for a living and, according to Figueroa, have no other homes than their vintas, where they reside. Each family carries their few belongings with them, often spending years without stepping on land because even the fuel they need comes from the mangrove trees. They [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]typically go without clothes. Their population is no more than three or four hundred. On the map, they are shown in color no. 20.

The Calibuganes are Moro and Subano mestizos, who are peaceful and but little warlike. They share in the religion of the Moros which is altered by the superstitions of the Subanos. They are considered by the Moros as a free people, and hence the latter only exact from them personal service with their vintas. That runs at the account of the datos, on whom depend the maintenance of the same people. They live in small groups on the coasts of the peninsula of Sibuguey and occupy color number 21 on the map.

The Calibuganes are a mix of Moro and Subano backgrounds, who are peaceful and not very warlike. They practice the religion of the Moros, but it's influenced by the superstitions of the Subanos. The Moros consider them a free people, so they only require personal service from them with their boats. This is the responsibility of the datos, who are responsible for the upkeep of these communities. They live in small groups along the coasts of the Sibuguey peninsula and are marked as color number 21 on the map.

Moros. The Moros compared to the Christians of Filipinas, are what the Jebusites are to the village of God. Consecrated to piracy and the taking of captives since the beginning of their installation in Joló and Mindanao that profession has always been for them the most solid support of their formidable power. Until 1860 when eighteen steamboats came to this archipelago it was impossible to break their indomitable pride, and assure communication with the sea of Mindoro. Later with the increase of the navy and the installation of the steamship post it has become impossible for those people to leave their lurking places in order to practice their infamous raids. The expeditions of General Claveria against the Moros of Balanguingui; those of Urbistondo and Malcampo, against the Moros of Joló;49 and the [286]definitive establishment of our forts in Dávao, Rio Grande, and Joló, have given the deathblow to Mahometanism in the archipelago,50 and it is now become shrunken to the reducible circle of the territory that they overlook, and in that of the heathen rancherías which surround them, where the beneficent influence of the Spanish domination has not yet been able to penetrate in an efficacious and immediate manner. Nevertheless the Moros will be from today and forever under the vigilant eye of the victorious Lion of Castilla, so that they may not commit any offenses outside. The day on which the missionaries shall have succeeded in planting the cross among the heathens who surround the Moros, then the latter deprived of the slaves who cultivate the earth for them and clothe them, erect their houses, and serve them as an object of luxury and trade, will [287]on that day see their necessity to change the campilan and the kris for the ploughshare and the plough, the fierce arrogance of the warrior or pirate, for the pacific gentleness of the man who is forced to gain his bread by the sweat of his brow.

Morons. The Moros compared to the Christians of the Philippines are like the Jebusites to the village of God. Dedicated to piracy and capturing people since they settled in Jolo and Mindanao, this way of life has always been their strongest support for their significant power. Until 1860, when eighteen steamboats arrived in this archipelago, it was impossible to break their unyielding pride and ensure communication with the sea of Mindoro. Later, with the growth of the navy and the establishment of steamship posts, it became difficult for these people to emerge from their hiding places to conduct their infamous raids. The campaigns led by General Claveria against the Moros of Balanguingui, and those by Urbistondo and Malcampo against the Moros of Jolo, along with the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] definitive establishment of our forts in Davao, Rio Grande, and Jolo, have dealt a severe blow to Islam in the archipelago, reducing it to a small area of land they control, and the surrounding pagan ranches where the positive influence of Spanish rule has yet to be effectively established. Nevertheless, from now on, the Moros will remain under the watchful eye of the victorious Lion of Castilla, ensuring they do not commit any offenses outside. The day that missionaries successfully establish the cross among the pagans surrounding the Moros, the latter, deprived of the slaves who till the land for them, build their homes, and serve as objects of luxury and trade, will [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] on that day realize their need to exchange the campilan and the kris for the plow and the plowshare, and replace the fierce pride of the warrior or pirate with the peaceful gentleness of someone who has to earn a living by working hard.

The worst Moros are those of Joló and some rancherías of the coasts of Basílan called Sámal Laut (see color no. 23); the Illanos (no. 18), who occupy the bay of Illana which gives them their name, and who form a few groups on the coasts of Sibuguey; those of the lake of Lánao; those of the valley of the Rio Grande; and those of the coast between Cottabato and the gulf of Sarangani.

The worst Moros are those from Joló and some towns along the coasts of Basílan called Sámal Laut (see color no. 23); the Illanos (no. 18), who live by Illana Bay after which they are named, and who have a few groups on the coasts of Sibuguey; those from Lake Lánao; those from the valley of the Rio Grande; and those along the coast between Cottabato and the Gulf of Sarangani.

The most pacific are the Yácanes Moros (no. 22) of the interior of Basílan; the Sánguiles (number 19); and those of Sarangani, except some who have come from the Rio Grande. The Moros of the gulf of Dávao and Mayo are not feared both because of their isolation and their small number.

The most peaceful are the Yácanes Moros (no. 22) from the interior of Basílan; the Sánguiles (number 19); and those from Sarangani, except for a few who have come from the Rio Grande. The Moros from the Dávao and Mayo gulf areas aren't feared due to their isolation and small population.

[Continuing Father Pastells speaks of the ethnographical map that accompanies this volume of the Letters. He mentions the fact that Blumentritt published a map of like character in 1884. The present map is made from information obtained directly by the Jesuit missionaries. Concrete information as to the various dialects is still in so incipient a condition that nothing can as yet be written definitely on the subject, but Father Pastells holds out the hope that such information may be given in the near future.] [288]

[Continuing, Father Pastells talks about the ethnographic map that comes with this volume of the Letters. He points out that Blumentritt published a similar map in 1884. This current map is created using information gathered directly by the Jesuit missionaries. Detailed information about the various dialects is still developing, so nothing can be written definitively on the topic yet, but Father Pastells remains hopeful that such information may be available soon.] [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]


1 The Carolinas were discovered first by the Portuguese navigator, Diogo da Rocha, in 1525, and different groups of them were seen by early Spanish navigators. In 1686, one of them was discovered by the Spanish admiral, Francisco Lezcano, who named it Carolina, in honor of Cárlos II, and the whole archipelago finally took its name from it. They number about 525 islands counting reefs and uninhabited rocks, and contain about 525 square miles. In the beginning of the eighteenth century they were entirely abandoned by Spain, and were only brought back to public notice in the beginning of the nineteenth century through several scientific expeditions. Gradually German commercial interests became paramount, and in 1885 the German flag was hoisted in the island of Yap in the presence of two Spanish gunboats. The pope arbitrating on the matter declared that the islands belonged to Spain, but gave special privileges to Germany. In 1899, the Carolinas, Palaos, and all of the Ladrones except Guam were ceded to Germany in payment of 16,750,000 marks. See Montero y Vidal’s Archipiélago, pp. 483–505 (who gives the propositions submitted by the pope); Gregorio Miguel’s Estudio sobre las islas Carolinas; and New International Encyclopædia.

1 The Carolinas were first discovered by the Portuguese navigator, Diogo da Rocha, in 1525, and different groups were encountered by early Spanish navigators. In 1686, one of these islands was discovered by the Spanish admiral, Francisco Lezcano, who named it Carolina in honor of Carlos II, and the entire archipelago eventually took its name from that. There are about 525 islands when counting reefs and uninhabited rocks, covering approximately 525 square miles. At the start of the eighteenth century, Spain completely abandoned them, and they only regained public attention in the early nineteenth century through several scientific expeditions. Gradually, German commercial interests became dominant, and in 1885, the German flag was raised on the island of Yap in front of two Spanish gunboats. The pope, who mediated in the situation, declared that the islands belonged to Spain but granted special privileges to Germany. In 1899, the Carolinas, Palaos, and all of the Ladrones except Guam were ceded to Germany for 16,750,000 marks. See Montero y Vidal’s Archipiélago, pp. 483–505 (which presents the proposals submitted by the pope); Gregorio Miguel’s Estudio sobre las islas Carolinas; and New International Encyclopædia.

2 The volcano of Apo is located on the highest summit of the Philippines, which is 10,311 ft. high. The first to attempt its ascent was José Oyangúren in 1859, but he failed. It was first ascended in 1880 by Montano, Joaquin Rajal, and Mateo Gisbert, S. J. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 202–204.

2 The volcano of Apo is situated at the highest peak in the Philippines, standing at 10,311 ft. The first person to try to climb it was José Oyangúren in 1859, but he didn't succeed. It was first successfully climbed in 1880 by Montano, Joaquin Rajal, and Mateo Gisbert, S. J. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 202–204.

3 The Bilans are an exceedingly timid and wild people, fleeing, it is said, even from Moros with whom they are unacquainted. They inhabit the mountains south and west of Lake Bulúan, in South Mindanao, their range being southeast of that of the Tirurayes. Their religion is a sort of demon worship and they are very superstitious. They do not live in communities but each family by itself in a house at least one-half mile from any other house. The brief examination of those houses by Lieutenant H. Rodgers of the Philippine scouts, leads to the belief that the Bilans are a race superior to the Moro, being more cleanly, industrious, and more wealthy. The Moros do not allow them to trade direct with the Chinese merchants. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 560, 561.

3 The Bilans are a very shy and wild group of people, reportedly escaping even from unfamiliar Moros. They live in the mountains to the south and west of Lake Bulúan in South Mindanao, their territory being southeast of that of the Tirurayes. Their beliefs include a form of demon worship, and they are quite superstitious. Instead of living in communities, each family resides alone in a house that is at least half a mile away from any other house. A brief look at these houses by Lieutenant H. Rodgers of the Philippine scouts suggests that the Bilans are a race superior to the Moros, as they are cleaner, more hardworking, and wealthier. The Moros do not permit them to trade directly with Chinese merchants. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 560, 561.

4 Dr. Barrows says (Census of Philippines, i, p. 461): “Manobo is a native word which, in the Bagobo language on the Gulf of Dávao, means ‘man.’ It is so given in Padre Gisbert’s vocabulary and also in a special vocabulary taken for the ethnological survey. Blumentritt, however, suggests—and I believe with merit—that Manobo here in Northern Mindanao is a derivation of Manubo, which is itself derived from Masuba, meaning ‘people of the river.’ This term Manobo should be retained for all of this great group living along the affluents and tributary streams of the river Agusan, and the term might, with propriety, I believe, be extended to the Montes farther west and back of Misamis. If there are objections to applying the term Manobo to these pagans of Misamis, I would suggest the application of our general term Bukidnon.”

4 Dr. Barrows says (Census of Philippines, i, p. 461): “Manobo is a native word that, in the Bagobo language on the Gulf of Dávao, means ‘man.’ It is mentioned in Padre Gisbert’s vocabulary and also in a special vocabulary created for the ethnological survey. However, Blumentritt suggests—and I believe he has a valid point—that Manobo, as used here in Northern Mindanao, comes from Manubo, which itself comes from Masuba, meaning ‘people of the river.’ This term Manobo should be used for this large group living along the tributaries of the Agusan River, and I believe it could also be appropriately extended to the Montes farther west, behind Misamis. If there are concerns about applying the term Manobo to these pagans of Misamis, I would suggest the use of our broader term Bukidnon.”

5 This letter is addressed directly to the superior of the mission.

5 This letter is written directly to the head of the mission.

6 On the prevailing custom of making slaves among the peoples in Mindanao, Father Gisbert says in a letter written May 20, 1886 (Cartas, Manila, 1887): “The slavehunt is not always easy. By availing themselves of tricks and surprises, they can generally capture the old people, women, and the children easily. They first kill those who can make any resistance.”

6 Regarding the common practice of enslaving people in Mindanao, Father Gisbert mentions in a letter dated May 20, 1886 (Cartas, Manila, 1887): “The slave hunt isn’t always straightforward. By using tricks and ambushes, they can usually capture the elderly, women, and children with ease. They first eliminate those who might put up any resistance.”

7 Literally “shields.” That is, the rice was measured into the shield.

7 Literally “shields.” That is, the rice was measured into the shield.

8 i.e., So so, or, just as it was.

8 i.e., So so, or, just like it was.

9 On the Moros, see Census of Philippines, i, pp. 465–467, 561–585.

9 For information on the Moros, refer to Census of Philippines, vol. i, pages 465–467, 561–585.

10 The Yakan are a primitive Malayan tribe of the same type and general culture as the Subanon of the Mindanao mainland, who live in Basilan, and who, some generations ago, accepted the Mahometan faith and are fanatical adherents thereof. They live scattered over the island cultivating a little maize, rice, and tapioca, bringing out some jungle product, but living as a whole miserably and in poverty. Some of them have migrated to the peninsula of Zamboanga and the islands adjacent to this coast. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 465, 466.

10 The Yakan are a primitive Malay tribe similar in type and culture to the Subanon of the Mindanao mainland. They live in Basilan and, several generations ago, adopted the Islamic faith, to which they are fiercely devoted. They are scattered across the island, growing small amounts of corn, rice, and tapioca, and gathering some products from the jungle, but overall, they live in poverty and hardship. Some have migrated to the Zamboanga peninsula and the nearby islands. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 465, 466.

11 According to Census of Philippines, the population of the comandancia of Basilan is 30,179, of whom 28,848 are uncivilized.

11 According to Census of Philippines, the population of the comandancia of Basilan is 30,179, with 28,848 classified as uncivilized.

12 Among the Sámal Laút boys are trained for the priesthood by making their homes with priests, where they remain for several years in the capacity of servant and pupil. Occasionally, when grown they are sent to Singapore for continuous study, but such cases are rare. If a man goes to Mekka he is given the honorable title of pilgrim and is held in high consideration. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 571.

12 Among the Sámal Laút boys, they are trained for the priesthood by living with priests, where they stay for several years as both servants and students. Sometimes, when they are older, they are sent to Singapore for further study, but these instances are uncommon. If a man travels to Mecca, he earns the honorable title of pilgrim and is highly respected. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 571.

13 i.e., A distance of two palm-lengths.

13 i.e., A distance of two hand spans.

14 A dish made in the Philippines from the inner and harder shell of the cocoanut.—See Echegaray’s Diccionario etimológico, and Noceda and Sanlucar’s Vocabulario de la lengua tagala.

14 A dish made in the Philippines from the tough inner shell of the coconut.—See Echegaray’s Diccionario etimológico, and Noceda and Sanlucar’s Vocabulario de la lengua tagala.

15 See beliefs and superstitions of the North American Indians in regard to eclipses in Jesuit Relations (Cleveland reissue), vi, p. 223, xii, pp. 31, 73, xxii, p. 295.

15 See the beliefs and superstitions of North American Indians about eclipses in Jesuit Relations (Cleveland reissue), vi, p. 223, xii, pp. 31, 73, xxii, p. 295.

16 The principal articles of food are rice, for which corn is sometimes substituted, fish, chickens, vegetables, wild fruits, and cocoanut oil. The natives are fond of chickens and eggs, and most families raise poultry for the table. Pork is forbidden by their faith, and the use of venison, or the flesh of the carabao, ox, sheep, or goat, is limited, the Moros being apparently not fond of meat. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 564.

16 The main foods include rice, which is sometimes swapped for corn, along with fish, chicken, vegetables, wild fruits, and coconut oil. The locals really like chicken and eggs, and most families raise poultry for meals. Pork is off-limits due to their beliefs, and the consumption of venison or meat from carabaos, cattle, sheep, or goats is limited, as the Moros don't seem to enjoy meat that much. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 564.

17 Cogon (Imperata koenigii) is a species of grass of general natural growth, the young shoots of which afford excellent food for cattle. The grass is used in some localities as a substitute for nipa, where the latter does not grow, in thatching roofs. The name “cogon” is applied to many coarse, rank-growing grasses. See Census of Philippines, iv, p. 118.

17 Cogon (Imperata koenigii) is a type of grass that grows naturally and has young shoots that are great food for cattle. In some areas, this grass is used instead of nipa for thatching roofs where nipa doesn’t grow. The term “cogon” is used for various coarse, fast-growing grasses. See Census of Philippines, iv, p. 118.

18 We give the verses in the original language with the Spanish translation of Father Pablo Cavallería, and add the English translation of the latter, which is necessarily crude.

18 We provide the verses in the original language along with the Spanish translation by Father Pablo Cavallería, and we include the English translation of the latter, which is inevitably rough.

19 An authority among the Moros, after the panglima, and as well a name denoting nobility of race and blood. See Cartas de ... la mision de Filipinas (Manila, 1887), p. 34, note.

19 A leader among the Moros, right after the panglima, and also a term that signifies nobility of lineage and heritage. See Cartas de ... la mision de Filipinas (Manila, 1887), p. 34, note.

20 The letter occupies pp. 326–349, and is accompanied by an ethnographical map (which we do not reproduce) made by the fathers of the Society of Jesuits. Our extract relates to the ethnology of Mindanao, and occupies pp. 336–349.

20 The letter spans pages 326–349 and includes an ethnographic map (which we haven't included) created by the Jesuit fathers. Our excerpt focuses on the ethnology of Mindanao and covers pages 336–349.

21 Dr. Barrows (Census of Philippines, i, pp. 462, 463), says in speaking of the tribes of Mindanao that the term Indonesian has been applied to some of them to explain their higher stature and finer physique, which means that they are connected with people of mixed Caucasian blood, who were in primitive times distributed across the Malay Archipelago, and who find their purest living type in the Polynesians. He does not accept the evidence, as the perceptible gain in height among such peoples is not apparently accompanied by the other distinguishing marks of the Caucasian or Polynesian, and consequently regards them as Malayan. See also Le Roy’s Philippine Life (New York, 1905), p. 20.

21 Dr. Barrows (Census of Philippines, i, pp. 462, 463) states that when discussing the tribes of Mindanao, the term Indonesian has been used for some of them to explain their taller stature and better physique. This implies a connection to people of mixed Caucasian ancestry who were historically spread across the Malay Archipelago, with the purest existing representatives found among the Polynesians. However, he does not accept this evidence, noting that the noticeable increase in height among these groups is not matched by other distinguishing features of Caucasian or Polynesian origins, so he considers them to be Malayan. See also Le Roy’s Philippine Life (New York, 1905), p. 20.

22 See laws of the Sámal Laút in regard to family and social life in Census of Philippines, i, p. 569.

22 See laws of the Sámal Laút about family and social life in Census of Philippines, i, p. 569.

23 The root of the plant gabe (Colocasia antiquorum variety) is highly prized and extensively cultivated, the leaves also being used as food. Of the resins and oils mentioned, piayo, also called conferal and galagala (Agathis orantifolia—Salisb.) is used for burning and lighting, and the manufacture of varnish; and balao or malapaho (Dipterocarpus velulinno—Bl.) is used for calking. See Census of Philippines, iv, pp. 121, 202, 221; and Philippine Gazetteer, p. 78.

23 The root of the plant gabe (Colocasia antiquorum variety) is highly valued and widely cultivated, and the leaves are also eaten as food. Among the resins and oils mentioned, piayo, also known as conferal and galagala (Agathis orantifolia—Salisb.), is used for burning and lighting, as well as for making varnish; balao or malapaho (Dipterocarpus velulinno—Bl.) is utilized for caulking. See Census of Philippines, iv, pp. 121, 202, 221; and Philippine Gazetteer, p. 78.

24 Cabo Negro (Caryota urens) is a palm from which a kind of starch or sago is extracted. The camagon (Diospyros discolor) is a native persimmon tree 30 to 45 ft. high growing in Luzón and some of the other islands. See Census of Philippines, iv, pp. 139, 143.

24 Cabo Negro (Caryota urens) is a palm tree that produces a type of starch or sago. The camagon (Diospyros discolor) is a native persimmon tree that grows between 30 and 45 feet tall in Luzón and some other islands. See Census of Philippines, iv, pp. 139, 143.

25 Salt is produced by evaporation, from a method taught prior to the coming of the Spaniards by the Chinese. Sea-water, enclosed in a depression surrounded by dykes, is evaporated by the sun’s rays; when the water has disappeared, the salt deposited on the floor of the basin is gathered up and cleaned by filtration. See Census of Philippines, iv, p. 469.

25 Salt is made by evaporation, following a technique that the Chinese taught before the Spaniards arrived. Sea water, trapped in a low area surrounded by dikes, is evaporated by the sun’s heat; once the water is gone, the salt left on the bottom of the basin is collected and filtered. See Census of Philippines, iv, p. 469.

26 This is the Musa sapientum, which is a variety of banana. This fiber is inferior to abacá. See Census of Philippines, iv, p. 167.

26 This is the Musa sapientum, which is a type of banana. This fiber is not as good as abacá. See Census of Philippines, iv, p. 167.

27 See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 566, 567, for the industrial life of the Moros. The occupation of smith is especially honorable.

27 See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 566, 567, for the industrial life of the Moros. Being a blacksmith is particularly respected.

28 The Coripha minor. Its trunk is black and very straight, and the wood is very hard. It is also used for making stockades and for conducting water. See Blanco, p. 161.

28 The Coripha minor. Its trunk is black and straight, and the wood is very tough. It’s also used for building stockades and for carrying water. See Blanco, p. 161.

29 Blanco describes a shrub called tubli, the fruit of which is very small, and which he does not believe to belong to the species Galactia under which he describes it. The lagtan or lactang (Anamirta cocculus) is a coarse woody plant whose stems are used for tying and binding. The wood is of a yellow color. It like the preceding plant makes the fish that eat mixtures containing it exhibit the appearance of intoxication so that they can be caught by the hand. The fruit is called bayati by the natives. See Census of Philippines, iv, p. 155; Blanco, pp. 411, 557, 558.

29 Blanco describes a shrub called tubli, which produces very small fruit and which he doubts belongs to the species Galactia that he categorizes it under. The lagtan or lactang (Anamirta cocculus) is a tough, woody plant whose stems are used for tying and binding. The wood has a yellow color. Similar to the previous plant, it causes fish that consume mixtures containing it to appear as if they're intoxicated, making them easy to catch by hand. The fruit is known as bayati by the locals. See Census of Philippines, iv, p. 155; Blanco, pp. 411, 557, 558.

30 The claims often put forward by many writers that some of the peoples of the Philippines arise from a mixture of Chinese and Japanese blood with the Malay have no foundation. The Chinese have, it is true, mingled with almost every tribe in the archipelago, but they have not given rise to a new tribe or race.

30 The claims often made by many writers that some of the peoples of the Philippines come from a mix of Chinese and Japanese ancestry along with Malay roots are unfounded. It's true that the Chinese have intermingled with nearly every tribe in the archipelago, but they have not created a new tribe or race.

31 i.e., They are a Negrito tribe.

31 i.e., They are a Negrito tribe.

32 This is the Calamus maximus, a very large species of rattan. See Blanco, pp. 185, 186; and Census of Philippines, iv, p. 159.

32 This is the Calamus maximus, a very large type of rattan. See Blanco, pp. 185, 186; and Census of Philippines, iv, p. 159.

33 See ante, p. 241, note 106.

33 See before, p. 241, note 106.

34 Throughout the friar chronicles and accounts the words “reduce” and “reduction” are frequently employed. As used the words have a rather wide application. The primary meaning is of course “conversion” to the Christian faith, but along with this idea must be understood the settlement of the converts in villages in a civilized manner, where they could be under the immediate eye of their spiritual directors. Hence the words bear in a sense a two-fold meaning—the one religious, and the other civil.

34 Throughout the friar chronicles and accounts, the terms “reduce” and “reduction” are often used. They have a fairly broad application. The main meaning is, of course, “conversion” to the Christian faith, but this also includes the idea of settling the converts in villages in an organized way, where they can be closely monitored by their spiritual leaders. Therefore, the terms carry a dual meaning—one religious and the other civil.

35 An allusion to Joseph Montano’s Rapport à M. le ministre de l’instruction publique sur une Mission aux Îles Philippines et en Malaise (Paris, 1885). Of him Pardo de Tavera says (Biblioteca filipino, p. 270): “Doctor Montano is a French anthropologist and physician.... This book is very important and the author divides it into five parts, namely, geology, meteorology, anthropology, pathology, and dialects and political geography, with a few notices regarding agriculture and commerce. The most important chapters are those relating to anthropology and linguistics.”

35 This refers to Joseph Montano’s Rapport à M. le ministre de l’instruction publique sur une Mission aux Îles Philippines et en Malaise (Paris, 1885). Pardo de Tavera states (Biblioteca filipino, p. 270): “Doctor Montano is a French anthropologist and physician.... This book is very significant and the author breaks it into five sections: geology, meteorology, anthropology, pathology, and dialects and political geography, along with some notes on agriculture and commerce. The most crucial sections are those about anthropology and linguistics.”

36 Census of Philippines, i, p. 473, calls these people a branch of the Mandayas.

36 Census of Philippines, i, p. 473, refers to these people as a branch of the Mandayas.

37 Dr. Barrows (Census of Philippines, i, p. 460) restricts the term “Buquidnon” to mountain-dwellers in Luzón and the Visayas, who escaped reduction when those islands were christianized. The term “Buquidnon” means “people of the mountain forest.”

37 Dr. Barrows (Census of Philippines, i, p. 460) limits the term "Buquidnon" to mountain dwellers in Luzón and the Visayas, who avoided being assimilated when those islands were Christianized. The term "Buquidnon" translates to "people of the mountain forest."

38 These are the Negritos. Aetas is the oldest known name for that people. It is probably derived from the Tagálog word itim, “black.” In many places the Negrito seems to have disappeared by absorption into the conquering Malay race. There are about 23,000 of them still in the islands. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 468, 478, 532, 533.

38 These are the Negritos. Aetas is the oldest known name for this group. It likely comes from the Tagálog word itim, meaning “black.” In many areas, the Negrito appears to have vanished by merging with the conquering Malay race. There are about 23,000 of them still in the islands. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 468, 478, 532, 533.

39 Dr. Barrows (Census, i, p. 471) calls this people a division of the Bagobos.

39 Dr. Barrows (Census, i, p. 471) refers to this group as a division of the Bagobos.

40 The Bagobos, together with the Moros and Mandayas, are migratory in habit, though they do not leave the province. They are said to be fire worshipers. The blood feud prevails. The Ocacola Bagobos have discontinued their annual sacrifice which they would eat. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 462, 463, 531.

40 The Bagobos, along with the Moros and Mandayas, tend to migrate, although they remain within the province. They are believed to practice fire worship. Blood feuds are common. The Ocacola Bagobos have stopped their annual sacrifice that they would consume. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 462, 463, 531.

41 Called by Barrows (Census, i, p. 470) a Bagobo tribe.

41 Referred to by Barrows (Census, i, p. 470) as a Bagobo tribe.

42 See ante, p. 199, note 84.

42 See above, p. 199, note 84.

43 A more complete title of this book by Jose Gumilla, S. J., is, El Orinoco ilustrado, historia natural, civil, y geographica, de este gran rio ... govierno, usos y costumbres de los Indios sus habitadores (Madrid, 1741).

43 A fuller title of this book by Jose Gumilla, S. J., is, El Orinoco ilustrado, historia natural, civil, y geographica, de este gran rio ... govierno, usos y costumbres de los Indios sus habitadores (Madrid, 1741).

44 See ante, p. 197, note 82. Pardo de Tavera derives Tiruray from atew rooter, “people living above,” that is, “up the river.” This branch of the Manobos are described by First Lieut. G. S. Turner, Tenth U. S. Infantry, who collected information for the Census among them, “as ignorant, shiftless savages ruled by superstitions and fear, with little moral or legal restraint upon their desires or passions. They were formerly much preyed upon by Moros and Manobos, but they are troubled no longer in this respect.” See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 462, 549–552.

44 See ante, p. 197, note 82. Pardo de Tavera derives Tiruray from atew rooter, “people living above,” which means, “up the river.” This branch of the Manobos is described by First Lieutenant G. S. Turner, Tenth U.S. Infantry, who gathered information for the Census among them, “as uneducated, aimless individuals ruled by superstitions and fear, with very little moral or legal restraint on their desires or passions. They were previously heavily targeted by Moros and Manobos, but they are no longer facing that issue.” See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 462, 549–552.

45 The Sámal are an exceedingly important element in the Sulu Archipelago. Their former locus, where the pure Sámal dialect was spoken, is in the islands between Basilan and Joló, especially Tonguil and Balanguingui. These were the very latest pirate haunts to be broken up by the Spaniards. The Sámal are now scattered along the coast of Zamboanga and nearly everywhere in the archipelago of Sulu. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 475.

45 The Sámal are a very important group in the Sulu Archipelago. Their original area, where the pure Sámal dialect was spoken, is in the islands between Basilan and Joló, especially Tonguil and Balanguingui. These were the last pirate hideouts to be eliminated by the Spaniards. The Sámal are now spread along the coast of Zamboanga and almost everywhere in the Sulu archipelago. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 475.

46 It is the custom among the heathen to change, suppress, and add vowels. For example: biñag for buñag, “baptism;” bidi for budi, “girl;” isug for usug, “man;” buhay for bahay, “woman;” guianga for guanga, “forest;” inay for ina, “mother;” budiay for budi; di for dili, “no;” etc.—Pablo Pastells, S. J.

46 It’s a common practice among non-believers to change, drop, and add vowels. For example: biñag instead of buñag, “baptism;” bidi instead of budi, “girl;” isug instead of usug, “man;” buhay instead of bahay, “woman;” guianga instead of guanga, “forest;” inay instead of ina, “mother;” budiay instead of budi; di instead of dili, “no;” etc.—Pablo Pastells, S. J.

47 An important pagan tribe whose habitat is about the bay of Sibuguey and the bay of Dumanquilas. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 461, 462, 476.

47 An important pagan tribe that lives around the bay of Sibuguey and the bay of Dumanquilas. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 461, 462, 476.

48 “The campaign of General Terrero in 1887 against the Sultanates of Buhayen, Bacat, and Kuduranga in the ‘cuenca’ of the Pulangui resulted in the occupation of Liong, Bacat, and Kuduranga, taking possession likewise at this time of the cove of Pujaga (east coast) of the bay of Sarangani, the port of Lebak, and that of Santa Maria, commencing work on the trocha of Tukuran.” Memoria de Mindanao by Julian Gonzales Parrado.

48 “The campaign led by General Terrero in 1887 against the Sultanates of Buhayen, Bacat, and Kuduranga in the Pulangui region resulted in the capture of Liong, Bacat, and Kuduranga. At this time, they also took control of the cove of Pujaga (east coast) in Sarangani Bay, the port of Lebak, and the port of Santa Maria, beginning work on the Tukuran trocha.” Memoria de Mindanao by Julian Gonzales Parrado.

In 1902 two military roads were planned by General George W. Davis through Mindanao, one passing from the south and one from the north coast of Mindanao into the very heart of the Moro country, and meeting on the waters of Lake Lanao. See the story of the building of the roads by Major R. L. Bullard of the 28th U.S. Infantry, who is stationed at Iligan, Mindanao, in the Atlantic Monthly for December, 1903.

In 1902, General George W. Davis planned two military roads through Mindanao—one coming from the south coast and the other from the north coast, both leading into the heart of the Moro territory and meeting at Lake Lanao. Check out the story about the construction of these roads by Major R. L. Bullard of the 28th U.S. Infantry, who was stationed in Iligan, Mindanao, in the Atlantic Monthly for December 1903.

49 Governor Narciso Clavería personally conducted an expedition against the Moros in 1848. The three vessels were under command of José Ruiz de Apodaca, of the royal navy. He administered heavy defeats on the Moros at several points. The expedition of Antonio de Urbistondo against Joló was made in 1850–1851. The expedition of Jose Malcampo y Monje was made in 1875. By these three expeditions the Moro power was badly crippled. See Montero y Vidal, Historia de la piratería, and Historia general, iii.

49 Governor Narciso Clavería led an expedition against the Moros in 1848. The three ships were under the command of José Ruiz de Apodaca from the royal navy. He dealt significant defeats to the Moros at various locations. The expedition led by Antonio de Urbistondo against Joló took place in 1850–1851. The expedition of Jose Malcampo y Monje occurred in 1875. Together, these three expeditions severely weakened Moro power. See Montero y Vidal, Historia de la piratería, and Historia general, iii.

50 Speaking of the efforts of the Jesuits in Mindanao in his Memoria de Mindanao, Julian Gonzales Parrado says: “This proper zeal causes them, nevertheless, not to see this question clearly and leads them to an excusable optimism, but which gives them credit for the success obtained in so many years of preaching and teaching as to what relates to the Moros. In spite of their efforts, sacrifices, and infinite constancy, neither in Joló nor in Mindanao have they succeeded during the three centuries in causing to be admitted into the labarum of the Evangelist more than an insignificant number of Mahometans, and even of this small contingent of converts and baptized, nearly all have been observed to have abjured their new religion and returned to their former practices as soon as possible; or the interest or the danger that impelled them at receiving the baptism more than anything else, has ceased.” He concludes by saying that this is not to the discredit of the Jesuits, but due to the peculiarities of the Moros, and to their fanatic religion. It is advised that no forcible attempt be made to convert them, but that they adopt Christianity only if they so desire.

50 In his Memoria de Mindanao, Julian Gonzales Parrado discusses the efforts of the Jesuits in Mindanao, saying: “Their genuine enthusiasm makes it difficult for them to see this issue clearly and leads them to an understandable optimism, which gives them credit for the success they’ve had over many years of preaching and teaching regarding the Moros. Despite their efforts, sacrifices, and immense perseverance, neither in Joló nor in Mindanao have they managed, over three centuries, to bring more than a tiny number of Muslims into the fold of the Evangelist. Even among this small group of converts and baptisms, nearly all have been seen to abandon their new faith and return to their previous practices as soon as they could; or the motivation or risk that drove them to undergo baptism has faded.” He concludes by stating that this is not a failure on the part of the Jesuits, but is due to the unique characteristics of the Moros and their fervent religion. It is recommended that no forced attempts be made to convert them, but that they embrace Christianity only if they genuinely wish to.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Letter from Father José Maria Clotet to the Reverend Father Rector of the Ateneo Municipal

Pax Christi.

Peace of Christ.

My dearly beloved Father Rector in Christ:

My dearest Father Rector in Christ:

In my last letter to your Reverence, I indicated to you that I was gathering some data in regard to the religion, manners, and customs of the mountain race. Now during the days of our stay in Talisayan, I shall make use of my spare moments to write your Reverence what I have been able to learn in the various reductions and visitas of said heathens. In the present letter, however, I shall only give information of some interesting matters which are worth knowing, and are not unsuitable for a familiar letter.

In my last letter to you, I mentioned that I was collecting some information about the religion, customs, and ways of the mountain people. Now, during our days in Talisayan, I will take advantage of my free time to share with you what I've been able to learn in the different towns and places of these people. In this letter, though, I will only focus on a few interesting points that are worth knowing and fit for a casual letter.

In order to give the fullest information of the mountain race, I shall take in general the water farthest up, beginning with their name and with the territory which they occupy. I shall tell something of their religion, false beliefs, and peculiar customs, and, not forgetting their progress and their industries, I shall end by setting down, although in passing, the fruit which our missionaries have gathered in a short time among those heathens. I shall not [289]bind myself, however, to tell everything, but only some of the most remarkable things which have come to my notice.

To provide the most complete picture of the mountain people, I'll start with the water source farthest upstream, mentioning their name and the land they inhabit. I'll share some details about their religion, misconceptions, and unique customs, and I won't overlook their development and industries. I'll conclude by briefly noting the progress our missionaries have made in a short time among these people. However, I won’t promise to cover everything, just some of the most notable things I’ve observed.

The Monteses, recognized in Mindanao under the name of Buquidnons (inhabitants of the thicket), are found in the district of Misamis, and can be considered as divided into three main groups. The first embraces those who extend through the mountains and fertile plains bathed by the Tagoloan, Cagayán, and Iponan rivers. The second comprises the Colindantes with the Manobos of the Agusan between Gingóog and Nasípit. Those living on the right bank of the Pulangui River and along some of its affluents form the third group. They are shown at number 6 on the ethnographical map.1 From what I have just explained, it can be easily seen that, although the Buquidnons have some peculiarities which distinguish them from the other races, as is natural, yet they approach in the manner of their habitual social and religious existence, to the other races of this territory, as I shall note in the course of this brief relation. Their exact number is not known, but it can be calculated that they at present exceed 13,000. They are of good stature and graceful build, and even handsome. Their character is affable and frank, and some of them seem to me so clever and polished that they are not one whit behind the most civilized Visayans, and to judge by the frankness with which they speak to the father missionary, and by the naturalness with which they handle their affairs with the old Christians, no one would say that they were heathens. By the capacity [290]of their minds (as Father Urios very well remarked) they would be elevated as the kings of all the Manobos, since they surpass the latter so greatly. However, to tell the truth, one always recognized in heathens, whoever they may be, that their understanding is obscured and confused by false ideas which penetrate into all the acts of their life. In the race of which I am treating they are shown to be heathens by certain vices of egoism, their self-interest, and the satisfaction that they take. Blessed forever be the light of our holy faith which enlightens us with the true knowledge of God and of ourselves, and infuses us with self-abnegation and supernatural love for God and our neighbors!

The Monteses, known in Mindanao as the Buquidnons (people of the thicket), are located in the Misamis district and can be divided into three main groups. The first group consists of those living across the mountains and fertile plains along the Tagoloan, Cagayán, and Iponan rivers. The second group includes the Colindantes who live alongside the Manobos of Agusan between Gingóog and Nasípit. The third group is made up of those residing on the right bank of the Pulangui River and along some of its tributaries. They are marked as number 6 on the ethnographical map.1 From what I’ve just explained, it’s clear that while the Buquidnons have unique traits that set them apart from other races, they share similarities in their social and religious practices with the other groups in this area, as I will mention in this brief account. Their exact population isn’t known, but it’s estimated to be over 13,000. They are of good height, well-built, and even attractive. Their demeanor is friendly and straightforward, and some of them are so intelligent and refined that they are on par with the most civilized Visayans. Judging by their openness with the missionary and the ease with which they interact with the local Christians, you wouldn’t think they were pagans. According to their mental capabilities (as Father Urios noted), they could rise to be the leaders of all the Manobos, as they far surpass them. However, it must be said that one always notices in pagans, regardless of who they are, that their understanding is clouded and confused by misguided beliefs that affect all aspects of their lives. In this group, they exhibit traits of paganism through certain selfish vices, self-interest, and the satisfaction they derive from it. Blessed be the light of our holy faith, which illuminates us with true knowledge of God and ourselves, and instills in us selflessness and a supernatural love for God and our neighbors!

From what I have seen and heard I can assert that the dress of the Monteses is better than that of all the rest of the races of Mindanao in point of decorum and modesty, and in affirming this, I refer, not only to the men but also to the women. The skirts which the latter wear down to the ankles fasten securely at the waist their white shirt. Above this they wear another very short and well-fitting shirt on which they sew little bits of cloth of many different colors in the manner of fine patchwork. The sleeves are short and full and are ornamented in the same manner. They take pleasure in choosing the colors and designs with which to adorn their dress. On the left side of the girdle they hang rings and bundles of sweet-scented herbs mixed with glass beads and hawk’s-bells. Fine rings of copper, brass or silver on their legs hanging quite loosely, produce a certain sound when they walk, which invites the attention of him who is ignorant of such a custom. Their manner of dressing the hair is also peculiar and [291]characteristic, for they twist and knot the chief lock of the hair, without braiding it, in the form of a large high crown. All about the head hang very short locks of hair of equal length, which take the form of a small circle on the forehead, and sometimes almost cover the eyebrows. They allow the forelocks to grow to a great length, although that gives them an especial grace. A beautiful comb very well made from metal, more or less precious, according to the wealth of the one who wears it, crowns the said headdress. Many are the women who are materially laden with bracelets from the wrists almost to the elbows, some of metal, others of tortoise-shell, others of taclobo,2 etc., etc. As an ornament for their ears they generally wear some wide eardrops (balaring) formed by a cylinder of wood, generally soft, at the bases of which are fixed two round and unequal plates of engraved brass, silver, gold, or copper. In order to insert these eardrops, they make very large holes in the lobes of the ears until the smaller sheet of metal can pass through the said orifice, so that the cylinder may rest on the inner edges of the said orifice. They have necklaces and rings of several kinds, some of them of great value. They are often made of strings of beads interwoven in different colors. Not seldom do they have clusters of hawk’s-bells and shells, or bundles of blue or red silk hanging from the necklaces. They have other necklaces which they call balucag, which are made from the hairs of the wild boar, and which they weave in the manner of small hoops and unite in the manner of a net, which are [292]ornamented bits of shells, glass beads, and other trifles of the same kind. My attention was peculiarly struck by a necklace made of silver coins which were quite old, and which diminished in size successively from the center to the ends. The center was a duro of Carlos III, somewhat flattened out, which formed as it were the medallion of the necklace. The latter, besides being original, was quite valuable, for the thirty odd pesos which it must have been worth are a capital for a mountaineer of that small ranchería. Such jewels are seldom parted with however much necessity presses them, and thus it is explained how they pass from father to son for many generations. The rings that I saw among the individuals of that race were all of brass; but I am assured that those of gold and silver are not scarce. It is to be noted that not only do they adorn the fingers with them but also their toes. Of all these vain ornaments of eardrops, necklaces, and rings, they are despoiled when they receive the health-giving waters of baptism, like one who renounces the world and its pomp and vanity. Those objects are taken from them for they are wont to use them as amulets against this or that sickness, against such or such an injury which they fear, or, to obtain more easily their desires, etc., etc. In exchange, the father missionary gives them medals, rosaries, and scapularies, which they take great pleasure in showing, and wear hanging from the neck.

From what I've seen and heard, I can say that the clothing of the Monteses is better than that of all the other groups in Mindanao when it comes to decorum and modesty, and this applies to both men and women. The women wear skirts that reach their ankles, secured at the waist with a white shirt underneath. On top of that, they wear a short, fitted shirt decorated with colorful patches like fine patchwork. The sleeves are short and loose, similarly adorned. They enjoy choosing the colors and designs to embellish their outfits. On the left side of their belts, they hang rings and bundles of sweet-smelling herbs mixed with glass beads and hawk's bells. The fine rings made of copper, brass, or silver that dangle loosely on their legs make a sound when they walk, catching the attention of those unfamiliar with this custom. Their hair is styled in a distinctive way, where the main lock is twisted and knotted into a large, high crown without being braided. Short locks of equal length frame their face, forming a small circle on the forehead, sometimes nearly covering their eyebrows. They let their forelocks grow long, which gives them a particular charm. A beautiful, well-made metal comb—more or less precious depending on the wearer's wealth—tops their hairstyle. Many women wear numerous bracelets from their wrists almost to their elbows, made of metal, tortoiseshell, or other materials. For their ears, they typically wear wide eardrops (balaring) made from a cylinder of soft wood, with two uneven, round plates of engraved brass, silver, gold, or copper attached at the base. They create large holes in their earlobes so the smaller metal piece can fit through and the cylinder can rest on the inside edges. They have various necklaces and rings, some highly valuable, often crafted from strings of colorful beads. Sometimes, their necklaces feature clusters of hawk's bells and shells, or bundles of blue or red silk. They also have necklaces called balucag made from wild boar hair, woven into small hoops and interconnected like a net, adorned with bits of shells, glass beads, and other similar trinkets. I was particularly struck by a necklace made of old silver coins, decreasing in size from the center to the ends. The centerpiece was a somewhat flattened duro from Carlos III, serving as the medallion of the necklace. This unique piece was quite valuable, as it must have been worth over thirty pesos, a significant amount for a mountaineer from that small community. Such jewelry is rarely parted with, no matter how pressing the necessity, which explains how it stays within families for generations. The rings I saw among those individuals were all made of brass, but I am told that gold and silver rings are also not uncommon. They adorn not only their fingers but also their toes with these ornaments. However, when they receive the life-giving waters of baptism, they give up these decorative items—similar to renouncing worldly vanity. These items are taken from them since they often use them as charms against illnesses or injuries they fear, or to help achieve their desires. In exchange, the missionary father gives them medals, rosaries, and scapulars, which they take great joy in displaying and wear around their necks.

The dress of the men is simple and usually like that of the Indians. But they are very valuable when they have on their court apparel, for then they wear long breeches of European cloth, and many wear jackets of the same material, and fine beaver [293]hats while they are not without shoes and shirts of much value. The shirts are not worn outside as the other Indians wear them, but they hide them as much as possible except the bosom, especially if they are well embroidered. Those who dress in the most beautiful gala attire, cut the hair and take care of it, but most of them who are fugitives and have but little intercourse with the Christians let the hair grow without taking any care of it. They twist it in order to make the crown which they hide under a handkerchief, usually a red one, which they wear tied about the head in the manner of the swains of Aragón. Some consider it an important ornament for their person to dye the teeth black and file them by means of flints, which take the place of a file with them. Although I have not seen it, I have been assured that the very rich cover their teeth with sheets of very thin gold, which they only take out when they eat. It is amusing to see the Monteses, who have recently come down from the woods, among the old Christians. In order not to be taken for Buquidnons, they present themselves so prinked out and walk along the streets so carefully, that one would think that they do not set their feet on the ground, and being so unnatural in their movements, they move the others to laughter in that very thing by which they are trying to please them. There is no better grace than naturalness.

The men's clothing is simple and usually similar to that of the Indigenous people. However, they become quite valuable when they wear their formal attire, as they then don long trousers made of European fabric, and many have jackets of the same material, along with fine beaver [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]hats, not to mention shoes and shirts of significant value. Unlike other Indigenous people, they don’t wear their shirts outside but try to hide them as much as possible, revealing only the embroidered front, especially if it's well-done. Those dressed in the most beautiful outfits take care of their hair, but most of those who are outcasts and have little contact with Christians let their hair grow untended. They twist it to form a crown, which they cover with a handkerchief, usually red, tied around their heads like the young men from Aragón. Some see it as an important ornament to dye their teeth black and file them using flints, which serve as a substitute for a file. Although I haven’t seen it myself, I’ve been told that the wealthy cover their teeth with very thin sheets of gold, which they only remove when eating. It's amusing to watch the Monteses, who have recently come down from the woods, as they mix with the old Christians. To avoid being mistaken for Buqidnons, they present themselves all dressed up and walk through the streets so carefully that it seems like they don’t actually touch the ground, and their unnatural movements often make others laugh at their attempts to impress. There’s no greater charm than authenticity.

In the brief examination that we made of what passes among the individuals of this race, in the deities whom they adorn, their sacrifices, and their songs and traditions, we shall see that they have some ideas of God, of heaven, of eternity, and of the first man. But they are so material, small, and disfigured, [294]that by transverse light alone can the greatness of the primitive creeds be divined. Like the polytheists that they are, they have four gods at the four cardinal points: at the north, Domalóngdong; at the south, Ongli; at the east, Tagolámbong; and at the west, Magbabaya. Those gods, with their wisdom and power rule and govern this great mass of the world which we inhabit. Who does not see in these four deities a perfect resemblance to the Vazus, of the worshipers of Brahma? Now then, if those gods, according to the Buquidnons, govern this great fabric of the world with so great acumen from the four cardinal points, in the same manner, according to the Brahmans, Vazu-Pulastia governs the nations of the north; Vazu-Yama those of the south; those of the east, Vazu-Indra; and those of the west Vazu-Varuna. And so great is the order and concert of those regions that therefrom results the harmony of the whole universe, and, consequently, the so extensive worship which the inhabitants of India attribute to their Vazus, so that offended by men the order of this world might not be overturned. The god Magbabaya, that is to say, “the all-powerful one,” has as equals in rank the god Ibabásug, and Ipamahandi. The former is invoked for the fortunate delivery of women; the latter takes care of carabaos, horses, and other larger and smaller cattle, and since a Buquidnon is rarely seen, who does not possess some of these animals for his ordinary work, hence, they invoke that divinity with so great frequency and in any disagreeable mischance that may happen to the said animals. From Tagumbanua, or the god of the fields, they hope for a good harvest, and dedicate the feast called caliga to him after the harvesting of the fruits. [295]They invoke the Tao sa súlup or “men of the woods” (who resemble the Anitos of the Ilocan heathens) in their wars, diseases, journeys, etc. Those divinities according to them, are genii, who live within the trunks of the large trees, or on huge crags. They intervene in the affairs of mortals, harming them or protecting them, according as they are contrary or propitious. I noted on a certain occasion that, on passing before a leafy tree called balite, the mountaineer who accompanied me lowered his voice and was very much frightened. I asked him the reason for it, and after many urgings he considered it advisable to give me the explanation of his fright in these words: “The Buquidnons affirm that the balite is the habitation of Magtitima, or an invisible being of the woods, who, if he does not receive a sacrifice of white fowls, grows angry at mortals and does not allow them to cut the wood, and sends them sickness. Although I do not believe those things, I have a certain fear in passing near these trees.” I urged him to cast off so superstitious belief and to trust in God, who is the only one who can deliver us from all sicknesses and danger of soul and body. The idol called Tigbas figures among the Buquidnons as a very highly respected god. They look upon him with great reverence, for they believe that he descended from the sky. Only the chief datos among them possess that idol. The said idol is made of stone, as is also the pedestal that supports it. The people guard it with the greatest care among the most esteemed objects of their ancestors, and only show it to those whom they consider as very closely allied to themselves, either by reason of friendship or kinship. Talián is another little idol represented [296]by the figure of a monkey seated on its haunches. They make it from the root of the alder tree. Generally they carry it hanging from the breast by means of a cord which the unhappy Talián has tied about his neck. When they go on a journey and fear an ambush, they take that little idol by the string and let it hang in the air free in the manner of a plumb-line, and toward the direction where its gaze rests, they say that the enemies are preparing an ambush for them there. In order to free themselves from those enemies they leave the road which they had taken and follow one entirely different. If they suffer from any sickness, they submerge the idol in a basin of water and then drink the water immediately, for they believe that by so doing they will recover their lost health. Sometimes they say that it is sufficient to touch with the idol the ailing member, or the painful part, in order to find relief and even a total cure. Finally, they make use of it in order to divine where the objects or jewels which they have lost by chance are. They always try to keep the Búsao or evil spirit well dispositioned. For that purpose they offer him food and drink, singing and dancing, according to their custom. At the same time they recite certain prayers, asking him to free them from such or such a calamity which they fear. The old men are generally the ones who offer the sacrifices, which usually consist only of the offering of fruits of the soil, and in the sacrifice of some swine and fowls, in order to court or make amends to one of their deities. One of their most common altars consists of a column with a dish on the upper part which contains some offering. The two cross timbers which are seen in the middle part are for the purpose of holding their little idols. [297]

In the brief look we took at what happens among the members of this community, including the gods they worship, their sacrifices, songs, and traditions, we see that they have some concepts of God, heaven, eternity, and the first man. However, these ideas are so concrete, limited, and distorted, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] that only with a different perspective can we glimpse the greatness of their primitive beliefs. Like polytheists, they have four gods for the four cardinal directions: to the north, Domalóngdong; to the south, Ongli; to the east, Tagolámbong; and to the west, Magbabaya. These gods, with their wisdom and power, rule and govern this vast world we live in. It's easy to see a striking similarity between these four deities and the Vazus worshiped by the Brahmins. If, according to the Buquidnons, these gods govern the world with such insight from their respective cardinal points, then the Brahmins also claim that Vazu-Pulastia rules the northern nations; Vazu-Yama the southern; Vazu-Indra the eastern; and Vazu-Varuna the western. The order and harmony of these regions contribute to the balance of the entire universe, which explains the extensive worship that the people of India show towards their Vazus, hoping to avoid upsetting the order of the world. The god Magbabaya, meaning "the all-powerful one," is on equal footing with Ibabásug and Ipamahandi. The former is called upon for safe childbirth, while the latter looks after carabaos, horses, and other livestock. Since almost every Buquidnon owns some of these animals for their daily work, they frequently invoke this deity, especially when something unfortunate happens to their animals. They look to Tagumbanua, the god of the fields, for a good harvest, dedicating a feast called caliga to him after harvesting their crops. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]They call upon the Tao sa súlup or “men of the woods” (similar to the Anitos of the Ilocan pagans) during wars, illnesses, travels, and other situations. These deities, as they believe, are spirits that dwell in the trunks of large trees or on giant rocks. They interact with humans, causing harm or providing protection depending on whether they are favorable or not. I remember once, as we walked past a leafy tree known as balite, the mountain guide with me lowered his voice and seemed very frightened. I asked him why, and after some coaxing, he shared his fear with me: “The Buquidnons say that the balite is home to Magtitima, an invisible being of the woods, who gets angry with mortals if he doesn’t receive a sacrifice of white chickens. He then doesn’t allow them to cut the wood and can send them illness. Even though I don’t believe in such things, I still get a bit scared when passing by these trees.” I encouraged him to let go of such superstitious beliefs and to have faith in God, who is the only one capable of protecting us from all sickness and dangers to our souls and bodies. The idol known as Tigbas is considered a highly respected god among the Buquidnons. They regard it with great reverence, believing it came down from the sky. Only the chief datos have this idol. It is made of stone, as is the pedestal it stands on. People guard it carefully among their most valued ancestral possessions and only reveal it to those they consider closely related to them through friendship or blood. Talián is another smaller idol depicted as a monkey sitting on its haunches. They craft it from the root of the alder tree. Generally, they carry it around hanging from their neck by a cord that the unfortunate Talián has tied around itself. When they travel and fear an ambush, they take this little idol by the cord and let it hang down like a plumb line, claiming that the direction it points to indicates where enemies might be lurking. To avoid these enemies, they change their path completely. If they’re unwell, they submerge the idol in a basin of water and drink it immediately, believing this will restore their health. Sometimes they say that just touching the afflicted body part with the idol is enough for relief or even a complete cure. Lastly, they use it to divine the whereabouts of lost objects or valuables. They always try to keep the Búsao, or evil spirit, in good spirits. To do this, they offer him food and drink, sing and dance, and recite certain prayers, asking him to protect them from the calamities they fear. Usually, it’s the elders who perform the sacrifices, which typically include offerings of fruits and the sacrifice of pigs and fowl to please or appease one of their deities. One of their most common altars consists of a column topped with a dish containing some offerings. The two crossed beams seen in the middle are meant to hold their little idols. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Leaving aside many other superstitious things in regard to their gods, which no less than the preceding give an idea of the sad condition of these poor wretches, I shall pass on to speak briefly of their marriages, which are agreed upon by the sole authority of the ancients or Maslicampo.3 The latter who is also the one who directs all the chief affairs, determines by his own opinion that the alliance between such a youth and such a maiden shall take place, whether it be at the insinuation of the sweethearts or at the entreaty of their parents. Some promises then being made between the parents of the bride and the father of the young man, the relatives of each party having been summoned assemble in the house that has been previously prepared, where everything must be in abundance, but especially a liquor called pangasi, which they keep in certain large jars. When the hour for the marriage has arrived, the bridal couple having exchanged some words between themselves, receive from their respective parents a ball of morisqueta. They hold it for some minutes in the palm of the hand, and then the groom gives the ball of morisqueta to his wife and with that ceremony the marriage is effected. By that means, as is obvious, is indicated the duty which they have and recognize of mutually supporting one another and trying to procure the support of the family. A fine bichara is prepared among the guests while the feast lasts. There is abundance of food, sauces, and beverages, which are arranged with [298]great anticipation. A solemn drunken revel follows this kind of banquet, the effect of that beverage, which they suck up through long reeds, placed in the jars which hold it. Unless they are datos or chief men, there are but few of them who have two or three wives, which, unhappily, is more common among other heathen races.

Putting aside many other superstitions related to their gods, which, like the previous ones, highlight the unfortunate situation of these poor people, I will briefly discuss their marriages. These are determined solely by the authority of the ancients or Maslicampo.3 The latter, who also manages all major affairs, decides based on his own judgment that a particular young man and woman shall be joined, whether prompted by the couple themselves or at the urging of their parents. Some promises are then exchanged between the bride's parents and the young man's father, and relatives from both sides gather at a pre-arranged house where everything must be plentiful, especially a drink called pangasi, which is stored in large jars. When the time for the wedding arrives, the couple shares a few words, and each receives a ball of morisqueta from their parents. They hold it in their hands for a few moments, then the groom gives the ball of morisqueta to his bride, and with that act, the marriage is completed. This clearly signifies their obligation to support each other and seek the support of their families. A delicious bichara is prepared among the guests while the celebration is underway. There is plenty of food, sauces, and drinks, arranged with great care. Following this feast, a serious drunken revelry ensues, fueled by that drink, which they sip through long reeds placed in the jars. Unless they are datos or chief men, very few have two or three wives, which, sadly, is more common among other pagan groups.

Father Eusebio Barrado, a missionary among those people, told me on a certain occasion that they exhibit great repugnance when they have to pass through the territory of other datos to whom they are not subject. In order that the traveler may make such passage without any danger, the chiefs have a spear called quiap, much larger than ordinary spears with incrustations of silver along the shaft, and the lower end of metal. They give it for a trifling recompense as a safe conduct to the travelers who have to cross through the territories of other datos, and the latter on recognizing the spear of the chief dato allow such persons to pass freely without harming them in the least, but on the contrary showing them consideration and deference. This takes place as I have been informed by a person worthy of all credit, even when there is war between the different factions.

Father Eusebio Barrado, a missionary among these people, once told me that they show a strong dislike when they have to travel through the territory of other grupos they don’t belong to. To ensure the traveler can pass through safely, the chiefs have a spear called quiap, which is much larger than regular spears and has silver inlays along the shaft, with a metal tip. They provide it for a small fee as a safe conduct for travelers who need to cross into the lands of other grupos. When the latter see the chief's spear, they allow these travelers to pass freely without causing them any harm, and instead treat them with respect and courtesy. This happens, as I’ve been told by a very reliable source, even during times of conflict between the different factions.

The principal datos show their greatness by the use of enormous vases, where they keep rare and curious articles. Those vases are used at the same time for the storing of food. The águnes are not less esteemed by them, but the things held in highest estimation both by rulers and by subjects are certain quadrangular prismatic boxes like small coffers, which are ornamented on the outer part and on all their sides with two cuarto coins, in the form of very symmetrical [299]and harmonious designs. In those boxes they keep their clothes and weapons. The weapons which they use most are balaraos of greater or less value, which they acquire from the Manobos of Agusan, in exchange for cloth, maize, camotes, salt, etc., etc.; the bangcao, or spear that they use both for hunting and for fighting with their enemies and for their exploits, one of which is the capturing and enslaving of children, after they have assassinated their parents. The said spears are generally of an excellent temper, as are also their bolos, and a certain other weapon called kris, which has been seen at times in the possession of the Buquidnons and is without doubt acquired from the Moros. For besides it being well-known that the Buquidnons have communication with the Moros by means of the river Pulangui, the said krises have Moro inscriptions and seals. I had a bolo in my hands whose handle or hilt surpassed many krises in value, for since it was of a dark, very hard and heavy wood, which I thought to be manconó4 it had many large incrustations of silver, and from some of the silver which had been lost I discovered that they were not merely thin plates but pieces of quite a large size. The corresponding scabbard was of baticulin5 and was worked with great skill. [300]

The main items show their importance through the use of huge vases, where they keep rare and interesting objects. These vases also serve the purpose of storing food. The águnes are also valued by them, but the items most highly regarded by both leaders and commoners are specific quadrangular boxes resembling small chests, which are decorated on the outside and all around with two cuarto coins in very balanced and harmonious designs. In these boxes, they store their clothing and weapons. The weapons they commonly use are balaraos of varying values, which they get from the Manobos of Agusan in exchange for cloth, corn, sweet potatoes, salt, etc.; the bangcao, or spear, is utilized for hunting as well as fighting their enemies and is also used for one of their exploits, which involves capturing and enslaving children after killing their parents. These spears are usually of excellent quality, as are their bolos, along with another weapon called kris, which has occasionally been seen with the Buquidnons and is clearly obtained from the Moros. It's well-known that the Buquidnons have contact with the Moros via the Pulangui River, and the krises have Moro inscriptions and seals. I held a bolo in my hands whose handle or hilt was worth more than many krises, as it was made of a dark, very hard, and heavy wood that I believed to be manconó4, adorned with large silver inlays, and from some of the silver that had worn away, I found that they were not just thin plates but sizable pieces. The matching scabbard was made of baticulin5 and was crafted with great skill. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Father Barrado of whom I have made mention a while ago assured me that he had seen among these heathens one who had a coat-of-mail made of brass plates, of very thick wire of the same metal and ornaments of silver, which was made to cover all the breast and the back. It would be difficult to say from whom and in what manner they obtained them, but according to the method in which they are constructed and by what I have been able to ascertain they appear to be very ancient, and, consequently, worthy of being exhibited in any museum of arms or antiquities. They have other more common ones which they make themselves, and which consist of certain bolsters about three fingers thick, well quilted, which cover their breast and back, not only from the darts but also from the spears of their enemies. The petty rulers of this race bind their temples with the pinditón which is a crown of cloth with three points, that of the center being the largest, and all of them ornamented in the style of the mountain. I shall tell on what occasions they make use of this crown.

Father Barrado, whom I mentioned earlier, told me he had seen among these heathens someone wearing a suit of armor made of brass plates, very thick wire of the same metal, and silver ornaments that covered their chest and back. It's tough to say where they got it or how, but from how it's made and what I’ve learned, it seems to be very old and, therefore, deserves a place in any museum of weapons or antiques. They also have more common types that they make themselves, which consist of padded bolsters about three fingers thick, well quilted, to protect their chest and back from not only darts but also spears from enemies. The minor rulers of this group wear a crown called the pinditón, made of cloth with three points, the center one being the tallest, all decorated in a mountain style. I’ll explain on which occasions they wear this crown.

Various are the said objects in my possession, as well as a curious sacafuegos [firemaker] of which I am going to say a few words, which are due to the kindness and generosity of Don Procopio de Alcántara, judge of the village of Tagoloan. The sacafuegos consists of two cylinders of wood of great resisting power, and not very porous. One of them is hollow and the other solid. The latter, which is fitted very perfectly to the interior part of the [301]former, has at one end a little tinder with very fine powdered sulphur. Having been prepared in this manner it is inserted a trifle at the said end into the hollow cylinder, and a smart blow is struck on it in order to send it all at once [into the hollow cylinder], and then by drawing it out quickly, the tinder is found to be alight and is immediately applied to the tobacco. That is no other than a small pneumatic flint and steel, such as is usually represented by the authors of books on physics.

I have various items in my possession, including a curious sacafuegos [firemaker] that I want to mention, thanks to the kindness and generosity of Don Procopio de Alcántara, the judge of the village of Tagoloan. The sacafuegos consists of two durable wooden cylinders that aren't very porous. One is hollow and the other is solid. The solid one fits perfectly inside the hollow cylinder and has a small piece of tinder with very fine powdered sulfur at one end. Once it's prepared this way, it's inserted slightly into the hollow cylinder, and a quick blow is struck to push it all at once into the hollow cylinder. Then, by pulling it out quickly, the tinder is found to be lit and is immediately used for the tobacco. It's basically a small pneumatic flint and steel, like those depicted by authors of physics books.

They smoke the tobacco which they grow themselves, which is considered to be of the most excellent quality. They sell it in not small quantities in Cagayán in exchange for clothes or other objects that they need. Since the people of this race have been somewhat more civilized than those of others, they smoke the tobacco in small clay, wood, or horn pipes, which they make themselves, adding a small bamboo joint for a mouthpiece. They chew tobacco without swallowing it, as well as buyo. Instead of keeping the lime [for the buyo] in bamboo tubes beautifully worked, as do the Manobos and Mandayas, they keep it in small brass boxes, which are beautified with cunningly-made adornments, each one of which has its fitting ladle of the same metal, fashioned by means of a small chain.

They smoke the tobacco they grow themselves, which is considered to be of the highest quality. They sell it in substantial amounts in Cagayán in exchange for clothing or other items they need. The people of this group are somewhat more civilized than others, and they smoke tobacco in small clay, wood, or horn pipes that they make themselves, adding a small bamboo joint for the mouthpiece. They chew tobacco without swallowing it, as well as buyo. Instead of keeping the lime [for the buyo] in beautifully crafted bamboo tubes like the Manobos and Mandayas, they store it in small brass boxes that are decorated with intricately made embellishments, each with its own matching ladle made from the same metal, attached with a small chain.

In order to be more unembarrassed in their voyages, they use what they call salapa, which is a brass box in the form of a crescent which they fasten to the front of their girdle by cords. The lotoan or pouch which is adorned with rich and vari-colored embroidery, is also used by them in their excursions. In it they keep their money, tobacco, buyo, rice, etc., etc. Although they can undertake [302]long voyages afoot, without giving out, and can well endure the discomforts of the road through mountains and woods, they are such good horsemen that however steep may be the ascents they never alight from their horses. The horse is generally caparisoned with one or two strings of hawk’s-bells, in the manner of the mule teams conducted by the muleteers of Cataluña, and they make as do the latter such a racket that they advise the traveler of their passing from a long distance.

To feel more at ease during their travels, they use something called salapa, which is a brass box shaped like a crescent that they attach to the front of their belt with cords. The lotoan or pouch, decorated with rich and colorful embroidery, is also used for their trips. They keep their money, tobacco, buyo, rice, and other items in it. Even though they can go on [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] long journeys on foot without tiring and can endure the roughness of the trails through mountains and forests, they are such skilled horse riders that no matter how steep the inclines may be, they never get off their horses. The horse is usually outfitted with one or two strings of hawk’s bells, similar to the mule teams led by muleteers from Cataluña, creating a racket that alerts travelers of their approach from afar.

They engage in the cultivation of the soil, and make extensive plantations of maize, which supply them not only with their ordinary food but also with goodly profits by selling it to the beach villages, thus obtaining in exchange many articles which they do not possess in the woods, salt being the chief. Since they do not count by months or by years, but by harvests, in order to know the time for their sowing they pay attention to the aspect of the sky. Accordingly, when they see certain constellations in the firmament which they designate by very curious and completely arbitrary names, since they know that they are, for example, those which precede the rainy season, they hasten to burn their trees and prepare the ground for sowing. I have seen the plow used for the cultivation of the soil, one somewhat different from those of España. He who guides it is never without his adze with which to cut the roots which he finds as the plow passes. For the finer labor, they use a small hoe with a short curved handle. Scarcely will one find a house of Buquidnons where there are not one or at times more small mills for grinding maize. They are made of two very hard stone cylinders. The inner is fixed on a wooden upright, while the [303]upper is movable, and has an orifice in its center through which the maize is poured. The circular movement by which the grain is crushed is produced by a handle securely fastened to one side of the movable cylinder. An apparatus which I saw in Jasaán for removing cotton seed appeared very ingenious to me. It consists in the special gearing of the screws [engrenaje particular de las roscas] of two cylinders. Those cylinders being very close together allow the filaments of cotton to pass but not the seeds, which are as large as small peas. The motion is produced by means of a crank which is the continuation of the upper cylinder. The whole apparatus is wooden, but is operated with sufficient regularity although with some discomfort to the one operating it. Not a little time is given by the Monteses to the harvesting of abacá for they are not ignorant of the high price of that filament, in commerce. But to many of them their dream proves very contrary, for they often meet with Chinese traders, cunning as are no others, who exploit them by deceiving them in the price and weight, and what is worse, fill them with alcohol, by enticing them to drink deeply. In fact after the unfortunate fellows have used all the week in transacting the business they again return to their woods with the after effects of their intoxication, without abacá, without money, with some miserable gewgaws perhaps and a mind irritated by the deceit of which they were the victims. It would be advisable to impose an efficacious corrective on those exploiters of an evil class, and worse tricks, in favor of the poor Monteses. When the palay is harvested, on rising and before undertaking the ordinary labors, until daybreak, [304]they generally sing popular songs, men and women alternating, either the history of their ancestors, or the prowess of one of their heroes, or some events of our first parents, Adam and Eve, corrupted and mixed as is supposed by their false beliefs. The airs of those songs are in general gloomy and monotonous. Their musical instruments are few and rudimentary, among them being the pulala, or bamboo clarinet, which has a very shrill sound, but which is the most appreciated; and instruments of bamboo resembling a flute; an imitation of a guitar (tiape) with only three strings; and the dayuray, or a very small drum whose box is made of the shell of the cocoanut or a bamboo tube.

They farm the land and have large fields of corn, which not only provide them with their regular food but also generate good profits when sold to the beach villages, allowing them to obtain many items they lack in the woods, with salt being the most important. Since they don't keep track of time by months or years but by harvests, they look to the sky to determine when to plant. They notice certain constellations in the sky, which they refer to with unique and completely arbitrary names, knowing that these are the ones that indicate the upcoming rainy season, prompting them to burn their trees and ready the land for planting. I've seen a plow used for farming that is somewhat different from those in Spain. The person guiding it always carries an adze to cut through any roots that the plow encounters. For more delicate work, they use a small hoe with a short curved handle. It’s rare to find a Buquidnon house without at least one small mill for grinding corn. These mills consist of two very hard stone cylinders; the inner one is fixed to a wooden post, while the upper one is movable and has a hole in its center for pouring in the corn. The circular motion that crushes the grain comes from a handle securely attached to the side of the movable cylinder. I saw a clever device in Jasaán for removing cotton seeds. It involves a specific gear arrangement of two closely spaced cylinders. This setup allows the cotton fibers to pass through while blocking the larger seeds, which are about the size of small peas. Motion is created by a crank attached to the upper cylinder. The entire device is made of wood and operates fairly smoothly, though it can be uncomfortable for the person using it. The Monteses spend a significant amount of time harvesting abacá, as they are aware of its high market value. Unfortunately, many of them face significant challenges, often encountering crafty Chinese traders who trick them regarding price and weight, and worse, tempt them with alcohol. By the end of the week spent dealing with these traders, they often return to their forests with the aftereffects of their intoxication, without any abacá, no money, maybe some worthless trinkets, and feeling frustrated by the deceit they've experienced. It would be wise to put effective measures in place against these unscrupulous exploiters for the benefit of the poor Monteses. When the rice is harvested, before starting their daily work at dawn, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] they usually sing popular songs, alternating between men and women, narrating the history of their forebears, the deeds of their heroes, or tales about Adam and Eve, often twisted by their misconceptions. The melodies of these songs are generally somber and monotonous. Their musical instruments are few and basic, including the pulala, a bamboo clarinet with a very shrill sound, which is the most valued; bamboo instruments that resemble flutes; a three-stringed imitation of a guitar called tiape; and the dayuray, a tiny drum made from a coconut shell or bamboo tube.

Although they are so sunk in the darkness of heathenism they have some glimmerings of civilization among themselves, without doubt the vestige of the past Spanish domination, for they have their laws and courts for the punishment of theft and other crimes, laws which, transmitted from father to son, are reformed according to the greater or less discretion of the superior dato, to whom those who have been offended in a serious matter have recourse to demand justice. The dato, seated, and with his temples bound with his flaming pinditón and grasping in his right hand the famous quiap, has two subordinate datos sit near him, and then the criminal is immediately brought to his presence. Those who conduct him leave their spears thrust into the ground near the steps of that tribunal, so that no one in view of the crime of which the criminal is convicted dares to take the justice of the criminal into his own hands. The arguments for each side having been heard, after deliberation, the superior dato administers justice, [305]together with the subordinate datos present at the act. The penalty decreed is executed without delay for the satisfaction of the aggrieved parties, the punishment of the offender, and the public warning of all. When the crime is not very serious, the offender is condemned to pay a certain number of large and small plates, to which a China jar is sometimes added, if the crime is somewhat greater. After the fine has been paid the one offended and the offender have to cleave with one single blow of the bolo, and at the same time a rattan which is held by the judges. If by accident the rattan should not be cut at one time, it is an evident sign that the opposing parties are still enemies, and, consequently, they yet look upon one another with care and dread.

Although they are deeply entrenched in the darkness of paganism, they have some signs of civilization among themselves, likely a remnant of past Spanish rule. They have their own laws and courts to punish theft and other crimes, laws that have been passed down from father to son and are modified based on the judgment of the superior dato, to whom those seriously wronged turn to seek justice. The dato, seated with his head adorned by a flaming pinditón and holding the famous quiap in his right hand, has two subordinate datos sitting beside him, and then the criminal is immediately brought before him. Those escorting the criminal leave their spears stuck in the ground near the steps of the tribunal, so that no one witnessing the crime for which the person is charged dares to take justice into their own hands. After hearing arguments from both sides and deliberating, the superior dato delivers the verdict, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] along with the subordinate datos present at the proceedings. The punishment decided upon is carried out immediately for the satisfaction of the victims, the punishment of the offender, and as a public warning to all. When the crime is not very serious, the offender is ordered to pay a certain number of large and small plates, and sometimes a China jar is added if the crime is a bit more severe. After the fine is paid, the victim and the offender must strike a rattan held by the judges with a single blow of a bolo. If, by chance, the rattan is not cut in one hit, it clearly indicates that the two parties are still enemies, and thus, they continue to regard each other with caution and fear.

It is a well-established fact among these heathens that he who kills a dato has committed so great a crime that it can never be erased, and the author and all his descendants are considered as slaves, and all have the right to reduce them to slavery whenever they wish.

It is a well-established fact among these people that anyone who kills a dato has committed such a terrible crime that it can never be erased, and the person responsible and all their descendants are seen as slaves, with everyone having the right to enslave them whenever they choose.

I will mention here certain peculiar apprehensions and some of the superstitions of this race.

I will mention here some unusual fears and some of the superstitions of this group.

Whenever they offer any food or drink to guests, they first taste it in order to remove all suspicion of deceit or poison from their guests. Among the Monteses it is a lack of education and good breeding to mention their names in conversation. If any of them is asked “What is your name?” the one interrogated does not answer, but some other person of the group will say “His name is Colás.” In regard to the rest which man ought to take they say that it is better for him to imitate the birds, which go to bed at the setting of the sun and wake up at the reddening [306]of the dawn. They say that the rainbow is the red girdle of two famous men, Banlac and Aguio, who mounted up to heaven by a great leap from the hill called Balábag, without any more being known of them. These heathens reckon by nights and not by days, so that their method of expression is as follows: “That voyage will last about six nights;” “After four nights we shall begin to build the house.” I mind me that the ancient Germans did the same thing, and I believe that some peoples of Oceanica had the same custom in remote times. When they are outside of their houses and away from their village or ranchería, when they see that the moon has a halo, they are persuaded that somebody is being judged in their village, and for fear that it may be one of their partisans they immediately return home, to see whether they can save the defendant. They are convinced that if it rains and the rays of the sun illumine, at the same time, such or such a distant wood, it is because the Buquidnons are at war in the said point, and the sun does not wish to hide its light so that they may fight with greater valor. If they hear the song of the bird limocon under certain circumstances, they do not leave their houses, for as they say some danger or ambush awaits them on the way. If the song surprises them on the road itself, in this or that position which they ascertain, they immediately return to their houses and refuse to continue for certain reasons. When they find the worm called lábud in the middle of the road they go back, for they assert that some sickness or misfortune would overtake them, if they did not do so. If they enter any house to visit those who live there, and during the conversation any cock or hen flies and passes in front of the stranger, the owners of the house immediately [307]kill the bold bird, and it is eaten in friendly intercourse with the guest, in order to remove his fright and bring his soul back, which they believe has been separated from the body through fright and returns again to the same body joyfully. I could mention other interesting things of the same kind, but I leave them in order not to tire your Reverence.

Whenever they offer food or drink to guests, they first taste it to eliminate any suspicion of deceit or poison. Among the Monteses, it’s considered rude and unrefined to mention their names in conversation. If someone is asked, “What’s your name?” they don’t answer; instead, another person in the group will say, “His name is Colás.” Regarding what a man should do, they think it’s better to imitate birds, which go to sleep at sunset and wake up at dawn. They believe the rainbow is the red belt of two famous men, Banlac and Aguio, who jumped up to heaven from a hill called Balábag, and nothing more is known about them. These people count nights instead of days, so they express it like this: “That journey will take about six nights;” “After four nights, we’ll start building the house.” I recall that the ancient Germans did the same, and I believe some Oceanic peoples had a similar custom long ago. When they are outside their homes and away from their village or settlement, if they see that the moon has a halo, they believe someone is being judged in their village. Out of fear that it might be one of their own, they hurry home to see if they can help the person in trouble. They are convinced that if it rains while the sun is shining on a distant forest, it’s because the Buqidnons are at war there, and the sun wants to shine its light so they can fight bravely. If they hear the song of the bird limocon under certain conditions, they won’t leave their homes because they believe some danger or ambush is waiting for them on the path. If the song surprises them while they are traveling, they immediately return home for various reasons. When they find the worm called lábud in the middle of the road, they turn back because they believe some illness or misfortune will befall them if they don’t. If they enter a house to visit its residents and a rooster or hen flies in front of a guest during the conversation, the homeowners quickly kill the brave bird, and it is shared with the guest to alleviate their fear and restore their spirit, which they think has temporarily separated from their body due to the fright and joyfully returns. I could share more interesting things like this, but I’ll stop here to avoid tiring your Reverence.

When speaking of the dwellings of these heathens, one must distinguish between those who live in settlements and those who live in the woods. The former build their houses well spread out and comfortably, it being indispensable for them to have a projecting wing joined to the house itself in the manner of a gallery, open to the air on all sides except that by which it communicates with the interior. To this gallery is fitted the stairway, generally of wood, very simple in form and generally without balustrades. The materials employed are not always bamboo and nipa. I have seen the houses of Buquidnons which have board walls excellently constructed, very strong, but needing no nails, hammers, or saws. How is that? I will tell something about it. Here is the crucial point, as one generally says; for some boards are simply sewn to others. And I must tell another marvel so that with one surprise we are relieved of another. All the boards have six holes along their length three on one side and three on the other, and joining the boards by the edges they pass a bit of very fine and tough rattan through the said holes, and they are so tightly bound together that nails are not missed at all. Those who live scattered in the interior of the woods build their houses low, but raised very far above the ground through their fear of the spears of their enemies.

When talking about the homes of these people, we need to differentiate between those who live in communities and those who live in the forest. The first group builds their houses spaced out and comfortably, making it essential to have a projecting section attached to the house itself like a gallery, open to the air on all sides except for the side connected to the main house. A simple wooden staircase, usually without railings, leads up to this gallery. The materials used aren't always bamboo and nipa. I've seen the houses of the Buquidnons, which have walls made of board that are excellently constructed and very strong, yet they don't use nails, hammers, or saws. How is that possible? Here’s the interesting part: some boards are just sewn together. And there's another amazing thing to share so we can be amazed by two surprises. All the boards have six holes along their length—three on one side, three on the other—and by aligning the edges of the boards, they thread a piece of very fine and strong rattan through these holes, binding them so tightly that nails aren't needed at all. Those who live scattered in the depths of the forest construct their homes low to the ground, but elevated far above it to protect themselves from their enemies' spears.

Very great is the respect that all these heathens [308]show for their deceased. Accordingly, they generally bury them in their fields and with them the spear, bolo, and other precious things which they especially used during their lifetime. Along the place that the corpse occupies they heap up the earth, and form a small mound, and at short intervals in the ground they fasten certain tree trunks in the form of an X, on top of which they place the bark of a tree, which serves as a roof for the earth mound, which they consider as sacred. Never do they forget to suspend from the upper end of a large pole, a small sack of rice, on which the deceased supports himself until his soul takes according to them the long road to Mount Bolotucan. Bolotucan is the highest peak which dominates all the region comprehended between Jasaán and Lagónlong. When the deceased reaches the summit of the same he gets into heaven by jumping up, reaching a higher or lesser point according to the probity of his life, and there he will remain forever. All the relatives of the deceased, both men and women, make great demonstrations of grief when death occurs. They let their hair hang loose as a sign of mourning, and do not bind it up again until after a greater or less period, according to the love which they professed for the deceased.

The respect that these individuals show for their deceased is immense. They typically bury their loved ones in their fields along with their spear, bolo, and other treasured items that were significant to them during their lives. They pile up dirt around the spot where the body lies to form a small mound, and at intervals in the ground, they place tree trunks in an X shape, topped with tree bark, which acts as a roof for the sacred earth mound. They never forget to hang a small sack of rice from the upper end of a tall pole, which the deceased uses to sustain themselves until their soul embarks on the long journey to Mount Bolotucan. Bolotucan is the tallest peak that overlooks the area between Jasaán and Lagónlong. When the deceased reaches the peak, they enter heaven by jumping up, landing at a higher or lower place based on how virtuous their life was, where they will remain forever. All relatives of the deceased, both men and women, express deep sorrow when someone dies. They let their hair hang freely as a sign of mourning and do not tie it back until a certain period has passed, which depends on how much they cared for the deceased.

I have recounted all these things so minutely in order that the obscurity and darkness in which all those of this race were before they were visited by the father ministers, may be understood. Reverend Father, the consolation which I have had, on seeing the zeal and activity with which these fathers procure the spiritual and material welfare of so many poor creatures, is unspeakable. In honor of truth I must tell your Reverence that their hopes and labors [309]have not been in vain, for in less than four years, more than 6,600 heathens who dwelt in the region of the shadow of death, have been illumined by the torch of the faith, have denied their false beliefs and ridiculous superstitions, and have been regenerated in the waters of baptism. Fortunate missionaries who are occupied in such ministries, and happy converts who have passed from so great vileness to so great dignity by the labors of those missionaries!

I have shared all these details so thoroughly to highlight the confusion and darkness that this group faced before they were reached by the dedicated ministers. Reverend Father, the comfort I’ve felt after witnessing the dedication and effort these fathers put into the spiritual and material well-being of so many struggling individuals is beyond words. To be honest, I must tell you that their hopes and efforts [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]have not been in vain, as in less than four years, over 6,600 individuals who lived in the shadows have been enlightened by the light of faith, have rejected their false beliefs and absurd superstitions, and have been renewed through baptism. How fortunate are the missionaries engaged in such work, and how blessed are the converts who have moved from such deep darkness to incredible dignity through their efforts!

The objects described in the present letter which are not in my possession, I have sketched from the natural. When I shall return there I shall be glad to hand them to your Reverence.

The items mentioned in this letter that I don't have with me, I've drawn from what I saw. When I go back there, I'll be happy to give them to you.

I beg that you will not forget me in your holy sacrifices and prayers.

I ask that you don't forget me in your prayers and sacrifices.

Your servant in Christ Jesus,

Your servant in Christ,

José María Clotet, S. J. [310]

José María Clotet, S.J. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]


1 This volume of the Cartas is accompanied by a large map of Mindanao.

1 This volume of the Letters comes with a big map of Mindanao.

2 Taclobo is the Tagálog name of a large snail; here used for the shell.

2 Taclobo is the Tagalog name for a large snail; here it refers to the shell.

3 Masalicampo, or Maestre de campo is a title which was formerly given to the Monteses, who had distinguished themselves in any service for Spain or its government, by the superior authorities; for instance, by fighting against the Moros in favor of our banner, as is seen by the title despatched at the petition of Father Ducós, S. J. (note to this letter, p. 176).

3 Masalicampo, or Maestre de campo, is a title that used to be given to the Monteses who had distinguished themselves in any service for Spain or its government by the higher authorities; for example, by fighting against the Moros in support of our banner, as noted in the title sent at the request of Father Ducós, S. J. (note to this letter, p. 176).

4 The Xanthostemon verdugonianus—Naves, of the family of Myrtaceæ, allied to the Iron wood of Java. It is found in Luzón and Mindanao, and is a hard, heavy wood, exceedingly difficult to work. See Important Philippine Woods (Manila, 1901), pp. 65, 66.

4 The Xanthostemon verdugonianus—Naves, from the Myrtaceae family, related to the Ironwood of Java. It grows in Luzón and Mindanao, and it's a tough, heavy wood that's really hard to work with. See Important Philippine Woods (Manila, 1901), pp. 65, 66.

5 There is a species of tree called baticulin, which is the Litsea obtusata of Villar, and the Olax baticulin of Blanco, belonging to the family Laurineæ. It is extensively used for cabinet making and carving, and is not readily attacked by the white ant. Blanco (pp. 351, 352) describes a wood Millingtonia quadripinnata, which he also calls baticulin, and which is easily worked and extensively used for carving. It is called Ansohan in the Visayas Islands. The latter is probably the wood meant in the text. See Blanco, and Important Philippine Woods, pp. 31–33.

5 There’s a type of tree known as baticulin, which is identified as Litsea obtusata by Villar and Olax baticulin by Blanco, and it belongs to the family Laurineæ. It’s widely used for cabinet making and carving, and it’s not easily damaged by termites. Blanco (pp. 351, 352) also describes a wood called Millingtonia quadripinnata, which he refers to as baticulin, and this wood is easy to work with and commonly used for carving. It's referred to as Ansohan in the Visayas Islands. The latter is probably the wood referred to in the text. See Blanco and Important Philippine Woods, pp. 31–33.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Present beliefs and superstitions in Luzon

[The following we translate from the supplement to the Manila newspaper El Renacimiento, of the date of December 9, 1905, which was called to our attention by James A. LeRoy. It is deserving of a place in this series, as showing what is actually believed at the present time among some of the ignorant Filipinos.]

[The following is a translation from the supplement of the Manila newspaper El Renacimiento, dated December 9, 1905, which was highlighted to us by James A. LeRoy. It deserves to be included in this series, as it reflects the current beliefs among some of the uninformed Filipinos.]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The mangkukulam

Here, as in Europe, and in almost all parts, the people believe in witches.

Here, like in Europe and almost everywhere else, people believe in witches.

The mangkukulam1 is the male or female witch [311]of Filipinas. To that one is attributed a certain power of witchcraft by the common people which makes him full of terror to many. He has the custom of not looking straight at his interlocutors, I do not know whether it is because he fears the open or searching glance of them or not. He always keeps his eyes lowered, and whenever it is necessary to direct his gaze toward the person with whom he is talking, he does it on all occasions by glancing up sideways, and he has never dared to meet directly the gaze of the others.

The mangkukulam1 is a male or female witch [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]of the Philippines. People commonly believe that this person possesses a certain power of witchcraft, which makes them frightening to many. They have a habit of not looking directly at those they are talking to; I'm not sure if it's because they fear the open or intense gaze of others. They always keep their eyes down, and whenever they need to look at the person they're speaking with, they do so by glancing up sideways, never daring to meet anyone's gaze directly.

It is a general belief that the mangkukulam is almost omnipotent in matters pertaining to doing evil to his neighbor. By the mere wish alone, he can produce sickness in any person who has secured his ill-will. In general, the sicknesses that he usually deals out are most intense headaches, or aches in other parts of the body, boils or internal tumors, swellings on the head or in any other place, such ailments being all inexplicable to the immense majority of the crowd, of the ignorant masses, who do not give credit, understand, or have faith in the power, capacity, or secrets of science.

It is widely believed that a mangkukulam has almost unlimited power when it comes to causing harm to others. With just a thought, they can inflict illness on anyone who has earned their resentment. Typically, the types of ailments they cause include severe headaches, pain in various parts of the body, boils, or internal tumors, as well as swellings on the head or elsewhere. These conditions are largely mysterious to most people, especially those who lack knowledge or trust in the capabilities and insights of science.

He who gains the ill-will or enmity of these witches of Filipinas, can rest assured that if he goes [312]out for a walk in the street, when he is about to re-enter his house he will perceive himself to be stricken with some sort of ailment, through the means and influence of the angered mangkukulam, who has already taken it upon himself to make him a present of the illness which suits him best—pains in the stomach, swellings in any part of the body, swellings on the head, deformity in the genital parts, etc., etc.

He who earns the hatred or hostility of these witches of Filipinas can be sure that if he goes [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]out for a walk in the street, when he’s about to go back inside his house, he will find himself suffering from some kind of illness, caused by the angered mangkukulam, who has decided to gift him the sickness that suits him best—stomach pains, swelling in any part of the body, swelling on the head, deformities in the genital area, etc., etc.

It happens as a rule that when any person is attacked by any of the above ailments, he begins to talk of certain deeds as if he had done them in company with some person there present, at the very moment when he feels himself stricken by the ailment. At the same time he cites names that are unknown, and localities more or less distant. That is an assurance that during such moments, the patient is completely bewitched by the mangkukulam, who has penetrated into his body, and that the latter is the one who causes the patient to talk. It cannot be said that the patient is delirious during those moments, for rarely is he accustomed to have a fever, and in general has none. Besides, every day, and whenever the ailment attacks him, he repeats the words, deeds, and citations that he mentioned the first time—all of this preceded by the exclamation “Oh! oh! now you are here again!” This exclamation forces the members of the family of the one attacked to believe more and more strongly that the sick man has been effectively bewitched by the mangkukulam, that the latter had entered the body of the one attacked at that time, and that physicians and medicines are powerless to cure those evils which are produced by those witches of Filipinas, for the simple reason that the physicians do not believe in the existence of the mangkukulam or in their witchcraft. [313]

It usually happens that when someone is affected by any of the ailments mentioned above, they start to discuss certain actions as if they had done them with someone who is present, right at the moment they feel the impact of the ailment. They also mention names that are unfamiliar and locations that are quite far away. This indicates that during those moments, the person is completely under the spell of the mangkukulam, who has invaded their body, and it’s this entity that makes the person speak. It wouldn’t be accurate to say the person is delirious during these times, since they are rarely prone to fever and generally do not have one. Moreover, every day, and every time the illness strikes, they repeat the words, actions, and references they mentioned the first time—all of this starting with the exclamation “Oh! oh! now you are here again!” This exclamation compels the family members of the afflicted to increasingly believe that the sick person has indeed been bewitched by the mangkukulam, that the witch has taken over their body at that moment, and that doctors and medicines are powerless to cure the issues caused by these witches from the Philippines, simply because the doctors do not believe in the existence of the mangkukulam or their magic. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

In these cases, the herbalists themselves, who are frequently called in to aid all kinds of sickness are useless.

In these situations, the herbalists themselves, who are often called in to help with all sorts of illnesses, are ineffective.

Nothing remains except to mention here certain details which complete the picture of the mangkukulam or give an exact idea of what they are, according to the popular belief.

Nothing is left to do but to point out some details that round out the picture of the mangkukulam or give a clear idea of what they are, based on popular belief.

Every mangkukulam has his abubut.2 The abubut consists of a small tampipi which does not contain more than a small rag doll similar to those that, are sold in front of the doors of our churches in order to amuse our children with them, and a small cushion stuck full of innumerable pins.

Every mangkukulam has his abubut.2 The abubut consists of a small tampipi that contains no more than a small rag doll, similar to those sold outside our churches to entertain our children, and a small cushion stuffed with countless pins.

In the abubut lies, according to popular belief, all the power of the mangkukulam. Without it, the mangkukulam is powerless, and even inoffensive, if one wishes.

In the abubut lies, according to popular belief, all the power of the mangkukulam. Without it, the mangkukulam is powerless, and even harmless, if one chooses.

When the mangkukulam plans to do any harm to any person whomever, he goes to the quarter of his house where he always keeps his abubut, and takes out the doll and a pin. Then he sticks the latter in whatever part of the body of the doll that he wishes. By that means, accompanied by the desire of producing or causing evil to the person at whom he has been angered, that person will be found to be stricken with some sort of sickness in the part of the body where the doll has been pricked. And since in general, no success is had in applying the appropriate remedy for the sickness suffered by those who are made ill by the means and influence of the mangkukulam, the family decide to call a physician.

When the mangkukulam wants to harm someone, he goes to a specific part of his house where he keeps his abubut. He takes out a doll and a pin, then sticks the pin in whichever part of the doll's body he chooses. Because of this, combined with his desire to cause harm to the person who angered him, that person will end up suffering from an illness in the area of their body that corresponds to where the doll was pricked. Since remedies usually don't work for those made ill by the mangkukulam's methods, the family decides to call a doctor.

But the physician in those cases, is not the real [314]physician who has been for a long time singeing his eyebrows and devouring countless text books in the universities, and who has not few years of experience in the hospitals. Neither is he the mediquillo,3 who is, in many cases, a simple practitioner with some notions of medical science in his head. Neither is he the poor herbalist, who knows and is acquainted with the curative virtues of some plants, aided by the famous book of Father Santa Maria.4 No, not one of these serves for the case. The physician whose services are needed, is he who expressly devotes himself to the cure of those bewitched by the mangkukulam.

But the doctor in these cases is not the real [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] doctor who has spent years singeing his eyebrows and absorbing countless textbooks at universities and who has several years of experience in hospitals. He’s also not the mediquillo, 3 who is often just a simple practitioner with a bit of medical knowledge. Nor is he the poor herbalist, who knows the healing properties of some plants, aided by the famous book of Father Santa Maria. 4 No, none of these individuals fit the situation. The doctor needed is the one who specifically dedicates himself to curing those afflicted by the mangkukulam.

These physicians of the kulam, after looking at the patient attentively, who equally with the mangkukulam cannot resist the glance of any other person in the moments when he is attacked by the sickness; and after hearing what things the sick one says, approaches any member of the family to tell him that the sick one is really possessed by the mangkukulam; and at the same time to ask whether the family cares to have him cured.

These doctors of the kulam, after carefully observing the patient, who, like the mangkukulam, cannot escape the gaze of others when suffering from illness; and after listening to what the sick person says, goes to a family member to inform them that the sick individual is truly possessed by the mangkukulam; and at the same time, asks if the family wants to have them treated.

If the reply is in the affirmative, preparations are made and the sick man is submitted to the following practices.

If the answer is yes, preparations are made, and the sick man goes through the following procedures.

All the toes of his feet, and the fingers of his hands are tied up in anona bark. If the sick one continues to cry out and to utter all the things that he has been accustomed to say, adding thereto the petition for [315]pardon with the promise of not doing it again, it is a sign that the mangkukulam has not had time to escape or leave the body of the patient. Then the physician takes a well-dried ray’s tail, such as is often used as a cane, and prescribes for the sick person a good stiff caning [paliza de padre y señor mio] from his head to his feet. This operation is repeated for three or four consecutive days, longer, if contrary to what the mangkukulam promises by word of mouth, he again takes up his lodging in the body of the sick person. Lastly, it is decided whether or not to go on with the operation completely to the end. That consists in bathing the sick person in boiling water, and in the result thereof the patient finds a true remedy for his ills, for when the bath is finished, he ceases to suffer forever.

All the toes on his feet and the fingers on his hands are wrapped in anona bark. If the sick person keeps crying out and saying everything he usually says, adding a request for [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]forgiveness with a promise not to do it again, it means that the mangkukulam hasn't had time to escape or leave the patient's body. Then, the healer takes a well-dried ray's tail, often used as a cane, and prescribes a good hard beating [paliza de padre y señor mio] from the patient's head to his feet. This treatment is done for three or four consecutive days, or longer if the mangkukulam, despite promises, returns to the sick person's body. Finally, it is decided whether to continue the treatment to the end. This involves bathing the sick person in boiling water, and as a result, the patient finds a true remedy for his ailments, because once the bath is finished, he stops suffering for good.

These practices obey their long-established conviction that it is not the sick person who suffers from the great acts of nonsense committed on him. Many affirm that they have found the mangkukulam who had bewitched the sick person dead on different occasions after such practices had been finished.

These practices follow a long-held belief that it's not the sick person who experiences the harmful effects of the ridiculous actions taken against them. Many claim they have discovered the witch who had cursed the sick person, caught at different times after these practices were completed.

Since I have been in the province of Nueva Écija, I have had the opportunity to prove one thing; namely, that the mangkukulam fears or flees from anonas. The fact by which I have been able to prove it is as follows.

Since I've been in the province of Nueva Écija, I've had the chance to prove one thing: the mangkukulam fears or avoids anonas. The evidence I've gathered to support this is as follows.

A poor woman was found some weeks ago suffering from severe pains in the stomach, accompanied by nausea and vomiting. The family which was composed of several brothers, was thoroughly convinced that their sister had been bewitched by a mangkukulam. As they did not know any physicians for the kulam, they summoned me to please visit and [316]treat the sick woman. I held off as much as possible, by saying that inasmuch as I did not believe in any of those superstitions, it was impossible to cure her; aside from the fact that I was not even a physician. My excuses availed nothing. They begged and entreated me so hard that there was no other remedy than to comply with their wishes. When I reached the house of the sick person, she was, as the saying is, throwing up her guts, so great was the violence of the vomiting. As soon as she had fallen sick she had lost her sight so completely that she could see absolutely nothing, as long as she was attacked by the sickness, and very little (indeed, very little), when the attack left her. Consequently, she was told nothing of my arrival until she heard me speak. She asked her brothers who was there, and they told her, adding that they had summoned me to cure her.

A poor woman was found a few weeks ago suffering from intense stomach pain, along with nausea and vomiting. Her family, which consisted of several brothers, was convinced that their sister had been cursed by a mangkukulam. Since they didn't know any doctors who understood this sort of curse, they called me to come and help the sick woman. I tried to delay as much as I could, explaining that because I didn’t believe in those superstitions, it would be impossible for me to cure her, especially since I wasn't even a doctor. My excuses didn’t help. They begged and pleaded with me so much that I had no choice but to agree to their request. When I arrived at the sick woman’s house, she was, as the saying goes, throwing up her guts from the force of her vomiting. Since she had fallen ill, she had lost her sight completely; she couldn't see anything at all while she was sick, and very little when the illness passed. Therefore, she knew nothing of my arrival until she heard me speak. She asked her brothers who was there, and they told her, adding that they had called me to help her.

As soon as it was understood that I was there for that purpose, the vomiting ceased for a moment, and the woman was quite calm. After a quarter of an hour, and feeling vexed because of the false light in which they were trying to make me appear, I took my leave, saying that since the ailment of the sick woman had passed, I had nothing to do there. But scarcely had I crossed the threshold of the street door when the vomiting was repeated and one of the brothers called me again in a low voice, asking me to please have the kindness to return since the sick woman was once more attacked by the mangkukulam. I armed myself with patience, and went back until I again found myself face to face with the sick woman. At a certain moment in which the patient was making great efforts to expel what she had in her stomach, I asked one of those present in a loud [317]voice to please get me some anonas branches. The vomiting of the sick woman ceased suddenly as soon as she heard such a request, and did not return to rack her all that day and until the following day. At that time the same scenes were reproduced as on the preceding day. For three days they continued to call me to the said house, and I perceived that the attack disappeared as soon as I spoke of, or mentioned, the anonas. For the rest, I declare that in spite of these observations, I have not come to believe in, or to be convinced of, the existence of witches in Filipinas. However, such beliefs continue to exist in the popular mind.

As soon as they realized I was there for that reason, the woman stopped vomiting for a moment and seemed calm. After about fifteen minutes, feeling frustrated about the false impression they were trying to create of me, I decided to leave, saying that since the sick woman was feeling better, I had no reason to stay. But just as I stepped out the door, the vomiting started again, and one of the brothers quietly called me back, asking if I could please return because the woman was once again being attacked by the mangkukulam. I steeled myself with patience and went back to confront the sick woman again. At one point, as she was struggling to get rid of whatever was in her stomach, I asked one of the people present in a loud [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]voice to please fetch me some anonas branches. The woman stopped vomiting the instant she heard my request and didn’t suffer from it again that day or the next. The same scenes played out the following day. For three days, they kept summoning me to that house, and I noticed that the attacks ceased whenever I mentioned the anonas. Still, I maintain that despite these observations, I don't actually believe in or am convinced of the existence of witches in the Philippines. However, such beliefs persist in popular culture.

There are two kinds of physicians of the kulam. Those belonging to the first class are the ones of whom I have just spoken. Those of the second class are inoffensive and very worthy, therefore, of being mentioned.

There are two types of kulam physicians. The first group is the one I just talked about. The second group is harmless and quite deserving of being mentioned.

Several persons have informed me of the following fact of which they were eyewitnesses. On a certain occasion a physician of the kulam was summoned to treat a swelling. That physician after having examined the sick person carefully, and proved that there really was a swelling, asked for a bit of wax, of which he made a small figure of human shape. While he was moulding the small figure, he ordered hot water prepared in a carahay, and when it began to boil, he put the figure upright on it. When all the people expected to see it dissolved in the boiling water (tremble, my readers!) they saw the figure begin to jump about on the water without being submerged or being melted. Ten or fifteen minutes after the small figure had been hopping about on the surface of the water, a person [318]came to the door of the house, calling out with vehemence. He was beating his feet quite openly with a handkerchief which he carried in his hand. He could not remain quiet or keep any position for five seconds, so restless was he. He was making so many contortions and grimaces with his face that one could not at all doubt that he was suffering terribly. He appeared to be walking on thorns. When that man reached the inside of the house, he began to beg pardon over and over again, promising never again to do “what he had done. The physician of the kulam took the small wax figure from the water and approached the new arrival, whom he ordered to undo the charm with which he had troubled the patient. The new arrival replied immediately that it was undone. Thereupon the physician told him never again to repeat what he had just done, and threatened him that it be relapsed, he would have to cut off his ears, so that all people might recognize him as such mag̃kukulam. The mag̃kukulam, who was the same man who had just arrived, promised never again to do what he had done, for fear of being exposed to the wrath of the populace.

Several people have told me about an event they witnessed. One time, a local doctor was called to treat a swelling. After carefully examining the patient and confirming that there was indeed a swelling, the doctor asked for a piece of wax, which he shaped into a small human figure. While he was molding the figure, he had someone prepare hot water in a carahay, and when it started to boil, he placed the figure upright on the surface. Everyone expected it to dissolve in the boiling water (tremble, my readers!), but instead, they saw the figure jumping around on the water without sinking or melting. After it had been leaping on the surface for about ten or fifteen minutes, a person [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] arrived at the door, calling out loudly. He was openly beating his feet with a handkerchief he held. He couldn’t stay still for even five seconds, he was so agitated. He was making so many contortions and grimaces that it was clear he was in great pain, as if he was walking on thorns. Once he got inside the house, he began to apologize repeatedly, promising never to do “what he had done” again. The doctor took the wax figure out of the water and approached the newcomer, ordering him to undo the charm he had cast on the patient. The newcomer quickly replied that the charm was broken. The doctor then warned him never to do what he had just done again and threatened that if it happened again, he would have to cut off his ears so everyone would know him as a mag̃kukulam. The mag̃kukulam, who was the same man who had just arrived, promised he would never do it again for fear of facing the anger of the crowd.

When this was finished, the physician sent him away, and from that moment, the sick person was completely well.

When this was done, the doctor sent him off, and from that point on, the patient was completely healed.

Besides these, it is said that there is another kind of mag̃kukulam who are known under the name of kusim or palipád hag̃in. But I believe that it is the same dog with a different collar; for I consider that the kusim or the palipád hag̃in is nothing else than a variety of the power of witchcraft possessed by these beings.

Besides these, it’s said that there’s another type of mag̃kukulam known as kusim or palipád

In the mind of the masses, it is held that the ailment [319]or sickness which these latter beings bring about are sent through the air, whence they have taken their name. Those ailments are, moreover, incurable, for they say (walang pasaulî) that they do not return to the place whence they have come.

In the minds of the people, it's believed that the diseases [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] or illnesses caused by these beings are transmitted through the air, which is how they got their name. Moreover, these diseases are considered incurable, as they say (walang pasaulî) that they never go back to where they originated.

Both these and the first, that is the simple mag̃kukulam dash themselves face downward every Friday in their respective quarters, well wrapped up and uttering doleful exclamations. When this occurs, it is said that they suffer terribly the consequences of their power. That condition of depression is called nagbabatá by the masses. On the following day these beings are found all sound and well, and hurrying to the witches’ sabbath, or unlawful assembly which is held at a determined spot, where on midnight of Saturday meet the asuang, mananangal, and mangkukulam, in order that they may all together enjoy the delicious feast of human flesh.

Both these and the first, which are the simple mag̃kukulam, lie face down every Friday in their respective areas, all wrapped up and making sad sounds. When this happens, it’s said that they suffer greatly because of their powers. This state of depression is referred to as nagbabatá by the public. The next day, these beings are found completely fine and rushing to the witches’ sabbath, or illegal gathering, which takes place at a specific location, where at midnight on Saturday the asuang, mananangal, and mangkukulam come together to enjoy a feast of human flesh.

José Nuñez

José Nuñez


1 Vicente Fragante, one of the Philippine government students in the University of Wisconsin (1906), an Ilocano, says that the term mangkukulam is used in Ilocos to signify an invisible being. Whenever anything is lost or disappears, it is supposed that the mangkukulam has stolen it. The term pogot is used to signify a big black man. It is the bugaboo of the Filipino mothers with which they threaten refractory children. In some families an image to represent the pogot is shown to the children to cause them to be good. The pogot is said to inhabit unfinished or deserted houses, and to sit on the window-sill at night where he smokes a large pipe. In sparsely-settled districts the pogot also inhabits santol, tamarind, and lomboy trees. It is the custom of the small Ilocano boys, who partly live the belief, and who also wish to frighten their more timid playmates of the other sex, to make a great racket about the supposed abodes of the pogot, with tin cans and other instruments in order to scare him away. At night when the pogot is frightened or angered, he throws stones at the houses. These stones have the power of passing completely through the walls of the house, and strike against the dishes in the place where they are kept. The dishes are, however, unharmed, as neither are the people who may be struck by those stones. Ansisit is an Ilocan term for a sort of scarecrow, which is used to scare the children into goodness. It consists of an old coat through the arms of which is thrust a stick, while another stick is placed at right angles to it, thus enabling the coat to be set up or moved.

1 Vicente Fragante, a student from the Philippine government at the University of Wisconsin (1906) and an Ilocano, explains that the term mangkukulam refers to an invisible being in Ilocos. Whenever something goes missing or disappears, it's believed that the mangkukulam has taken it. The term pogot is used to refer to a big black man. It’s the boogeyman Filipino mothers use to scare their disobedient children. In some families, they show an image representing the pogot to encourage kids to behave. The pogot is said to live in unfinished or abandoned houses and sits on window sills at night, smoking a large pipe. In sparsely populated areas, the pogot is also found in santol, tamarind, and lomboy trees. Small Ilocano boys, who partly believe in this figure, often try to frighten their more timid playmates by making loud noises around the supposed homes of the pogot with tin cans and other objects to scare it away. At night, if the pogot feels threatened or angry, it throws stones at houses. These stones can pass right through the walls and hit dishes where they are stored. However, the dishes remain unharmed, and so do any people who may be hit by these stones. Ansisit is an Ilocano term for a type of scarecrow used to encourage children to behave. It consists of an old coat through which a stick is thrust at the arms, with another stick placed perpendicularly to allow the coat to be propped up or moved.

The Manila newspaper La Democracia, of August 29, 1903, contains an item in regard to some men who were hanged for killing a “witch.”

The Manila newspaper La Democracia, from August 29, 1903, includes a story about some men who were hanged for killing a “witch.”

2 Noceda and Sanlucar’s Vocabulario de la lengua tagala defines abobót, the same word as abubut, as a basket woven from rattan, which has a lid.

2 Noceda and Sanlucar’s Vocabulario de la lengua tagala defines abobót, the same word as abubut, as a basket made from rattan that has a lid.

3 Native of the Philippines, with medical experience, but no title. See Appleton’s New Velázquez Dictionary. Mediquillo is literally “little, or petty physician.”

3 Native of the Philippines, with medical experience but no official title. See Appleton’s New Velázquez Dictionary. Mediquillo literally means “little, or petty physician.”

4 Probably the Dissertation sur les maladies convulso-clenico-toniques en général ([Montpellier], 1806), by Joseph Boy y Santa Maria.

4 Probably the Dissertation sur les maladies convulso-clenico-toniques en général ([Montpellier], 1806), by Joseph Boy y Santa Maria.

Table of Contents

Colophon

Availability

Page scans of this work are available in the The United States and its Territories collection a the University of Michigan, as well as in the Internet Archive (Another Copy).

Page scans of this work are available in the The United States and its Territories collection at the University of Michigan, as well as in the Internet Archive (Another Copy).

Encoding

Revision History

  • 2011-02-22 Started.

External References

Corrections

The following corrections have been applied to the text:

The following corrections have been applied to the text:

Page Source Correction
18, 194, 194, 233 Oyanguren Oyangúren
34 . ,
53 chid chide
171 exeedingly exceedingly
207 Batútun Batúnun
221 Padaúgnon Pudaúgnon
281 illustrado ilustrado
283 Bulùan Bulúan
288 Jose José


        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!